53-1003625-01

31 March 2015

FastIron Ethernet Switch

Administration Guide

Supporting FastIron Software Release 08.0.30

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 © 2015, Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

ADX, Brocade, Brocade Assurance, the B-wing symbol, DCX, Fabric OS, HyperEdge, ICX, MLX, MyBrocade, OpenScript, The Effortless
Network, VCS, VDX, Vplane, and Vyatta are registered trademarks, and Fabric Vision and vADX are trademarks of Brocade
Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or in other countries. Other brands, products, or service names mentioned may be
trademarks of others.
Notice: This document is for informational purposes only and does not set forth any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning any
equipment, equipment feature, or service offered or to be offered by Brocade. Brocade reserves the right to make changes to this document
at any time, without notice, and assumes no responsibility for its use. This informational document describes features that may not be
currently available. Contact a Brocade sales office for information on feature and product availability. Export of technical data contained in
this document may require an export license from the United States government.
The authors and Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. assume no liability or responsibility to any person or entity with respect to the
accuracy of this document or any loss, cost, liability, or damages arising from the information contained herein or the computer programs that
accompany it.
The product described by this document may contain open source software covered by the GNU General Public License or other open
source license agreements. To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products, view the licensing terms applicable to
the open source software, and obtain a copy of the programming source code, please visit http://www.brocade.com/support/oscd.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................................11
Document conventions....................................................................................11
Text formatting conventions................................................................ 11
Command syntax conventions............................................................ 11
Notes, cautions, and warnings............................................................ 12
Brocade resources.......................................................................................... 13
Contacting Brocade Technical Support...........................................................13
Document feedback........................................................................................ 14

About This Document.............................................................................................................. 15

Supported hardware and software.................................................................. 15
What’s new in this document ......................................................................... 15
How command information is presented in this guide.....................................16

Management Applications...................................................................................................... 19
Management port overview.............................................................................19
How the management port works....................................................... 19
CLI Commands for use with the management port.............................20
Web Management Interface............................................................................21
Management VRFs......................................................................................... 21
Source interface and management VRF compatibility........................ 22
Supported management applications..................................................22
Configuring a global management VRF.............................................. 24
Displaying management VRF information...........................................25

Basic Software Features..........................................................................................................29

Basic system parameter configuration............................................................ 29
Entering system administration information........................................ 29
SNMP parameter configuration...........................................................30
Displaying virtual routing interface statistics....................................... 33
User-login details in Syslog messages and traps............................... 33
Cancelling an outbound Telnet session.............................................. 34
Network Time Protocol Version 4 (NTPv4)..................................................... 35
Limitations........................................................................................... 37
Network Time Protocol (NTP) leap second ........................................37
How Brocade supports leap second handling for NTP....................... 37
NTP and SNTP................................................................................... 38
NTP server.......................................................................................... 38
NTP Client...........................................................................................39
NTP peer.............................................................................................39
NTP broadcast server......................................................................... 40
NTP broadcast client...........................................................................41
NTP associations................................................................................ 41
Synchronizing time..............................................................................42
Authentication..................................................................................... 42
VLAN and NTP....................................................................................43
Configuring NTP..................................................................................43

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 3

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic port parameter configuration............................................................... 53
Specifying a port address..................................................................53
Assigning port names........................................................................56
Displaying the port name for an interface......................................... 56
Enabling auto-negotiation maximum port speed advertisement
and down-shift............................................................................. 59
Configuring port speed down-shift and auto-negotiation for a
range of ports.............................................................................. 61
Enabling port speed down-shift.........................................................62
Force mode configuration................................................................. 62
MDI and MDIX configuration............................................................. 63
Disabling or re-enabling a port.......................................................... 64
Flow control configuration................................................................. 64
Symmetric flow control on FCX and ICX devices..............................67
PHY FIFO Rx and Tx depth configuration.........................................71
Interpacket Gap (IPG) on a FastIron X Series switch....................... 71
IPG on FastIron Stackable devices...................................................72
Enabling and disabling support for 100BaseTX................................ 73
Enabling and disabling support for 100BaseFX................................ 74
Changing the Gbps fiber negotiation mode...................................... 75
Port priority (QoS) modification......................................................... 75
Dynamic configuration of Voice over IP (VoIP) phones.................... 75
Port flap dampening configuration.................................................... 77
Port loop detection............................................................................ 80
CLI banner configuration...............................................................................86
Setting a message of the day banner............................................... 86
Requiring users to press the Enter key after the message of the day
banner..................................................................................................... 87
Setting a privileged EXEC CLI level banner................................................. 88
Displaying a console message when an incoming Telnet session is
detected...................................................................................................88

Operations, Administration, and Maintenance.......................................................................89

OAM Overview.............................................................................................. 89
Software versions installed and running on a device.................................... 90
Determining the flash image version running on the device............. 90
Displaying the boot image version running on the device.................92
Displaying the image versions installed in flash memory..................92
Flash image verification ................................................................... 92
Software Image file types..............................................................................93
Flash timeout.................................................................................................94
Software upgrades........................................................................................94
Boot code synchronization feature................................................................95
Viewing the contents of flash files................................................................. 95
Using SNMP to upgrade software.................................................................96
Software reboot.............................................................................................97
Software boot configuration notes.................................................... 98
Displaying the boot preference..................................................................... 98
Loading and saving configuration files..........................................................99
Replacing the startup configuration with the running
configuration................................................................................ 99
Replacing the running configuration with the startup
configuration.............................................................................. 100
Logging changes to the startup-config file...................................... 100
Copying a configuration file to or from a TFTP server.................... 100
Dynamic configuration loading........................................................ 101
Maximum file sizes for startup-config file and running-config......... 103

4 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Loading and saving configuration files with IPv6.......................................... 103
Using the IPv6 copy command......................................................... 104
Copying a file from an IPv6 TFTP server.......................................... 105
IPv6 copy command..........................................................................106
IPv6 TFTP server file upload.............................................................106
Using SNMP to save and load configuration information..................107
Erasing image and configuration files............................................... 108
System reload scheduling............................................................................. 109
Reloading at a specific time.............................................................. 109
Reloading after a specific amount of time......................................... 109
Displaying the amount of time remaining beforea scheduled
reload...........................................................................................109
Canceling a scheduled reload...........................................................110
Diagnostic error codes and remedies for TFTP transfers............................. 110
Network connectivity testing..........................................................................112
Pinging an IPv4 address................................................................... 112
Tracing an IPv4 route........................................................................113
IEEE 802.3ah EFM-OAM.............................................................................. 114
Network deployment use case.......................................................... 114
EFM-OAM protocol........................................................................... 115
Process overview.............................................................................. 115
Remote failure indication...................................................................116
Remote loopback.............................................................................. 117
EFM-OAM error disable recovery .................................................... 117
Configuring EFM-OAM......................................................................117
Displaying OAM information..............................................................118
Displaying OAM statistics..................................................................120
EFM-OAM syslog messages.............................................................122
Hitless management on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600................................... 122
Benefits of hitless management........................................................ 123
Supported protocols and services for hitless management events...123
Hitless management configuration notes and feature limitations......125
Hitless reload or switchover requirements and limitations................ 126
What happens during a Hitless switchover or failover...................... 126
Enabling hitless failover on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600.................. 128
Executing a hitless switchover on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600........ 129
Hitless OS upgrade on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600......................... 129
Syslog message for Hitless management events............................. 131
Displaying diagnostic information......................................................132
Displaying management redundancy information ........................................ 132
Layer 3 hitless route purge ...........................................................................133
Setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the defatult VRF.................. 133
Example for setting IPv4 hitless purge timer on the default VRF......133
Setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-default VRF............ 133
Example for setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-
default VRF..................................................................................134
Setting the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the defatult VRF.................. 134
Example for setting the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the defatult
VRF............................................................................................. 134
Setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-default VRF............ 134
Example for setting the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the non-
default VRF..................................................................................134
Energy Efficient Ethernet.............................................................................. 134
Enabling Energy Efficient Ethernet................................................... 135
Histogram information overview....................................................................135
Displaying CPU histogram information............................................. 136
External USB Hotplug................................................................................... 136
Using External USB Hotplug............................................................. 136

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 5

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Commands..................................................................................................137
ip hitless-route-purge-timer ............................................................ 137
ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer ........................................................ 138

IPv6....................................................................................................................................139
Static IPv6 route configuration.................................................................... 139
Configuring a static IPv6 route........................................................ 139
Configuring a static route in a non-default VRF or User VRF......... 141
IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels................................................................................ 141
IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel configuration notes...................................... 142
Configuring a manual IPv6 tunnel................................................... 142
Clearing IPv6 tunnel statistics......................................................... 143
Displaying IPv6 tunnel information..................................................143

SNMP Access..................................................................................................................... 147

SNMP overview...........................................................................................147
SNMP community strings............................................................................147
Encryption of SNMP community strings .........................................148
Adding an SNMP community string................................................ 148
Displaying the SNMP community strings........................................ 150
User-based security model......................................................................... 150
Configuring your NMS.....................................................................151
Configuring SNMP version 3 on Brocade devices.......................... 151
Defining the engine id..................................................................... 151
Defining an SNMP group................................................................ 152
Defining an SNMP user account..................................................... 153
Defining SNMP views..................................................................................154
SNMP version 3 traps................................................................................. 155
Defining an SNMP group and specifying which view is notified
of traps.......................................................................................156
Defining the UDP port for SNMP v3 traps.......................................156
Trap MIB changes...........................................................................157
Specifying an IPv6 host as an SNMP trap receiver........................ 157
SNMP v3 over IPv6.........................................................................157
Specifying an IPv6 host as an SNMP trap receiver ....................... 158
Viewing IPv6 SNMP server addresses........................................... 158
Displaying SNMP Information..................................................................... 159
Displaying the Engine ID.................................................................159
Displaying SNMP groups................................................................ 159
Displaying user information.............................................................159
Interpreting varbinds in report packets............................................160
SNMP v3 configuration examples............................................................... 160
Example 1....................................................................................... 160
Example 2....................................................................................... 161

Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) and Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Packets .................... 163
FDP Overview.............................................................................................163
FDP configuration........................................................................... 163
Displaying FDP information.............................................................165
Clearing FDP and CDP information................................................ 167
CDP packets............................................................................................... 168
Enabling interception of CDP packets globally............................... 168
Enabling interception of CDP packets on an interface....................168
Displaying CDP information............................................................ 169
Clearing CDP information............................................................... 170

6 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED.............................................................................................................173
LLDP terms used in this chapter................................................................... 173
LLDP overview.............................................................................................. 174
Benefits of LLDP............................................................................... 174
LLDP-MED overview.....................................................................................175
Benefits of LLDP-MED...................................................................... 176
LLDP-MED class...............................................................................176
General LLDP operating principles............................................................... 177
LLDP operating modes..................................................................... 177
LLDP packets....................................................................................178
TLV support.......................................................................................178
MIB support...................................................................................................182
Syslog messages.......................................................................................... 182
LLDP configuration........................................................................................182
LLDP configuration notes and considerations...................................183
Enabling and disabling LLDP............................................................ 183
Enabling support for tagged LLDP packets.......................................184
Changing a port LLDP operating mode.............................................184
Configuring LLDP processing on 802.1x blocked port...................... 186
Maximum number of LLDP neighbors ..............................................186
Enabling LLDP SNMP notifications and Syslog messages...............187
Changing the minimum time between LLDP transmissions..............188
Changing the interval between regular LLDP transmissions............ 189
Changing the holdtime multiplier for transmit TTL............................ 189
Changing the minimum time between port reinitializations............... 189
LLDP TLVs advertised by the Brocade device..................................190
LLDP-MED configuration.............................................................................. 196
Enabling LLDP-MED......................................................................... 197
Enabling SNMP notifications and Syslog messagesfor LLDP-
MED topology changes............................................................... 197
Changing the fast start repeat count................................................. 197
Defining a location id.........................................................................198
Defining an LLDP-MED network policy............................................. 204
LLDP-MED attributes advertised by the Brocade device.............................. 206
LLDP-MED capabilities..................................................................... 206
Extended power-via-MDI information................................................207
Displaying LLDP statistics and configuration settings.......................209
LLDP configuration summary............................................................209
Displaying LLDP statistics.................................................................210
Displaying LLDP neighbors...............................................................211
Displaying LLDP neighbors detail..................................................... 212
Displaying LLDP configuration details...............................................213
Resetting LLDP statistics.............................................................................. 215
Clearing cached LLDP neighbor information................................................ 215

Hardware Component Monitoring..........................................................................................217

Traffic Limitations in Mixed Environments.....................................................217
Virtual cable testing.......................................................................................217
Virtual Cable Testing configuration notes......................................... 218
Virtual Cable Test command syntax................................................. 218
Viewing the results of the cable analysis.......................................... 218
Digital optical monitoring............................................................................... 220
Digital optical monitoring configuration limitations............................ 220
Enabling digital optical monitoring.....................................................220
Setting the alarm interval.................................................................. 221

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 7

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying information about installed media..................................221
Viewing optical monitoring information............................................222
Syslog messages for optical transceivers....................................... 225
FastIron Fiber-optic Transceivers............................................................... 225

Network Monitoring............................................................................................................ 229

Basic system management......................................................................... 229
Viewing system information............................................................ 229
Viewing configuration information................................................... 230
Enabling the display of the elapsed timestamp for port statistics
reset...........................................................................................231
Viewing port statistics......................................................................231
Viewing STP statistics.....................................................................235
Clearing statistics............................................................................ 235
Traffic counters for outbound traffic ............................................... 236
Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 6610 and FCX devices.... 238
Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 7750 devices....................239
Clearing the egress queue counters............................................... 240
RMON support............................................................................................ 240
Maximum number of entries allowed in the RMON control table.... 241
Statistics (RMON group 1).............................................................. 241
History (RMON group 2)................................................................. 244
Alarm (RMON group 3)................................................................... 244
Event (RMON group 9)................................................................... 245
sFlow...........................................................................................................245
sFlow version 5............................................................................... 245
sFlow support for IPv6 packets....................................................... 246
sFlow configuration considerations................................................. 247
Configuring and enabling sFlow......................................................249
Enabling sFlow forwarding.............................................................. 254
sFlow version 5 feature configuration............................................. 256
Configuring sFlow with Multi-VRFs................................................. 258
Displaying sFlow information.......................................................... 260
Utilization list for an uplink port................................................................... 263
Utilization list for an uplink port command syntax........................... 263
Displaying utilization percentages for an uplink.............................. 263

System Monitoring..............................................................................................................265
Overview of system monitoring................................................................... 265
Configuration notes and feature limitations.....................................265
Configure system monitoring...................................................................... 266
disable system-monitoring all .........................................................266
enable system-monitoring all ......................................................... 266
sysmon timer ..................................................................................267
sysmon log-backoff ........................................................................ 267
sysmon threshold ........................................................................... 268
System monitoring on FCX and ICX devices.............................................. 268
sysmon ecc-error ........................................................................... 268
sysmon link-error ............................................................................269
System monitoring for Fabric Adapters.......................................................270
sysmon fa error-count .................................................................... 271
sysmon fa link ................................................................................ 272
System monitoring for Cross Bar................................................................ 273
sysmon xbar error-count ................................................................ 273
sysmon xbar link ............................................................................ 274
System monitoring for Packet Processors.................................................. 275

8 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon pp error-count ..................................................................... 276
clear sysmon counters ..................................................................... 276
show sysmon logs ............................................................................278
show sysmon counters .....................................................................278
show sysmon config .........................................................................282
show sysmon system sfm ................................................................ 283

Syslog.................................................................................................................................. 285
About Syslog messages................................................................................285
Displaying Syslog messages........................................................................ 286
Enabling real-time display of Syslog messages................................286
Enabling real-time display for a Telnet or SSH session.................... 286
Displaying real-time Syslog messages ............................................ 287
Syslog service configuration......................................................................... 287
Displaying the Syslog configuration.................................................. 287
Disabling or re-enabling Syslog........................................................ 290
Specifying a Syslog server................................................................291
Specifying an additional Syslog server............................................. 291
Disabling logging of a message level................................................291
Changing the number of entries the local buffer can hold.................291
Changing the log facility.................................................................... 292
Displaying interface names in Syslog messages.............................. 293
Displaying TCP or UDP port numbers in Syslog messages............. 293
Retaining Syslog messages after a soft reboot.................................293
Clearing the Syslog messages from the local buffer.........................294
Syslog messages for hardware errors.............................................. 294

Syslog messages.................................................................................................................. 297

Brocade Syslog messages............................................................................297

Power over Ethernet ............................................................................................................. 339

Power over Ethernet overview...................................................................... 339
Power over Ethernet terms used in this chapter............................... 339
Methods for delivering Power over Ethernet..................................... 340
PoE autodiscovery............................................................................ 342
Power class.......................................................................................342
Dynamic upgrade of PoE power supplies......................................... 344
Power over Ethernet cabling requirements....................................... 345
Supported powered devices..............................................................346
Installing PoE firmware .................................................................... 346
PoE and CPU utilization....................................................................350
Enabling and disabling Power over Ethernet................................................ 351
Disabling support for PoE legacy power-consuming devices....................... 352
Enabling the detection of PoE power requirements advertised through
CDP......................................................................................................... 353
Command syntax for PoE power requirements................................ 353
Setting the maximum power level for a PoE power-consuming device........ 354
Considerations for setting power levels............................................ 354
Configuring power levels command syntax.......................................354
Setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device........................ 355
Setting the power class command syntax.........................................356
Setting the power budget for a PoE interface module on an FSX device..... 356
Setting the inline power priority for a PoE port .............................................357
Command syntax for setting the inline power priority for a PoE
port.............................................................................................. 357

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 9

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Resetting PoE parameters.......................................................................... 358
Displaying Power over Ethernet information............................................... 359
Displaying PoE operational status ................................................. 359
Displaying PoE data specific to PD ports .......................................362
Displaying detailed information about PoE power supplies............ 364
Inline power on PoE LAG ports...................................................................371
Configuring inline power on PoE ports in a LAG.............................372
Decouple PoE and datalink operations on PoE ports................................. 373
Decoupling of PoE and datalink operations on PoE LAG ports...... 373
Decoupling of PoE and datalink operations on regular PoE ports.. 374

40 Gbps Breakout Ports......................................................................................................377

Overview of 40 Gbps breakout ports.......................................................... 377
Configuring 40 Gbps breakout ports........................................................... 378
Configuring sub-ports..................................................................................379
Removing breakout configuration............................................................... 381
Displaying information for breakout ports................................................... 383

OpenSSL License................................................................................................................385
OpenSSL license........................................................................................ 385
Original SSLeay License.................................................................385

Joint Interoperability Test Command................................................................................... 387

JITC overview............................................................................................. 387

10 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Preface

● Document conventions....................................................................................................11
● Brocade resources.......................................................................................................... 13
● Contacting Brocade Technical Support...........................................................................13
● Document feedback........................................................................................................ 14

Document conventions
The document conventions describe text formatting conventions, command syntax conventions, and
important notice formats used in Brocade technical documentation.

Text formatting conventions

Text formatting conventions such as boldface, italic, or Courier font may be used in the flow of the text
to highlight specific words or phrases.

Format Description
bold text Identifies command names
Identifies keywords and operands
Identifies the names of user-manipulated GUI elements
Identifies text to enter at the GUI

italic text Identifies emphasis

Identifies variables
Identifies document titles

Courier font Identifies CLI output

Identifies command syntax examples

Command syntax conventions

Bold and italic text identify command syntax components. Delimiters and operators define groupings of
parameters and their logical relationships.

Convention Description
bold text Identifies command names, keywords, and command options.
italic text Identifies a variable.
value In Fibre Channel products, a fixed value provided as input to a command
option is printed in plain text, for example, --show WWN.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 11

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Notes, cautions, and warnings

Convention Description

[] Syntax components displayed within square brackets are optional.

Default responses to system prompts are enclosed in square brackets.

{x|y|z} A choice of required parameters is enclosed in curly brackets separated by

vertical bars. You must select one of the options.
In Fibre Channel products, square brackets may be used instead for this
purpose.

x|y A vertical bar separates mutually exclusive elements.

<> Nonprinting characters, for example, passwords, are enclosed in angle

brackets.

... Repeat the previous element, for example, member[member...].

\ Indicates a “soft” line break in command examples. If a backslash separates

two lines of a command input, enter the entire command at the prompt without
the backslash.

Notes, cautions, and warnings

Notes, cautions, and warning statements may be used in this document. They are listed in the order of
increasing severity of potential hazards.

NOTE
A Note provides a tip, guidance, or advice, emphasizes important information, or provides a reference
to related information.

ATTENTION
An Attention statement indicates a stronger note, for example, to alert you when traffic might be
interrupted or the device might reboot.

CAUTION
A Caution statement alerts you to situations that can be potentially hazardous to you or cause
damage to hardware, firmware, software, or data.

DANGER
A Danger statement indicates conditions or situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of
these conditions or situations.

12 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Brocade resources

Brocade resources
Visit the Brocade website to locate related documentation for your product and additional Brocade
resources.

You can download additional publications supporting your product at www.brocade.com. Select the
Brocade Products tab to locate your product, then click the Brocade product name or image to open the
individual product page. The user manuals are available in the resources module at the bottom of the
page under the Documentation category.

To get up-to-the-minute information on Brocade products and resources, go to MyBrocade. You can
register at no cost to obtain a user ID and password.
Release notes are available on MyBrocade under Product Downloads.
White papers, online demonstrations, and data sheets are available through the Brocade website.

Contacting Brocade Technical Support

As a Brocade customer, you can contact Brocade Technical Support 24x7 online, by telephone, or by e-
mail. Brocade OEM customers contact their OEM/Solutions provider.

Brocade customers
For product support information and the latest information on contacting the Technical Assistance
Center, go to http://www.brocade.com/services-support/index.html.
If you have purchased Brocade product support directly from Brocade, use one of the following methods
to contact the Brocade Technical Assistance Center 24x7.

Online Telephone E-mail

Preferred method of contact for non- Required for Sev 1-Critical and Sev [email protected]
urgent issues: 2-High issues:
Please include:
• My Cases through MyBrocade • Continental US: 1-800-752-8061
• Problem summary
• Software downloads and licensing • Europe, Middle East, Africa, and
• Serial number
tools Asia Pacific: +800-AT FIBREE
(+800 28 34 27 33) • Installation details
• Knowledge Base
• For areas unable to access toll • Environment description
free number: +1-408-333-6061
• Toll-free numbers are available in
many countries.

Brocade OEM customers

If you have purchased Brocade product support from a Brocade OEM/Solution Provider, contact your
OEM/Solution Provider for all of your product support needs.
• OEM/Solution Providers are trained and certified by Brocade to support Brocade® products.
• Brocade provides backline support for issues that cannot be resolved by the OEM/Solution Provider.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 13

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Document feedback

• Brocade Supplemental Support augments your existing OEM support contract, providing direct
access to Brocade expertise. For more information, contact Brocade or your OEM.
• For questions regarding service levels and response times, contact your OEM/Solution Provider.

Document feedback
To send feedback and report errors in the documentation you can use the feedback form posted with
the document or you can e-mail the documentation team.
Quality is our first concern at Brocade and we have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this document. However, if you find an error or an omission, or you think that a topic
needs further development, we want to hear from you. You can provide feedback in two ways:
• Through the online feedback form in the HTML documents posted on www.brocade.com.
• By sending your feedback to [email protected].
Provide the publication title, part number, and as much detail as possible, including the topic heading
and page number if applicable, as well as your suggestions for improvement.

14 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 About This Document

● Supported hardware and software.................................................................................. 15

● What’s new in this document ......................................................................................... 15
● How command information is presented in this guide.....................................................16

Supported hardware and software

This guide supports the following product families for the FastIron 08.0.30 release:
• FCX Series
• FastIron X Series ( FastIron SX 800, FastIron SX 1600)
• ICX 6610 Series
• ICX 6430 Series (ICX 6430, ICX 6430-C12)
• ICX 6450 Series (ICX 6450, ICX 6450-C12-PD)
• ICX 6650 Series
• ICX 7250 Series
• ICX 7450 Series
• ICX 7750 Series

NOTE
The Brocade ICX 6430-C switch supports the same feature set as the Brocade ICX 6430 switch unless
otherwise noted.

NOTE
The Brocade ICX 6450-C12-PD switch supports the same feature set as the Brocade ICX 6450 switch
unless otherwise noted.
For information about the specific models and modules supported in a product family, refer to the
hardware installation guide for that product family.

What’s new in this document

The following tables include descriptions of new information added to this guide for the FastIron 08.0.30
release.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 15

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 How command information is presented in this guide

TABLE 1 Summary of enhancements in FastIron release 08.0.30

Feature Description Described in

ICX 7750 40 Gbps Certain ICX 7750 40 Gbps ports can be Refer to the chapter 40 Gbps
breakout port configured with sub-ports when a breakout Breakout Ports for configuration
configuration cable is installed. information. Refer to the ICX 7750
Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation
Guide for information on the breakout
cable.

Energy efficient Regulates and saves power consumed by the Refer to the chapter Operations
ethernet active hardware components in the switch and Administration and Maintenance
conserves power during idle time. This feature
is supported on the ICX 7250 and ICX 7450
devices.

External USB hotplug Allows you to copy images, cores, logs and Refer to the chapter Operations
configurations between the external USB and Administration and Maintenance
the internal eUSB. This feature is supported on
ICX 7250, ICX 7450 and ICX 7750 devices.

Histogram The histogram framework feature monitors and Refer to the chapter Operations
records system resource usage information. Administration and Maintenance
This feature is supported on ICX 6430, ICX
6450, ICX 7250, ICX 7450 and ICX 7750
devices.

IEEE 802.3ah EFM- EFM-OAM provides mechanisms to monitor link Refer to IEEE 802.3ah EFM-OAM on
OAM operation, health and improve fault isolation of page 114
Ethernet network to increase management
capability.

sFlow sample mode The sample mode can be changed to include Refer to Changing the sampling
the dropped packets for sFlow sampling. mode on page 251

sFlow source IP The sFlow source interface can be configured Refer to sFlow and source IP address
address from which the IP source address is selected for on page 248
the sFlow datagram.

Flash timeout The flash timeout can be configured to a value Refer to Flash timeout on page 94
from 12 through 60 minutes.

Elapsed timestamp The elapsed time between the most recent Refer to Enabling the display of the
display for port statistics reset of the port statistics counters and the time elapsed timestamp for port statistics
reset when the show statistics command is reset on page 231
executed, can be displayed in the output of the
show statistics command.

How command information is presented in this guide

For all new content supported in FastIron Release 08.0.20 and later, command information is
documented in a standalone command reference guide.
In an effort to provide consistent command line interface (CLI) documentation for all products, Brocade
is in the process of completing a standalone command reference for the FastIron platforms. This

16 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 About This Document

process involves separating command syntax and parameter descriptions from configuration tasks.
Until this process is completed, command information is presented in two ways:
• For all new content supported in FastIron Release 08.0.20 and later, the CLI is documented in
separate command pages included in the FastIron Command Reference. Command pages are
compiled in alphabetical order and follow a standard format to present syntax, parameters, usage
guidelines, examples, and command history.

NOTE
Many commands from previous FastIron releases are also included in the command reference.
• Legacy content in configuration guides continues to include command syntax and parameter
descriptions in the chapters where the features are documented.
If you do not find command syntax information embedded in a configuration task, refer to the FastIron
Command Reference.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 17

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 How command information is presented in this guide

18 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Management Applications

● Management port overview.............................................................................................19

● Web Management Interface............................................................................................21
● Management VRFs......................................................................................................... 21

Management port overview

NOTE
The management port applies to FCX, SX 800, SX 1600, ICX 6430, and ICX 6450 devices.
The management port is an out-of-band port that customers can use to manage their devices without
interfering with the in-band ports. The management port is widely used to download images and
configurations, for Telnet sessions and for Web management.
For FCX devices, the MAC address for the management port is derived from the base MAC address of
the unit, plus the number of ports in the base module. For example, on a 48-port FCX standalone
device, the base MAC address is 0000.0034.2200. The management port MAC address for this device
would be 0000.0034.2200 plus 0x30, or 0000.0034.2230. The 0x30 in this case equals the 48 ports on
the base module.
For SX 800 and SX 1600 devices, the MAC address for the management port is derived as if the
management port is the last port on the management module where it is located. For example, on a 2 X
10G management module, the MAC address of the management port is that of the third port on that
module.

How the management port works

The following rules apply to management ports:
• Only packets that are specifically addressed to the management port MAC address or the broadcast
MAC address are processed by the Layer 2 switch or Layer 3 switch. All other packets are filtered
out.
• No packet received on a management port is sent to any in-band ports, and no packets received on
in-band ports are sent to a management port.
• A management port is not part of any VLAN
• Configuring a strict management VRF disables certain features on the management port.
• Protocols are not supported on the management port.
• Creating a management VLAN disables the management port on the device.
• For FCX and ICX devices, all features that can be configured from the global configuration mode can
also be configured from the interface level of the management port. Features that are configured
through the management port take effect globally, not on the management port itself.
For switches, any in-band port may be used for management purposes. A router sends Layer 3 packets
using the MAC address of the port as the source MAC address.
For stacking devices, (for example, an FCX stack) each stack unit has one out-of band management
port. Only the management port on the Active Controller will actively send and receive packets. If a new
Active Controller is elected, the new Active Controller management port will become the active

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 19

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 CLI Commands for use with the management port

management port. In this situation, the MAC address of the old Active Controller and the MAC address
of the new controller will be different.

CLI Commands for use with the management port

The following CLI commands can be used with a management port.
To display the current configuration, use the show running-config interface management
command.
Syntax: show running-config interface management num

device(config-if-mgmt)# ip addr 10.44.9.64/24

device(config)# show running-config interface management 1
interface management 1
ip address 10.44.9.64 255.255.255.0

To display the current configuration, use the show interfaces management command.
Syntax: show interfaces management num

device(config)# show interfaces management 1

GigEthernetmgmt1 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is GigEthernet, address is 0000.0076.544a (bia 0000.0076.544a)
Configured speed auto, actual 1Gbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual none
BPRU guard is disabled, ROOT protect is disabled
Link Error Dampening is Disabled
STP configured to OFF, priority is level0, MAC-learning is enabled
Flow Control is config disabled, oper enabled
Mirror disabled, Monitor disabled
Not member of any active trunks
Not member of any configured trunks
No port name
IPG MII 0 bits-time, IPG GMII 0 bits-time
IP MTU 1500 bytes
300 second input rate: 83728 bits/sec, 130 packets/sec, 0.01% utilization
300 second output rate: 24 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
39926 packets input, 3210077 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 4353 broadcasts, 32503 multicasts, 370 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
22 packets output, 1540 bytres, 0 underruns
Transmitted 0 broadcasts, 6 multicasts, 16 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions

To display the management interface information in brief form, enter the show interfaces brief
management command.
Syntax: show interfaces brief management num

device# show interfaces brief management 1

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pri MAC Name
mgmt1 Up None Full 1G None No 0 0000.0076.544a

To display management port statistics, enter the show statistics management command.
Syntax: show statistics management num

device# show statistics management 1

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pri MAC Name
mgmt1 Up None Full 1G None No 0 0000.0076.544a
Port mgmt1 Counters:
InOctets 3210941 OutOctets 1540
InPkts 39939 OutPackets 22
InBroadcastPkts 4355 OutbroadcastPkts 0
InMultiastPkts 35214 OutMulticastPkts 6
InUnicastPkts 370 OutUnicastPkts 16
InBadPkts 0
InFragments 0

20 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Web Management Interface

InDiscards 0 OutErrors 0
CRC 0 Collisions 0
InErrors 0 LateCollisions 0
InGiantPkts 0
InShortPkts 0
InJabber 0
InFlowCtrlPkts 0 OutFlowCtrlPkts 0
InBitsPerSec 83728 OutBitsPerSec 24
InPktsPerSec 130 OutPktsPerSec 0
InUtilization 0.01% OutUtilization 0.00%

To display the management interface statistics in brief form, enter the show statistics brief
management command.
Syntax: show statistics brief management num

device(config)# show statistics brief management 1

Port In Packets Out PacketsTrunk In Errors Out Errors
mgmt1 39946 22 0 0
Total 39945 22 0 0

Web Management Interface

The Web Management Interface is a browser-based interface that allows administrators to manage and
monitor a single Brocade device or a group of Brocade devices connected together.
For many of the features on a Brocade device, the Web Management Interface can be used as an
alternate to the CLI for creating new configurations, modifying existing ones, and monitoring the traffic
on a device.
For more information on how to log in and use the Web Management Interface, refer to the FastIron SX,
FCX, and ICX Web Management Interface User Guide.

Management VRFs
Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) allows routers to maintain multiple routing tables and forwarding
tables on the same router. A management VRF can be configured to control the flow of management
traffic as described in this section.

NOTE
For information on configuring Multi-VRF, sometimes called VRF-Lite or Multi-VRF CE, refer to the
FastIron Ethernet Switch Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide.
A management VRF is used to provide secure management access to the device by sending inbound
and outbound management traffic through the VRF specified as a global management VRF and through
the out-of-band management port, thereby isolating management traffic from the network data traffic.
By default, the inbound traffic is unaware of VRF and allows incoming packets from any VRF, including
the default VRF. Outbound traffic is sent only through the default VRF. The default VRF consists of an
out-of-band management port and all the LP ports that do not belong to any other VRFs.
Any VRF, except the default VRF, can be configured as a management VRF. When a management
VRF is configured, the management traffic is allowed through the ports belonging to the specified VRF
and the out-of-band management port. The management traffic through the ports belonging to the other
VRFs and the default VRF are dropped, and the rejection statistics are incremented.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 21

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Source interface and management VRF compatibility

If the management VRF is not configured, the management applications follows default behavior. The
management VRF is configured the same way for IPv4 and IPv6 management traffic.
The management VRF is supported by the following management applications:
• SNMP server
• SNMP trap generator
• Telnet server
• SSH server
• Telnet client
• RADIUS client
• TACACS+ client
• TFTP
• SCP
• Syslog

NOTE
Any ping or traceroute commands use the VRF specified in the command or the default VRF if no
VRF is specified.

Source interface and management VRF compatibility

A source interface must be configured for management applications. When a source interface is
configured, management applications use the lowest configured IP address of the specified interface
as the source IP address in all the outgoing packets. If the configured interface is not part of the
management VRF, the response packet does not reach the destination. If the compatibility check fails
while either the management VRF or the source interface is being configured, the following warning
message is displayed. However, the configuration command is accepted.

The source-interface for Telnet, TFTP is not part of the management-vrf

Supported management applications

This section explains the management VRF support provided by the management applications.

SNMP server
When the management VRF is configured, the SNMP server receives SNMP requests and sends
SNMP responses only through the ports belonging to the management VRF and through the out-of-
band management port.
Any change in the management VRF configuration becomes immediately effective for the SNMP
server.

SNMP trap generator

When the management VRF is configured, the SNMP trap generator sends traps to trap hosts through
the ports belonging to the management VRF and through the out-of-band management port.
Any change in the management VRF configuration takes effect immediately for the SNMP trap
generator.

22 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SSH server

NOTE
The SNMP source interface configuration command snmp-server trap-source must be compatible
with the management VRF configuration.

SSH server
When the management VRF is configured, the incoming SSH connection requests are allowed only
from the ports belonging to the management VRF and from the out-of-band management port.
Management VRF enforcement occurs only while a connection is established.
To allow the incoming SSH connection requests only from the management VRF and not from the out-
of-band management port, enter the following command.

device(config)# ip ssh strict-management-vrf

The ip ssh strict-management-vrf command is applicable only when the management VRF is
configured. If not, the command issues the following warning message.

Warning - Management-vrf is not configured.

For the SSH server, changing the management VRF configuration or configuring the ip ssh strict-
management-vrf command does not affect the existing SSH connections. The changes are be applied
only to new incoming connection requests.

Telnet client
When the VRF name is specified in the telnet vrf command, the Telnet client initiates Telnet requests
only from the ports belonging to the specified VRF.
To configure the VRF name in outbound Telnet sessions, enter the following command at the privileged
EXEC level.

device(config)# telnet vrf red 10.157.22.39

Syntax: telnet vrf vrf-name IPv4address | ipv6 IPv6address

The vrf-name variable specifies the name of the pre-configured VRF.

RADIUS client
When the management VRF is configured, the RADIUS client sends RADIUS requests or receives
responses only through the ports belonging to the management VRF and through the out-of-band
management port.
Any change in the management VRF configuration takes effect immediately for the RADIUS client.

NOTE
The RADIUS source interface configuration command ip radius source-interface must be compatible
with the management VRF configuration.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 23

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 TACACS+ client

TACACS+ client
When the management VRF is configured, the TACACS+ client establishes connections with TACACS
+ servers only through the ports belonging to the management VRF and the out-of-band management
port.
For the TACACS+ client, a change in the management VRF configuration does not affect the existing
TACACS+ connections. The changes are applied only to new TACACS+ connections.

NOTE
The TACACS+ source interface configuration command ip tacacs source-interface must be
compatible with the management VRF configuration.

TFTP
When the management VRF is configured, TFTP sends or receives data and acknowledgments only
through ports belonging to the management VRF and through the out-of-band management port.
Any change in the management VRF configuration takes effect immediately for TFTP. You cannot
change in the management VRF configuration while TFTP is in progress.

NOTE
The TFTP source interface configuration command ip tftp source-interface must be compatible with
the management VRF configuration.

SCP
SCP uses SSH as the underlying transport. The behavior of SCP is similar to the SSH server.

Syslog
When the management VRF is configured, the Syslog module sends log messages only through the
ports belonging to the management VRF and the out-of-band management port.
Any change in the management VRF configuration takes effect immediately for Syslog.

NOTE
The Syslog source interface configuration command ip syslog source-interface must be compatible
with the management VRF configuration.

Configuring a global management VRF

To configure a VRF as a global management VRF, enter the following command.

device(config)# management-vrf mvrf

Syntax: [no] management-vrf vrf-name

24 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuration notes

The vrf-name parameter must specify the name of a pre-configured VRF. If the VRF is not pre-
configured, command execution fails, and the following error message is displayed.

Error - VRF <vrf-name>

doesn't exist

When the management VRF is configured, the following Syslog message is displayed.

SYSLOG: VRF <vrf-name>

has been configured as management-vrf

Enter the no form of the command to remove the management VRF. When the management VRF is
deleted, the following Syslog message is displayed.

SYSLOG: VRF <vrf-name>

has been un-configured as management-vrf

Configuration notes
Consider the following configuration notes:
• If a management VRF is already configured, you must remove the existing management VRF
configuration before configuring a new one. If not, the system displays the following error message.

device(config)# management-vrf red

Error - VRF mvrf already configured as management-vrf

• If you try to delete a management VRF that was not configured, the system displays the following
error message.

device(config)# no management-vrf red

Error - VRF red is not the current management-vrf

• If a VRF is currently configured as the management VRF, it cannot be deleted or modified.

Attempting to do so causes the system to return the following error message.

device(config)# no vrf mvrf

Error - Cannot modify/delete a VRF which is configured as management-vrf

Displaying management VRF information

To display IP Information for a specified VRF, enter the following command at any level of the CLI.

device(config)# show vrf mvrf

VRF mvrf, default RD 1100:1100, Table ID 11
Configured as management-vrf
IP Router-Id: 1.0.0.1
Interfaces:
ve3300 ve3400
Address Family IPv4
Max Routes: 641
Number of Unicast Routes: 2
Address Family IPv6
Max Routes: 64
Number of Unicast Routes: 2

Syntax: show vrf vrf-name

The vrf-name parameter specifies the VRF for which you want to display IP information.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 25

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Management Applications

TABLE 2 show vrf output descriptions

This field Displays

VRF vrf-name The name of the VRF.

default RD The default route distinguisher for the VRF.

Table ID The table ID for the VRF.

Routes The total number of IPv4 and IPv6 Unicast routes configured on this VRF.

Configured as management-vrf Indicates that the specified VRF is configured as a management VRF.

IP Router-Id The 32-bit number that uniquely identifies the router.

Number of Unicast Routes The number of Unicast routes configured on this VRF.

The show who command displays information about the management VRF from which the Telnet or
SSH connection has been established.

device(config)# show who

Console connections:
established, monitor enabled, privilege super-user, in config mode
1 minutes 47 seconds in idle
Telnet server status: Enabled
Telnet connections (inbound):
1 established, client ip address 10.53.1.181, user is lab, privilege super-user
using vrf default-vrf.
2 minutes 46 seconds in idle
2 established, client ip address 10.20.20.2, user is lab, privilege super-user
using vrf mvrf.
16 seconds in idle
3 closed
4 closed
5 closed
Telnet connections (outbound):
6 established, server ip address 10.20.20.2, from Telnet session 2, ,
privilege super-user
using vrf mvrf.
12 seconds in idle
7 closed
8 closed
9 closed
10 closed
SSH server status: Enabled
SSH connections:
1 established, client ip address 10.53.1.181, privilege super-user
using vrf default-vrf.
you are connecting to this session
3 seconds in idle
2 established, client ip address 10.20.20.2, privilege super-user
using vrf mvrf.
48 seconds in idle
3 closed
4 closed
5 closed
6 closed
7 closed
8 closed
9 closed
10 closed
11 closed
12 closed
13 closed
14 closed
15 closed
16 closed

26 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Management Applications

Syntax: show who

To display packet and session rejection statistics due to failure in management VRF validation, enter
the following command.

device(config)# show management-vrf

Management VRF name : sflow

Management Application Rx Drop Pkts Tx Drop Pkts
SNMP Engine 0 11
RADIUS Client 0 0
TFTP Client 0 0
Traps - 0
SysLogs - 0

TCP Connection rejects:

Telnet : 0
SSH (Strict): 685
TACACS+ Client : 0

Syntax: show management-vrf

TABLE 3 show management-vrf output descriptions

This field Displays

Management VRF name Displays the configured management VRF name.

Management Application Displays the management application names.

Rx Drop Pkts Displays the number of packets dropped in the inbound traffic.

Tx Drop Pkts Displays the number of packets dropped in the outbound traffic.

TCP Connection rejects Displays the number of TCP connections per application rejected due to management
VRF validation.

Make sure that the management VRF is configured before executing the show management-vrf
command. If not, the system displays the following error message.

Error - Management VRF is not configured.

To clear the management VRF rejection statistics, enter the following command.

device(config)# clear management-vrf-stats

Syntax: clear management-vrf-stats

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 27

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying management VRF information

28 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic Software Features

● Basic system parameter configuration............................................................................ 29

● Network Time Protocol Version 4 (NTPv4)..................................................................... 35
● Basic port parameter configuration................................................................................. 53
● CLI banner configuration.................................................................................................86
● Requiring users to press the Enter key after the message of the day banner................ 87
● Setting a privileged EXEC CLI level banner....................................................................88
● Displaying a console message when an incoming Telnet session is detected............... 88

Basic system parameter configuration

Brocade devices are configured at the factory with default parameters that allow you to begin using the
basic features of the system immediately. However, many of the advanced features such as VLANs or
routing protocols for the device must first be enabled at the system (global) level before they can be
configured. If you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to configure system parameters, you can find
these system level parameters at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

NOTE
Before assigning or modifying any router parameters, you must assign the IP subnet (interface)
addresses for each port.

NOTE
For information about configuring IP addresses, DNS resolver, DHCP assist, and other IP-related
parameters, refer to "IP Configuration" chapter in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Layer 3 Routing
Configuration Guide

NOTE
For information about the Syslog buffer and messages, refer to Basic system parameter configuration.
The procedures in this section describe how to configure the basic system parameters listed in Basic
Software Features on page 29.

Entering system administration information

You can configure a system name, contact, and location for a Brocade device and save the information
locally in the configuration file for future reference. This information is not required for system operation
but is suggested. When you configure a system name, the name replaces the default system name in
the CLI command prompt.
The name, contact, and location each can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 29

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SNMP parameter configuration

Here is an example of how to configure a system name, system contact, and location.

device(config)# hostname zappa

zappa(config)# snmp-server contact Support Services
zappa(config)# snmp-server location Centerville
zappa(config)# end
zappa# write memory

Syntax:hostname string
Syntax: snmp-server contact string
Syntax: snmp-server location string
The text strings can contain blanks. The SNMP text strings do not require quotation marks when they
contain blanks but the host name does.

NOTE
The chassis name command does not change the CLI prompt. Instead, the command assigns an
administrative ID to the device.

SNMP parameter configuration

Use the procedures in this section to perform the following configuration tasks:
• Specify a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) trap receiver.
• Specify a source address and community string for all traps sent by the device.
• Change the holddown time for SNMP traps
• Disable individual SNMP traps. (All traps are enabled by default.)
• Disable traps for CLI access that is authenticated by a local user account, a RADIUS server, or a
TACACS/TACACS+ server.

NOTE
To add and modify "get" (read-only) and "set" (read-write) community strings, refer to "Security
Access" chapter in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Security Configuration Guide .

Specifying an SNMP trap receiver

You can specify a trap receiver to ensure that all SNMP traps sent by the Brocade device go to the
same SNMP trap receiver or set of receivers, typically one or more host devices on the network. When
you specify the host, you also specify a community string. The Brocade device sends all the SNMP
traps to the specified hosts and includes the specified community string. Administrators can therefore
filter for traps from a Brocade device based on IP address or community string.
When you add a trap receiver, the software automatically encrypts the community string you associate
with the receiver when the string is displayed by the CLI or Web Management Interface. If you want
the software to show the community string in the clear, you must explicitly specify this when you add a
trap receiver. In either case, the software does not encrypt the string in the SNMP traps sent to the
receiver.
To specify the host to which the device sends all SNMP traps, use one of the following methods.
To add a trap receiver and encrypt the display of the community string, enter commands such as the
following.

30 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying a single trap source

To specify an SNMP trap receiver and change the UDP port that will be used to receive traps, enter a
command such as the following.

device(config)# snmp-server host 10.2.2.2 0 mypublic port 200

device(config)# write memory

Syntax: snmp-server host ip-addr { 0 | 1 } string [ port value ]

The ip-addr parameter specifies the IP address of the trap receiver.
The 0 | 1 parameter specifies whether you want the software to encrypt the string (1 ) or show the string
in the clear (0 ). The default is 0 .
The string parameter specifies an SNMP community string configured on the Brocade device. The
string can be a read-only string or a read-write string. The string is not used to authenticate access to
the trap host but is instead a useful method for filtering traps on the host. For example, if you configure
each of your Brocade devices that use the trap host to send a different community string, you can easily
distinguish among the traps from different Brocade devices based on the community strings.
The command in the example above adds trap receiver 10.2.2.2 and configures the software to encrypt
display of the community string. When you save the new community string to the startup-config file
(using the write memory command), the software adds the following command to the file.

snmp-server host 10.2.2.2 1

encrypted-string

To add a trap receiver and configure the software to encrypt display of the community string in the CLI
and Web Management Interface, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)# snmp-server host 10.2.2.2 0 FastIron-12

device(config)# write memory

The port value parameter allows you to specify which UDP port will be used by the trap receiver. This
parameter allows you to configure several trap receivers in a system. With this parameter, a network
management application can coexist in the same system. Brocade devices can be configured to send
copies of traps to more than one network management application.

Specifying a single trap source

You can specify a single trap source to ensure that all SNMP traps sent by the Layer 3 switch use the
same source IP address. For configuration details, refer to "Specifying a single source interface for
specified packet types" section in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide.

Setting the SNMP trap holddown time

When a Brocade device starts up, the software waits for Layer 2 convergence (STP) and Layer 3
convergence (OSPF) before beginning to send SNMP traps to external SNMP servers. Until
convergence occurs, the device might not be able to reach the servers, in which case the messages are
lost.
By default, a Brocade device uses a one-minute holddown time to wait for the convergence to occur
before starting to send SNMP traps. After the holddown time expires, the device sends the traps,
including traps such as "cold start" or "warm start" that occur before the holddown time expires.
You can change the holddown time to a value from one second to ten minutes.
To change the holddown time for SNMP traps, enter a command such as the following at the global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)# snmp-server enable traps holddown-time 30

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 31

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Disabling SNMP traps

The command in this example changes the holddown time for SNMP traps to 30 seconds. The device
waits 30 seconds to allow convergence in STP and OSPF before sending traps to the SNMP trap
receiver.
Syntax: [no] snmp-server enable traps holddown-time seconds
The secs parameter specifies the number of seconds and can be from 1 - 600 (ten minutes). The
default is 60 seconds.

Disabling SNMP traps

Brocade devices come with SNMP trap generation enabled by default for all traps. You can selectively
disable one or more of the following traps.

NOTE
By default, all SNMP traps are enabled at system startup.

SNMP Layer 2 traps

The following traps are generated on devices running Layer 2 software:

• SNMP authentication keys
• Power supply failure
• Fan failure
• Cold start
• Link up
• Link down
• Bridge new root
• Bridge topology change
• Locked address violation

SNMP Layer 3 traps

The following traps are generated on devices running Layer 3 software:

• SNMP authentication key
• Power supply failure
• Fan failure
• Cold start
• Link up
• Link down
• Bridge new root
• Bridge topology change
• Locked address violation
• BGP4
• OSPF
• VRRP
• VRRP-E
To stop link down occurrences from being reported, enter the following.

device(config)# no snmp-server enable traps link-down

32 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SNMP ifIndex

Syntax: [no] snmp-server enable traps trap-type

SNMP ifIndex
On Brocade IronWare devices, SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) uses Interface Index
(ifIndex) to assign a unique value to each port on a module or slot. The number of indexes that can be
assigned per module is 64. On all IronWare devices, the system automatically assign 64 indexes to
each module on the device. This value is not configurable.

Displaying virtual routing interface statistics

NOTE
This feature is supported on FastIron X Series and ICX 6650 devices only.

You can enable SNMP to extract and display virtual routing interface statistics from the ifXTable (64-bit
counters).
The following describes the limitations of this feature:
• The Brocade device counts traffic from all virtual interfaces (VEs). For example, in a configuration
with two VLANs (VLAN 1 and VLAN 20) on port 1, when traffic is sent on VLAN 1, the counters (VE
statistics) increase for both VE 1 and VE 20.
• The counters include all traffic on each virtual interface, even if the virtual interface is disabled.
• The counters include traffic that is denied by ACLs or MAC address filters.
To enable SNMP to display VE statistics, enter the enable snmp ve-statistics command.

device(config)# enable snmp ve-statistics

Syntax: [no] enable snmp ve-statistics

Use the no form of the command to disable this feature once it is enabled.
Note that the above CLI command enables SNMP to display virtual interface statistics. It does not
enable the CLI or Web Management Interface to display the statistics .

User-login details in Syslog messages and traps

Brocade devices send Syslog messages and SNMP traps when a user logs into or out of the User
EXEC or Privileged EXEC level of the CLI. The feature applies to users whose access is authenticated
by an authentication-method list based on a local user account, RADIUS server, or TACACS/TACACS+
server.
To view the user-login details in the Syslog messages and traps, you must enable the logging enable
user-login command.
device(config)# logging enable user-login

Syntax: [no] logging enable user-login

NOTE
The Privileged EXEC level is sometimes called the "Enable" level, because the command for accessing
this level is enable.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 33

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Cancelling an outbound Telnet session

Examples of Syslog messages for CLI access

When a user whose access is authenticated by a local user account, a RADIUS server, or a TACACS
or TACACS+ server logs into or out of the CLI User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode, the software
generates a Syslog message and trap containing the following information:
• The time stamp
• The user name
• Whether the user logged in or out
• The CLI level the user logged into or out of (User EXEC or Privileged EXEC level)

NOTE
Messages for accessing the User EXEC level apply only to access through Telnet. The device does
not authenticate initial access through serial connections but does authenticate serial access to the
Privileged EXEC level. Messages for accessing the Privileged EXEC level apply to access through the
serial connection or Telnet.

The following examples show login and logout messages for the User EXEC and Privileged EXEC
levels of the CLI.

device# show logging

Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 12 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dec 15 19:04:14:A:Fan 1, fan on right connector, failed
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
Oct 15 18:01:11:info:dg logout from USER EXEC mode
Oct 15 17:59:22:info:dg logout from PRIVILEGE EXEC mode
Oct 15 17:38:07:info:dg login to PRIVILEGE EXEC mode
Oct 15 17:38:03:info:dg login to USER EXEC mode

Syntax: show logging

The first message (the one on the bottom) indicates that user "dg" logged in to the CLI User EXEC
level on October 15 at 5:38 PM and 3 seconds (Oct 15 17:38:03). The same user logged into the
Privileged EXEC level four seconds later.
The user remained in the Privileged EXEC mode until 5:59 PM and 22 seconds. (The user could have
used the CONFIG modes as well. Once you access the Privileged EXEC level, no further
authentication is required to access the CONFIG levels.) At 6:01 PM and 11 seconds, the user ended
the CLI session.

Removing user-login details from the Syslog messages and traps

If you want to disable the logging of user-login details from the system log, enter the following
commands.

device(config)# no logging enable user-login

device(config)# write memory
device(config)# end
device# reload

Cancelling an outbound Telnet session

If you want to cancel a Telnet session from the console to a remote Telnet server (for example, if the
connection is frozen), you can terminate the Telnet session by doing the following.

34 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Time Protocol Version 4 (NTPv4)

1. At the console, press Ctrl+^ (Ctrl+Shift-6).

2. Press the X key to terminate the Telnet session.
Pressing Ctrl+^ twice in a row causes a single Ctrl+^ character to be sent to the Telnet server. After
you press Ctrl+^ , pressing any key other than X or Ctrl+^ returns you to the Telnet session.

Network Time Protocol Version 4 (NTPv4)

NTPv4 feature synchronizes the local system clock in the device with the UTC. The synchronization is
achieved by maintaining a loop-free timing topology computed as a shortest-path spanning tree rooted
on the primary server. NTP does not know about local time zones or daylight-saving time. A time server
located anywhere in the world can provide synchronization to a client located anywhere else in the
world. It allows clients to use different time zone and daylight-saving properties. Primary servers are
synchronized by wire or radio to national standards such as GPS. Timing information is conveyed from
primary servers to secondary servers and clients in the network. NTP runs on UDP, which in turn runs
on IP.
NTP has a hierarchical structure. NTP uses the concept of a stratum to describe how many NTP hops
away a machine is from an authoritative time source. A stratum 1 time server typically has an
authoritative time source such as a radio or atomic clock, or a Global Positioning System [GPS] time
source directly attached. A stratum 2 time server receives its time through NTP from a stratum 1 time
server and so on. As the network introduces timing discrepancies, lower stratum devices are a factor
less accurate. A hierarchical structure allows the overhead of providing time to many clients to be
shared among many time servers. Not all clients need to obtain time directly from a stratum 1 reference,
but can use stratum 2 or 3 references.
NTP operates on a client-server basis. The current implementation runs NTP as a secondary server
and/or a NTP Client. As a secondary server, the device operates with one or more upstream servers
and one or more downstream servers or clients. A client device synchronizes to one or more upstream
servers, but does not provide synchronization to dependant clients. Secondary servers at each lower
level are assigned stratum numbers one greater than the preceding level. As stratum number increases,
the accuracy decreases. Stratum one is assigned to Primary servers.
NTP uses the concept of associations to describe communication between two machines running NTP.
NTP associations are statistically configured. On startup or on the arrival of NTP packets, associations
are created. Multiple associations are created by the protocol to communicate with multiple servers.
NTP maintains a set of statistics for each of the server or the client it is associated with. The statistics
represent measurements of the system clock relative to each server clock separately. NTP then
determines the most accurate and reliable candidates to synchronize the system clock. The final clock
offset applied for clock adjustment is a statistical average derived from the set of accurate sources.
When multiple sources of time (hardware clock, manual configuration) are available, NTP is always
considered to be more authoritative. NTP time overrides the time that is set by any other method.
NTPv4 obsoletes NTPv3 (RFC1305) and SNTP (RFC4330). SNTP is a subset of NTPv4. RFC 5905
describes NTPv4.
To keep the time in your network current, it is recommended that each device have its time
synchronized with at least four external NTP servers. External NTP servers should be synchronized
among themselves to maintain time synchronization.

NOTE
Network Time Protocol (NTP) commands must be configured on each individual device.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 35

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic Software Features

FIGURE 1 NTP Hierarchy

• NTP implementation conforms to RFC 5905.

• NTP can be enabled in server and client mode simultaneously.
• The NTP uses UDP port 123 for communicating with NTP servers/peers.
• NTP server and client can communicate using IPv4 or IPv6 address
• NTP implementation supports below association modes.
‐ Client
‐ Server
‐ Symmetric active/passive
‐ Broadcast server
‐ Broadcast client
• NTP supports maximum of 8 servers and 8 peers. The 8 peers includes statically configured and
dynamically learned.

36 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Limitations

• NTP can operate in authenticate or non-authenticate mode. Only symmetric key authentication is
supported.
• By default, NTP operates in default VLAN and it can be changed.

Limitations
• FastIron devices cannot operate as primary time server (or stratum 1). It only serves as secondary
time server (stratum 2 to 15).
• NTP server and client cannot communicate using hostnames.
• NTP is not supported on VRF enabled interface.
• Autokey public key authentication is not supported.
• The NTP version 4 Extension fields are not supported. The packets containing the extension fields
are discarded.
• The NTP packets having control (6) or private (7) packet mode is not supported. NTP packets with
control and private modes will be discarded.
• On reboot or switchover, all the NTP state information will be lost and time synchronization will start
fresh.
• NTP multicast server/client and manycast functionalities are not supported.
• NTP versions 1 and 2 are not supported.
• NTP MIB is not supported.

Network Time Protocol (NTP) leap second

A leap second is a second added to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) in order to keep it synchronized
with astronomical time (UT1).
There are two main reasons that cause leap seconds to occur. The first is that the atomic second
defined by comparing cesium clocks to the Ephemeris Time (ET) scale was incorrect, as the duration of
the ephemeris second was slightly shorter than the mean solar second and this characteristic was
passed along to the atomic second. The second reason for leap seconds is that the speed of the Earth's
rotation is not constant. It sometimes speeds up, and sometimes slows down, but when averaged over
long intervals the trend indicates that it is gradually slowing. This gradual decrease in the rotational rate
is causing the duration of the mean solar second to gradually increase with respect to the atomic
second.
Leap seconds are added in order to keep the difference between UTC and astronomical time (UT1) to
less than 0.9 seconds. The International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems Service (IERS),
measures Earth's rotation and publishes the difference between UT1 and UTC. Usually leap seconds
are added when UTC is ahead of UT1 by 0.4 seconds or more.

How Brocade supports leap second handling for NTP

The obvious question raised is what happens during the NTP leap second itself.
Specifically, a positive leap second is inserted between second 23:59:59 of a chosen UTC calendar
date (the last day of a month, usually June 30 or December 31) and second 00:00:00 of the following
date. This extra second is displayed on UTC clocks as 23:59:60. On clocks that display local time tied to
UTC, the leap second may be inserted at the end of some other hour (or half-hour or quarter-hour),
depending on the local time zone. When ever there is a leap second the NTP server notifies by setting
the NTP leap second bits.
On Brocade devices when ever there is a negative leap second, the clock is set once second backward
of the following date as described here. On positive leap second the clock suppress second 23:59:59 of

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 37

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NTP and SNTP

the last day of a chosen month, so that second 23:59:58 of that date would be followed immediately by
second 00:00:00 of the following date.
Because the Earth's rotation speed varies in response to climatic and geological events, UTC leap
seconds are irregularly spaced and unpredictable. Insertion of each UTC leap second is usually
decided about six months in advance by the International Earth Rotation and Reference Systems
Service (IERS), when needed to ensure that the difference between the UTC and UT1 readings will
never exceed 0.9 second.

NTP and SNTP

FastIron 07.3.00c and earlier releases implements SNTP for time synchronization. In FastIron
07.3.00d, NTP can be used for time synchronization in FCX devices with router images. From FastIron
8.0 release onwards, NTP can be used for time synchronization in all FastIron devices with both router
and switch images.
NTP and SNTP implementations cannot operate at the same time and one of them has to be disabled.
On downgrading from FastIron 07.3.00d to FastIron 07.3.00c or lower version, the entire NTP
configuration is lost.

NTP server
A NTP server will provide the correct network time on your device using the Network time protocol
(NTP). Network Time Protocol can be used to synchronize the time on devices across a network. A
NTP time server is used to obtain the correct time from a time source and adjust the local time in each
connecting device.
The NTP server functionality is enabled when you use the ntp command, provided SNTP configuration
is already removed.
When the NTP server is enabled, it will start listening on the NTP port for client requests and responds
with the reference time. Its stratum number will be the upstream time server's stratum + 1. The stratum
1 NTP server is the time server which is directly attached to the authoritative time source.
The device cannot be configured as primary time server with stratum 1. It can be configured as
secondary time server with stratum 2 to 15 to serve the time using the local clock.
The NTP server is stateless and will not maintain any NTP client information.

System as an Authoritative NTP Server

The NTP server can operate in master mode to serve time using the local clock, when it has lost
synchronization. Serving local clock can be enabled using the master command. In this mode, the
NTP server stratum number is set to the configured stratum number. When the master command is
configured and the device was never synchronized with an upstream time server and the clock setting
is invalid, the server will respond to client's request with the stratum number set to 16. While the
device is operating in the master mode and serving the local clock as the reference time, if
synchronization with the upstream server takes place it will calibrate the local clock using the NTP
time. The stratum number will switch to that of the synchronized source +1. And when synchronization
is lost, the device switches back to local clock time with stratum number as specified manually (or the
default).

NOTE
Local time and time zone has to be configured before configuring the master command.

38 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NTP Client

• The following scenarios are observed when the master command is not configured and the NTP
upstream servers are configured:
• If the synchronization with the NTP server/peer is active, the system clock is synchronized and the
reference time is the NTP time.
• If the NTP server/peer is configured but not reachable and if the local clock is valid, the server will
respond to client's request with the stratum number set to 16.
• If there is no NTP server/peer configured and if the local clock is valid, the server will respond to
client's request with the stratum number set to 16.
• If there is no NTP server/peer configured and if the local clock is invalid, the system clock is not
synchronized.
The following scenarios are observed when the master command is configured and the NTP upstream
servers are also configured:
• If the synchronization with the time server/peer is active, system clock is synchronized and the
reference time is the NTP time.If the NTP server/peer is configured but not reachable, the system
clock is synchronized. If the local time is valid then the reference time is the local clock time.
• If the NTP server/peer is not configured, the system clock is synchronized. If the local clock is valid,
then the reference time is the local clock time.
• If the NTP server/peer is not configured and the local clock is invalid, system clock is not
synchronized.

NOTE
Use the master command with caution. It is very easy to override valid time sources using this
command, especially if a low stratum number is configured. Configuring multiple machines in the same
network with the master command can cause instability in timekeeping if the machines do not agree on
the time.

NTP Client
An NTP client gets time responses from an NTP server or servers, and uses the information to calibrate
its clock. This consists of the client determining how far its clock is off and adjusting its time to match
that of the server. The maximum error is determined based on the round-trip time for the packet to be
received.
The NTP client can be enabled when we enter the ntp command and configure one or more NTP
servers/peers.
The NTP client maintains the server and peer state information as association. The server and peer
association is mobilized at the startup or whenever user configures. The statically configured server/
peer associations are not demobilized unless user removes the configuration. The symmetric passive
association is mobilized upon arrival of NTP packet from peer which is not statically configured. The
associations will be demobilized on error or time-out.

NTP peer
NTP peer mode is intended for configurations where a group of devices operate as mutual backups for
each other. If one of the devices loses a reference source, the time values can flow from the surviving
peers to all the others. Each device operates with one or more primary reference sources, such as a
radio clock, or a subset of reliable NTP secondary servers. When one of the devices lose all reference
sources or simply cease operation, the other peers automatically reconfigures so that time values can
flow from the surviving peers to others.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 39

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NTP broadcast server

When the NTP server or peer is configured with burst mode, client will send burst of up to 8 NTP
packets in each polling interval. The burst number of packets in each interval increases as the polling
interval increases from minimum polling interval towards maximum interval.
The NTP peer can operate in:
• Symmetric Active-When the peer is configured using the peer command.
• Symmetric Passive-Dynamically learned upon arrival of a NTP packet from the peer which is not
configured. The symmetric passive association is removed on timeout or error.
The following scenarios are observed when the upstream server is not reachable after retries:
• If the NTP server/peer is configured and the master command is not configured, then the system
clock is synchronized. When the system clock is synchronized, the server will respond to client's
request with the stratum number set to +1. And when the system clock is unsynchronized, the
server will respond to client's request with the stratum number set to 16.
• If the NTP server/peer is configured and the master command is configured, then the system clock
is synchronized. When the system clock is synchronized, the reference time is the local clock time.
If the local clock is valid then the server will respond to client's request with the specified stratum
number if it is configured otherwise with the default stratum number.
The following scenarios are observed when you remove the last NTP server/peer under the conditions
- the NTP server/peer is configured, master command is not configured, system clock is synchronized
and the reference time is the NTP time:
• If the local clock is not valid, the system clock is not synchronized.
• If the local clock is valid, the system clock is synchronized and the reference time is the local clock.
The server will respond to the client's request with the specified stratum number if it is configured
otherwise with the default stratum number.

NOTE
To create a symmetric active association when a passive association is already formed, disable NTP,
configure peer association and then enable NTP again.

NTP broadcast server

An NTP server can also operate in a broadcast mode. Broadcast servers send periodic time updates
to a broadcast address, while multicast servers send periodic updates to a multicast address. Using
broadcast packets can greatly reduce the NTP traffic on a network, especially for a network with many
NTP clients.
The interfaces should be enabled with NTP broadcasting. The NTP broadcast server broadcasts the
NTP packets periodically (every 64 sec) to subnet broadcast IP address of the configured interface.
• NTP broadcast packets are sent to the configured subnet when the NTP broadcast server is
configured on the interface which is up and the IP address is configured for the broadcast subnet
under the following conditions:
‐ The local clock is valid and the system clock is synchronized
‐ The local clock is valid and the system clock is not synchronized
‐ Authentication key is configured, the system clock is synchronized and the local clock is
valid
• NTP broadcast packets are not sent in the following cases:

40 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NTP broadcast client

‐ NTP broadcast server is configured on the interface which is down even if the system clock
is synchronized and the local clock is valid.
‐ NTP broadcast server is configured on the interface which is up and no IP address is
configured for the broadcast subnet even if the system clock is synchronized and the local
clock is valid.
‐ NTP broadcast server is configured on the interface which is not present and no IP address
is configured for the broadcast subnet even if the system clock is synchronized and the local
clock is valid.
‐ NTP broadcast server without authentication key is configured on the interface which is up
and the IP address is configured for the broadcast subnet even when NTP authentication is
enforced and the system clock is synchronized and the local clock is valid.

NTP broadcast client

An NTP broadcast client listens for NTP packets on a broadcast address. When the first packet is
received, the client attempts to quantify the delay to the server, to better quantify the correct time from
later broadcasts. This is accomplished by a series of brief interchanges where the client and server act
as a regular (non-broadcast) NTP client and server. Once interchanges occur, the client has an idea of
the network delay and thereafter can estimate the time based only on broadcast packets.

NTP associations
Networking devices running NTP can be configured to operate in variety of association modes when
synchronizing time with reference time sources. A networking device can obtain time information on a
network in two ways-by polling host servers and by listening to NTP broadcasts. That is, there are two
types of associations-poll-based and broadcast-based.

NTP poll-based associations

The following modes are the NTP polling based associations:
1. Server mode
2. Client mode
3. Symmetric Active/Passive
The server mode requires no prior client configuration. The server responds to client mode NTP
packets. Use the master command to set the device to operate in server mode when it has lost the
synchronization.
When the system is operating in the client mode, it polls all configured NTP servers and peers. The
device selects a host from all the polled NTP servers to synchronize with. Because the relationship
that is established in this case is a client-host relationship, the host will not capture or use any time
information sent by the local client device. This mode is most suited for file-server and workstation
clients that are not required to provide any form of time synchronization to other local clients. Use the
server and peer to individually specify the time server that you want the networking device to
consider synchronizing with and to set your networking device to operate in the client mode.
Symmetric active/passive mode is intended for configurations where group devices operate as
mutual backups for each other. Each device operates with one or more primary reference sources,
such as a radio clock, or a subset of reliable NTP secondary servers. If one of the devices lose all
reference sources or simply cease operation, the other peers automatically reconfigures. This helps
the flow of time value from the surviving peers to all the others.
When a networking device is operating in the symmetric active mode, it polls its assigned time-
serving hosts for the current time and it responds to polls by its hosts. Because symmetric active

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 41

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NTP broadcast-based associations

mode is a peer-to-peer relationship, the host will also retain time-related information of the local
networking device that it is communicating with. When many mutually redundant servers are
interconnected via diverse network paths, the symmetric active mode should be used. Most stratum
1 and stratum 2 servers on the Internet adopt the symmetric active form of network setup. The
FastIron device operates in symmetric active mode, when the peer information is configured using
the peer command and specifying the address of the peer. The peer is also configured in symmetric
active mode in this way by specifying the FastIron device information. If the peer is not specifically
configured, a symmetric passive association is activated upon arrival of a symmetric active
message.
The specific mode that you should set for each of your networking devices depends primarily on the
role that you want them to assume as a timekeeping device (server or client) and the device's
proximity to a stratum 1 timekeeping server. A networking device engages in polling when it is
operating as a client or a host in the client mode or when it is acting as a peer in the symmetric
active mode. An exceedingly large number of ongoing and simultaneous polls on a system can
seriously impact the performance of a system or slow the performance of a given network. To avoid
having an excessive number of ongoing polls on a network, you should limit the number of direct,
peer-to-peer or client-to-server associations. Instead, you should consider using NTP broadcasts to
propagate time information within a localized network.

NTP broadcast-based associations

The broadcast-based NTP associations should be used in configurations involving potentially large
client population. Broadcast-based NTP associations are also recommended for use on networks that
have limited bandwidth, system memory, or CPU resources.
The devices operating in the broadcast server mode broadcasts the NTP packets periodically which
can be picked up by the devices operating in broadcast client mode. The broadcast server is
configured using the broadcast command.
A networking device operating in the broadcast client mode does not engage in any polling. Instead,
the device receives the NTP broadcast server packets from the NTP broadcast servers in the same
subnet. The NTP broadcast client forms a temporary client association with the NTP broadcast server.
A broadcast client is configured using the broadcast client command. For broadcast client mode to
work, the broadcast server and the clients must be located on the same subnet.

Synchronizing time
After the system peer is chosen, the system time is synchronized based on the time difference with
system peer:
• If the time difference with the system peer is 128 msec and < 1000 sec, the system clock is stepped
to the system peer reference time and the NTP state information is cleared.

Authentication
The time kept on a machine is a critical resource, so it is highly recommended to use the encrypted
authentication mechanism.
The NTP can be configured to provide cryptographic authentication of messages with the clients/
peers, and with its upstream time server. Symmetric key scheme is supported for authentication. The
scheme uses MD5 keyed hash algorithm.
The authentication can be enabled using the authenticate command. The set of symmetric key and
key string is specified using the authentication-key command.
If authentication is enabled, NTP packets not having a valid MAC address are dropped.

42 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 VLAN and NTP

If the NTP server/peer is configured without authentication keys, the NTP request is not sent to the
configured server/peer.

NOTE
The same set or subset of key id and key string should be installed on all NTP devices.

VLAN and NTP

When VLAN is configured,
• NTP time servers should be reachable through the interfaces which belong to the configured VLAN.
Otherwise, NTP packets are not transmitted. This is applicable to both the unicast and the broadcast
server/client.
• NTP broadcast packets are sent only on the interface which belongs to the configured VLAN.
• The received unicast or broadcast NTP packet are dropped if the interface on which packet has been
received does not belong to the configured VLAN

Configuring NTP
NTP services are disabled on all interfaces by default.
Prerequisites:
• Before you begin to configure NTP, you must use the clock set command to set the time on your
device to within 1000 seconds of the coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
• Disable SNTP by removing all the SNTP configurations.

Enabling NTP
NTP and SNTP implementations cannot operate simultaneously. By default, SNTP is enabled. To
disable SNTP and enable NTP, use the ntp command in configuration mode. This command enables
the NTP client and server mode if SNTP is disabled.

Brocade(config)# ntp
Brocade(config-ntp)#

Syntax: [no] ntp

Use the no form of the command to disable NTP and remove the NTP configuration.

NOTE
The no ntp command removes all the configuration which are configured statistically and learned
associations from NTP neighbors.

NOTE
You cannot configure the ntp command if SNTP is enabled. If SNTP is enabled, configuring the ntp
command will display the following message:"SNTP is enabled. Disable SNTP before using NTP for
time synchronization"

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 43

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Disabling NTP

Disabling NTP
To disable the NTP server and client mode, use the disable command in NTP configuration mode.
Disabling the NTP server or client mode will not remove the configurations.

Brocade(config-ntp)# disable

Syntax: [no] disable [ serve ]

If the serve keyword is specified, then NTP will not serve the time to downstream devices. The serve
keyword disables the NTP server mode functionalities. If the serve keyword is not specified, then both
NTP client mode and NTP server mode functionalities are disabled.
Use the no form of the command to enable NTP client and server mode. To enable the client mode,
use the no disable command. To enable the client and server mode, use the no disable serve
command. The no disable command enables both client and server, if the client is already enabled
and server is disabled at that time "no disable server " enables the server.

NOTE
The disable command disables the NTP server and client mode; it does not remove the NTP
configuration.

Enabling NTP authentication

To enable Network Time Protocol (NTP) strict authentication, use the authenticate command. To
disable the function, use the no form of this command.
By default, authentication is disabled.

Brocade(config-ntp)# [no] authenticate

Syntax: [no] authenticate

Defining an authentication key

To define an authentication key for Network Time Protocol (NTP), use the authentication-key
command. To remove the authentication key for NTP, use the no form of this command.
By default, authentication keys are not configured.

Brocade(config-ntp)# authentication-key key-id 1 md5 moof

Syntax: [no] authentication-key key-id [ md5 | sha1 ] key-string

The valid key-id parameter is 1 to 65535.
MD5 is the message authentication support that is provided using the Message Digest 5 Algorithm.
The sha1 keyword specifies that the SHA1 keyed hash algorithm is used for NTP authentication.

NOTE
If JITC is enabled, only the sha1 option is available.

The key-string option is the value of the MD5 or SHA1 key. The maximum length of the key string may
be defined up to 16 characters. Up to 32 keys may be defined.

44 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying a source interface

Specifying a source interface

When the system sends an NTP packet, the source IP address is normally set to the address of the
interface through which the NTP packet is sent. Use the source-interface command to configure a
specific interface from which the IP source address will be taken. To remove the specified source
address, use the no form of this command.
This interface will be used for the source address for all packets sent to all destinations. If a source
address is to be used for a specific association, use the source keyword in the peer or server command.

NOTE
If the source-interface is not configured, then the lowest IP address in the outgoing interface will be
used in the NTP packets. Source IP address of a tunnel interface is not supported.

Brocade(config-ntp)# source-interface ethernet 1/3/1

Syntax: [no] source-interface ethernet { port | loopback num | ve num }

Specify the port parameter in the format stack-unit/slotnum/portnum.
The loopback num parameter specifies the loopback interface number.
The ve num parameter specifies the virtual port number.

Enable or disable the VLAN containment for NTP

To enable or disable the VLAN containment for NTP, use the access-control vlan command. To
remove the specified NTP VLAN configuration, use the no form of this command.

NOTE
The management interface is not part of any VLAN. When configuring the VLAN containment for NTP, it
will not use the management interface to send or receive the NTP packets.

Brocade(config-ntp)# access-control vlan 100

Syntax: [no] access-control vlan vlan-id

The vlan-id parameter specifies the VLAN ID number.

Configuring the NTP client

To configure the device in client mode and specify the NTP servers to synchronize the system clock,
use the server command. A maximum 8 NTP servers can be configured. To remove the NTP server
configuration, use the no form of this command.
By default, no servers are configured.

Brocade(config-ntp)#server 1.2.3.4 key 1234

Syntax: [no] server { ipv4-address | ipv6-address } [ version num ] [ key key-id ] [ minpoll interval ] [
maxpoll interval ] [ burst ]
The ipv4-address or ipv6-address parameter is the IP address of the server providing the clock
synchronization.
The version num option defines the Network Time Protocol (NTP) version number. Valid values are 3 or
4. If the num option is not specified, the default is 4.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 45

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring the master

The key key-id option defines the authentication key. By default, no authentication key is configured.
The minpoll interval option is the shortest polling interval. The range is from 4 through 17. Default is 6.
The interval argument is power of 2 (4=16s, 5=32s, 6=64s, 7=128s, 8=256s, 9=512s, and so on).
The maxpoll interval option is the longest polling interval. The range is 4 through 17. Default is 10. The
interval argument is calculated by the power of 2 (4=16s, 5=32s, 6=64s, 7=128s, 8=256s, 9=512s, and
so on).
The burst option sends a burst of packets to the server at each polling interval.

Configuring the master

To configure the FastIron device as a Network Time Protocol (NTP) master clock to which peers
synchronize themselves when an external NTP source is not available, use the master command. The
master clock is disabled by default. To disable the master clock function, use the no form of this
command.

NOTE
This command is not effective, if the NTP is enabled in client-only mode.

Brocade(config-ntp)# master stratum 5

Syntax: [no] master [ stratum number ]

The number variable is a number from 2 to 15. It indicates the NTP stratum number that the system
will claim.

Configuring the NTP peer

To configure the software clock to synchronize a peer or to be synchronized by a peer, use the peer
command. A maximum of 8 NTP peers can be configured. To disable this capability, use the no form
of this command.
This peer command is not effective if the NTP is enabled in client-only mode.

NOTE
If the peer is a member of symmetric passive association, then configuring the peer command will fail.

Brocade(config-ntp)# peer 1.2.3.4 key 1234

Syntax: [no] peer { ipv4-address | ipv6-address } [ version num [ key key-id ] [ minpoll interval ] [
maxpoll interval ] [ burst ]
The ipv4-address or ipv6-address parameter is the IP address of the peer providing the clock
synchronization.
The version num option defines the Network Time Protocol (NTP) version number. Valid values are 3
and 4. If this option is not specified, then the default is 4.
The key key-id option defines the authentication key. By default, no authentication key is configured.
The minpoll interval option is the shortest polling interval. The range is from 4 through 17. Default is 6.
The interval argument is power of 2 (4=16s, 5=32s, 6=64s, 7=128s, 8=256s, 9=512s, and so on).
The maxpoll interval option is the longest polling interval. The range is 4 through 17. Default is 10. The
interval argument is calculated by the power of 2 (4=16s, 5=32s, 6=64s, 7=128s, 8=256s, 9=512s, and
so on).

46 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring NTP on an interface

The burst option sends a burst of packets to the peer at each polling interval.

NOTE
When the NTP server/peer is configured, the master command is not configured; on configuring the
clock set command the system clock is not synchronized. When the master command is configured,
on configuring the clock set command the system clock is synchronized and the reference time will be
the local clock.
To have active peers at both the ends, you need to disable NTP, configure the peers and enable the
NTP using the no disable command.

Configuring NTP on an interface

To configure the NTP interface context, use the ntp-interface command. The broadcast server or client
is configured on selected interfaces. To remove the NTP broadcast configurations on the specified
interface, use the no form of this command.

NOTE
The ntp-interface command is a mode change command, and will not be included in to the show run
output unless there is configuration below that interface.

Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface ethernet 2/13

Brocade(config-ntp-if-e1000-2/13)# exit
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface management 1
Brocade(config-ntp-mgmt-1)# exit
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface ve 100
Brocade(config-ntp-ve-100)#

Syntax: [no] ntp-interface { management 1 | ethernet port | ve id }

The management 1 parameter is the management port 1.
The ethernet port parameter specifies the ethernet port number. Specify the port parameter in the
format stack-unit/slotnum/portnum.
The ve id parameter specifies the virtual port number.

Configuring the broadcast client

To configure a device to receive Network Time Protocol (NTP) broadcast messages on a specified
interface, use the broadcast client command. NTP broadcast client can be enabled on maximum of 16
ethernet interfaces. If the interface is operationally down or NTP is disabled, then the NTP broadcast
server packets are not received. To disable this capability, use the no form of this command.

Brocade(config-ntp mgmt-1)# broadcast client

Syntax: [no] broadcast client

Configuring the broadcast destination

To configure the options for broadcasting Network Time Protocol (NTP) traffic, use the ntp broadcast
destination command. The NTP broadcast server can be enabled on maximum 16 ethernet interfaces
and four subnet addresses per interface. If the interface is operationally down or there is no ip address
configured for the subnet address, then the NTP broadcast server packets are not sent. To disable this
capability, use the no form of this command.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 47

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying NTP status

By default, the broadcast mode is not enabled.

NOTE
This command is not effective, if the NTP server is disabled.

Brocade(config)#int m1
Brocade(config-if-mgmt-1)#ip address 10.20.99.173/24
Brocade(config-if-mgmt-1)#ntp
Brocade(config-ntp)#ntp-interface m1
Brocade(config-ntp -mgmt-1)# broadcast destination 10.20.99.0 key 2

Syntax: [no] broadcast destination ip-address [ key key-id ] [ version num ]

The ip-address parameter is the IPv4 subnet address of the device to send NTP broadcast messages
to.
The key key-id option defines the authentication key. By default, no authentication key is configured.
The version num option defines the Network Time Protocol (NTP) version number. If this option is not
specified, then the default value is 4.

Displaying NTP status

Use the show ntp status command to display the NTP status.

Brocade#show ntp status

Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference clock is 10.20.99.174
precision is 2**-16
reference time is D281713A.80000000 (03:21:29.3653007907 GMT+00 Thu Dec 01 2011)
clock offset is -2.3307 msec, root delay is 24.6646 msec
root dispersion is 130.3376 msec, peer dispersion is 84.3335 msec
system poll interval is 64, last clock update was 26 sec ago
NTP server mode is enabled, NTP client mode is enabled
NTP master mode is disabled, NTP master stratum is 8
NTP is not in panic mode

The following table provides descriptions of the show ntp status command output.

TABLE 4 NTP status command output descriptions

Field Description

synchronized Indicates the system clock is synchronized to NTP server or peer.

stratum Indicates the stratum number that this system is operating. Range 2..15.

reference IPv4 address or first 32 bits of the MD5 hash of the IPv6 address of the peer to which clock
is synchronized.

precision Precision of the clock of this system in Hz.

reference time Reference time stamp.

clock offset Offset of clock (in milliseconds) to synchronized peer.

root delay Total delay (in milliseconds) along path to root clock.

root dispersion Dispersion of root path.

48 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying NTP associations

TABLE 4 NTP status command output descriptions (Continued)

Field Description

peer dispersion Dispersion of root path.

system poll interval Poll interval of the local system.

last update Time the router last updated its NTP information.

server mode Status of the NTP server mode for this device.

client mode Status of the NTP client mode for this device.

master Status of the master mode.

master stratum Stratum number that will be used by this device when master is enabled and no upstream
time servers are accessible.

panic mode Status of the panic mode.

Displaying NTP associations

Use the show ntp associations command to display detailed association information of the NTP
server or peers.

Brocade# show ntp associations

address ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp
*~172.19.69.1 172.24.114.33 3 25 64 3 2.89 0.234 39377
~2001:235::234
INIT 16 - 64 0 0.00 0.000 15937
* synced, # selected, + candidate, - outlayer, x falseticker, ~ configured

The following table provides descriptions of the show ntp associations command output.

TABLE 5 NTP associations command output descriptions

Field Description

* The peer has been declared the system peer and lends its variables to the system variables.

# This peer is a survivor in the selection algorithm.

+ This peer is a candidate in the combine algorithm.

- This peer is discarded as outlier in the clustering algorithm.

x This peer is discarded as 'falseticker' in the selection algorithm.

~ The server or peer is statically configured.

address IPv4 or IPv6 address of the peer.

ref clock IPv4 address or first 32 bits of the MD5 hash of the IPv6 address of the peer to which clock is
synchronized.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 49

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying NTP associations details

TABLE 5 NTP associations command output descriptions (Continued)

Field Description

St Stratum setting for the peer.

when Time, in seconds, since last NTP packet was received from peer.

poll Polling interval (seconds).

reach Peer reachability (bit string, in octal).

delay Round-trip delay to peer, in milliseconds.

offset Relative time difference between a peer clock and a local clock, in milliseconds.

disp Dispersion.

Displaying NTP associations details

Use the show ntp associations detail command to display all the NTP servers and peers association
information.

Brocade# show ntp association detail

2001:1:99:30::1 configured server, sys peer, stratum 3
ref ID 204.235.61.9, time d288dc3b.f2a17891 (10:23:55.4070668433 Pacific Tue Dec 06
2011)
our mode client, peer mode server, our poll intvl 10, peer poll intvl 10,
root delay 0.08551025 msec, root disp 0.09309387, reach 17, root dist 0.17668502
delay 0.69961487 msec, offset -13.49459670 msec, dispersion 17.31550718,
precision 2**-16, version 4
org time d288df70.a91de561 (10:37:36.2837308769 Pacific Tue Dec 06 2011)
rcv time d288df70.a0c8d19e (10:37:36.2697515422 Pacific Tue Dec 06 2011)
xmt time d288df70.a086e4de (10:37:36.2693194974 Pacific Tue Dec 06 2011)
filter delay 1.7736 0.9933 0.8873 0.6699 0.7709 0.7712 0.7734 6.7741
filter offset -17.9936 33.0014 -13.6604 -13.4494 -14.4481 -16.4453 -18.4423 -22.0025
filter disp 15.6660 0.0030 17.7730 17.7700 17.6670 17.6640 17.6610 16.6635
filter epoch 55824 56866 55686 55688 55690 55692 55694 55759

Use the show ntp associations detail command with the appropriate parameters to display the NTP
servers and peers association information for a specific IP address.

Brocade# show ntp association detail 1.99.40.1

1.99.40.1 configured server, candidate, stratum 3
ref ID 216.45.57.38, time d288de7d.690ca5c7 (10:33:33.1762436551 Pacific Tue Dec 06
2011)
our mode client, peer mode server, our poll intvl 10, peer poll intvl 10,
root delay 0.02618408 msec, root disp 0.10108947, reach 3, root dist 0.23610585
delay 0.92163588 msec, offset 60.77749188 msec, dispersion 70.33842156,
precision 2**-16, version 4
org time d288defa.b260a71f (10:35:38.2992678687 Pacific Tue Dec 06 2011)
rcv time d288defa.a2efbd41 (10:35:38.2733620545 Pacific Tue Dec 06 2011)
xmt time d288defa.a2ae54f8 (10:35:38.2729334008 Pacific Tue Dec 06 2011)
filter delay 0.000 6.7770 6.7773 6.7711 6.7720 6.7736 6.7700 0.9921
filter offset 0.000 19.0047 19.1145 19.2245 19.3313 17.4410 15.4463 60.7777
filter disp 16000.000 16.0005 15.9975 15.9945 15.9915 15.8885 15.8855 0.0030
filter epoch 55683 55683 55685 55687 55689 55691 55693 56748

Syntax: show ntp association detail { ipv4-address | ipv6-address }

The following table provides descriptions of the show ntp associations detail command output.

50 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic Software Features

TABLE 6 NTP associations detail command output descriptions

Field Description

server Indicates server is statically configured.

symmetric active peer Indicates peer is statically configured.

symmetric passive peer Indicates peer is dynamically configured.

sys_peer This peer is the system peer

candidate This peer is chosen as candidate in the combine algorithm.

reject This peer is rejected by the selection algorithm

falsetick This peer is dropped as falseticker by the selection algorithm

outlyer This peer is dropped as outlyer by the clustering algorithm

Stratum Stratum number

ref ID IPv4 address or hash of IPv6 address of the upstream time server to which the peer is
synchronized.

Time Last time stamp that the peer received from its master.

our mode This system's mode relative to peer (active/passive/client/server/bdcast/bdcast client).

peer mode Mode of peer relative to this system.

our poll intvl This system's poll interval to this peer.

peer poll intvl Poll interval of peer to this system

root delay The delay along path to root (the final stratum 1 time source).

root disp Dispersion of path to root.

reach peer The peer reachability (bit string in octal).

Delay Round-trip delay to peer.

offset Offset of a peer clock relative to this clock.

Dispersion Dispersion of a peer clock.

precision Precision of a peer clock.

version Peer NTP version number.

org time Originate time stamp of the last packet.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 51

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuration Examples

TABLE 6 NTP associations detail command output descriptions (Continued)

Field Description

rcv time Receive time stamp of the last packet.

xmt time Transmit time stamp of the last packet.

filter delay Round-trip delay in milliseconds of last 8 samples.

filter offset Clock offset in milliseconds of last 8 samples.

filter error Approximate error of last 8 samples.

Configuration Examples
The following sections list configuration examples to configure the Brocade device.

NTP server and client mode configuration

Sample CLI commands to configure the Brocade device in NTP server and client modes.

Brocade(config-ntp)# server 10.1.2.3 minpoll 5 maxpoll 10

Brocade(config-ntp)# server 11::1/64
Brocade(config-ntp)# peer 10.100.12.18
Brocade(config-ntp)# peer 10.100.12.20
Brocade(config-ntp)# peer 10.100.12.67
Brocade(config-ntp)# peer 10.100.12.83

NTP client mode configuration

Sample CLI commands to configure the Brocade device in NTP client mode.

Brocade(config-ntp)# server 10.1.2.3 minpoll 5 maxpoll 10

Brocade(config-ntp)# server 11::1/24
Brocade(config-ntp)# peer 10.100.12.83
Brocade(config-ntp)# disable serve

NTP strict authentication configuration

Sample CLI commands to configure the Brocade device in strict authentication mode.

Brocade(config-ntp)# authenticate
Brocade(config-ntp)# authentication-key key-id 1 md5 key123
Brocade(config-ntp)# server 10.1.2.4 key 1

NTP loose authentication configuration

Sample CLI commands to configure the Brocade device in loose authentication mode. This allows
some of the servers or clients to use the authentication keys.

Brocade(config-ntp)# authentication-key key-id 1 md5 key123

Brocade(config-ntp)# server 10.1.2.4 key 1
Brocade(config-ntp)# server 10.1.2.7

52 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 NTP interface context for the broadcast server or client mode

NTP interface context for the broadcast server or client mode

Sample CLI commands to enter the NTP interface context.

Brocade(config)#int management 1
Brocade(config-if-mgmt-1)#ip address 10.20.99.173/24
Brocade(config-if-mgmt-1)#ntp
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface management 1
Brocade(config-ntp-mgmt-1)# broadcast destination 10.23.45.128
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface ethernet 1/3
Brocade(config-ntp-if-e1000-1/3)# broadcast destination 10.1.1.0 key 1
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface ve 100
Brocade(config-ntp-ve-100)# broadcast destination 10.2.2.0 key 23

NTP broadcast client configuration

Sample CLI commands to configure the NTP broadcast client.

Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface management 1

Brocade(config-ntp-mgmt-1)# broadcast client
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface ethernet 1/5
Brocade(config-ntp-if-e1000-1/5)# broadcast client
Brocade(config-ntp)# ntp-interface ve 100
Brocade(config-ntp-ve-100)# broadcast client

Basic port parameter configuration

The procedures in this section describe how to configure the port parameters shown in Basic Software
Features on page 29.
All Brocade ports are pre-configured with default values that allow the device to be fully operational at
initial startup without any additional configuration. However, in some cases, changes to the port
parameters may be necessary to adjust to attached devices or other network requirements.

Specifying a port address

You can specify a port address for an uplink (data) port, stacking port, or a management port.

ICX 6430 and ICX 6450

Specifying a data port

The port address format is is stack unit/slot/port, where:

• stack unit --Specifies the stack unit ID. For the ICX 6430, range is from 1 to 4. For the ICX 6450,
range is from 1 to 8. If the device is not part of a stack, the stack unit ID is 1.
• slot --Specifies the slot number. Can be 1 or 2.
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Range is from 1 to 24 (24-port models) or 1 to 48 (48-port
models).
This example shows how to specify port 2 in slot 1 of a device that is not part of a stack:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 1/1/2

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 53

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ICX 6610

Specifying a stacking port

The port address format is is stack unit/slot/port, where:

• stack unit --Specifies the stack unit ID. For the ICX 6430, range is from 1 to 4. For the ICX 6450,
range is from 1 to 8.
• slot --Specifies the slot number. Stacking ports are in slot 2.
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Stacking ports are 1, 2, 3, and 4.
This example shows how to specify stacking port 3 in slot 2 of unit 3 in a stack:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 3/2/3

Specifying a management port

The management port number is always 1. This example shows how to specify the management port:

Brocade (config) # interface management 1

ICX 6610

Specifying a data port

The port address format is is stack unit/slot/port, where:

• stack unit --Specifies the stack unit ID. Range is from 1 to 8. If the device is not part of a stack, the
stack unit ID is 1.
• slot --Specifies the slot number. Can be 1 or 3.
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Range is from 1 to 24 (24-port models) or 1 to 48 (48-
port models).
This example shows how to specify port 2 in slot 1 of a device that is not part of a stack:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 1/1/2

Specifying a stacking port

The port address format is is stack unit/slot/port, where:

• stack unit --Specifies the stack unit ID. Range is from 1 to 8.
• slot --Specifies the slot number. Stacking ports are in slot 2.
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Dedicated stacking ports are 1, 2, 6, and 7.
This example shows how to specify stacking port 2 in slot 2 of unit 3 in a stack:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 3/2/2

Specifying a management port

The management port number is always 1. This example shows how to specify the management port:

Brocade (config) # interface management 1

54 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FCX

FCX

Specifying a data port

The port address format is stack unit/slot/port, where:

• stack unit --Specifies the stack unit ID. Range is from 1 to 8. If the device is not part of a stack, the
stack unit ID is 1.
• slot --Specifies the slot number. Can be 1 or 3.
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Range is from 1 to 24 (24-port models) or 1 to 48 (48-port
models).
This example shows how to specify port 2 in slot 1 of a device that is not part of a stack:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 1/1/2

Specifying a stacking port

The port address format is stack unit/slot/port, where:

• stack unit --Specifies the stack unit ID. Range is from 1 to 8.
• slot --Specifies the slot number. Default stacking ports are in slot 2 (FCX S/S-F) and slot3 (FCX E/I).
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Default stacking ports in slot 2 and slot 3 are ports 1 and
2.
This example shows how to specify port 2 in slot 2 of unit 3 in a stack:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 3/2/2

Specifying a management port

The management port number is always 1. This example shows how to specify the management port:

Brocade (config) # interface management 1

FSX

Specifying a data port

The port address format is slot/port, where:

• slot --Specifies the interface slot number. Range is from 1 to 8 (FSX 800) or 1 to 16 (FSX 1600).
• port --Specifies the port number in the slot. Range is from 1 to 48 depending on the interface module.
This example shows how to specify port 2 in slot 1:

Brocade (config) # interface ethernet 1/2

Specifying a management port

The management port number is always 1. This example shows how to specify the management port:

Brocade (config) # interface management 1

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 55

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Assigning port names

NOTE
Stacking is not supported on FSX devices.

Assigning port names

You can assign text strings as port names, which help you identify ports with meaningful names. You
can assign port names to individual ports or to a group of ports. You can assign a port name to
physical ports, virtual interfaces, and loopback interfaces.

Assigning a port name

To assign a name to a port, enter commands such as the following:

device(config)# interface ethernet 2

device(config-if-e1000-2)# port-name Marsha

Syntax: port-name text

The text parameter is an alphanumeric string. The name can be up to 255 characters long. The name
can contain blanks. You do not need to use quotation marks around the string, even when it contains
blanks. The port name can contain special characers as well, but the percentage character (%), if it
appears at the end of the port name, is dropped.

Assigning the same name to multiple ports

To assign a name to a range of ports, enter commands such as the following:

Brocade (config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1 to 1/1/10

Brocade (config-mif-1/1/1-1/1/10)# port-name connected-to-the nearest device

Syntax: [no] port-name text

To remove the assigned port name, use no form of the command.
The text parameter is an alphanumeric string, up to 255 characters long. The name can contain
blanks. You do not need to use quotation marks around the string, even when it contains blanks.
You can also specify the individual ports, separated by space.
To assign a name to multiple specific ports, enter commands such as the following:

Brocade (config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1 ethernet 1/1/5 ethernet 1/1/7

Brocade (config-mif-1/1/1, 1/1/5, 1/1/7)# port-name connected-to-the nearest device

Displaying the port name for an interface

You can use the show interface brief command to display the name assigned to the port. If any of
the ports have long port names, they are truncated. To show full port names, use the show interfaces
brief wide command.

Brocade# show interfaces brief

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pvid Pri
MAC
Name
1/1/23 Up Forward Full 1G None No 1 0 748e.f82d.7a16 connected-

56 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic Software Features

1/1/47 Up Forward Full 1G None No 1 0 748e.f82d.7a2e

mgmt1 Up None Full 1G None No None 0 748e.f82d.7a00

In this output, the port name for inteface 1/1/23 is truncated.

Use the show interface brief wide command to avoid truncating long port names.
To display the complete port name for an interface, enter the following command.

Brocade# show interface brief wide

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pvid Pri
MAC Name
1/1/23 Up Forward Full 1G None No 1 0 748e.f82d.7a16 connected-
to-the nearest device
1/1/47 Up Forward Full 1G None No 1 0 748e.f82d.7a2e
mgmt1 Up None Full 1G None No None 0 748e.f82d.7a00

Syntax: show interface brief [ wide ] [ ethernet stack-unit/slot/port | loopback port | management
port | slot port | tunnel port | ve port ]
The ethernet stack-unit/slot/port parameter specifies the Ethernet port for which you want to display the
interface information.
The loopback option specifies the loopback port for which you want to display the interface information.
The management option specifies the management port for which you want to display the interface
information.
The slot option specifies all the ports in a slot for which you want to display the interface information.
The tunnel option specifies the tunnel port for which you want to display the interface information.
The ve option specifies the virtual routing (VE) port for which you want to display the interface
information.
The following table describes the output parameters of the show interface brief wide command.

TABLE 7 Output parameters of the show interface brief wide command

Field Description

Port Specifies the port number.

Link Specifies the link state.

Port-State Specifies the current port state.

Speed Specifies the link speed.

Tag Specifies if the port is tagged or not.

Pvid Specifies the port VLAN ID.

Pri Specifies the priority.

MAC Specifies the MAC address.

Name Specifies the port name.

To display the complete port name for an Ethernet interface, enter a command such as the following.

Brocade# show interface brief wide ethernet 1/1/23

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 57

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Port speed and duplex mode modification

PPort Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pvid Pri MAC Name
1/1/23 Up Forward Full 1G None No 1 0 748e.f82d.7a16
connected- to-FCX

Syntax: show interface brief wide ethernet stack-unit/slot/port

For more information about field descriptions of the command output, refer Displaying the port name
for an interface.

Port speed and duplex mode modification

The Gigabit Ethernet copper ports are designed to auto-sense and auto-negotiate the speed and
duplex mode of the connected device. If the attached device does not support this operation, you can
manually enter the port speed to operate at either 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps. This configuration is
referred to as force mode. The default and recommended setting is 10/100/1000 auto-sense. Port
duplex mode and port speed are modified by the same command

NOTE
You can modify the port speed of copper ports only; this feature does not apply to fiber ports.

NOTE
For optimal link operation, copper ports on devices that do not support 803.3u must be configured with
like parameters, such as speed (10,100,1000), duplex (half, full), MDI/MDIX, and Flow Control.

Port speed and duplex mode configuration syntax

The following commands change the port speed of copper interface 8 on a FastIron device from the
default of 10/100/1000 auto-sense, to 100 Mbps operating in full-duplex mode.

device(config)# interface ethernet 8

device(config-if-e1000-8)# speed-duplex 100-full

Syntax: speed-duplex value

The value variable can be one of the following values:
• 10-full - 10 Mbps, full duplex
• 10-half - 10 Mbps, half duplex
• 100-full - 100 Mbps, full duplex
• 100-half - 100 Mbps, half duplex
• 1000-full-master - 1 Gbps, full duplex master
• 1000-full-slave - 1 Gbps, full duplex slave
• auto - auto-negotiation
The default is auto (auto-negotiation).
Use the no form of the command to restore the default.

NOTE
On Brocade ICX 7450 and Brocade ICX 7250-24G, the command options 10-half and 100-half are
not supported on 1G fiber ports with mini-GBIC (SFPs) for copper.

58 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling auto-negotiation maximum port speed advertisement and down-shift

NOTE
On FastIron devices, when setting the speed and duplex-mode of an interface to 1000-full, configure
one side of the link as master (1000-full-master) and the other side as slave (1000-full-slave).

NOTE
On Brocade ICX 6610 and ICX 6650 devices, after you remove the 10 Gbps speed from the running
configuration, plugging in a 1Gbps optic SFP transceiver into a 10 Gbps port causes the software to fail
to revert the ports back from the default 10Gbps mode to the 1 Gbps speed. Remove the 1Gbps SFP
transceiver and plug in the 10Gbps optic SFP+transceiver so that the devices go into the default 10
Gbps mode.

NOTE
When you use fixed speed and duplex configuration, you should use the non-auto MDI-MDIX
configuration.

Configuration considerations for port speed and duplex mode

The following considerations apply to the port speed and duplex mode configuration:
• When a local partner issues a speed-duplex 100-full or speed-duplex 10-full command, if the
remote partner does not issue the same commands, it becomes 100-half or 10-half, and may
receive collision errors. The local partner may receive In Errors such as CRC, fragments, or bad
packets.
• When a local partner issues a speed-duplex 100-full or speed-duplex 10-full command, if the
remote partner issues the same command, the port may or may not come up because both sides
enter the force mode and want to force the partner to accept these conditions. If both sides come up,
they may not receive any In or Out Errors.
• When both local and remote partners have a force mode configuration such as 100-full/half or 10-
full/half, for example, ICX6610-24F 1/1/1 (local link 100-full)<->(100-full remote link) FCX 1/1/1, if
another force mode such as 10-full is entered in a local or remote partner, the remote or local partner
link may or may not come up. This is an IEEE force mode standard. To resolve the force mode
changing, it is recommended that you first change to auto mode on one side, before switching to
another force mode configuration.

Enabling auto-negotiation maximum port speed advertisement and

down-shift

NOTE
For optimal link operation, link ports on devices that do not support 802.3u must be configured with like
parameters, such as speed (10,100,1000), duplex (half, full), MDI/MDIX, and Flow Control.
Maximum Port speed advertisement is an enhancement to the auto-negotiation feature, a mechanism
for accommodating multi-speed network devices by automatically configuring the highest performance
mode of inter-operation between two connected devices.
Port speed down-shift enables Gbps copper ports on the Brocade device to establish a link at 1000.
Mbps over a 4-pair wire when possible, or to down-shift to 100 Mbps if the medium is a 2-pair wire.
Maximum port speed advertisement enables you to configure an auto-negotiation maximum speed that
Gbps copper ports on the Brocade device will advertise to the connected device. You can configure a

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 59

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maximum port speed advertisement and down-shift application notes

port to advertise a maximum speed of either 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps. When the maximum port speed
advertisement feature is configured on a port that is operating at 100 Mbps maximum speed, the port
will advertise 10/100 Mbps capability to the connected device. Similarly, if a port is configured at 10
Mbps maximum speed, the port will advertise 10 Mbps capability to the connected device.
The maximum port speed and down-shift advertisement features operate dynamically at the physical
link layer between two connected network devices. They examine the cabling conditions and the
physical capabilities of the remote link, then configure the speed of the link segment according to the
highest physical-layer technology that both devices can accommodate.
The maximum port speed and down-shift advertisement features operate independently of logical
trunk group configurations. Although Brocade recommends that you use the same cable types and
auto-negotiation configuration on all members of a trunk group, you could utilize the auto-negotiation
features conducive to your cabling environment. For example, in certain circumstances, you could
configure each port in a trunk group to have its own auto-negotiation maximum port speed
advertisement or port speed down-shift configuration.

Maximum port speed advertisement and down-shift application notes

• The maximum port speed advertisement works only when auto-negotiation is enabled (CLI
command speed-duplex auto ). If auto-negotiation is OFF, the device will reject the maximum port
speed advertisement configuration.
• When the maximum port speed advertisement is enabled on a port, the device will reject any
configuration attempts to set the port to a forced speed mode (100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps).
• When port speed down-shift or maximum port speed advertisement is enabled on a port, the device
will reject any configuration attempts to set the port to a forced speed mode (100 Mbps or 1000
Mbps).

Configuring maximum port speed advertisement

NOTE
This is not supported in ICX devices.

To configure a maximum port speed advertisement of 10 Mbps on a port that has auto-negotiation
enabled, enter a command such as the following at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)
# link-config gig copper autoneg-control 10m ethernet 1

To configure a maximum port speed advertisement of 100 Mbps on a port that has auto-negotiation
enabled, enter the following command at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)
# link-config gig copper autoneg-control 100m ethernet 2

Syntax: [no] link-config gig copperautoneg-control [ 10m | 100m ] ethernet port [ ethernet port ]
You can enable maximum port speed advertisement on one or two ports at a time.
To disable maximum port speed advertisement after it has been enabled, enter the no form of the
command.

60 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring port speed down-shift and auto-negotiation for a range of ports

Configuring port speed down-shift and auto-negotiation for a range of

ports
Port speed down-shift and auto-negotiation can be configured for an entire range of ports with a single
command.

For example, to configure down-shift on ports 0/1/1 to 0/1/10 and 0/1/15 to 0/1/20 on the device, enter
the following.
Brocade(config)# link-config gig copper autoneg-control down-shift ethernet 0/1/1
to 0/1/10 ethernet 0/1/15 to 0/1/20

To configure down-shift on ports 5 to 13 and 17 to 19 on a compact switch, enter the following.

Brocade(config)# link-config gig copper autoneg-control down-shift ethernet 5 to 13
ethernet 17 to 19

Syntax: [no] link-config gig copperautoneg-control [ down-shift | 100m-auto | 10m-auto ] ethernet

port-list

NOTE
The <port-list> variable represents the list of ports to which the command will be applied.

For <port-list>, specify the ports in one of the following formats:

• FWS and FCX stackable switches – <stack-unit/slotnum/portnum>
• FSX 800 and FSX 1600 chassis devices – <slotnum/portnum>
• FESX compact switches – <portnum>
You can list all of the ports individually, use the keyword to to specify ranges of ports, or a combination
of both. To apply the configuration to all ports on the device, use the keyword all instead of listing the
ports individually.
The output from the show run command for this configuration will resemble the following.
Brocade# show run
Current configuration:
!
ver 04.0.00b64T7el
!
module 1 fgs-48-port-management-module
module 2 fgs-cx4-2-port-10g-module
!
link-config gig copper autoneg-control down-shift ethernet 0/1/1 to 0/1/10
ethernet 0/1/15 to 0/1/20
!
!
ip address 10.44.9.11 255.255.255.0
ip default-gateway 10.44.9.1
!
end

To disable selective auto-negotiation of 100m-auto on ports 0/1/21 to 0/1/25 and 0/1/30, enter the
following.
Brocade(config)# no link-config gig copper autoneg-control 100m-auto ethernet
0/1/21 to 0/1/25 ethernet 0/1/30

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 61

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling port speed down-shift

Enabling port speed down-shift

Enable port speed down-shift on a port that has auto-negotiation enabled.
1. At the Global CONFIG level of the CLI, enter the following:
Brocade(config)# link-config gig copper autoneg-control down-shift ethernet 1
ethernet 2

The above command configures Gbps copper ports 1 and 2 to establish a link at 1000 Mbps over a
4-pair wire when possible, or to down-shift (reduce the speed) to 100 Mbps when the medium is a
2-pair wire.
Syntax: [no] link-config gig copperautoneg-control down-shift ethernet port [ ethernet port ]
to port
2. Specify the port variable in one of the following formats:
• FWS and FCX stackable switches – <stack-unit/slotnum/portnum>
• FSX 800 and FSX 1600 chassis devices – <slotnum/portnum>
• FESX compact switches – <portnum>

NOTE
To list all of the ports individually, use the keyword in order to specify ranges of ports, or a
combination of both. You can enable port speed down-shift on one or two ports at a time.
3. To disable port speed down-shift, enter the no form of the command.

Force mode configuration

You can manually configure a 10/100 Mbps port to accept either full-duplex (bi-directional) or half-
duplex (uni-directional) traffic.

NOTE
You can modify the port duplex mode of copper ports only. This feature does not apply to fiber ports.
Port duplex mode and port speed are modified by the same command.

Force mode configuration syntax

To change the port speed of interface 8 from the default of 10/100/1000 auto-sense to 10 Mbps
operating at full-duplex, enter the following.

device(config)
# interface ethernet 8
device(config-if-e1000-8)# speed-duplex 10-full

Syntax: speed-duplex value

The value can be one of the following:
• 10-full
• 10-half
• 100-full
• 100-half
• auto (default)

62 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MDI and MDIX configuration

NOTE
On Brocade ICX 7450 and Brocade ICX 7250-24G, the command options 10-half and 100-half are not
supported on 1G fiber ports with mini-GBIC (SFPs) for copper.

Force Mode Configuration Considerations

The following considerations apply to the force mode configuration.

• When a local partner issues a speed-dup 100-full or speed-dup 10-full command, if the remote
partner does not issue the same commands it becomes 100-half or 10-half, and may receive collision
errors. The local partner may receive InErrors such as CRC, Fragment or Bad packets.
• When a local partner issues a speed-dup 100-full or speed-dup 10-full command, if the remote
partner issues the same command, the port may or may not come up, since both sides enter the
force mode and want to force the partner to accept these conditions. If both sides come up, they may
not receive any In or Out Errors.
• When a local partner is a force mode configuration such as 100-full/half or 10-full-half and the remote
partner is also a force mode configuration, for example, ICX6610-24F 1/1/1 (local link 100-full)<-
>(100-full remote link) FCX 1/1/1, if another force mode in a local or remote partner such as 10-full is
entered, the remote or local partner link may or may not come up. This is an IEEE force mode
standard. To resolve force mode changing, it is recommended that you change to auto mode first on
one side before switching to another force mode configuration.

MDI and MDIX configuration

Brocade devices support automatic Media Dependent Interface (MDI) and Media Dependent Interface
Crossover (MDIX) detection on all Gbps Ethernet Copper ports.
MDI/MDIX is a type of Ethernet port connection using twisted pair cabling. The standard wiring for end
stations is MDI, whereas the standard wiring for hubs and switches is MDIX. MDI ports connect to MDIX
ports using straight-through twisted pair cabling. For example, an end station connected to a hub or a
switch uses a straight-through cable. MDI-to-MDI and MDIX-to-MDIX connections use crossover twisted
pair cabling. So, two end stations connected to each other, or two hubs or switches connected to each
other, use crossover cable.
The auto MDI/MDIX detection feature can automatically correct errors in cable selection, making the
distinction between a straight-through cable and a crossover cable insignificant.

MDI and MDIX configuration notes

• This feature applies to copper ports only.
• The mdi-mdix mdi and mdi-mdix mdix commands work independently of auto-negotiation. Thus,
these commands work whether auto-negotiation is turned ON or OFF.

MDI and MDIX configuration syntax

The auto MDI/MDIX detection feature is enabled on all Gbps copper ports by default. For each port, you
can disable auto MDI/MDIX, designate the port as an MDI port, or designate the port as an MDIX port.
To turn off automatic MDI/MDIX detection and define a port as an MDI only port.

device(config-if-e1000-2)# mdi-mdix mdi

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 63

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Disabling or re-enabling a port

To turn off automatic MDI/MDIX detection and define a port as an MDIX only port.

device(config-if-e1000-2)# mdi-mdix mdix

To turn on automatic MDI/MDIX detection on a port that was previously set as an MDI or MDIX port.

device(config-if-e1000-2)# mdi-mdix auto

Syntax: mdi-mdix[ mdi | mdix | auto ]

After you enter the mdi-mdix command, the Brocade device resets the port and applies the change.
To display the MDI/MDIX settings, including the configured value and the actual resolved setting (for
mdi-mdix auto), enter the command show interface at any level of the CLI.

Disabling or re-enabling a port

A port can be made inactive (disable) or active (enable) by selecting the appropriate status option. The
default value for a port is enabled.
To disable port 8 of a Brocade device, enter the following.

device(config)
# interface ethernet 8
device(config-if-e1000-8)# disable

You also can disable or re-enable a virtual interface. To do so, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)
# interface ve v1
device(config-vif-1)# disable

Syntax: disable
To re-enable a virtual interface, enter the enable command at the Interface configuration level. For
example, to re-enable virtual interface v1, enter the enable command.

device(config-vif-1)# enable

Syntax: enable

Flow control configuration

Flow control (802.3x) is a QoS mechanism created to manage the flow of data between two full-duplex
Ethernet devices. Specifically, a device that is oversubscribed (is receiving more traffic than it can
handle) sends an 802.3x PAUSE frame to its link partner to temporarily reduce the amount of data the
link partner is transmitting. Without flow control, buffers would overflow, packets would be dropped,
and data retransmission would be required.
All FastIron devices support asymmetric flow control, meaning they can receive PAUSE frames but
cannot transmit them. In addition, FCX and ICX devices also support symmetric flow control, meaning
they can both receive and transmit 802.3x PAUSE frames. For details about symmetric flow control,
refer to Symmetric flow control on FCX and ICX devices on page 67.

64 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Flow control configuration notes

Flow control configuration notes

• Auto-negotiation of flow control is not supported on 10 Gbps and 40 Gbps ports, fiber ports, and
copper or fiber combination ports.
• When any of the flow control commands are applied to a port that is up, the port will be disabled and
re-enabled.
• For 10 Gbps and 40 Gbps ports, the show interface command with the appropriate parameters
shows whether Flow Control is enabled or disabled, depending on the configuration.
• When flow-control is enabled, the hardware can only advertise PAUSE frames. It does not advertise
Asym.
• On ICX 7750 devices the default packet-forwarding method is cut-through, in which port flow control
(IEEE 802.3x) is not supported but priority-based flow control (PFC) is supported. You can configure
the store-and- forward command in global configuration mode to enable the store-and-forward
method for packet-forwarding.

NOTE
You must save the configuration and reload for the change to take effect. See the description of the
store-and-forward command in the FastIron Command Reference for more information.

Disabling or re-enabling flow control

You can configure the Brocade device to operate with or without flow control. Flow control is enabled by
default globally and on all full-duplex ports. You can disable and re-enable flow control at the Global
CONFIG level for all ports. When flow control is enabled globally, you can disable and re-enable it on
individual ports.
To disable flow control, enter the no flow-control command.

device(config)# no flow-control

To turn the feature back on, enter the flow-control command.

device(config)# flow-control

Syntax: [no] flow-control

NOTE
For optimal link operation, link ports on devices that do not support 803.3u must be configured with like
parameters, such as speed (10,100,1000), duplex (half, full), MDI/MDIX, and Flow Control.

Negotiation and advertisement of flow control

By default, when flow control is enabled globally and auto-negotiation is ON, flow control is enabled and
advertised on 10/100/1000M ports. If auto-negotiation is OFF or if the port speed was configured
manually, then flow control is not negotiated with or advertised to the peer. For details about auto-
negotiation, refer to Port speed and duplex mode modification on page 58.
To disable flow control capability on a port, enter the following commands.

device(config)
# interface ethernet 0/1/21
device(config-if-e1000-0/1/21)# no flow-control

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 65

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying flow-control status

To enable flow control negotiation, enter the following commands.

device(config)# interface ethernet 0/1/21

device(config-if-e1000-0/1/21)# flow-control neg-on

Syntax: [no] flow-control [ neg-on ]

• flow-control [default] - Enable flow control, flow control negotiation, and advertise flow control
• no flow-control neg-on - Disable flow control negotiation
• no flow-control - Disable flow control, flow control negotiation, and advertising of flow control
After flow control negotiation is enabled using the flow-control neg-on command option, flow control
is enabled or disabled depending on the peer advertisement.
Commands may be entered in IF (single port) or MIF (multiple ports at once) mode.

device(config)# interface ethernet 0/1/21

device(config-if-e1000-0/1/21)# no flow-control

This command disables flow control on port 0/1/21.

device(config)# interface ethernet 0/1/11 to 0/1/15

device(config-mif-0/1/11-0/1/15)# no flow-control

This command disables flow control on ports 0/1/11 to 0/1/15.

Displaying flow-control status

The show interface command with the appropriate parameters displays configuration, operation, and
negotiation status where applicable.
For example, on a FastIron Stackable device, issuing the command for 10/100/1000M port 0/1/21
displays the following output.

device# show interfaces ethernet 0/1/21

GigabitEthernet0/1/21 is up, line protocol is up
Port up for 30 minutes 20 seconds
Hardware is GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0004.4014 (bia 0000.0004.4014)
Configured speed auto, actual 100Mbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual MDIX
Member of L2 VLAN ID 1, port is untagged, port state is LISTENING
BPDU Guard is disabled, Root Protect is disabled
STP configured to ON, priority is level0
Flow Control is config enabled, oper enabled, negotiation disabled

Mirror disabled, Monitor disabled

Not member of any active trunks
Not member of any configured trunks
No port name
Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) is 96 bit times
300 second input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
300 second output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
5 packets output, 320 bytes, 0 underruns
Transmitted 0 broadcasts, 5 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions

NOTE
The port up/down time is required only for physical ports and not for loopback/ ve/ tunnel ports.

66 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Symmetric flow control on FCX and ICX devices

Issuing the show interface command with the appropriate parameters on a FSX device displays the
following output:

device# show interface ethernet 18/1

GigabitEthernet18/1 is up, line protocol is up
Port up for 50 seconds
Hardware is GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0028.0600 (bia 0000.0028.0798)
Configured speed auto, actual 1Gbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual MDIX
Member of 4 L2 VLANs, port is tagged, port state is FORWARDING
BPDU guard is Disabled, ROOT protect is Disabled
Link Error Dampening is Disabled
STP configured to ON, priority is level0, flow control enabled
Flow Control is config enabled, oper enabled, negotiation disabled
mirror disabled, monitor disabled
Not member of any active trunks
Not member of any configured trunks
No port name
IPG MII 96 bits-time, IPG GMII 96 bits-time
IP MTU 1500 bytes, encapsulation ethernet
300 second input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
300 second output rate: 848 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
10251 packets output, 1526444 bytes, 0 underruns
Transmitted 1929 broadcasts, 8293 multicasts, 29 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions

The line highlighted in bold will resemble one of the following, depending on the configuration:
• If flow control negotiation is enabled (and a neighbor advertises "Pause-Not Capable"), the display
shows:

Flow Control is config enabled, oper disabled, negotiation enabled

• If flow control negotiation is enabled (and a neighbor advertises "Pause-Capable"), the display
shows:

Flow Control is config enabled, oper enabled, negotiation enabled

• If flow control is enabled, and flow control negotiation is disabled, the display shows:

Flow Control is config enabled, oper enabled, negotiation disabled

• If flow control is disabled, the display shows:

Flow control is config disabled, oper disabled

Symmetric flow control on FCX and ICX devices

In addition to asymmetric flow control, FCX and ICX devices support symmetric flow control, meaning
they can both receive and transmit 802.3x PAUSE frames.
By default on FCX devices, packets are dropped from the end of the queue at the egress port (tail drop
mode), when the maximum queue limit is reached. Conversely, when symmetric flow control is enabled,
packets are guaranteed delivery since they are managed at the ingress port and no packets are
dropped.
Symmetric flow control addresses the requirements of a lossless service class in an Internet Small
Computer System Interface (iSCSI) environment. It is supported on FCX and ICX standalone units as
well as on all FCX and ICX units in a traditional stack.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 67

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 About XON and XOFF thresholds

About XON and XOFF thresholds

An 802.3x PAUSE frame is generated when the buffer limit at the ingress port reaches or exceeds the
port’s upper watermark threshold (XOFF limit). The PAUSE frame requests that the sender stop
transmitting traffic for a period of time. The time allotted enables the egress and ingress queues to be
cleared. When the ingress queue falls below the port’s lower watermark threshold (XON limit), an
802.3x PAUSE frame with a quanta of 0 (zero) is generated. The PAUSE frame requests that the
sender resume sending traffic normally.
Each 1G, 10G, and 40G port is configured with a default total number of buffers as well as a default
XOFF and XON threshold. The defaults are different for 1G ports versus 10G or 40G ports. Also, the
default XOFF and XON thresholds are different for jumbo mode versus non-jumbo mode. The defaults
are shown in About XON and XOFF thresholds.

TABLE 8 XON and XOFF default thresholds

Limit when Jumbo disabled / % of buffer limit Limit when Jumbo enabled / % of buffer limit

1G ports

Total buffers 272 272

XOFF 240 / 91% 216 / 82%

XON 200 / 75% 184 / 70%

10G ports

Total buffers 416 416

XOFF 376 / 91% 336 / 82%

XON 312 / 75% 288 / 70%

40G ports

Total buffers 960 960

XOFF 832 (87%) 832 (87%)

XON 720 (75%) 720 (75%)

If necessary, you can change the total buffer limits and the XON and XOFF default thresholds. Refer
to Changing the total buffer limits on page 70 and Changing the XON and XOFF thresholds on page
69, respectively.

Configuration notes and feature limitations for symmetric flow control

Note the following configuration notes and feature limitations before enabling symmetric flow control.
• Symmetric flow control is supported on FCX and ICX devices only. It is not supported on other
FastIron models.
• Symmetric flow control is supported on all 1G,10G, and 40G data ports on FCX and ICX devices.
• Symmetric flow control is not supported on stacking ports or across units in a stack.

68 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling and disabling symmetric flow control

• To use this feature, 802.3x flow control must be enabled globally and per interface on FCX and ICX
devices. By default, 802.3x flow control is enabled, but can be disabled with the no flow-control
command.
• The following QoS features are not supported together with symmetric flow control:
‐ Dynamic buffer allocation (CLI commands qd-descriptor and qd-buffer )
‐ Buffer profiles (CLI command buffer-profile port-region )
‐ DSCP-based QoS (CLI command trust dscp )

NOTE
Although the above QoS features are not supported with symmetric flow control, the CLI will still accept
these commands. The last command issued will be the one placed into effect on the device. For
example, if trust dscp is enabled after symmetric-flow-control is enabled, symmetric flow control will
be disabled and trust dscp will be placed into effect. Make sure you do not enable incompatible QoS
features when symmetric flow control is enabled on the device.
• Head of Line (HOL) blocking may occur when symmetric flow control is enabled. This means that a
peer can stop transmitting traffic streams unrelated to the congestion stream.

Enabling and disabling symmetric flow control

By default, symmetric flow control is disabled and tail drop mode is enabled. However, because flow
control is enabled by default on all full-duplex ports, these ports will always honor received 802.3x
Pause frames, whether or not symmetric flow control is enabled.
To enable symmetric flow control globally on all full-duplex data ports of a standalone unit, enter the
symmetric-flow-control enable command.

device(config)# symmetric-flow-control enable

To enable symmetric flow control globally on all full-duplex data ports of a particular unit in a traditional
stack, enter the symmetric-flow-control enable command with the appropriate paramters.

device(config)# symmetric-flow-control enable unit 4

Syntax: [no] symmetric-flow-control enable [ unit stack-unit ]

The stack-unit parameter specifies one of the units in a stacking system. Master/Standby/Members are
examples of a stack-unit
To disable symmetric flow control once it has been enabled, use the no form of the command.

Changing the XON and XOFF thresholds

This section describes how to change the XON and XOFF thresholds described in About XON and
XOFF thresholds on page 68.
To change the thresholds for all 1G ports, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)# symmetric-flow-control set 1 xoff 91 xon 75

To change the thresholds for all 10G ports, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)# symmetric-flow-control set 2 xoff 91 xon 75

In the above configuration examples, when the XOFF limit of 91% is reached or exceeded, the Brocade
device will send PAUSE frames to the sender telling it to stop transmitting data temporarily. When the

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 69

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Changing the total buffer limits

XON limit of 75% is reached, the Brocade device will send PAUSE frames to the sender telling it to
resume sending data.
Syntax: symmetric-flow-control set { 1 | 2 } xoff % xon %
symmetric-flow-control set 1 sets the XOFF and XON limits for 1G ports.
symmetric-flow-control set 2 sets the XOFF and XON limits for 10G ports.
For xoff % , the % minimum value is 60% and the maximum value is 95%.
For xon % , the % minimum value is 50% and the maximum value is 90%.
Use the show symmetric command to view the default or configured XON and XOFF thresholds.
Refer to Displaying symmetric flow control status on page 70.

Changing the total buffer limits

This section describes how to change the total buffer limits described in About XON and XOFF
thresholds on page 68. You can change the limits for all 1G ports and for all 10G ports.
To change the total buffer limit for all 1G ports, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)# symmetric-flow-control set 1 buffers 320

Total buffers modified, 1G: 320, 10G: 128

To change the total buffer limit for all 10G ports, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)# symmetric-flow-control set 2 buffers 128

Total buffers modified, 1G: 320, 10G: 128

Syntax: symmetric-flow-control set { 1 | 2 } buffers value

symmetric-flow-control set 1 buffers value sets the total buffer limits for 1G ports. The default value is
272. You can specify a number from 64 - 320.
symmetric-flow-control set 2 buffers value sets the total buffer limits for 10G ports. The default value is
416. You can specify a number from 64 - 1632.
Use the show symmetric command to view the default or configured total buffer limits. Refer to
Displaying symmetric flow control status on page 70.

Displaying symmetric flow control status

The show symmetric-flow-control command displays the status of symmetric flow control as well as
the default or configured total buffer limits and XON and XOFF thresholds.

device(config)# show symmetric

Symmetric Flow Control Information:
-----------------------------------
Symmetric Flow Control is enabled on units: 2 3
Buffer parameters:
1G Ports:
Total Buffers : 272
XOFF Limit : 240(91%)
XON Limit : 200(75%)
10G Ports:
Total Buffers : 416
XOFF Limit : 376(91%)
XON Limit : 312(75%)

Syntax: show symmetric-flow-control

70 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PHY FIFO Rx and Tx depth configuration

PHY FIFO Rx and Tx depth configuration

PHY devices on Brocade devices contain transmit and receive synchronizing FIFOs to adjust for
frequency differences between clocks. The phy-fifo-depth command allows you to configure the depth
of the transmit and receive FIFOs. There are 4 settings (0-3) with 0 as the default. A higher setting
indicates a deeper FIFO.
The default setting works for most connections. However, if the clock differences are greater than the
default will handle, CRCs and errors will begin to appear on the ports. Raising the FIFO depth setting
will adjust for clock differences.
Brocade recommends that you disable the port before applying this command, and re-enable the port.
Applying the command while traffic is flowing through the port can cause CRC and other errors for any
packets that are actually passing through the PHY while the command is being applied.
Syntax: [no] phy-fifo-depth setting
• setting is a value between 0 and 3. (0 is the default.)
This command can be issued for a single port from the IF config mode or for multiple ports from the MIF
config mode.

NOTE
Higher settings give better tolerance for clock differences with the partner phy, but may marginally
increase latency as well.

Interpacket Gap (IPG) on a FastIron X Series switch

IPG is the time delay, in bit time, between frames transmitted by the device. You configure IPG at the
interface level. The command you use depends on the interface type on which IPG is being configured.
The default interpacket gap is 96 bits-time, which is 9.6 microseconds for 10 Mbps Ethernet, 960
nanoseconds for 100 Mbps Ethernet, 96 nanoseconds for 1 Gbps Ethernet, and 9.6 nanoseconds for 10
Gbps Ethernet.

IPG on a FastIron X series switch configuration notes

• The CLI syntax for IPG differs on FastIron X Series devices compared to FastIron Stackabledevices.
This section describes the configuration procedures for FastIron X Series devices. For FastIron
Stackabledevices, refer to IPG on FastIron Stackable devices on page 72.
• IPG configuration commands are based on "port regions". All ports within the same port region
should have the same IPG configuration. If a port region contains two or more ports, changes to the
IPG configuration for one port are applied to all ports in the same port region. When you enter a
value for IPG, the CLI displays the ports to which the IPG configuration is applied.

device(config-if-e1000-7/1)# ipg-gmii 120

IPG 120(112) has been successfully configured for ports 7/1 to 7/12

• When you enter a value for IPG, the device applies the closest valid IPG value for the port mode to
the interface. For example, if you specify 120 for a 1 Gbps Ethernet port in 1 Gbps mode, the device
assigns 112 as the closest valid IPG value to program into hardware.

Configuring IPG on a Gbps Ethernet port

On a Gbps Ethernet port, you can configure IPG for 10/100 mode and for Gbps Ethernet mode.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 71

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring IPG on a 10 Gbps Ethernet interface

10/100M mode

To configure IPG on a Gbps Ethernet port for 10/100M mode, enter the following command.

device(config)# interface ethernet 7/1

device(config-if-e1000-7/1)# ipg-mii 120
IPG 120(120) has been successfully configured for ports 7/1 to 7/12

Syntax: [no] ipg-mii bit-time

Enter 12-124 for bit time . The default is 96 bit time.

1G mode

To configure IPG on a Gbps Ethernet port for 1-Gbps Ethernet mode, enter commands such as the
following.

device(config)# interface ethernet 7/1

device(config-if-e1000-7/1)# ipg-gmii 120
IPG 120(112) has been successfully configured for ports 0/7/1 to 7/12

Syntax: [no] ipg-gmii bit-time

Enter 48 - 112 for bit time . The default is 96 bit time.

Configuring IPG on a 10 Gbps Ethernet interface

To configure IPG on a 10 Gbps Ethernet interface, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)# interface ethernet 9/1

device(config-if-e10000-9/1)# ipg-xgmii 120
IPG 120(128) has been successfully configured for port 9/1

Syntax: [no] ipg-xgmii bit-time

Enter 96-192 for bit time . The default is 96 bit time.

IPG on FastIron Stackable devices

On FCX and ICX devices, you can configure an IPG for each port. An IPG is a configurable time delay
between successive data packets.
You can configure an IPG with a range from 48-120 bit times in multiples of 8, with a default of 96. The
IPG may be set from either the interface configuration level or the multiple interface level.

IPG configuration notes

• The CLI syntax for IPG differs on FastIron Stackabledevices compared to FastIron X Series
devices. This section describes the configuration procedures for FastIron Stackabledevices. For
FastIron X Series devices, refer to Interpacket Gap (IPG) on a FastIron X Series switch on page 71.
• When an IPG is applied to a trunk group, it applies to all ports in the trunk group. When you are
creating a new trunk group, the IPG setting on the primary port is automatically applied to the
secondary ports.
• This feature is supported on 10/100/1000M ports.

72 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring IPG on a 10/100/1000M port

Configuring IPG on a 10/100/1000M port

To configure an IPG of 112 on Ethernet interface 0/1/21, for example, enter the following command.

device(config)# interface ethernet 0/1/21

device(config-if-e1000-0/1/21)# ipg 112

For multiple interface levels, to configure IPG for ports 0/1/11 and 0/1/14 through 0/1/17, enter the
following commands.

device(config)# interface ethernet 0/1/11 ethernet 0/1/14 to 0/1/17

device(config-mif-0/1/11,0/1/14-0/1/17)# ipg 104

Syntax: [no] ipg value

For value , enter a number in the range from 48-120 bit times in multiples of 8. The default is 96.
As a result of the above configuration, the output from the show interface Ethernet 0/1/21 command is
as follows.

device# show interfaces ethernet 0/1/21

GigabitEthernet 0/1/21 is up, line protocol is up
Port up for 40 seconds
Hardware is GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0004.4014 (bia 0000.0004.4014)
Configured speed auto, actual 100Mbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual MDIX
Member of L2 VLAN ID 1, port is untagged, port state is FORWARDING
BPDU Guard is disabled, Root Protect is disabled
STP configured to ON, priority is level0
Flow Control is config enabled, oper enabled, negotiation disabled
Mirror disabled, Monitor disabled
Not member of any active trunks
Not member of any configured trunks
No port name
Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) is 112 bit times
IP MTU 10222 bytes
300 second input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
300 second output rate: 248 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
80 packets output, 5120 bytes, 0 underruns
Transmitted 0 broadcasts, 80 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions

Enabling and disabling support for 100BaseTX

For FastIron X Series devices, you can configure a 1000Base-TX SFP (part number E1MG-TX) to
operate at a speed of 100 Mbps. To do so, enter the 100-tx command at the Interface level of the CLI.

device(config-if-e1000-11)# 100-tx

After the link is up, it will be in 100M/full-duplex mode, as shown in the following example.

device# show interface brief ethernet 11

Port Link State Dupl Speed
Trunk Tag Priori MAC Name
11 Up Forward Full 100M
None No level10 0000.0013.c74b

The show media command will display the SFP transceiver as 1G M-TX .
Syntax: [no] 100-tx
To disable support, enter the no form of the command.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 73

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 100BaseTX configuration notes

100BaseTX configuration notes

• This feature requires that autonegotiation be enabled on the other end of the link.
• Although combo ports (ports 1 - 4) on Hybrid Fiber (HF) models support the 1000Base-TX SFP,
they cannot be configured to operate at 100 Mbps. The 100 Mbps operating speed is supported
only with non-combo ports (ports 5-24).
• The FCX624S-F is the only FCX model that supports the 1000Base-TX SFP module, and only on
the non-combo ports (ports 5-24). The FCX624S-F does not have a specific command to enable the
1000Base-TX SFP optic at 100 Mbps. You must manually configure it with the speed-duplex 100-
full command. Refer to Port speed and duplex mode configuration syntax on page 58.
• 1000Base-TX modules must be configured individually, one interface at a time.
• 1000Base-TX modules do not support Digital Optical Monitoring.
• This module requires a Cat5 cable and uses an RJ45 connector.
• Hotswap is supported for this module when it is configured in 100M mode.

Enabling and disabling support for 100BaseFX

Some Brocade devices support 100BaseFX fiber transceivers. After you physically install a
100BaseFX transceiver, you must enter a CLI command to enable it. For information about supported
SFP and SFP+ transceivers on ICX devices, refer to the Brocade Optics Family Datasheet on the
Brocade website.

Enabling and disabling 100BaseFX on Chassis-based and stackable devices

NOTE
The following procedure applies to Stackable devices and to Chassis-based 100/1000 Fiber interface
modules only. The CLI syntax for enabling and disabling 100BaseFX support on these devices differs
than on a Compact device. Make sure you refer to the appropriate procedures. These are not
supported on ICX 6430 and ICX 6450 devices.

FastIron devices support the following types of SFPs for 100BaseFX:

• Multimode SFP - maximum distance is 2 kilometers
• Long Reach (LR) - maximum distance is 40 kilometers
• Intermediate Reach (IR) - maximum distance is 15 kilometers
For information about supported SFP and SFP+ transceivers on FastIron devices, refer to the Brocade
Optics Family Datasheet on the Brocade website.

NOTE
Connect the 100BaseFX fiber transceiver after configuring both sides of the link. Otherwise, the link
could become unstable, fluctuating between up and down states.

To enable support for 100BaseFX on an FSX fiber port or on a Stackable switch, enter commands
such as the following.

device(config)# interface ethernet 1/6

device(config-if-1/6)# 100-fx

The above commands enable 100BaseFX on port 6 in slot 1.

Syntax: [no] 100-fx

74 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Changing the Gbps fiber negotiation mode

To disable 100BaseFX support on a fiber port, enter the no form of the command. Note that you must
disable 100BaseFX support before inserting a different type of module In the same port. Otherwise, the
device will not recognize traffic traversing the port.

Changing the Gbps fiber negotiation mode

The globally configured Gbps negotiation mode is the default mode for all Gbps fiber ports. You can
override the globally configured default and set individual ports to the following:

NOTE
Gbps negotiation is not supported on ICX 6430, ICX 6450, and ICX 6650devices.

• Negotiate-full-auto - The port first tries to perform a handshake with the other port to exchange
capability information. If the other port does not respond to the handshake attempt, the port uses the
manually configured configuration information (or the defaults if an administrator has not set the
information). This is the default.
• Auto-Gbps - The port tries to perform a handshake with the other port to exchange capability
information.
• Negotiation-off - The port does not try to perform a handshake. Instead, the port uses configuration
information manually configured by an administrator.
To change the mode for individual ports, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)
# interface ethernet 1 to 4
device(config-mif-1-4)# gig-default auto-gig

This command overrides the global setting and sets the negotiation mode to auto-Gbps for ports 1 - 4.
Syntax: gig-default{ neg-full-auto | auto-gig | neg-off ]

NOTE
When Gbps negotiation mode is turned off (CLI command gig-default neg-off ), the Brocade device
may inadvertently take down both ends of a link. This is a hardware limitation for which there is currently
no workaround.

Port priority (QoS) modification

You can give preference to the inbound traffic on specific ports by changing the Quality of Service
(QoS) level on those ports. For information and procedures, refer to "Quality of Service" chapter in the
FastIron Ethernet Switch Traffic Management Guide .

Dynamic configuration of Voice over IP (VoIP) phones

You can configure a FastIron device to automatically detect and re-configure a VoIP phone when it is
physically moved from one port to another within the same device. To do so, you must configure a voice
VLAN ID on the port to which the VoIP phone is connected. The software stores the voice VLAN ID in
the port database for retrieval by the VoIP phone.
The dynamic configuration of a VoIP phone works in conjunction with the VoiP phone discovery
process. Upon installation, and sometimes periodically, a VoIP phone will query the Brocade device for
VoIP information and will advertise information about itself, such as, device ID, port ID, and platform.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 75

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 VoIP configuration notes

When the Brocade device receives the VoIP phone query, it sends the voice VLAN ID in a reply
packet back to the VoIP phone. The VoIP phone then configures itself within the voice VLAN.
As long as the port to which the VoIP phone is connected has a voice VLAN ID, the phone will
configure itself into that voice VLAN. If you change the voice VLAN ID, the software will immediately
send the new ID to the VoIP phone, and the VoIP phone will re-configure itself with the new voice
VLAN.

VoIP configuration notes

• This feature works with any VoIP phone that:
‐ Runs CDP
‐ Sends a VoIP VLAN query message
‐ Can configure its voice VLAN after receiving the VoIP VLAN reply
• Automatic configuration of a VoIP phone will not work if one of the following applies:
‐ You do not configure a voice VLAN ID for a port with a VoIP phone
‐ You remove the configured voice VLAN ID from a port without configuring a new one
‐ You remove the port from the voice VLAN
• Make sure the port is able to intercept CDP packets (cdp run command).
• Some VoIP phones may require a reboot after configuring or re-configuring a voice VLAN ID. For
example, if your VoIP phone queries for VLAN information only once upon boot up, you must reboot
the VoIP phone before it can accept the VLAN configuration. If your phone is powered by a PoE
device, you can reboot the phone by disabling then re-enabling the port.

Enabling dynamic configuration of a Voice over IP (VoIP) phone

You can create a voice VLAN ID for a port, or for a group of ports.
To create a voice VLAN ID for a port, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)
# interface ethernet 2
device(config-if-e1000-2)# voice-vlan 1001

To create a voice VLAN ID for a group of ports, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)
# interface ethernet 1-8
device(config-mif-1-8)# voice-vlan 1001

Syntax: [no] voice-vlan voice-vlan-num

where voice-vlan-num is a valid VLAN ID between 1 - 4095.
To remove a voice VLAN ID, use the no form of the command.

Viewing voice VLAN configurations

You can view the configuration of a voice VLAN for a particular port or for all ports.
To view the voice VLAN configuration for a port, specify the port number with the show voice-vlan
command. The following example shows the command output results.

device# show voice-vlan ethernet 2

Voice vlan ID for port 2: 1001

76 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Port flap dampening configuration

The following example shows the message that appears when the port does not have a configured
voice VLAN.

device# show voice-vlan ethernet 2

Voice vlan is not configured for port 2.

To view the voice VLAN for all ports, use the show voice-vlan command. The following example shows
the command output results.

device# show voice-vlan

Port ID Voice-vlan
2 1001
8 150
15 200

Syntax: show voice-vlan [ ethernet port ]

Port flap dampening configuration

Port Flap Dampening increases the resilience and availability of the network by limiting the number of
port state transitions on an interface.
If the port link state toggles from up to down for a specified number of times within a specified period,
the interface is physically disabled for the specified wait period. Once the wait period expires, the port
link state is re-enabled. However, if the wait period is set to zero (0) seconds, the port link state will
remain disabled until it is manually re-enabled.

Port flap dampening configuration notes

• When a flap dampening port becomes a member of a trunk group, that port, as well as all other
member ports of that trunk group, will inherit the primary port configuration. This means that the
member ports will inherit the primary port flap dampening configuration, regardless of any previous
configuration.
• The Brocade device counts the number of times a port link state toggles from "up to down", and not
from "down to up".
• The sampling time or window (the time during which the specified toggle threshold can occur before
the wait period is activated) is triggered when the first "up to down" transition occurs.
• "Up to down" transitions include UDLD-based toggles, as well as the physical link state.

Configuring port flap dampening on an interface

This feature is configured at the interface level.

device(config)# interface ethernet 2/1

device(config-if-e10000-2/1)# link-error-disable 10 3 10

Syntax: [no] link-error-disable toggle-threshold sampling-time-in-sec wait-time-in-sec

The toggle-threshold is the number of times a port link state goes from up to down and down to up
before the wait period is activated. Enter a value from 1 - 50.
The sampling-time-in-sec is the amount of time during which the specified toggle threshold can occur
before the wait period is activated. The default is 0 seconds. Enter 1 - 65535 seconds.
The wait-time-in-sec is the amount of time the port remains disabled (down) before it becomes enabled.
Enter a value from 0 - 65535 seconds; 0 indicates that the port will stay down until an administrative
override occurs.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 77

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring port flap dampening on a trunk

Configuring port flap dampening on a trunk

You can configure the port flap dampening feature on the primary port of a trunk using the link-error-
disable command. Once configured on the primary port, the feature is enabled on all ports that are
members of the trunk. You cannot configure port flap dampening on port members of the trunk.
Enter commands such as the following on the primary port of a trunk.

device(config)# interface ethernet 2/1

device(config-if-e10000-2/1)# link-error-disable 10 3 10

Re-enabling a port disabled by port flap dampening

A port disabled by port flap dampening is automatically re-enabled once the wait period expires;
however, if the wait period is set to zero (0) seconds, you must re-enable the port by entering the
following command on the disabled port.

device(config)# interface ethernet 2/1

device(config-if-e10000-2/1)# no link-error-disable 10 3 10

Displaying ports configured with port flap dampening

Ports that have been disabled due to the port flap dampening feature are identified in the output of the
show link-error-disable command. The following shows an example output.

device# show link-error-disable

Port 2/1 is forced down by link-error-disable.

Use the show link-error-disable all command to display the ports with the port flap dampening
feature enabled.
For FastIron Stackabledevices, the output of the command shows the following.

device# show link-error-disable all

Port8/1 is configured for link-error-disable
threshold:1, sampling_period:10, waiting_period:0
Port8/2 is configured for link-error-disable
threshold:1, sampling_period:10, waiting_period:0
Port8/3 is configured for link-error-disable
threshold:1, sampling_period:10, waiting_period:0
Port8/4 is configured for link-error-disable
threshold:1, sampling_period:10, waiting_period:0
Port8/5 is configured for link-error-disable
threshold:4, sampling_period:10, waiting_period:2
Port8/9 is configured for link-error-disable
threshold:2, sampling_period:20, waiting_period:0

For FastIron X Series devices, the output of the command shows the following.

device# show link-error-disable all

Port -----------------Config--------------- ------Oper----
# Threshold Sampling-Time Shutoff-Time State Counter
----- --------- ------------- ------------ ----- -------
11 3 120 600 Idle N/A
12 3 120 500 Down 424

Displaying ports configured with port flap dampening defines the port flap dampening statistics
displayed by the show link-error-disable all command.

78 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Basic Software Features

TABLE 9 Output of show link-error-disable

Column Description

Port # The port number.

Threshold The number of times the port link state will go from up to down and down to up before the wait
period is activated.

Sampling-Time The number of seconds during which the specified toggle threshold can occur before the wait
period is activated.

Shutoff-Time The number of seconds the port will remain disabled (down) before it becomes enabled. A zero (0)
indicates that the port will stay down until an administrative override occurs.

State The port state can be one of the following:

• Idle - The link is normal and no link state toggles have been detected or sampled.
• Down - The port is disabled because the number of sampled errors exceeded the configured
threshold.
• Err - The port sampled one or more errors.

Counter • If the port state isIdle , this field displays N/A .

• If the port state is Down , this field shows the remaining value of the shutoff timer.
• If the port state is Err , this field shows the number of errors sampled.

Syntax: show link-error-disable [ all ]

Also, in FastIron X Series devices, the show interface command indicates if the port flap dampening
feature is enabled on the port.

device# show interface ethernet 15

GigabitEthernet15 is up, line protocol is up
Link Error Dampening is Enabled
Port up for 6 seconds
Hardware is GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0000.010e (bia 0000.0000.010e)
Configured speed auto, actual 1Gbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual MDIX
device# show interface ethernet 17
GigabitEthernet17 is ERR-DISABLED, line protocol is down
Link Error Dampening is Enabled
Port down for 40 seconds
Hardware is GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0000.010e (bia 0000.0000.010e)
Configured speed auto, actual unknown, configured duplex fdx, actual unknown

The line "Link Error Dampening" displays "Enabled" if port flap dampening is enabled on the port or
"Disabled" if the feature is disabled on the port. The feature is enabled on the ports in the two examples
above. Also, the characters "ERR-DISABLED" is displayed for the "GbpsEthernet" line if the port is
disabled because of link errors.
Syntax: show interface ethernet port-number
In addition to the show commands above, the output of the show interface brief command for FastIron
X Series indicates if a port is down due to link errors.

device# show interface brief e17

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Priori MAC Name
17 ERR-DIS
None None None 15 Yes level0 0000.0000.010e

The ERR-DIS entry under the "Link" column indicates the port is down due to link errors.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 79

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages for port flap dampening

NOTE
If a port name is longer than five characters, the port name is truncated in the output of the show
interface brief command.

Syslog messages for port flap dampening

The following Syslog messages are generated for port flap dampening.
• If the threshold for the number of times that a port link toggles from "up" to "down" then "down" to
"up" has been exceeded, the following Syslog message is displayed.

0d00h02m10s:I:ERR_DISABLE: Link flaps on port ethernet 16 exceeded threshold; port

in err-disable state

• If the wait time (port is down) expires and the port is brought up the following Syslog message is
displayed.

0d00h02m41s:I:ERR_DISABLE: Interface ethernet 16, err-disable recovery timeout

Port loop detection

This feature allows the Brocade device to disable a port that is on the receiving end of a loop by
sending test packets. You can configure the time period during which test packets are sent.

Types of loop detection

There are two types of loop detection; Strict Mode and Loose Mode. In Strict Mode, a port is disabled
only if a packet is looped back to that same port. Strict Mode overcomes specific hardware issues
where packets are echoed back to the input port. In Strict Mode, loop detection must be configured on
the physical port.
In Loose Mode, loop detection is configured on the VLAN of the receiving port. Loose Mode disables
the receiving port if packets originate from any port or VLAN on the same device. The VLAN of the
receiving port must be configured for loop detection in order to disable the port.

Recovering disabled ports

Once a loop is detected on a port, it is placed in Err-Disable state. The port will remain disabled until
one of the following occurs:
• You manually disable and enable the port at the Interface Level of the CLI.
• You enter the command clear loop-detection . This command clears loop detection statistics and
enables all Err-Disabled ports.
• The device automatically re-enables the port. To set your device to automatically re-enable Err-
Disabled ports, refer to Configuring the device to automatically re-enable ports on page 82.

Port loopback detection configuration notes

• Loopback detection packets are sent and received on both tagged and untagged ports. Therefore,
this feature cannot be used to detect a loop across separate devices.
The following information applies to Loose Mode loop detection:

80 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling loop detection

• With Loose Mode, two ports of a loop are disabled.

• Different VLANs may disable different ports. A disabled port affects every VLAN using it.
• Loose Mode floods test packets to the entire VLAN. This can impact system performance if too many
VLANs are configured for Loose Mode loop detection.

NOTE
Brocade recommends that you limit the use of Loose Mode. If you have a large number of VLANS,
configuring loop detection on all of them can significantly affect system performance because of the
flooding of test packets to all configured VLANs. An alternative to configuring loop detection in a VLAN-
group of many VLANs is to configure a separate VLAN with the same tagged port and configuration,
and enable loop detection on this VLAN only.

NOTE
When loop detection is used with Layer 2 loop prevention protocols, such as spanning tree (STP), the
Layer 2 protocol takes higher priority. Loop detection cannot send or receive probe packets if ports are
blocked by Layer 2 protocols, so it does not detect Layer 2 loops when STP is running because loops
within a VLAN have been prevented by STP. Loop detection running in Loose Mode can detect and
break Layer 3 loops because STP cannot prevent loops across different VLANs. In these instances, the
ports are not blocked and loop detection is able to send out probe packets in one VLAN and receive
packets in another VLAN. In this way, loop detection running in Loose Mode disables both ingress and
egress ports.

Enabling loop detection

Use the loop-detection command to enable loop detection on a physical port (Strict Mode) or a VLAN
(Loose Mode). Loop detection is disabled by default. The following example shows a Strict Mode
configuration.

device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1

device(config-if-e1000-1/1)# loop-detection

The following example shows a Loose Mode configuration.

device(config)# vlan20
device(config-vlan-20)# loop-detection

By default, the port will send test packets every one second, or the number of seconds specified by the
loop-detection-interval command. Refer to Configuring a global loop detection interval on page 81.
Syntax: [no] loop-detection
Use the [no] form of the command to disable loop detection.

Configuring a global loop detection interval

The loop detection interval specifies how often a test packet is sent on a port. When loop detection is
enabled, the loop detection time unit is 0.1 second, with a default of 10 (one second). The range is from
1 (one tenth of a second) to 100 (10 seconds). You can use the show loop-detection status command
to view the loop detection interval.
To configure the global loop detection interval, enter a command similar to the following.

device(config)# loop-detection-interval 50

This command sets the loop-detection interval to 5 seconds (50 x 0.1).

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 81

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring the device to automatically re-enable ports

To revert to the default global loop detection interval of 10, enter one of the following.

device(config)# loop-detection-interval 10

OR

device(config)# no loop-detection-interval 50

Syntax: [no] loop-detection-interval number

where number is a value from 1 to 100. The system multiplies your entry by 0.1 to calculate the
interval at which test packets will be sent.

Configuring the device to automatically re-enable ports

To configure the Brocade device to automatically re-enable ports that were disabled because of a loop
detection, enter the errdisable recovery cause loop-detection command.

device(config)# errdisable recovery cause loop-detection

The above command will cause the Brocade device to automatically re-enable ports that were
disabled because of a loop detection. By default, the device will wait 300 seconds before re-enabling
the ports. You can optionally change this interval to a value from 10 to 65535 seconds. Refer to
Specifying the recovery time interval on page 82.
Syntax: [no] errdisable recovery cause loop-detection
Use the [no] form of the command to disable this feature.

Specifying the recovery time interval

The recovery time interval specifies the number of seconds the Brocade device will wait before
automatically re-enabling ports that were disabled because of a loop detection. (Refer to Configuring
the device to automatically re-enable ports on page 82.) By default, the device will wait 300 seconds.
To change the recovery time interval, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)# errdisable recovery interval 120

The above command configures the device to wait 120 seconds (2 minutes) before re-enabling the
ports.
To revert back to the default recovery time interval of 300 seconds (5 minutes), enter one of the
following commands.

device(config)# errdisable recovery interval 300

OR

device(config)# no errdisable recovery interval 120

Syntax: [no] errdisable recovery interval seconds

where seconds is a number from 10 to 65535.

82 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing loop-detection

Clearing loop-detection
To clear loop detection statistics and re-enable all ports that are in Err-Disable state because of a loop
detection, enter the clear loop-detection command.

device# clear loop-detection

Displaying loop-detection information

Use the show loop-detection status command to display loop detection status, as shown.

device# show loop-detection status

loop detection packets interval: 10 (unit 0.1 sec)
Number of err-disabled ports: 3
You can re-enable err-disable ports one by one by "disable" then "enable"
under interface config, re-enable all by "clear loop-detect", or
configure "errdisable recovery cause loop-detection" for automatic recovery
index port/vlan status #errdis sent-pkts recv-pkts
1 1/13 untag, LEARNING 0 0 0
2 1/15 untag, BLOCKING 0 0 0
3 1/17 untag, DISABLED 0 0 0
4 1/18 ERR-DISABLE by itself 1 6 1
5 1/19 ERR-DISABLE by vlan 12 0 0 0
6 vlan12 2 ERR-DISABLE ports 2 24 2

If a port is errdisabled in Strict mode, it shows "ERR-DISABLE by itself". If it is errdisabled due to its
associated vlan, it shows "ERR-DISABLE by vlan ?"
The following command displays the current disabled ports, including the cause and the time.

device# show loop-detection disable

Number of err-disabled ports: 3
You can re-enable err-disable ports one by one by "disable" then "enable"
under interface config, re-enable all by "clear loop-detect", or
configure "errdisable recovery cause loop-detection" for automatic recovery
index port caused-by disabled-time
1 1/18 itself 00:13:30
2 1/19 vlan 12 00:13:30
3 1/20 vlan 12 00:13:30

This example shows the disabled ports, the cause, and the time the port was disabled. If loop-detection
is configured on a physical port, the disable cause will show "itself". For VLANs configured for loop-
detection, the cause will be a VLAN.
The following command shows the hardware and software resources being used by the loop-detection
feature.

Vlans configured loop-detection use 1 HW MAC

Vlans not configured but use HW MAC: 1 10
alloc in-use avail get-fail limit get-mem size init
configuration pool 16 6 10 0 3712 6 15 16
linklist pool 16 10 6 0 3712 10 16 16

Displaying loop detection resource information

Use the show loop-detection resource command to display the hardware and software resource
information on loop detection.

device# show loop-detection resource

Vlans configured loop-detection use 1 HW MAC
Vlans not configured but use HW MAC: 1 10
alloc in-use avail get-fail limit get-mem size init
configuration pool 16 6 10 0 3712 6 15 16
linklist pool 16 10 6 0 3712 10 16 16

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 83

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying loop detection configuration status on an interface

Syntax: show loop-detection resource

The following table describes the output fields for this command.

TABLE 10 Field definitions for the show loop-detection resource command

Field Description

alloc Memory allocated

in-use Memory in use

avail Available memory

get-fail The number of get requests that have failed

limit The maximum memory allocation

get-mem The number of get-memory requests

size The size

init The number of requests initiated

Displaying loop detection configuration status on an interface

Use the show interface command to display the status of loop detection configuration on a particular
interface.

Brocade# show interface ethernet 2/1

10GigabitEthernet2/1 is up, line protocol is up
Port up for 1 day 22 hours 43 minutes 5 seconds
Hardware is 10GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0089.1100 (bia 0000.0089.1118)
Configured speed 10Gbit, actual 10Gbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Member of 9 L2 VLANs, port is tagged, port state is FORWARDING
BPDU guard is Disabled, ROOT protect is Disabled
Link Error Dampening is Disabled
STP configured to ON, priority is level0
Loop Detection is ENABLED
Flow Control is enabled
Mirror disabled, Monitor disabled
Member of active trunk ports 2/1,2/2, primary port
Member of configured trunk ports 2/1,2/2, primary port
No port name
IPG XGMII 96 bits-time
MTU 1500 bytes, encapsulation ethernet
ICL port for BH1 in cluster id 1
300 second input rate: 2064 bits/sec, 3 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
300 second output rate: 768 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
171319 packets input, 12272674 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 63650 multicasts, 107669 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
51094 packets output, 3925313 bytes, 0 underruns
Transmitted 2 broadcasts, 42830 multicasts, 8262 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions
Relay Agent Information option: Disabled

84 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog message due to disabled port in loop detection

Syslog message due to disabled port in loop detection

The following message is logged when a port is disabled due to loop detection. This message also
appears on the console.

loop-detection: port ?/?/? vlan ?, detect, putting into err-disable state

Shutdown prevention for loop-detection on an interface

Prevents shut down for loop-detect on an interface.

In prior FastIron releases, when a loop detection probe packet was received back on an interface, the
corresponding interface would be shut down either permanently or for a specific duration configured by
the user. The new shut down prevention for loop-detection functionality allows users to disable the
shutdown of a port when the loop detection probe packet is received on an interface. This provides
control over deciding which port is allowed to enter into an error-disabled state and go into a shutdown
state when a loop is detected. This function can also be used as a test tool to detect Layer 2 and Layer
3 loops in network current data packet flow.
Limitations of shutdown prevention for loop-detection
Shutdown prevention for loop-detection does not allow any corrective action to be taken on the loop.
There could be network instability due to the presence of network loops, if adequate corrective
measures are not taken by the network administrator.
To enable shutdown prevention for loop detection, follow these steps.
1. Enter global configuration mode.
2. Specify the interface on which you would like to enable the loop-detection shutdown-disable
command.
3. Enter the loop-detection shutdown-disable command.
Brocade (config)# interface ethe 1/7
Brocade (config-if-e1000-1/7)# loop-detection shutdown-disable

Periodic log message generation for shutdown prevention

Generates periodic log messages for shutdown prevention.

You can raise a periodic syslog that provides information about loops in the network. When a loop is
detected because of a loop detection protocol data unit (PDU), on a loop detection shutdown-disabled
interface, the interface will never be put into an error-disabled state, but it will generate a periodic log
message indicating that the interface is in the shutdown-disabled mode. The periodic syslog is by
default generated at an interval of five minutes. You can change this interval as required.
You can globally specify the interval at which the loop-detection syslog message is generated if the
loop detection shutdown-disable command is configured on the port. This configuration applies to all
the ports that have shutdown prevention for loop detection configured.
During a log interval duration window, a log message will be displayed for the first loop detection PDU
received on the interface. This means that there will be only one log message per port in an interval
window.
To configure the periodic log message generation for shutdown prevention, follow these steps.
1. Enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter the loop-detection syslog-interval <num> command.
The following command will set the syslog-interval to 1 hr.
Brocade (config)# loop-detection-syslog-interval 60

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 85

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog for port shutdown prevention

Syslog for port shutdown prevention

Describes the syslog for port shutdown prevention.

<14>0d01h38m44s:<product type>: port <port-num> detect loop, ignoring shut down event in
shutdown-disable mode.

CLI banner configuration

Brocade devices can be configured to display a greeting message on users’ terminals when they enter
the Privileged EXEC CLI level or access the device through Telnet.
In addition, a Brocade device can display a message on the Console when an incoming Telnet CLI
session is detected.

Setting a message of the day banner

You can configure the Brocade device to display a message on a user terminal when a Telnet CLI
session is established.

For example, to display the message “Welcome to FESX!” when a Telnet CLI session is established.
Brocade(config)# banner motd $ (Press Return)
Enter TEXT message, End with the character '$'.
Welcome to FESX! $

A delimiting character is established on the first line of the banner motd command. You begin and end
the message with this delimiting character. The delimiting character can be any character except
“ (double-quotation mark) and cannot appear in the banner text. In this example, the delimiting
character is $ (dollar sign). The text in between the dollar signs is the contents of the banner. The
banner text can be up to 4000 characters long, which can consist of multiple lines.
Syntax: [no] banner motd delimiting-character
To remove the banner, enter the no banner motd command.

NOTE
The banner delimiting-character command is equivalent to the banner motd delimiting-character
command.
When you access the Web Management Interface, the banner is displayed.

86 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Requiring users to press the Enter key after the message of the day banner

NOTE
If you are using a Web client to view the message of the day, and your banners are very wide, with
large borders, you may need to set your PC display resolution to a number greater than the width of
your banner. For example, if your banner is 100 characters wide and the display is set to 80 characters,
the banner may distort, or wrap, and be difficult to read. If you set your display resolution to 120
characters, the banner will display correctly.

Requiring users to press the Enter key after the message of the day
banner
In earlier IronWare software releases, users were required to press the Enter key after the Message of
the Day (MOTD) was displayed, prior to logging in to the Brocade device on a console or from a Telnet
session.

Now, this requirement is disabled by default. Unless configured, users do not have to press Enter after
the MOTD banner is displayed.
For example, if the MOTD "Authorized Access Only" is configured, by default, the following messages
are displayed when a user tries to access the Brocade device from a Telnet session.
Authorized Access Only ...
Username:

The user can then login to the device.

However, if the requirement to press the Enter key is enabled, the following messages are displayed
when accessing the switch from Telnet.
Authorized Access Only ...
Press <Enter> to accept and continue the login process....

The user must press the Enter key before the login prompt is displayed.
Also, on the console, the following messages are displayed if the requirement to press the Enter key is
disabled.
Press Enter key to login
Authorized Access Only ...
User Access Verification
Please Enter Login Name:

However, if the requirement to press the Enter key after a MOTD is enabled, the following messages
are displayed when accessing the switch on the console.
Press Enter key to login
Authorized Access Only ...
Press <Enter> to accept and continue the login process....

The user must press the Enter key to continue to the login prompt.
To enable the requirement to press the Enter key after the MOTD is displayed, enter a command such
as the following.
Brocade(config)# banner motd require-enter-key

Syntax: [no] banner motd require-enter-key

Use the no form of the command to disable the requirement.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 87

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Setting a privileged EXEC CLI level banner

Setting a privileged EXEC CLI level banner

You can configure the Brocade device to display a message when a user enters the Privileged EXEC
CLI level.

Example
You can configure the Brocade device to display a message when a user enters the
Privileged EXEC CLI level.

As with the banner motd command, you begin and end the message with a
delimiting character; in this example, the delimiting character is #(pound sign).
The delimiting character can be any character except “ (double-quotation mark)
and cannot appear in the banner text. The text in between the pound signs is
the contents of the banner. Banner text can be up to 4000 characters, which
can consist of multiple lines.

Syntax: [no] banner exec_mode delimiting-character

To remove the banner, enter the no banner exec_mode command.

Displaying a console message when an incoming Telnet session is

detected
You can configure the Brocade device to display a message on the Console when a user establishes
a Telnet session.

This message indicates where the user is connecting from and displays a configurable text message.
Brocade(config)# banner incoming $ (Press Return)
Enter TEXT message, End with the character '$'.
Incoming Telnet Session!! $

When a user connects to the CLI using Telnet, the following message appears on the Console.
Telnet from 209.157.22.63
Incoming Telnet Session!!

As with the banner motd command, you begin and end the message with a delimiting character; in
this example, the delimiting character is $(dollar sign). The delimiting character can be any character
except “ (double-quotation mark) and cannot appear in the banner text. The text in between the dollar
signs is the contents of the banner. Banner text can be up to 4000 characters, which can consist of
multiple lines.
Syntax: [no] banner incoming delimiting-character
To remove the banner, enter the no banner incoming command.

88 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

● OAM Overview................................................................................................................ 89
● Software versions installed and running on a device...................................................... 90
● Software Image file types................................................................................................93
● Flash timeout...................................................................................................................94
● Software upgrades.......................................................................................................... 94
● Boot code synchronization feature..................................................................................95
● Viewing the contents of flash files................................................................................... 95
● Using SNMP to upgrade software...................................................................................96
● Software reboot...............................................................................................................97
● Displaying the boot preference....................................................................................... 98
● Loading and saving configuration files............................................................................ 99
● Loading and saving configuration files with IPv6.......................................................... 103
● System reload scheduling............................................................................................. 109
● Diagnostic error codes and remedies for TFTP transfers............................................. 110
● Network connectivity testing..........................................................................................112
● IEEE 802.3ah EFM-OAM.............................................................................................. 114
● Hitless management on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600................................................... 122
● Displaying management redundancy information ........................................................ 132
● Layer 3 hitless route purge ...........................................................................................133
● Energy Efficient Ethernet.............................................................................................. 134
● Histogram information overview....................................................................................135
● External USB Hotplug................................................................................................... 136
● Commands....................................................................................................................137

OAM Overview
For easy software image management, all Brocade devices support the download and upload of
software images between the flash modules on the devices and a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
server on the network.
Brocade devices have two flash memory modules:
• Primary flash - The default local storage device for image files and configuration files.
• Secondary flash - A second flash storage device. You can use the secondary flash to store
redundant images for additional booting reliability or to preserve one software image while testing
another one.
Only one flash device is active at a time. By default, the primary image will become active upon reload.
You can update the software contained on a flash module using TFTP to copy the update image from a
TFTP server onto the flash module. In addition, you can copy software images and configuration files
from a flash module to a TFTP server.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 89

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Software versions installed and running on a device

NOTE
Brocade devices are TFTP clients but not TFTP servers. You must perform the TFTP transaction from
the Brocade device. You cannot "put" a file onto the Brocade device using the interface of your TFTP
server.

NOTE
If you are attempting to transfer a file using TFTP but have received an error message, refer to
Diagnostic error codes and remedies for TFTP transfers on page 110.

Software versions installed and running on a device

Use the following methods to display the software versions running on the device and the versions
installed in flash memory.

Determining the flash image version running on the device

To determine the flash image version running on a device, enter the show version command at any
level of the CLI. Some examples are shown below.

Compact devices
To determine the flash image version running on a Compact device, enter the show version
command at any level of the CLI. The following shows an example output.

device#show version
Copyright (c) 1996-2012 Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
UNIT 1: compiled on Mar 2 2012 at 12:38:17 labeled as ICX64S07400
(10360844 bytes) from Primary ICX64S07400.bin
SW: Version 07.4.00T311
Boot-Monitor Image size = 774980, Version:07.4.00T310 (kxz07400)
HW: Stackable ICX6450-24
==========================================================================
UNIT 1: SL 1: ICX6450-24 24-port Management Module
Serial #: BZSxxxxxxxx
License: BASE_SOFT_PACKAGE (LID: dbuFJJHiFFi)
P-ENGINE 0: type DEF0, rev 01
==========================================================================
UNIT 1: SL 2: ICX6450-SFP-Plus 4port 40G Module
==========================================================================
800 MHz ARM processor ARMv5TE, 400 MHz bus
65536 KB flash memory
512 MB DRAM
STACKID 1 system uptime is 3 minutes 39 seconds
The system : started=warm start reloaded=by "reload"

The version information is shown in bold type in this example:

• "03.0.00T53" indicates the flash code version number. The "T53" is used by Brocade for record
keeping.
• "labeled as FER03000" indicates the flash code image label. The label indicates the image type and
version and is especially useful if you change the image file name.
• "Primary fer03000.bin" indicates the flash code image file name that was loaded.

90 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying flash image version on chassis devices

Displaying flash image version on chassis devices

To determine the flash image version running on a chassis device, enter the show version command
at any level of the CLI. The following is an example output.

device#show version
==========================================================================
Active Management CPU [Slot-9]:
SW: Version 07.4.00T3e3 Copyright (c) 1996-2012 Brocade Communications Systems,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Compiled on Mar 02 2012 at 11:54:29 labeled as SXR07400
(4585331 bytes) Primary /GA/SXR07400.bin
BootROM: Version 07.2.00T3e5 (FEv2)
Chassis Serial #: Bxxxxxxxxx
License: SX_V6_HW_ROUTER_IPv6_SOFT_PACKAGE (LID: yGFJGOiFLd)
HW: Chassis FastIron SX 800-PREM6 (PROM-TYPE SX-FIL3U-6-IPV6)
==========================================================================
Standby Management CPU [Slot-10]:
SW: Version 07.4.00T3e3 Copyright (c) 1996-2012 Brocade Communications Systems,
Inc. All rights reserved.
Compiled on Mar 02 2012 at 11:54:29 labeled as SXR07400
BootROM: Version 07.2.00T3e5 (FEv2)
HW: Chassis FastIron SX 800-PREM6 (PROM-TYPE SX-FIL3U-6-IPV6)
==========================================================================
SL 1: SX-FI-8XG 8-port 10G Fiber
Serial #: BQKxxxxxxxx
P-ASIC 0: type C341, rev 00 subrev 00
==========================================================================
SL 2: SX-FI-24GPP 24-port Gig Copper + PoE+
Serial #: BTUxxxxxxxx
P-ASIC 2: type C300, rev 00 subrev 00
==========================================================================
SL 8: SX-FI-48GPP 48-port Gig Copper + PoE+
Serial #: BFVxxxxxxxx
P-ASIC 14: type C300, rev 00 subrev 00
==========================================================================
SL 9: SX-FIZMR6 0-port Management
Serial #: Wxxxxxxxxx
License: SX_V6_HW_ROUTER_IPv6_SOFT_PACKAGE (LID: yGFJGOiFLd)
==========================================================================
SL 10: SX-FIZMR6 0-port Management
Serial #: Wxxxxxxxxx
License: SX_V6_HW_ROUTER_IPv6_SOFT_PACKAGE (LID: ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ)
==========================================================================
Active Management Module:
660 MHz Power PC processor 8541 (version 0020/0020) 66 MHz bus
512 KB boot flash memory
16384 KB code flash memory
512 MB DRAM
Standby Management Module:
660 MHz Power PC processor 8541 (version 0020/0020) 66 MHz bus
512 KB boot flash memory
16384 KB code flash memory
512 MB DRAM
The system uptime is 1 minutes 2 seconds
The system : started=warm start reloaded=by "reload"

The version information is shown in bold type in this example:

• "03.1.00aT3e3" indicates the flash code version number. The "T3e3" is used by Brocade for record
keeping.
• "labeled as SXR03100a" indicates the flash code image label. The label indicates the image type and
version and is especially useful if you change the image file name.
• "Primary SXR03100a.bin" indicates the flash code image file name that was loaded.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 91

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying the boot image version running on the device

Displaying the boot image version running on the device

To determine the boot image running on a device, enter the show flash command at any level of the
CLI. The following shows an example output.

device#show flash
Active Management Module (Slot 9):
Compressed Pri Code size = 3613675, Version 03.1.00aT3e3 (sxr03100a.bin)
Compressed Sec Code size = 2250218, Version 03.1.00aT3e1 (sxs03100a.bin)
Compressed BootROM Code size = 524288, Version 03.0.01T3e5
Code Flash Free Space = 9699328
Standby Management Module (Slot 10):
Compressed Pri Code size = 3613675, Version 03.1.00aT3e3 (sxr03100a.bin)
Compressed Sec Code size = 2250218, Version 03.1.00aT3e1 (sxs03100a.bin)
Compressed BootROM Code size = 524288, Version 03.0.01T3e5
Code Flash Free Space = 524288

The boot code version is shown in bold type.

Displaying the image versions installed in flash memory

Enter the show flash command to display the boot and flash images installed on the device. An
example of the command output is shown in Displaying the boot image version running on the device
on page 92:
• The "Compressed Pri Code size" line lists the flash code version installed in the primary flash area.
• The "Compressed Sec Code size" line lists the flash code version installed in the secondary flash
area.
• The "Boot Monitor Image size" line lists the boot code version installed in flash memory. The device
does not have separate primary and secondary flash areas for the boot image. The flash memory
module contains only one boot image.

NOTE
To minimize the boot-monitor image size on FastIron devices, the ping and tftp operations performed
in the boot-monitor mode are restricted to copper ports on the FastIron Chassis management modules
and to the out-of-band management port on the FastIron stackable switches. The other copper or fiber
ports on these devices do not have the ability to ping or tftp from the boot-monitor mode.

Flash image verification

The Flash Image Verification feature allows you to verify boot images based on hash codes, and to
generate hash codes where needed. This feature lets you select from three data integrity verification
algorithms:
• MD5 - Message Digest algorithm (RFC 1321)
• SHA1 - US Secure Hash Algorithm (RFC 3174)
• CRC - Cyclic Redundancy Checksum algorithm

Flash image CLI commands

Use the following command syntax to verify the flash image:
Syntax: verify md5 | sha1 | crc32 ASCII string|primary|secondary[hash code]
• md5 - Generates a 16-byte hash code
• sha1 - Generates a 20-byte hash code

92 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Software Image file types

• crc32 - Generates a 4 byte checksum

• ascii string - A valid image filename
• primary - The primary boot image (primary.img)
• secondary - The secondary boot image (secondary.img)
• hash code - The hash code to verify
The following examples show how the verify command can be used in a variety of circumstances.
To generate an MD5 hash value for the secondary image, enter the following command.

device#verify md5 secondary

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, MD5 01c410d6d153189a4a5d36c955653862

To generate a SHA-1 hash value for the secondary image, enter the following command.

device#verify sha secondary

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, SHA1 49d12d26552072337f7f5fcaef4cf4b742a9f525

To generate a CRC32 hash value for the secondary image, enter the following command.

device#verify crc32 secondary

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, CRC32 b31fcbc0

To verify the hash value of a secondary image with a known value, enter the following commands.

device#verify md5 secondary 01c410d6d153189a4a5d36c955653861

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, MD5 01c410d6d153189a4a5d36c955653862
Verification FAILED.

In the previous example, the codes did not match, and verification failed. If verification succeeds, the
output will look like this.

device#verify md5 secondary 01c410d6d153189a4a5d36c955653861

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, MD5 01c410d6d153189a4a5d36c955653861
Verification SUCEEDED.

The following examples show this process for SHA-1 and CRC32 algorithms.

device#verify sha secondary 49d12d26552072337f7f5fcaef4cf4b742a9f525

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, sha 49d12d26552072337f7f5fcaef4cf4b742a9f525
Verification SUCCEEDED.

and

device#verify crc32 secondary b31fcbc0

device#.........................Done
Size = 2044830, CRC32 b31fcbc0
Verification SUCCEEDED.

Software Image file types

This section lists the boot and flash image file types supported and how to install them on the FastIron
family of switches. For information about a specific version of code, refer to the release notes.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 93

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Flash timeout

NOTE
The boot images are applicable to the listed devices only and are not interchangeable. For example,
you cannot load FCX boot or flash images on an FSX device, and vice versa.

TABLE 11 Software image files

Product Boot image Flash image

FSX 800 sxzxxxxx.bin SXLSxxxxx.bin (Layer 2) or

FSX 1600 SXLRxxxxx.bin (full Layer 3)

FCX grzxxxxxx.bin FCXSxxxxx.bin (Layer 2) or FCXRxxxxx.bin (Layer 3)

ICX 6610

ICX 6430 kxzxxxxx.bin ICX64Sxxxxx.bin (Layer 2) or

ICX 6450 ICX64Rxxxxx.bin (Layer 3 - ICX 6450 only)

ICX 6650 fxzxxxxx.bin ICXRxxxxx.bin

ICXSxxxxx.bin

ICX 7250 spzxxxxx.bin SPSxxxxx.bin (Layer 2) or

ICX 7450 SPRxxxxx.bin (Layer 3)

ICX 7750 swzxxxxx.bin SWSxxxxx.bin (Layer 2) or

SWRxxxxx.bin (Layer 3)

Flash timeout
The operations that require access to the flash device are expected to be completed within the default
flash timeout value of 12 minutes.
If the operations exceed the timeout value, the flash device will be locked and further flash operations
cannot be processed. To facilitate prolonged flash operations without the device being locked, you can
manually configure the flash timeout for a longer duration using the flash-timeout command. You can
configure the flash timeout to a value from 12 through 60 minutes. The new timeout value is applicable
for all flash operations and will be effective from the next flash operation.

Software upgrades
For instructions about upgrading the software, refer to the FastIron Ethernet Switch Software Upgrade
Guide.

94 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Boot code synchronization feature

Boot code synchronization feature

The Brocade device supports automatic synchronization of the boot image in the active and redundant
management modules. When the new boot image is copied into the active module, it is automatically
synchronized with the redundant management module.

NOTE
There is currently no option for manual synchronization of the boot image.
To activate the boot synchronization process, enter the following command.

device#copy tftp flash 10.20.65.194 /GA/SXZ07200.bin bootrom

The system responds with the following message.

device#Load to buffer (8192 bytes per dot)

..................Write to boot flash......................
TFTP to Flash Done.
device#Synchronizing with standby module...
Boot image synchronization done.

Viewing the contents of flash files

The copy flash console command can be used to display the contents of a configuration file, backup
file, or renamed file stored in flash memory. The file contents are displayed on the console when the
command is entered at the CLI.
To display a list of files stored in flash memory, do one of the following:
• For devices other than FCX and ICX, enter the dir command at the monitor mode. To enter monitor
mode from any level of the CLI, press the Shift and Control+Y keys simultaneously then press the M
key. Enter the dir command to display a list of the files stored in flash memory. To exit monitor mode
and return to the CLI, press Control+Z .
• For FCX devices, enter the show dir command at any level of the CLI, or enter the dir command at
the monitor mode.
• For ICX devices, enter the show files command at the device configuration prompt.
The following shows an example command output.

device#show dir
133 [38f4] boot-parameter
0 [ffff] bootrom
3802772 [0000] primary
4867691 [0000] secondary
163 [dd8e] stacking.boot
1773 [0d2d] startup-config
1808 [acfa] startup-config.backup
8674340 bytes 7 File(s)
56492032 bytes free

Syntax: show dir

The following example shows the output of the show files command.
device#show files
Type Size Name
------------------------
F 28203908 primary
F 27949956 secondary

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 95

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using SNMP to upgrade software

F 641 startup-config.txt
F 391 stacking.boot
F 76942 debug.boot
F 638 startup-config.backup
F 0 startup-config.no

56232476 bytes 7 File(s) in FI root

1771020288 bytes free in FI root

1771020288 bytes free in /

Syntax: show files

To display the contents of a flash configuration file, enter a command such as the following from the
User EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode of the CLI:

device#copy flash console startup-config.backup

ver 07.0.00b1T7f1 !
stack unit 1
module 1 fcx-24-port-management-module
module 2 fcx-cx4-2-port-16g-module
module 3 fcx-xfp-2-port-10g-module
priority 80
stack-port 1/2/1 1/2/2
stack unit 2
module 1 fcx-48-poe-port-management-module
module 2 fcx-cx4-2-port-16g-module
module 3 fcx-xfp-2-port-10g-module
stack-port 2/2/1 2/2/2
stack enable
!
!
!
!
vlan 1 name DEFAULT-VLAN by port
no spanning-tree
metro-rings 1
metro-ring 1
master
ring-interfaces ethernet 1/1/2 ethernet 1/1/3
enable
!
vlan 10 by port
mac-vlan-permit ethe 1/1/5 to 1/1/6 ethe 2/1/5 to 2/1/6 no spanning-tree !
vlan 20 by port
untagged ethe 1/1/7 to 1/1/8
no spanning-tree
pvlan type primary
pvlan mapping 40 ethe 1/1/8
pvlan mapping 30 ethe 1/1/7
!
vlan 30 by port
untagged ethe 1/1/9 to 1/1/10
no spanning-tree
pvlan type community
!
...
some lines omitted for brevity...

Syntax: copy flash console filename

For filename, enter the name of a file stored in flash memory.

Using SNMP to upgrade software

You can use a third-party SNMP management application such as HP OpenView to upgrade software
on a Brocade device.

96 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Software reboot

NOTE
The syntax shown in this section assumes that you have installed HP OpenView in the "/usr" directory.

NOTE
Brocade recommends that you make a backup copy of the startup-config file before you upgrade the
software. If you need to run an older release, you will need to use the backup copy of the startup-config
file.
1. Configure a read-write community string on the Brocade device, if one is not already configured. To
configure a read-write community string, enter the following command from the global CONFIG level
of the CLI.snmp-server community string ro | rw where string is the community string and can be
up to 32 characters long.
2. On the Brocade device, enter the following command from the global CONFIG level of the CLI.
no snmp-server pw-check
This command disables password checking for SNMP set requests. If a third-party SNMP
management application does not add a password to the password field when it sends SNMP set
requests to a Brocade device, by default the Brocade device rejects the request.
3. From the command prompt in the UNIX shell, enter the following command.
/usr/OV/bin/snmpset -c rw-community-string brcd-ip-addr 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.5.0 ipaddress
tftp-ip-addr 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.6.0 octetstringascii file-name 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.7.0
integer command-integer
where
rw-community-string is a read-write community string configured on the Brocade device.
brcd-ip-addr is the IP address of the Brocade device.
tftp-ip-addr is the TFTP server IP address.
file-name is the image file name.
command-integer is one of the following.
20 - Download the flash code into the primary flash area.
22 - Download the flash code into the secondary flash area.

Software reboot
You can use boot commands to immediately initiate software boots from a software image stored in
primary or secondary flash on a Brocade device or from a BootP or TFTP server. You can test new
versions of code on a Brocade device or choose the preferred boot source from the console boot
prompt without requiring a system reset.

NOTE
It is very important that you verify a successful TFTP transfer of the boot code before you reset the
system. If the boot code is not transferred successfully but you try to reset the system, the system will
not have the boot code with which to successfully boot.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 97

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Software boot configuration notes

By default, the Brocade device first attempts to boot from the image stored in its primary flash, then its
secondary flash, and then from a TFTP server. You can modify this booting sequence at the global
CONFIG level of the CLI using the boot system command.

NOTE
FSX device with FastIron 08.0.00a, ICX 6430, and ICX 6450 devices support only one configured
system boot preference.
To initiate an immediate boot from the CLI, enter one of the boot system commands.

NOTE
When using the boot system tftp command, the IP address of the device and the TFTP server should
be in the same subnet.

Software boot configuration notes

• In FastIron X Series devices, the boot system tftp command is supported on ports e 1 through e
12 only.
• If you are booting the device from a TFTP server through a fiber connection, use the following
command: boot system tftp ip-address filename fiber-port .
• The boot system tftp command is not supported in a stacking environment.

Displaying the boot preference

Use the show boot-preference command to display the boot sequence in the startup config and
running config files. The boot sequence displayed is also identified as either user-configured or the
default.
The following example shows the default boot sequence preference.

device#show boot-preference
Boot system preference (Configured):
Use Default
Boot system preference(Default):
Boot system flash primary
Boot system flash secondary

The following example shows a user-configured boot sequence preference.

Brocade#show boot-preference
Boot system preference(Configured):
Boot system tftp 10.1.1.1 FCXR08000.bin
Boot system flash primary
Boot system preference(Default):
Boot system flash primary
Boot system flash secondary

Syntax: show boot-preference

The results of the show run command for the configured example above appear as follows.

Brocade#show run
Current configuration:
!
ver 08.0.00T7f3
!

98 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Loading and saving configuration files

stack unit 1
module 1 fcx-24-poe-port-management-module
module 2 fcx-cx4-2-port-16g-module
priority 128
stack-port 1/2/1 1/2/2
stack unit 2
module 1 fcx-48-port-management-module
module 2 fcx-cx4-2-port-16g-module
stack-port 2/2/1 2/2/2
stack enable
stack mac 748e.f80e.dcc0
!
boot sys tf 10.1.1.1 FCXR08000.bin
boot sys fl pri
ip route 0.0.0.0/0 10.37.234.129
!
end

Loading and saving configuration files

For easy configuration management, all Brocade devices support both the download and upload of
configuration files between the devices and a TFTP server on the network.
You can upload either the startup configuration file or the running configuration file to the TFTP server
for backup and use in booting the system:
• Startup configuration file - This file contains the configuration information that is currently saved in
flash. To display this file, enter the show configuration command at any CLI prompt.
• Running configuration file - This file contains the configuration active in the system RAM but not yet
saved to flash. These changes could represent a short-term requirement or general configuration
change. To display this file, enter the show running-config or write terminal command at any CLI
prompt.
Each device can have one startup configuration file and one running configuration file. The startup
configuration file is shared by both flash modules. The running configuration file resides in DRAM.
When you load the startup-config file, the CLI parses the file three times.
1. During the first pass, the parser searches for system-max commands. A system-max command
changes the size of statically configured memory.
2. During the second pass, the parser implements the system-max commands if present and also
implements trunk configuration commands (trunk command) if present.
3. During the third pass, the parser implements the remaining commands.

Replacing the startup configuration with the running configuration

After you make configuration changes to the active system, you can save those changes by writing
them to flash memory. When you write configuration changes to flash memory, you replace the startup
configuration with the running configuration.
To replace the startup configuration with the running configuration, enter the following command at any
Enable or CONFIG command prompt.

device# write memory

NOTE
To return the unit to the default startup configuration, use the delete startup-config command.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 99

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Replacing the running configuration with the startup configuration

Replacing the running configuration with the startup configuration

If you want to back out of the changes you have made to the running configuration and return to the
startup configuration, enter the following command at the Privileged EXEC level of the CLI.

device# reload

Logging changes to the startup-config file

You can configure a Brocade device to generate a Syslog message when the startup-config file is
changed. The trap is enabled by default.
The following Syslog message is generated when the startup-config file is changed.

startup-config was changed

If the startup-config file was modified by a valid user, the following Syslog message is generated.

startup-config was changed by

username

To disable or re-enable Syslog messages when the startup-config file is changed, use the following
command.
Syntax:[no] logging enable config-changed

Copying a configuration file to or from a TFTP server

To copy the startup-config or running-config file to or from a TFTP server, use the following method.

NOTE
For details about the copy command used with IPv6, refer to Using the IPv6 copy command on page
104.

NOTE
You can name the configuration file when you copy it to a TFTP server. However, when you copy a
configuration file from the server to a Brocade device, the file is always copied as "startup-config" or
"running-config", depending on which type of file you saved to the server.
To initiate transfers of configuration files to or from a TFTP server using the CLI, enter one of the
following commands:
• copy startup-config tftp tftp-ip-addr filename - Use this command to upload a copy of the startup
configuration file from the Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch to a TFTP server.
• copy running-config tftp tftp-ip-addr filename - Use this command to upload a copy of the
running configuration file from the Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch to a TFTP server.
• copy tftp startup-config tftp-ip-addr filename - Use this command to download a copy of the
startup configuration file from a TFTP server to a Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch.

NOTE
It is recommended to use a script or the copy running-config tftp command for extensive
configuration. You should not copy-paste configuration with more than 2000 characters into CLI.

100 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Dynamic configuration loading

Dynamic configuration loading

You can load dynamic configuration commands (commands that do not require a reload to take effect)
from a file on a TFTP server into the running-config on the Brocade device. You can make configuration
changes off-line, then load the changes directly into the device running-config, without reloading the
software.

Dynamic configuration usage considerations

• Use this feature only to load configuration information that does not require a software reload to take
effect. For example, you cannot use this feature to change statically configured memory (system-
max command) or to enter trunk group configuration information into the running-config.
• Do not use this feature if you have deleted a trunk group but have not yet placed the changes into
effect by saving the configuration and then reloading. When you delete a trunk group, the command
to configure the trunk group is removed from the device running-config, but the trunk group remains
active. To finish deleting a trunk group, save the configuration (to the startup-config file), then reload
the software. After you reload the software, then you can load the configuration from the file.
• Do not load port configuration information for secondary ports in a trunk group. Since all ports in a
trunk group use the port configuration settings of the primary port in the group, the software cannot
implement the changes to the secondary port.

Preparing the configuration file

A configuration file that you create must follow the same syntax rules as the startup-config file the
device creates.
• The configuration file is a script containing CLI configuration commands. The CLI reacts to each
command entered from the file in the same way the CLI reacts to the command if you enter it. For
example, if the command results in an error message or a change to the CLI configuration level, the
software responds by displaying the message or changing the CLI level.
• The software retains the running-config that is currently on the device, and changes the running-
config only by adding new commands from the configuration file. If the running config already
contains a command that is also in the configuration file you are loading, the CLI rejects the new
command as a duplicate and displays an error message. For example, if the running-config already
contains a a command that configures ACL 1, the software rejects ACL 1 in the configuration file, and
displays a message that ACL 1 is already configured.
• The file can contain global CONFIG commands or configuration commands for interfaces, routing
protocols, and so on. You cannot enter User EXEC or Privileged EXEC commands.
• The default CLI configuration level in a configuration file is the global CONFIG level. Thus, the first
command in the file must be a global CONFIG command or " ! ". The ! (exclamation point) character
means "return to the global CONFIG level".

NOTE
You can enter text following " ! " as a comment. However, the " !" is not a comment marker. It returns
the CLI to the global configuration level.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 101

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

NOTE
If you copy-and-paste a configuration into a management session, the CLI ignores the " ! " instead of
changing the CLI to the global CONFIG level. As a result, you might get different results if you copy-
and-paste a configuration instead of loading the configuration using TFTP.
• Make sure you enter each command at the correct CLI level. Since some commands have identical
forms at both the global CONFIG level and individual configuration levels, if the CLI response to the
configuration file results in the CLI entering a configuration level you did not intend, then you can
get unexpected results.
For example, if a trunk group is active on the device, and the configuration file contains a command to
disable STP on one of the secondary ports in the trunk group, the CLI rejects the commands to enter
the interface configuration level for the port and moves on to the next command in the file you are
loading. If the next command is a spanning-tree command whose syntax is valid at the global CONFIG
level as well as the interface configuration level, then the software applies the command globally. Here
is an example.
The configuration file contains these commands.

interface ethernet
2
no spanning-tree

The CLI responds like this.

device(config)#interface ethernet 2
Error - cannot configure secondary ports of a trunk
device(config)#no spanning-tree
device(config)#

• If the file contains commands that must be entered in a specific order, the commands must appear
in the file in the required order. For example, if you want to use the file to replace an IP address on
an interface, you must first remove the old address using "no" in front of the ip address command,
then add the new address. Otherwise, the CLI displays an error message and does not implement
the command. Here is an example.
The configuration file contains these commands.

interface ethernet 11
ip address 10.10.10.69/24

The running-config already has a command to add an address to port 11, so the CLI responds like
this.

device(config)#interface ethernet 11
device(config-if-e1000-11)#ip add 10.10.10.69/24
Error: can only assign one primary ip address per subnet
device(config-if-e1000-11)#

To successfully replace the address, enter commands into the file as follows.

interface ethernet
11
no ip address 10.20.20.69/24
ip address 10.10.10.69/24

This time, the CLI accepts the command, and no error message is displayed.

device(config)#interface ethernet 11
device(config-if-e1000-11)#no ip add 10.20.20.69/24

102 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Loading the configuration information into the running-config

device(config-if-e1000-111)#ip add 10.10.10.69/24

device(config-if-e1000-11)

• Always use the end command at the end of the file. The end command must appear on the last line
of the file, by itself.

Loading the configuration information into the running-config

To load the file from a TFTP server, use the following command:
copy tftp running-config ip-addr filename

NOTE
In the current FastIron release, the copy tftp running-config command merges only the access-lists
and mac-filters configuration from the configuration file on the TFTP server to the running configuration
on the device.

NOTE
If you are loading a configuration file that uses a truncated form of the CLI command access-list , the
software will not go into batch mode.
For example, the following command line will initiate batch mode.

access-list 131 permit host pc1 host pc2

The following command line will not initiate batch mode.

acc 131 permit host pc1 host pc2

Maximum file sizes for startup-config file and running-config

Each Brocade device has a maximum allowable size for the running-config and the startup-config file. If
you use TFTP to load additional information into a device running-config or startup-config file, it is
possible to exceed the maximum allowable size. If this occurs, you will not be able to save the
configuration changes.
The maximum size for the running-config and the startup-config file is 640K each.
To determine the size of a running-config or startup-config file, copy it to a TFTP server, then use the
directory services on the server to list the size of the copied file. To copy the running-config or startup-
config file to a TFTP server, use the following commands:
• Command to copy the running-config to a TFTP server:
‐ copy running-config tftp ip-addr filename
• Command to copy the startup-config file to a TFTP server:
‐ copy startup-config tftp ip-addr filename

Loading and saving configuration files with IPv6

This section describes the IPv6 copy command.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 103

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Using the IPv6 copy command

Using the IPv6 copy command

The copy command for IPv6 allows you to do the following:
• Copy a file from a specified source to an IPv6 TFTP server
• Copy a file from an IPv6 TFTP server to a specified destination

Copying a file to an IPv6 TFTP server

You can copy a file from the following sources to an IPv6 TFTP server:
• Flash memory
• Running configuration
• Startup configuration

Copying a file from flash memory

For example, to copy the primary or secondary boot image from the device flash memory to an IPv6
TFTP server, enter a command such as the following.

device#copy flash tftp 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 test.img secondary

This command copies the secondary boot image named test.img from flash memory to a TFTP server
with the IPv6 address of 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3.
Syntax: copy flash tftp ipv6-address source-file-name primary | secondary
The ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this address
in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The source-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file you want to copy to the IPv6 TFTP
server.
The primary keyword specifies the primary boot image, while the secondary keyword specifies the
secondary boot image.

Copying a file from the running or startup configuration

For example, to copy the running configuration to an IPv6 TFTP server, enter a command such as the
following.

device#copy running-config tftp 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 newrun.cfg

This command copies the running configuration to a TFTP server with the IPv6 address of
2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 and names the file on the TFTP server newrun.cfg.
Syntax: copy running-config | startup-config tftp ipv6-address destination-file-name
Specify the running-config keyword to copy the running configuration file to the specified IPv6 TFTP
server.
Specify the startup-config keyword to copy the startup configuration file to the specified IPv6 TFTP
server.
The tftp ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this
address in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The destination-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file that is copied to the IPv6 TFTP
server.

104 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Copying a file from an IPv6 TFTP server

Copying a file from an IPv6 TFTP server

You can copy a file from an IPv6 TFTP server to the following destinations:
• Flash memory
• Running configuration
• Startup configuration

Copying a file to flash memory

For example, to copy a boot image from an IPv6 TFTP server to the primary or secondary storage
location in the device flash memory, enter a command such as the following.

device#copy tftp flash 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 test.img secondary

This command copies a boot image named test.img from an IPv6 TFTP server with the IPv6 address of
2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 to the secondary storage location in the device flash memory.
Syntax: copy tftp flash ipv6-address source-file-name primary | secondary
The ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this address in
hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The source-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file you want to copy from the IPv6 TFTP
server.
The primary keyword specifies the primary storage location in the device flash memory, while the
secondary keyword specifies the secondary storage location in the device flash memory.

Copying a file to the running or startup configuration

For example, to copy a configuration file from an IPv6 TFTP server to the running or startup
configuration, enter a command such as the following.

device#copy tftp running-config 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 newrun.cfg overwrite

This command copies the newrun.cfg file from the IPv6 TFTP server and overwrites the running
configuration file with the contents of newrun.cfg.

NOTE
To activate this configuration, you must reload (reset) the device.

Syntax:copy tftp running-config | startup-config ipv6-address source-file-name [ overwrite ]

Specify the running-config keyword to copy the running configuration from the specified IPv6 TFTP
server.
The ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this address in
hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The source-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file that is copied from the IPv6 TFTP server.
The overwrite keyword specifies that the device should overwrite the current configuration file with the
copied file. If you do not specify this parameter, the device copies the file into the current running or
startup configuration but does not overwrite the current configuration.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 105

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IPv6 copy command

IPv6 copy command

The copy command for IPv6 allows you to do the following:
• Copy a primary or secondary boot image from flash memory to an IPv6 TFTP server.
• Copy the running configuration to an IPv6 TFTP server.
• Copy the startup configuration to an IPv6 TFTP server
• Upload various files from an IPv6 TFTP server.

Copying a primary or secondary boot Image from flash memory to an IPv6 TFTP server
For example, to copy the primary or secondary boot image from the device flash memory to an IPv6
TFTP server, enter a command such as the following.

device#copy flash primary tftp 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 primary.img

This command copies the primary boot image named primary.img from flash memory to a TFTP
server with the IPv6 address of 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3.
Syntax: copy flash primary | secondary tftp ipv6-address source-file-name
The primary keyword specifies the primary boot image, while the secondary keyword specifies the
secondary boot image.
The tftp ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this
address in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The source-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file you want to copy from flash memory.

Copying the running or startup configuration to an IPv6 TFTP server

For example, to copy a device running or startup configuration to an IPv6 TFTP server, enter a
command such as the following.

device#copy running-config tftp 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 bakrun.cfg

This command copies a device running configuration to a TFTP server with the IPv6 address of
2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 and names the destination file bakrun.cfg.
Syntax: copy running-config | startup-config tftp ipv6-address destination-file-name
Specify the running-config keyword to copy the device running configuration or the startup-config
keyword to copy the device startup configuration.
The tftp ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this
address in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The destination-file-name parameter specifies the name of the running configuration that is copied to
the IPv6 TFTP server.

IPv6 TFTP server file upload

You can upload the following files from an IPv6 TFTP server:
• Primary boot image.
• Secondary boot image.
• Running configuration.
• Startup configuration.

106 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Uploading a primary or secondary boot image from an IPv6 TFTP server

Uploading a primary or secondary boot image from an IPv6 TFTP server

For example, to upload a primary or secondary boot image from an IPv6 TFTP server to a device flash
memory, enter a command such as the following.

device#copy tftp 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 primary.img flash primary

This command uploads the primary boot image named primary.img from a TFTP server with the IPv6
address of 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 to the device primary storage location in flash memory.
Syntax:copy tftp ipv6-address source-file-name flash primary | secondary
The tftp ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this
address in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The source-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file you want to copy from the TFTP server.
The primary keyword specifies the primary location in flash memory, while the secondary keyword
specifies the secondary location in flash memory.

Uploading a running or startup configuration from an IPv6 TFTP server

For example to upload a running or startup configuration from an IPv6 TFTP server to a device, enter a
command such as the following.

device#copy tftp 2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 newrun.cfg running-config

This command uploads a file named newrun.cfg from a TFTP server with the IPv6 address of
2001:DB8:e0ff:7837::3 to the device.
Syntax:copy tftp ipv6-address source-file-name running-config|startup-config
The tftp ipv6-address parameter specifies the address of the TFTP server. You must specify this
address in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as documented in RFC 2373.
The source-file-name parameter specifies the name of the file you want to copy from the TFTP server.
Specify the running-config keyword to upload the specified file from the IPv6 TFTP server to the
device. The device copies the specified file into the current running configuration but does not overwrite
the current configuration.
Specify the startup-config keyword to upload the specified file from the IPv6 TFTP server to the
device. The the device copies the specified file into the current startup configuration but does not
overwrite the current configuration.

Using SNMP to save and load configuration information

You can use a third-party SNMP management application such as HP OpenView to save and load a
configuration on a Brocade device. To save and load configuration information using HP OpenView, use
the following procedure.

NOTE
The syntax shown in this section assumes that you have installed HP OpenView in the "/usr" directory.
1. Configure a read-write community string on the Brocade device, if one is not already configured. To
configure a read-write community string, enter the following command from the global CONFIG level
of the CLI.
snmp-server community string ro|rw

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 107

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Erasing image and configuration files

where string is the community string and can be up to 32 characters long.

2. On the Brocade device, enter the following command from the global CONFIG level of the CLI.
no snmp-server pw-check
This command disables password checking for SNMP set requests. If a third-party SNMP
management application does not add a password to the password field when it sends SNMP set
requests to a Brocade device, by default the Brocade device rejects the request.
3. From the command prompt in the UNIX shell, enter the following command.
/usr/OV/bin/snmpset -c rw-community-string device-ip-addr
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.5.0
a tftp-ip-addr 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.8.0 s config-file-name
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2.1.9.0 integer command-integer
where
rw-community-string is a read-write community string configured on the Brocade device.
fdry-ip-addr is the IP address of the Brocade device.
tftp-ip-addr is the TFTP server IP address.
config-file-name is the configuration file name.
command-integer is one of the following:
20 - Upload the startup-config file from the flash memory of the Brocade device to the TFTP server.
21 - Download a startup-config file from a TFTP server to the flash memory of the Brocade device.
22 - Upload the running-config from the flash memory of the Brocade device to the TFTP server.
23 - Download a configuration file from a TFTP server into the running-config of the Brocade device.

NOTE
Option 23 adds configuration information to the running-config on the device, and does not replace
commands. If you want to replace configuration information in the device, use "no" forms of the
configuration commands to remove the configuration information, then use configuration commands
to create the configuration information you want. Follow the guidelines in Dynamic configuration
loading on page 101.

Erasing image and configuration files

To erase software images or configuration files, use the commands described below. These
commands are valid at the Privileged EXEC level of the CLI:
• erase flash primary erases the image stored in primary flash of the system.
• erase flash secondary erases the image stored in secondary flash of the system.
• erase startup-config erases the configuration stored in the startup configuration file; however, the
running configuration remains intact until system reboot.

108 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System reload scheduling

System reload scheduling

In addition to reloading the system manually, you can configure the Brocade device to reload itself at a
specific time or after a specific amount of time has passed.

NOTE
The scheduled reload feature requires the system clock. Refer to Network Time Protocol Version 4
(NTPv4) on page 35.

Reloading at a specific time

To schedule a system reload for a specific time, use the reload at command. For example, to schedule
a system reload from the primary flash module for 6:00:00 AM, April 1, 2003, enter the following
command at the global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device#reload at 06:00:00 04-01-03

Syntax: reload at hh:mm:ss mm-dd-yy [ primary | secondary ]

hh:mm:ss is the hours, minutes, and seconds.
mm-dd-yy is the month, day, and year.
primary | secondary specifies whether the reload is to occur from the primary code flash module or the
secondary code flash module. The default is primary .

Reloading after a specific amount of time

To schedule a system reload to occur after a specific amount of time has passed on the system clock,
use reload after command. For example, to schedule a system reload from the secondary flash one
day and 12 hours later, enter the following command at the global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device#reload after 01:12:00 secondary

Syntax: reload after dd:hh:mm [ primary | secondary ]

dd:hh:mm is the number of days, hours, and minutes.
primary | secondary specifies whether the reload is to occur from the primary code flash module or the
secondary code flash module.

Displaying the amount of time remaining beforea scheduled reload

To display how much time is remaining before a scheduled system reload, enter the following command
from any level of the CLI.

device#show reload

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 109

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Canceling a scheduled reload

Canceling a scheduled reload

To cancel a scheduled system reload using the CLI, enter the following command at the global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device#reload cancel

Diagnostic error codes and remedies for TFTP transfers

This section describes the error messages associated with TFTP transfer of configuration files,
software images or flash images to or from a Brocade device.

Error Message Explanation and action

code

1 Flash read preparation A flash error occurred during the download.

failed.
Retry the download. If it fails again, contact customer support.

2 Flash read failed.

3 Flash write preparation

failed.

4 Flash write failed.

5 TFTP session timeout. TFTP failed because of a time out.

Check IP connectivity and make sure the TFTP server is running.

6 TFTP out of buffer space. The file is larger than the amount of room on the device or TFTP server.
If you are copying an image file to flash, first copy the other image to
your TFTP server, then delete it from flash. (Use the erase flash ... CLI
command at the Privileged EXEC level to erase the image in the flash.)
If you are copying a configuration file to flash, edit the file to remove
unnecessary information, then try again.

7 TFTP busy, only one Another TFTP transfer is active on another CLI session, or Web
TFTP session can be management session, or network management system.
active.
Wait, then retry the transfer.

8 File type check failed. You accidentally attempted to copy the incorrect image code into the
system. For example, you might have tried to copy a Chassis image into
a Compact device.
Retry the transfer using the correct image.

16 TFTP remote - general The TFTP configuration has an error. The specific error message
error. describes the error.
Correct the error, then retry the transfer.
17 TFTP remote - no such
file.

110 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

Error Message Explanation and action

code

18 TFTP remote - access

violation.

19 TFTP remote - disk full.

20 TFTP remote - illegal

operation.

21 TFTP remote - unknown

transfer ID.

22 TFTP remote - file

already exists.

23 TFTP remote - no such

user.

This section describes the error messages associated with the TFTP transfer of PoE firmware file to a
Brocade device.

Message Explanation and action

Firmware TFTP timeout. TFTP failed because of a time out.

Check IP connectivity and make sure the TFTP server is running.

Firmware is not valid for this Each PoE firmware file delivered by Brocade is meant to be used on the specific
platform. platform only. If the file is used on a platform for which it is not meant, then this error
message will display.
Download the correct file, then retry the transfer.

Firmware is not valid for the Each PoE firmware file delivered by Brocade is meant to be used on the specific
IEEE 802.3at (PoE-Plus) platform only. If the file is used on a platform for which it is not meant, then this error
controller type. message will display.
Download the correct file, then retry the transfer.

Firmware is not valid for the

IEEE 802.3af PoE controller
type.

Firmware type cannot be Each PoE firmware file delivered by Brocade is meant to be used on the specific
detected from the firmware platform and the specific PoE controller on the specified module. If the file is used for
content. a platform for which it is meant, but the PoE controller is not same then this error
message will display.
TFTP File not Valid for PoE Download the correct file, then retry the transfer.
Controller Type.

Firmware tftp remote file The TFTP server needs read access on the PoE firmware file. Check the
access failed. permissions on the file, then try again.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 111

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network connectivity testing

Network connectivity testing

After you install the network cables, you can test network connectivity to other devices by pinging
those devices. You also can observe the LEDs related to network connection and perform trace
routes.
For more information about observing LEDs, refer to the Brocade FastIron X Series Chassis Hardware
Installation Guide and the Brocade FastIron Compact Switch Hardware Installation Guide.

Pinging an IPv4 address

NOTE
This section describes the IPv4ping command. For details about IPv6 ping , refer to the FastIron
Ethernet Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide .

To verify that a Brocade device can reach another device through the network, enter a command such
as the following at any level of the CLI on the Brocade device:

device> ping 10.33.4.7

Syntax:ping ip-addr | hostname [source ip-addr ] [count num ] [ timeout msec ] [ ttl num] [sizebyte]
[quiet][numeric][no-fragment][verify][data1-to-4 byte hex ][brief[max-print-per-sec number]]

NOTE
If the device is a Brocade Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch, you can use the host name only if you
have already enabled the Domain Name Server (DNS) resolver feature on the device from which you
are sending the ping. Refer to "IP Configuration" chapter in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Layer 3
Routing Configuration Guide .

The required parameter is the IP address or host name of the device.

The source ip-addr specifies an IP address to be used as the origin of the ping packets.
The count num parameter specifies how many ping packets the device sends. You can specify from 1
- 4294967296. The default is 1.
The timeout msec parameter specifies how many milliseconds the Brocade device waits for a reply
from the pinged device. You can specify a timeout from 1 - 4294967296 milliseconds. The default is
5000 (5 seconds).
The ttl num parameter specifies the maximum number of hops. You can specify a TTL from 1 - 255.
The default is 64.
The size byte parameter specifies the size of the ICMP data portion of the packet. This is the payload
and does not include the header. You can specify from 0 - 10000. The default is 16.
The no-fragment parameter turns on the "don’t fragment" bit in the IP header of the ping packet. This
option is disabled by default.
The quiet parameter hides informational messages such as a summary of the ping parameters sent to
the device and instead only displays messages indicating the success or failure of the ping. This
option is disabled by default.
The verify parameter verifies that the data in the echo packet (the reply packet) is the same as the
data in the echo request (the ping). By default the device does not verify the data.

112 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Tracing an IPv4 route

The data 1 - 4 byte hex parameter lets you specify a specific data pattern for the payload instead of the
default data pattern, "abcd", in the packet data payload. The pattern repeats itself throughout the ICMP
message (payload) portion of the packet.

NOTE
For numeric parameter values, the CLI does not check that the value you enter is within the allowed
range. Instead, if you do exceed the range for a numeric value, the software rounds the value to the
nearest valid value.
The brief parameter causes ping test characters to be displayed. The following ping test characters are
supported:
! Indicates that a reply was received.
. Indicates that the network server timed out while waiting for a reply.
U Indicates that a destination unreachable error PDU was received.
I Indicates that the user interrupted ping.

NOTE
The number of ! characters displayed may not correspond to the number of successful replies by the
ping command. Similarly, the number of . characters displayed may not correspond to the number of
server timeouts that occurred while waiting for a reply. The "success" or "timeout" results are shown in
the display as "Success rate is XX percent (X/Y)".

The optional max-print-per-sec number parameter specifies the maximum number of target responses
the Brocade device can display per second while in brief mode. You can specify from 0 - 2047. The
default is 511.

NOTE
If you address the ping to the IP broadcast address and network address, the device lists the first four
responses to the ping.

NOTE
On 48GC modules in non-jumbo mode, the maximum size of ping packets is 1486 bytes and the
maximum frame size of tagged traffic is no larger than 1581 bytes.

Tracing an IPv4 route

NOTE
This section describes the IPv4traceroute command. For details about IPv6traceroute , refer to the
FastIron Ethernet Switch Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide .

Use the traceroute command to determine the path through which a Brocade device can reach another
device. Enter the command at any level of the CLI.
The CLI displays trace route information for each hop as soon as the information is received.
Traceroute requests display all responses to a given TTL. In addition, if there are multiple equal-cost
routes to the destination, the Brocade device displays up to three responses by default.

device> traceroute 10.33.4.7

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 113

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IEEE 802.3ah EFM-OAM

Syntax: traceroute host-ip-addr [ maxttl value ] [ minttl value ] [ numeric ] [ timeout value ] [
source-ip ip-addr ]
Possible and default values are as follows.
minttl value - Minimum TTL (hops) value: Possible values are 1 through 255. Default value is 1
second.
maxttl value - Maximum TTL (hops) value: Possible values are 1 through 255. Default value is 30
seconds.
timeout value - Possible values are 1 through 120. Default value is 2 seconds.
numeric - Changes the display to list the devices by their IP addresses instead of their names.
source-ip ip-addr - Specifies an IP address to be used as the origin for the traceroute.

IEEE 802.3ah EFM-OAM

The IEEE 802.3ah Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM) standard specifies the protocols and Ethernet
interfaces for using Ethernet over access links as a first-mile technology.
Using the Ethernet in the First Mile solution, you will gain broadcast Internet access, in addition to
services, such as Layer 2 transparent LAN services, voice services over Ethernet Access networks,
and video and multicast applications, reinforced by security and Quality of Service control in order to
build a scalable network.
The in-band management specified by IEEE 802.3ah EFM standard defines the operations,
administration and maintenance (OAM) mechanism needed for the advanced monitoring and
maintenance of Ethernet links in the first mile. The OAM capabilities facilitate network operation and
troubleshooting. Basic 802.3 frames convey OAM data between two ends of the physical link. EFM-
OAM is optional and can be disabled on each physical port.
When OAM is present, two connected OAM sub-layers exchange protocol data units (OAMPDUs).
OAMPDUs are standard-size frames that can be sent at a maximum rate of 10 frames per second.
This limitation is necessary for reducing the impact on the usable bandwidth. It is possible to send
each frame several times in order to increase the probability of reception. A combination of the
destination MAC address, the Ethernet type/length field and subtype allow distinguishing OAMPDU
frames from other frames.
OAM functionality is designed to provide reliable service assurance mechanisms for both provider and
customer networks.

Network deployment use case

The data-link layer OAM is targeted at last-mile applications, and service providers can use it for
demarcation point OAM services.
Ethernet last-mile applications require robust infrastructure that is both passive and active. 802.3ah
OAM aims to solve validation and testing problems in such an infrastructure.
Using the Ethernet demarcation, service providers can additionally manage the remote device without
utilizing an IP layer. This can be done by using link-layer SNMP counters, request and reply, loopback
testing, and other techniques.

114 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EFM-OAM protocol

EFM-OAM protocol
The functionality of the EFM-OAM can be summarized under the following categories:
• Discovery: Discovery is the mechanism to detect the presence of an OAM sub-layer on the remote
device. During the discovery process, information about OAM entities, capabilities, and
configurations are exchanged.
• Remote fault detection: Provides a mechanism for an OAM entity to convey error conditions to its
peer by way of a flag in the OAMPDUs.
• Remote loopback: This mechanism is used to troubleshoot networks and to isolate problem
segments in a large network by sending test segments.

Discovery
Discovery is the first phase of EFM-OAM. At this phase, EFM-OAM identifies network devices along
with their OAM capabilities. The Discovery process relies on the Information OAMPDUs. During
discovery, the following information is advertised through the TLVs within periodic information
OAMPDUs:
• OAM capabilities: Advertises the capabilities of the local OAM entity. Using this information, a peer
can determine what functions are supported and accessible (for example, loopback capability).
• OAM mode: The OAM mode is conveyed to the remote OAM entity. The mode can be either active or
passive, and can also be used to determine a device’s functionality.
• OAMPDU configuration: This configuration includes the maximum OAMPDU size to delivery. In
combination with the limited rate of 10 frames per second, this information can be used to limit the
bandwidth allocated to OAM traffic.

Timers

Two configurable timers control the protocol, one determining the rate at which OAMPDUs are to be
sent, and the second controlling the rate at which OAMPDUs are to be received to maintain the
Discovery procedure from resetting.
• The timer should generate PDUs in the range of 1 through 10 PDUs per second. The default value is
1 PDU per second.
• The Hold timer assumes the peer is dead if no packet is received for a period of 1 through 10
seconds. The default value is 5 seconds.

Flags

Included in every OAMPDU is a flags field, which contains, besides other information, the status of the
discovery process. There are three possible values for the status:
• Discovering: Discovery is in progress.
• Stable: Discovery is completed. Once aware of this, the remote OAM entity can start sending any
type of OAMPDU.
• Unsatisfied: When there are mismatches in the OAM configuration that prevent OAM from completing
the discovery, the discovery process is considered unsatisfied and cannot continue.

Process overview
The discovery process allows local Data Terminating Entity (DTE) to detect OAM on a remote DTE.
Once OAM support is detected, both ends of the link exchange state and configuration information
(such as mode, PDU size, loopback support, and so on). If both DTEs are satisfied with the settings,

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 115

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Rules for active mode

OAM is enabled on the link. However, the loss of a link or a failure to receive OAMPDUs for five
seconds may cause the discovery process the start over again.
DTEs may be in either active or passive mode. Active mode DTEs instigate OAM communications and
can issue queries and commands to a remote device. Passive mode DTEs generally wait for the peer
device to instigate OAM communications and respond to, but do not instigate, commands and queries.
Rules of what DTEs in active or passive mode can do are discussed in the following sections.

Rules for active mode

A DTE in active mode:
• Initiates the OAM Discovery process
• Sends information PDUs
• May send event notification PDUs
• May send variable request or response PDUs
• May send loopback control PDUs

Exceptions
• A DTE in active mode does not respond to variable request PDUs from DTEs in passive mode
• A DTE in active mode does not react to loopback control PDUs from DTEs in passive mode

Rules for passive mode

A DTE in passive mode:
• Waits for the remote device to initiate the Discovery process
• Sends information PDUs
• May send event notification PDUs
• May respond to variable request PDUs
• May react to received loopback control PDUs
• Is not permitted to send variable request or loopback control OAMPDUs

Remote failure indication

Faults in Ethernet that are caused by slowly deteriorating quality are more difficult to detect than
completely disconnected links. A flag in the OAMPDU allows an OAM entity to send failure conditions
to its peer. The failure conditions are defined as follows:
• Dying gasp: This condition is detected when the receiver goes down. The dying gasp condition is
considered as unrecoverable. The conditions for a dying gasp condition include:
‐ Reload command (Warm reboot)
‐ Boot system flash pri/sec command (Warm reboot)
‐ Failure on the box (Cold reboot)
• Critical event: On any critical event, the DTE will set the critical event bit in the information
OAMPDU. The device will generate critical event in the following cases:
‐ When the temperature of the box breaches the warning/shutdown threshold
‐ Fan failure

116 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Remote loopback

Remote loopback
An OAM entity can put its remote entity into loopback mode using a loopback control OAMPDU. This
helps you ensure quality of links during installation or when troubleshooting. In loopback mode, each
frame received is transmitted back on that same port except for OAMPDUs and pause frames. The
periodic exchange of OAMPDUs must continue while in the loopback state to maintain the OAM
session. The loopback command is acknowledged by responding with an information OAMPDU with the
loopback state indicated in the state field.

NOTE
Brocade recommends to ensure that any higher layer protocol running over the local and remote
loopback ports does not block the interfaces in the VLAN on which loopback traffic testing is being
performed.

NOTE
Ethernet loopback and EFM-OAM remote loopback cannot be configured on the same interface.

NOTE
If EEE is enabled globally, port ceases to be in the remote loopback mode.

EFM-OAM error disable recovery

The error disable recovery feature enables the device to recover the EFM-OAM interface from the error-
disabled state caused by reception of a critical event from the remote device. Enter the errdisable
recovery cause loam-critical-event command to enable automatic recovery of ports from error-
disabled state.
The ports will recover automatically from the error-disabled state upon the expiry of the error disable
recovery timeout value.

Configuring EFM-OAM
The EFM-OAM configuration includes the following procedural steps to enable EFM-OAM on an
interface or multiple interfaces for advanced monitoring and maintenance of Ethernet network.
1. Enter the configure terminal command to enter global configuration mode.
device# configure terminal
2. Enter the link-oam command to enable the EFM-OAM protocol and enter EFM-OAM protocol
configuration mode.
device(config)# link-oam
device(config-link-oam)#
3. Enter the timeout command to configure the time in seconds for which the local Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) waits to receive OAM Protocol Data Units (OAM-PDUs) from the remote entity.
device(config-link-oam)# timeout 5
4. Enter the pdu-rate command to configure the number of PDUs to be transmitted per second by the
DTE.
device(config-link-oam)# pdu-rate 2
5. Enter the ethernet command to enable EFM-OAM on an interface.
EFM-OAM can be enabled on more than one interface. You can also specify a range of interfaces to
enable EFM-OAM on multiple interfaces.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 117

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying OAM information

You can set the operational mode of EFM-OAM as Active or Passive.

• Enter the ethernet stackid/slot/port active command to set the EFM-OAM operational mode as
active on an interface.
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/3 active
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/4 active
• Enter the ethernet stackid/slot/port to stackid/slot/port active command to set the EFM-OAM
operational mode as active on a range of interfaces.
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/5 to 1/1/8 active
• Enter the ethernet stackid/slot/port passive command to set the EFM-OAM operational mode as
passive on an interface.
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 2/1/1 passive
• Enter the ethernet stackid/slot/port to stackid/slot/port passive command to set the EFM-OAM
operational mode as passive on a range of interfaces.
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 2/1/1 to 2/1/8 passive

6. (Optional) Enter the ethernet stackid/slot/port allow-loopback command to enable the interface to
respond to a loopback request from the remote device.
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/3 allow-loopback
7. (Optional) Enter the ethernet stackid/slot/port remote-failure command to set the device for the
remote-failure action to be taken upon the reception of critical event information on the interface.
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/3 remote-failure critical-event action
block-interface
8. (Optional) Enter the remote-loopback ethernet stackid/slot/port command to start or stop the
remote loopback procedure on a remote device.
device(config-link-oam)# remote-loopback ethernet 2/1/1 start
device(config-link-oam)# remote-loopback ethernet 2/1/1 stop

The following output shows an example of EFM-OAM configuration.

device# configure terminal
device(config)# link-oam
device(config-link-oam)# timeout 5
device(config-link-oam)# pdu-rate 2
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/3 active
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/3 allow-loopback
device(config-link-oam)# remote-loopback ethernet 2/1/1 start
device(config-link-oam)# ethernet 1/1/3 remote-failure critical-event action block-
interface

Displaying OAM information

The following sample output of the show link-oam info command displays the OAM information on all
OAM-enabled ports.

device (config)# show link-oam info

Ethernet Link Status OAM Status Mode Local Stable Remote Stable
1/1/1 up up active satisfied satisfied
1/1/2 up up passive satisfied satisfied
1/1/3 up up active satisfied satisfied
1/1/4 up init passive unsatisfied unsatisfied
1/1/5 down down passive unsatisfied unsatisfied
1/1/6 down down passive unsatisfied unsatisfied
1/1/7 down down passive unsatisfied unsatisfied

The following sample output of the show link-oam info detail command displays detailed OAM
information on all OAM-enabled ports.
device(config)# show link-oam info detail
OAM information for Ethernet port: 10/1/1
+link-oam mode: passive
+link status: down
+oam status: down
Local information
multiplexer action: forward

118 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

parse action: forward

stable: unsatisfied
state: linkFault
loopback state: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: false
link-fault: true
Remote information
multiplexer action: forward
parse action: forward
stable: unsatisfied
loopback support: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: true
link-fault: false

OAM information for Ethernet port: 10/1/3

+link-oam mode: active
+link status: up
+oam status: down
Local information
multiplexer action: forward
parse action: forward
stable: unsatisfied
state: activeSend
loopback state: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: false
link-fault: false
Remote information
multiplexer action: forward
parse action: forward
stable: unsatisfied
loopback support: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: false
link-fault: false

OAM information for Ethernet port: 10/1/4

+link-oam mode: active
+link status: up
+oam status: up
Local information
multiplexer action: forward
parse action: forward
stable: satisfied
state: up
loopback state: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: false
link-fault: false
Remote information
multiplexer action: forward
parse action: forward
stable: satisfied
loopback support: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: true
link-fault: false

The following sample output of the show link-oam info detail ethernet command displays detailed
OAM information on a specific Ethernet port.
device(config)# show link-oam info detail ethernet 1/1/3
OAM information for Ethernet port: 1/1/3
+link-oam mode: active
+link status: up
+oam status: up
Local information
multiplexer action: forward
parse action: forward
stable: satisfied
state: up
loopback state: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: false
link-fault: false
Remote information

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 119

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying OAM statistics

multiplexer action: forward

parse action: forward
stable: satisfied
loopback support: disabled
dying-gasp: false
critical-event: false
link-fault: false

Displaying OAM statistics

The following sample output of the show link-oam statistics command displays the OAM statistics on
all OAM-enabled ports.
device(config)# show link-oam statistics
Ethernet Tx Pdus Rx Pdus
10/1/1 377908 377967
10/1/3 400 44
10/1/4 400 385
10/1/5 400 385
10/1/6 400 385

The following sample output of the show link-oam statistics detail command displays detailed OAM
statistics on all OAM-enabled ports.
device(config)# show link-oam statistics detail
OAM statistics for Ethernet port: 10/1/1
Tx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 377908
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 0
dying-gasp records: 0
Rx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 377967
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
loopback control OAMPDUs dropped: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
unsupported OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 377395
dying-gasp records: 0
discarded TLVs: 0
unrecognized TLVs: 0

OAM statistics for Ethernet port: 10/1/3

Tx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 427
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 0
dying-gasp records: 0
Rx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 44
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
loopback control OAMPDUs dropped: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
unsupported OAMPDUs: 0

120 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 0
dying-gasp records: 0
discarded TLVs: 0
unrecognized TLVs: 0

OAM statistics for Ethernet port: 10/1/4

Tx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 428
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 0
dying-gasp records: 0
Rx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 413
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
loopback control OAMPDUs dropped: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
unsupported OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 350
dying-gasp records: 0
discarded TLVs: 0
unrecognized TLVs: 0

The following sample output of the show link-oam statistics detail ethernet command displays
detailed OAM statistics on a specific Ethernet port.
device(config)# show link-oam statistics detail ethernet 1/1/3
OAM statistics for Ethernet port: 1/1/3
Tx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 122474
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 0
dying-gasp records: 0
Rx statistics
information OAMPDUs: 94691
loopback control OAMPDUs: 0
loopback control OAMPDUs dropped: 0
variable request OAMPDUs: 0
variable response OAMPDUs: 0
unique event notification OAMPDUs: 0
duplicate event notification OAMPDUs: 0
organization specific OAMPDUs: 0
unsupported OAMPDUs: 0
link-fault records: 0
critical-event records: 0
dying-gasp records: 0
discarded TLVs: 0
unrecognized TLVs: 0

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 121

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 EFM-OAM syslog messages

EFM-OAM syslog messages

When EFM-OAM is enabled on an interface, the syslog messages in the following table are generated
when the link goes up or down, or when loopback mode is entered or cleared on an interface.

TABLE 12 EFM-OAM syslog messages

Event Syslog output

Port 1 is LOAM logically Link-OAM: Logical link on interface Ethernet 1/1/1 is up.
Up

Port 1 is LOAM logically Link-OAM: Logical link on interface Ethernet 1/1/1 is down.
Down

Port 1 entered remote Link-OAM: Link entered remote loopback on ethernet 1/1/1
Loopback mode

Port 1 cleared remote Link-OAM: Link cleared remtote loopback on ethernet 1/1/1
Loopback mode

Port 1 entered local Link-OAM: Link entered local loopback on ethernet 1/1/1
Loopback mode

Port 1 cleared local Link-OAM: Link cleared local loopback on ethernet 1/1/1
Loopback mode

Dying gasp event on port Link-OAM: Link received dying-gasp event on ethernet 1/1/1
1

Critical event on port 1 Link-OAM: Link received critical event on ethernet 1/1/1

Hitless management on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600

Hitless management is supported on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600 chassis with dual management
modules. It is a high-availability feature set that ensures no loss of data traffic during the following
events:
• Management module failure or role change
• Software failure
• Addition or removal of modules
• Operating system upgrade
During such events, the standby management module takes over the active role and the system
continues to forward traffic seamlessly, as if no failure or topology change has occurred. In software
releases that do not support hitless management, events such as these could cause a system reboot,
resulting in an impact to data traffic.
The following Hitless management features are supported:
Hitless Switchover - A manually controlled (CLI-driven) switchover of the active and standby
management modules without any packet loss to the services and protocols that are supported by
Hitless management. A switchover is activated by the CLI command switch-over-active-role .
Hitless Failover - An automatic, forced switchover of the active and standby management modules
because of a failure or abnormal termination of the active management module. In the event of a
failover, the active management module abruptly leaves and the standby management module
immediately assumes the active role. Like a switchover, a failover occurs without any packet loss to

122 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Benefits of hitless management

hitless-supported services and protocols. Unlike a switchover, a failover generally happens without
warning.
Hitless Operating System (OS) Upgrade - An operating system upgrade and controlled switchover
without any packet loss to the services and protocols that are supported by Hitless management. The
services and protocols supported by Hitless management are listed in this section. Hitless failover and
hitless switchover are disabled by default.

Benefits of hitless management

The benefits of Hitless management include the following:
• The standby management module (the module that takes over the active role) and all interface
modules in the chassis are not reset
• Existing data traffic flows continue uninterrupted with no traffic loss
• Port link states remain UP for the duration of the hitless management event
• System configurations applied through Console/SNMP/HTTP interfaces remain intact
• Hitless switchover can be used by a system administrator, for example, to perform maintenance on a
management module that has been functioning as the active management module. Some
advantages of a hitless switchover over a hitless software reload are:
‐ A manual switchover is quicker, since the standby module does not have to reboot.
‐ Switched traffic through the Ethernet interfaces on the standby management module is not
interrupted.

NOTE
All traffic going through Ethernet interfaces (if present) on the management modules will be interrupted
during a hitless OS upgrade. This is because both management modules must be reloaded with the
new image. This applies to hitless OS upgrade only. It does not apply to hitless switchover or failover,
which does not interrupt traffic going through Ethernet interfaces on the standby management module
(the module that takes over the active role).

Supported protocols and services for hitless management events

The following table lists the services and protocols that are supported by Hitless management, and also
highlights the impact of Hitless management events (switchover, failover, and OS upgrade) to the
system’s major functions. The services and protocols that are not listed may be disrupted, but will
resume normal operation once the new active management module is back up and running.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 123

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Operations, Administration, and Maintenance

TABLE 13 Hitless-supported services and protocols - FSX 800 and FSX 1600

Traffic type Supported protocols and services Impact

Layer 2 switched • 802.1p and 802.1Q Layer 2 switched traffic is not impacted
traffic, including • 802.3ad - LACP during a Hitless management event. All
unicast and multicast • 802.3af - PoE existing switched traffic flows continue
uninterrupted.
+ • 802.3at - PoE+
• DSCP honoring and Diffserv New switched flows are not learned by the
System-level FastIron switch during the switchover
• Dual-mode VLAN
+ • IGMP v1, v2, and v3 snooping process and are flooded to the VLAN
members in hardware. After the new active
Layer 4 • IPv4 ACLs
management module becomes operational,
• IPv6 ACLs new switched flows are learned and
• Layer 2 switching (VLAN and 802.1Q-in- forwarded accordingly. The Layer 2 control
Q) protocol states are not interrupted during the
• MLD v1 and v2 snooping switchover process.
• MRP
Configured ACLs, PBR or GRE & IPv6 to
• Multiple spanning tree (MSTP) IPv4 Tunnels will operate in a hitless
• Physical port/link state manner.
• PIM SM snooping
• Port mirroring and monitoring
• Port trunking
• Rapid spanning tree (RSTP)
• Spanning tree (STP)
• ToS-based QoS
• Policy Based Routing
• Traffic policies
• UDLD
• VSRP

Layer 3 IPv4 routed • BGP4 Layer 3 routed traffic for supported protocols
traffic • IPv4 unicast forwarding is not impacted during a Hitless
• OSPFv2 management event.
• OSPFv2 with ECMP Other Layer 3 protocols that are not
• Static routes supported will be interrupted during the
• IPv4 PIM (IPv4 non-stop multicast switchover or failover.
routing needs to be enabled for IPv4 PIM
If BGP4 graceful restart or OSPF graceful
to be hitless.)
restart is enabled, it will be gracefully
• VRRP restarted and traffic will converge to
• VRRP-E normalcy after the new active module
• GRE becomes operational.
• IPv6 to IPv4 Tunnels
Configured ACLs, PBR or GRE & IPv6 to
IPv4 Tunnels will operate in a hitless
manner.

124 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hitless management configuration notes and feature limitations

TABLE 13 Hitless-supported services and protocols - FSX 800 and FSX 1600 (Continued)

Traffic type Supported protocols and services Impact

Layer 3 IPv6 routed • BGP4+ Layer 3 routed traffic for supported protocols
traffic • IPv6 unicast forwarding is not impacted during a Hitless
• OSPFv3 management event. Traffic will converge to
normalcy after the new active module
• OSPFv3 with ECMP
becomes operational.
• Static routes
• VRRP Other Layer 3 protocols that are not
• VRRP-E supported will be interrupted during the
switchover or failover.
If BGP4+ graceful restart or OSPF graceful
restart / OSPFv3 NSR is enabled, it will be
gracefully restarted and traffic will converge
to normalcy after the new active module
becomes operational.
Configured ACLs will operate in a hitless
manner.

Management traffic N/A All existing management sessions (SNMP,

TELNET, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TFTP, SSH
etc.), are interrupted during the switchover
or failover process. All such sessions are
terminated and can be re-established after
the new Active Controller takes over.

Security • 802.1X, including use with dynamic Supported security protocols and services
ACLs and VLANs are not impacted during a switchover or
• IPv4 ACLs failover.
• IPv6 ACLs
• DHCP snooping
• Dynamic ARP inspection NOTE
• EAP with RADIUS If 802.1X and multi-device port
• IP source guard authentication are enabled together on the
• Multi-device port authentication, same port, both will be impacted during a
including use with dynamic ACLs and switchover or failover. Hitless support for
VLANs these features applies to ports with 802.1X
only or multi-device port authentication only.

Configured ACLs will operate in a hitless

manner, meaning the system will continue
to permit and deny traffic during the
switchover or failover process.

Other services to • AAA Supported protocols and services are not

Management • DHCP impacted during a switchover or failover.
• sFlow DNS lookups will continue after a switchover
• SNMP v1, v2, and v3 or failover. This information is not
• SNMP traps synchronized.
• NTPv4
Ping traffic will be minimally impacted.
• Traceroute

Hitless management configuration notes and feature limitations

The following limitations apply to hitless management support.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 125

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hitless reload or switchover requirements and limitations

• All traffic going through Ethernet interfaces (if present) on the management modules will be
interrupted during a hitless OS upgrade. This is because both management modules must be
reloaded with the new image. This applies to hitless OS upgrade only. It does not apply to hitless
switchover or failover, which does not interrupt traffic going through Ethernet interfaces on the
standby management module (the module that takes over the active role).
• Static and dynamic multi-slot trunks will flap during a hitless switchover if any of the trunk port
members reside on the management module.
• Layer 3 multicast traffic is not supported by Hitless management.

Hitless reload or switchover requirements and limitations

The section describes the design limitation on devices with the following configuration:
• 0-port management modules
• One or more third generation line cards
For hitless reload or switch-over-active-role to succeed, the following requirements and limitations
must be met:
• Hitless reload is not allowed from Switch code when the primary image is in Router code and boot
primary is a part of the configuration.
• The standby management module must be up and in an "OK {Enabled}" state.
• A configuration requiring a reload must not be pending.
• A hitless-reload must not have already been issued on the previous active management module.
• POE firmware must not be in progress.
• The SXR running configuration must not be classified as too large (greater than 512KB).
• A TFTP session must not be in progress.
• An image sync session must not be in progress.
• The current active management card cannot have a memory utilization of greater than 90% of
available memory.
• A line card hotswap must not be in progress.
If any of these conditions are not met, an appropriate error message is printed to the console and
hitless-reload or switch-over will not succeed.
With following steps, after switchover, the new standby goes into continuous reload state:
1. SXL box is running with build "x"
2. Perform copy tftp of build "x+1" and wait for both active and standby to sync.
3. Execute switch-over-active-role.
With above step, the new active comes up but the new standby tries to load the primary image "x+1"
and due to this there is image sync issue and new standby goes to continuous reload state without
recovery. Hence, it is a limitation that after copy tftp operation to primary, switch-over-active-role
operation should be avoided.

What happens during a Hitless switchover or failover

This section describes the internal events that enable a controlled or forced switchover (failover) to
take place in a hitless manner, as well as the events that occur during the switchover.

Separate data and control planes

The FSX 800 and FSX 1600 management modules have separate data and control planes. The data
plane forwards traffic between the switch fabric modules and all of the Interface modules in the

126 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Real-time synchronization between management modules

chassis. The control plane carries traffic that is destined for the CPU of the active management module.
Control plane traffic includes the following:
• Management traffic
• Control protocol traffic
• In some cases, the first packet of a data flow
During a controlled or forced switchover, the data plane is not affected. Traffic in the forwarding plane
will continue to run without interruption while the standby management module takes over operation of
the system. However, traffic in the control plane will be minimally impacted.

Real-time synchronization between management modules

Hitless management requires that the active and standby management modules are fully synchronized
at any given point in time. This is accomplished by baseline and dynamicsynchronization of the
modules.
When a standby management module is inserted and becomes operational in the FSX 800 or FSX
1600 chassis, the standby module sends a baseline synchronization request to the active management
module. The request prompts the active management module to copy the current state of its CPU to the
standby CPU, including:
• Start-up and run-time configuration (CLI)
• Layer 2 protocols - Layer 2 protocols such as STP, RSTP, MRP, and VSRP run concurrently on both
the active and standby management modules.
• Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) - This includes the prefix-based routing table, next hop
information for outgoing interfaces, and tunnel information.
• Layer 3 IP forwarding information - This includes the routing table, IP cache table, and ARP table, as
well as static and connected routes.
• If NSR is enabled, OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 information is copied to the standby.
As baseline synchronization is performed, the console of the active management module displays the
progress of the synchronization.

ACTIVE: Detected Stdby heart-beat

ACTIVE: Standby is ready for baseline synchronization.
ACTIVE: Baseline SYNC is completed. Protocol Sync is in progress.
ACTIVE: State synchronization is complete.

The first message indicates that the active management module has detected the standby management
module. The second message indicates that the standby module has been hot-inserted and is ready for
baseline synchronization. The third message is seen when baseline synchronization is completed, and
the fourth message is seen when protocol synchronization is completed.
The console of the standby management module also displays the progress of the synchronization.

STBY: Baseline SYNC is completed. Protocol Sync is in progress.

STBY: State synchronization is complete.

The first message indicates that baseline synchronization is completed, and the second message
indicates that protocol sychronization is completed.
When control protocols are synchronized and protocol synchronization timers expire, the standby
management module will be in hot-standby mode, meaning the standby module is ready to take over as
the active management module. In the event of a switchover, the standby module will pick up where the
active module left off, without interrupting data traffic.
After baseline synchronization, any new events that occur on the active CPU will be dynamically
synchronized on the standby CPU. Examples of such events include:
• CLI/HTTP/SNMP configurations
• CPU receive packets

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 127

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 How a Hitless switchover or failover impacts system functions

• Link events
• Interrupts
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 forwarding table updates
• Dynamic user authentication updates such as 802.1X or multi-device port authentication
• Routing protocols OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 updates if NSR is enabled.
Dynamic events are synchronized in such a way that if the active CPU fails before fully executing an
event, the standby CPU (newly active CPU) will execute the event after the failover. Also, if the active
CPU aborts the event, the standby CPU will abort the event as well.

NOTE
Since both the standby and active management modules run the same code, a command that brings
down the active management module will most likely bring down the standby management module.
Because all configuration commands are synchronized from active to standby management module in
real time, both management modules will reload at almost the same time. This in turn will cause the
system to reset all interface modules (similar to the behavior when the reboot command is executed)
and will cause packet loss associated with a system reboot.

NOTE
If the new active management module becomes out-of-sync with an interface module, information on
the interface module can be overwritten in some cases, which can cause an interruption of traffic
forwarding.

How a Hitless switchover or failover impacts system functions

Fora description of the feature’s impact to major system functions, refer to Supported protocols and
services for hitless management events on page 123.

Enabling hitless failover on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600

Hitless failover is disabled by default. When disabled, the following limitations are in effect:
• If a failover occurs, the system will reload. The following message will display on the console prior
to a reload.

STBY:- - - - Active Hitless Failover is disabled. Re-setting the system - -

• Manual switchover (CLI command switch-over-active-role ) is not allowed. If this command is

entered, the following message will display on the console:

Switch-over is not allowed. Reason: hitless-failover not configured.

NOTE
Hitless OS upgrade is not impacted by this option and is supported whether or not hitless failover is
enabled.

NOTE
Synchronization between the active management module and standby management module will occur
whether or not hitless failover is enabled.

128 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Executing a hitless switchover on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600

To enable hitless failover, enter the following command at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI:

device(config)#hitless-failover enable

The command takes effect immediately. Manual switchover is allowed, and in the event of a failover, the
standby management module will take over the active role without reloading the system.
Syntax: [no] hitless-failoverenable
Use the no form of the command to disable hitless failover once it has been enabled.

Executing a hitless switchover on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600

Hitless failover must be enabled before a hitless switchover can be executed.
To switch over to the standby module (and thus make it the active module), enter the following
command.

device# switch-over-active-role

Once you enter this command, the system will prompt you as follows.

Are you sure? (enter ’y’ or ’n’): y

Running Config data has been changed. Do you want to continue
the switch-over without saving the running config? (enter ’y’ or ’n’): n
Please save the running config and try switch-over again

Syntax: switch-over-activerole
If this command is entered when hitless failover is disabled, the following message will appear on the
console:
Switch-over is not allowed. Reason: hitless-failover not configured.
A management slot which is in active management preference will always attempt to be active on the
next reboot.
To reset the preference, enter the command such as the following:

Brocade(config)# set-active-mgmt mgmt0/mgmt1

Syntax: set-active-management management slot numbers

NOTE
The default active management preference is set to mgmt0 (slot 9).

Hitless OS upgrade on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600

Hitless Operating System (OS) Upgrade enables an operating system upgrade and switchover
without any packet loss to the services and protocols that are supported by Hitless management.

What happens during a Hitless OS upgrade

The following steps describe the internal events that occur during a hitless OS upgrade.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 129

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hitless OS upgrade considerations

1. The standby management module resets and reloads with the new software image in its flash
memory.
2. The Ethernet interfaces (if present) on the standby module become operational and start carrying
data traffic.
3. The active management module synchronizes the standby management module with all the
information required to take over the active role.
4. The Layer 2 and Layer 3 control protocols on the standby management module converge. This
process takes approximately 70 seconds.
5. The standby management module takes over the active role.
6. The old active management module resets and reloads with the same software image running on
the newly active management module.
7. The FastIron switch is now operating with the new software image. The management module that
was initially configured as the standby management module is now the active management module
and the management module that was initially configured as the active management module is now
the standby.

NOTE
The events described above occur internally and do not create or affect the external network
topology.

Hitless OS upgrade considerations

Consider the following when using the hitless OS upgrade feature:
• Hitless OS upgrade allows for upgrading the software in a system between two releases of the OS
that support this functionality and have compatible data structures. A hitless O/S downgrade may
also be supported if the current and target code releases have compatible data structures. From
time to time it may be necessary, when enhancing the software or adding new features, to change
or add data structures that may cause some releases to be incompatible. In such cases, an
upgrade or downgrade will not be hitless, and the software will use the regular Brocade upgrade
process - relying on fast reboot.
• For a description of how this feature impacts major system functions, refer to Supported protocols
and services for hitless management events on page 123.
• You must have both active and standby management modules installed to use this feature.
• Hitless OS upgrade is supported in software release FSX 05.0.00 or higher, with boot image FSX
05.0.00 or higher. In general, it is supported with patch upgrades, for example, when upgrading
from release 07.0.01a to 07.0.01b. It is not supported during major release upgrades, for example
when upgrading from release 07.0.00 to 07.1.00.
• This feature can be used to upgrade an image to a higher or lower compatible version of the
software. However, if hitless upgrade to a particular software version is not supported, the software
upgrade must be performed through a fast reload of the system.
• Hitless OS upgrade between different types of software images is not supported. For example,
hitless OS upgrade is supported when upgrading the Layer 2 image to another Layer 2 image. It is
not supported when upgrading the Layer 2 image to Layer 3 image, and so on.
• Hitless OS upgrade should be performed locally, since remote connectivity will be lost during the
upgrade. During a reload, HTTP, SSH, Telnet, SNMP, and ping sessions will be dropped.
• The active management module switches from the initial active management module to the standby
management module during the hitless upgrade process. Therefore, a connection to the console
interface on both management modules is required.
• Upon being reset, any traffic going through the ports on the management module will be interrupted.
Once the management module is up and running, it will be able to send and receive packets, even
before the hitless upgrade process is complete.
• The running configuration is not allowed to be changed any time during the hitless upgrade process.

130 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hitless OS upgrade configuration steps

• System-max configuration changes require a system reload. System-max configuration changes do

not take effect by the hitless upgrade. Even if a system-max parameter is changed and saved in the
startup configuration, the FastIron switch will revert to the default system-max value upon a hitless
software upgrade. The new system-max value will only take effect after a regular system reload.
• Other commands requiring a software reload, such as CAM mode changes, also do not take effect
upon hitless upgrade and require a system reload before being placed in effect.

Hitless OS upgrade configuration steps

The following is a summary of the configuration steps for a hitless OS software upgrade.
1. Copy the software image that supports hitless software upgrade from a TFTP server to the FastIron
switch. Refer to Loading the software onto the switch on page 131.
2. Install the software image in flash memory on the active and standby management modules.
3. Enter the hitless-reload command on the active management module. The command triggers the
events described in the section What happens during a Hitless OS upgrade on page 129.

Loading the software onto the switch

Hitless OS upgrade loads from the primary and secondary images on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600
Management modules. If you will be using the hitless-reload command to perform the hitless upgrade,
you must first copy the software image that supports hitless software upgrade onto the flash memory of
the active and standby management modules. For instructions, refer to the release notes.

Performing a hitless upgrade

After loading the software image onto the flash memory of the active and standby management
modules, you can begin the process of performing a hitless OS upgrade using the hitless-reload
command. For example,

device#hitless-reload primary

Syntax: hitless-reloadprimary | secondary

The primary parameter specifies that the management module will be reloaded with the primary image.
The secondary parameter specifies that the management module will be reloaded with the secondary
image.

NOTE
The hitless-reload command is accepted only when the running configuration and startup configuration
files match. If the configuration file has changed, you must first save the file (write mem ) before
executing a hitless reload. Otherwise, the following message will display on the console.Error: Running
config and start-up config differs. Please reload the system or save the configuration before attempting
hitless reload.

Syslog message for Hitless management events

The following Syslog message is generated as a result of a switchover or hitless OS upgrade.

SWITCHOVER COMPLETED - by admin - Mgmt Module in slot

slotnum
is now Active

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 131

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying diagnostic information

The following Syslog message is generated as a result of a failover.

SWITCHOVER COMPLETED - by active CPU failure - Mgmt Module in slot

slotnum
is now Active

Displaying diagnostic information

Use the following commands to display diagnostic information for a hitless switchover or failover.

device#show ipc
Version 6, Grp 0, Recv: stk-p0: 840918, p1: 0, sum: 840918
Message types have callbacks:
1:Reliable IPC mesage 2:Reliable IPC atomic 4:fragmentation,jumbo
20:SYNC dynamic change 22:SYNC download reply 24:SYNC download spec i
25:SYNC restart download 26:SYNC verification 27:SYNC disable/enable
29:SYNC mgmt hello 35:IPC Ready Msg 36:IPC Msg for Sync Fra
38:SYNC reliable
Send message types:
[1]=815798, [21]=1, [35]=1, [38]=24442,
Recv message types:
[1]=816446,0, [20]=2,0 [22]=1,0
[29]=25,0, [38]=24442,0,
Statistics:
send pkt num : 840242, recv pkt num : 840918
send msg num : 840242, recv msg num : 840918,
send frag pkt num : 0, recv frag pkt num : 0,
pkt buf alloc : 832113,
Reliable-mail send success receive time us
target ID 0 0 0 0
target MAC 0 0 0 0
There is 0 current jumbo IPC session
Possible errors:
***recv msg no callback 2, last msg_type=20, from stack0, e1/9

Syntax:show ipc

device#show ipc_stat
Total available Hsync channel space = 1048580
Total available Appl channel space = 524292
Total number of application msgs in dyn queue = 0
Total number of hsync msgs in dyn queue = 0
Total number of rel sync msgs in dyn queue = 0
Total number of rx pkt msgs in standby dynamic queue
Total number of rx pkt msgs in active dyn queue = 0
Total number of rx pkts relayed = 0
Total number of rx pkts received = 5686578
Total number of dyn-sync messages received so far = 3
Total number of rel-sync pending complete = 0
Total number of L3 baseline-sync packets = 655
Total number of packet drops in sync = 0
Is image_sync_in_progress? = 0
Total num of rx dyn queue drops = 0
Total num of jumbo corrupts = 0
Total number of messages in IP send queue = 0

Syntax: showipc_stat

Displaying management redundancy information

Enter the following command at any level of the CLI, to view the redundancy parameter settings and
statistics.

Brocade(config)# show redundancy

=== MP Redundancy Settings ===

132 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Layer 3 hitless route purge

Configured Active Slot = 9

Running-Config Sync Period = (upon "write mem")
=== MP Redundancy Statistics ===
Current Active Session:
Active mgmt slot = 9, Standby mgmt slot = 10 (Absent)
Switchover cause = No Switchover
Start Time = Jan 1 00:00:09
Sxr Sys Hitless Enable Status = 0
Total number of Switchover/Failovers = 0
L3 slib baseline sync status: 0 [complete]

Layer 3 hitless route purge

Layer 3 traffic is forwarded seamlessly during a failover, switchover, or OS upgrade when hitless
management is enabled.
Some protocols support non-stop routing. On enabling non-stop routing, after switchover the
management module quickly re-converge the protocol database. Whereas, some protocols support
graceful restart, in which the protocol state is re-established with the help of neighboring devices. Once
all the protocols converge the routes which were removed from the network during the convergence
period, the routes are deleted from the devices. You can set the route purge timer per VRF instance.
Configure the timer to set the duration for which the routes should be preserved after switchover. Once
this period elapses, the route purging starts, if by then all other protocols have finished non-stop routing
or graceful restart.
When switchover occurs, the route purge timer starts. If non-stop routing or graceful restart is also
configured, the route validation and purging starts only when they are complete and the purge timer has
elapsed. If for some reason more delay is expected in learning the routes, you can configure a larger
period for the purge timer.

Setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the defatult VRF

To configure the purge timer, enter the ip hitless-route-purge-timer command in global configuration
mode.

Example for setting IPv4 hitless purge timer on the default VRF
The following example shows how to set the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the default VRF:

Brocade(config)# ip hitless-route-purge-timer 60

Setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-default VRF

1. Enter the VRF configuration mode using the vrf command.
2. Configure route distinguisher using the rd command.
3. Enter IPv4 address family configuration mode using the address-family ipv4 command.
4. Configure the router purge timer using the ip hitless-route-purge-timer command.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 133

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Example for setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-default VRF

Example for setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-default
VRF
The following example shows how to set the IPv4 purge timer on the non-default VRF:

Brocade(config)# vrf blue

Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# rd 10:10
Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# address-family ipv4
Brocade(config-vrf-blue-ipv4)# ip hitless-route-purge-timer 60

Setting the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the defatult VRF

To configure the purge timer, enter the ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer command in global
configuration mode.

Example for setting the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the defatult VRF
The following example shows how to set the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the default VRF:

Brocade(config)# ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer 60

Setting the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the non-default VRF

Before you begin: Enable IPv6 unicast routing using the ipv6 unicast-routing command in global
configuration mode.
1. Enter the VRF configuration mode using the vrf command.
2. Configure route distinguisher using the rd command.
3. Enter the IPv6 address family configuration mode using the address-family ipv6 command.
4. Configure the router purge timer using the ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer command.

Example for setting the IPv6 hitless purge timer on the non-default
VRF
The following example shows how to set the IPv6 purge timer on the non-default VRF:

Brocade(config)# vrf blue

Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# rd 10:10
Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# address-family ipv6
Brocade(config-vrf-blue-ipv4)# ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer 60

Energy Efficient Ethernet

Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) regulates and saves power consumed by the active hardware
components in the switch and conserves power during idle time.
EEE allows Brocade devices to conform to green computing standards. This functionality is achieved
by moving the data ports to a low-power state when their function is not necessary or when they are in

134 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling Energy Efficient Ethernet

a passive, no traffic condition. The EEE feature in switching platforms reduces overall energy
consumption, cooling, noise, and operating costs for energy and cooling. Lower power consumption
also means lower heat dissipation and increased system stability, less energy usage, thereby reducing
costs and impact on the environment.
EEE is a set of enhancements to the Ethernet specification to address power consumption during
periods of low data activity. EEE is specified in IEEE Std 802.3az-2010 which is an amendment to the
IEEE Std 802.3-2008 specification. The optional EEE capability combines the IEEE 802.3 Media
Access Control (MAC) sublayer with a family of physical layers defined to support operation in the Low
Power Idle (LPI) mode. When the LPI mode is enabled, systems on both sides of the link can save
power during periods of low link utilization. LPI signaling allows the LPI client to indicate to the PHY,
and to the link partner, that a break in the data stream is expected. The LPI client can then use this
information to enter power-saving modes that require additional time to resume normal operation. LPI
signaling also informs the LPI client when the link partner sends such an indication.

Port support for Energy Efficient Ethernet

• On ICX 7450 devices EEE is supported on 1G copper ports and 10G copper module ports.
• On ICX 7250 devices EEE is supported on 1G copper ports.
• You may notice port flap on the port when EEE is enabled.
• EEE is not supported on 1G fiber ports (ICX7450-48F), 4x10F module ports, and 1x40Q module
ports.

Enabling Energy Efficient Ethernet

Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) is supported on select Brocade devices and can be enabled globally or
per port.

Follow these steps to enable EEE globally or per port.

1. Enter global configuration mode.
2. Enter the eee command. The following example shows enabling EEE globally.
device(config)# eee
EEE Feature Enabled
3. To enable EEE at the interface level, enter the eee command in interface configuration mode.
device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# eee
EEE Feature Enabled on port 1/1/1

Histogram information overview

The histogram framework feature monitors and records system resource usage information. The main
objective of the histogram is to record resource allocation failures and task CPU usage information. The
histogram feature keeps track of task execution information, context switch history of tasks, buffer
allocation failure and memory allocation failure.
The histogram information is collected and maintained internally, in a cyclical buffer. It can be reviewed
to determine if resource allocation failures or task CPU usage may have contributed to an application
failure.

NOTE
Histogram information is not maintained across reboot.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 135

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying CPU histogram information

Displaying CPU histogram information

The CPU histogram provides information about task CPU usage. The CPU histogram is viewed in the
form of buckets (task usage is divided into different interval levels called buckets). For example, the
task run time is divided into buckets: bucket 1 (0-50 ms), bucket 2 (50-100 ms), bucket 3 (100-150
ms), and so on. The CPU histogram collects the task CPU usage in each bucket. This includes how
many times a task run time or hold time falls in each bucket, and the maximum run time and total run
time for each bucket. CPU histogram information is measured for the hold-time and wait-time of the
task.
• Hold time - The time that the task is holding the CPU without yield.
• Wait time - The time that the task is waiting for execution.

External USB Hotplug

External USB Hotplug support allows you to copy images, cores, logs, and configurations between the
external USB and the internal eUSB.
Brocade device images are stored in the raw partition. Cores, logs and configurations are stored in the
ext4 filesystem partition. The introduction of the External USB Hotplug gives you the option to easily
copy device images, cores, logs, and configurations between the external USB and the internal flash.

External USB Hotplug considerations

• Only USB drives of up to 128 GB of any vendor type are supported.
• USB 3.0 is not supported.
• You can copy files of less than 2 GB only.
• Make sure the external USB is formatted as a "FAT" filesystem before
attempting to use it. Formatting can be done on a PC or on the Brocade
device with the format disk0 command.
• You should not insert a USB-based disk drive, nor should you insert a USB
hub to connect multiple USB disks.
• copy TFTP/SCP to disk0 and disk0 to TFTP/SCP commands are not
supported.
• Only an administrator can execute operations on an external USB, similar to
TFTP.
• You cannot access the active unit's local external USB from a member unit
and vice versa.
• Boot from an external USB is not supported.
• You must run the unmount disk0 command before unplugging the external
USB. The external USB can be mounted using the mount disk0 command.
• The USB drive is only functional on the active member in a stacked
environment.

Using External USB Hotplug

Plug in the External USB to begin using the External USB Hotplug commands. Use the show files
disk0 command to check if the external USB is mounted and ready to use.
You can use the commands in the following table as part of the External USB Hotplug functionality.

136 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Commands

TABLE 14 External USB Hotplug commands

Command Description

show files disk0 Displays the files in the external USB drive.

format disk0 Formats the external USB.

mount disk0 Mounts the filesystem in the external USB drive.

unmount disk0 Unmounts the filesystem of the external USB drive. This command is
required to safely plug out the USB, so that files are not lost or corrupted.

copy flash disk0 primary \ Copies the image binary stored in the primary or secondary partition of the
secondary flash to a destination file in the external USB.

copy flash disk0 file Copies any file from a source file in the system flash to an external USB
destination file.

copy disk0 license Copies the license file present in the external USB drive to the system.

copy disk0 running-config Copies the configuration file present on the external USB drive to the
system's running configuration.

copy disk0 startup-config Copies the configuration file present on the external USB drive to the
system's startup configuration file.

Refer to the FastIron Command Reference Guide for details on using the External USB Hotplug
commands.

Commands
ip hitless-route-purge-timer

Configures the maximum time before stale routes are purged from the routing information base (RIB)
after a switchover, failover, or OS upgrade. The no form of this command sets the purge timer time to
its default value.

Syntax ip hitless-route-purge-timer seconds

no ip hitless-route-purge-timer seconds

Parameters seconds
Maximum time, in seconds, before stale routes are purged. The valid range is from 2 to 600.
The default is 45 seconds.

Modes Global configuration

IPv4 address family configuration

Usage Guidelines Under normal circumstances, you may not need to change the value of the route purge timer. If you
anticipate delay in learning the routes after switchover, you can configure a larger value for the route
purge timer.

Examples The following example shows how to set the IPv4 hitless purge timer on the default VRF:

Brocade(config)# ip hitless-route-purge-timer 500

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 137

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer

The following example shows how to set the IPv4 purge timer on the non-default VRF:

Brocade(config)# vrf blue

Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# rd 10:10
Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# address-family ipv4
Brocade(config-vrf-blue-ipv4)# ip hitless-route-purge-timer 120

ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer

Configures the maximum time before stale routes are purged from the routing information base (RIB)
after a switchover, failover, or OS upgrade. The no form of this command sets the purge timer time to
its default value.

Syntax ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer seconds

no ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer seconds

Parameters seconds
Maximum time, in seconds, before stale routes are purged. The valid range is from 2 to 600.
The default is 45 seconds.

Modes Global configuration

IPv6 address family configuration

Usage Guidelines Under normal circumstances, you may not need to change the value of the route purge timer. If you
anticipate delay in learning the routes after switchover, you can configure a larger value for the route
purge timer. IPv6 unicast routing must be enabled using the ipv6 unicast-routing command before
configuring the purge timer.

Examples The following example shows how to set IPv6 hitless purge timer on default VRF:

Brocade(config)# ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer 500

The following example shows how to set IPv6 purge timer on a non-default VRF:

Brocade(config)# vrf blue

Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# rd 10:10
Brocade(config-vrf-blue)# address-family ipv6
Brocade(config-vrf-blue-ipv4)# ipv6 hitless-route-purge-timer 120

138 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IPv6

● Static IPv6 route configuration...................................................................................... 139

● IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels.................................................................................................. 141

Static IPv6 route configuration

NOTE
Static IPv6 route configuration is supported only with the IPv6 Layer 3 license on FSX devices and the
full Layer 3 image on other devices.
You can configure a static IPv6 route to be redistributed into a routing protocol, but you cannot
redistribute routes learned by a routing protocol into the static IPv6 routing table.

NOTE
The maximum IPv6 static routes supported on an ICX 6450 device is 1070.
Before configuring a static IPv6 route, you must enable the forwarding of IPv6 traffic on the Layer 3
switch using the ipv6 unicast-routing command and enable IPv6 on at least one interface by
configuring an IPv6 address or explicitly enabling IPv6 on that interface. For more information on
performing these configuration tasks, refer to "Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 protocol stacks" section in the
FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide .

Configuring a static IPv6 route

To configure a static IPv6 route for a destination network with the prefix 2001:DB8::0/32, a next-hop
gateway with the global address 2001:DB8:0:ee44::1, and an administrative distance of 110, enter the
following command.

device(config)#ipv6 route 2001:DB8::0/32 2001:DB8:2343:0:ee44::1 distance 110

Syntax: ipv6 route dest-ipv6-prefix / prefix-length next-hop-ipv6-address [metric] [ distance number ]

To configure a static IPv6 route for a destination network with the prefix 2001:DB8::0/32 and a next-hop
gateway with the link-local address fe80::1 that the Layer 3 switch can access through Ethernet
interface 1/3/1, enter the following command.

device(config)#ipv6 route 2001:DB8::0/32 ethernet 1/3/1 fe80::1

Syntax: ipv6 route dest-ipv6-prefix / prefix-length [ ethernet slot/port | ve num ] next-hop-ipv6-address

[ metric ] [distance number ]
To configure a static IPv6 route for a destination network with the prefix 2001:DB8::0/32 and a next-hop
gateway that the Layer 3 switch can access through tunnel 1, enter the following command.

device(config)#ipv6 route 2001:DB8::0/32 tunnel 1

Syntax: ipv6 route dest-ipv6-prefix / prefix-length interface port [ metric ] [ distance number]

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 139

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IPv6

The following table describes the parameters associated with this command and indicates the status
of each parameter.

TABLE 15 Static IPv6 route parameters

Parameter Configuration details Status

The IPv6 prefix and You must specify the dest-ipv6-prefix parameter in Mandatory for all static
prefix length of the hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons as IPv6 routes.
route’s destination documented in RFC 2373.
network.
You must specify the prefix-length parameter as a decimal
value. A slash mark (/) must follow the ipv6-prefix parameter
and precede the prefix-length parameter.

The route’s next-hop You can specify the next-hop gateway as one of the Mandatory for all static
gateway, which can be following types of IPv6 addresses: IPv6 routes.
one of the following:
• A global address.
• The IPv6 address of a • A link-local address.
next-hop gateway.
If you specify a global address, you do not need to specify
• A tunnel interface.
any additional parameters for the next-hop gateway.

If you specify a link-local address, you must also specify the

interface through which to access the address. You can
specify one of the following interfaces:

• An Ethernet interface.
• A tunnel interface.
• A virtual interface (VE).

If you specify an Ethernet interface, also specify the port

number associated with the interface. If you specify a VE or
tunnel interface, also specify the VE or tunnel number.

You can also specify the next-hop gateway as a tunnel

interface. If you specify a tunnel interface, also specify the
tunnel number.

The route’s metric. You can specify a value from 1 - 16. Optional for all static
IPv6 routes. (The
default metric is 1.)

The route’s You must specify the distance keyword and any numerical Optional for all static
administrative distance. value. IPv6 routes. (The
default administrative
distance is 1.)

A metric is a value that the Layer 3 switch uses when comparing this route to other static routes in the
IPv6 static route table that have the same destination. The metric applies only to routes that the Layer
3 switch has already placed in the IPv6 static route table.
The administrative distance is a value that the Layer 3 switch uses to compare this route with routes
from other route sources that have the same destination. (The Layer 3 switch performs this
comparison before placing a route in the IPv6 route table.) This parameter does not apply to routes
that are already in the IPv6 route table. In general, a low administrative distance indicates a preferred
route. By default, static routes take precedence over routes learned by routing protocols. If you want a

140 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring a static route in a non-default VRF or User VRF

dynamic route to be chosen over a static route, you can configure the static route with a higher
administrative distance than the dynamic route.

Configuring a static route in a non-default VRF or User VRF

To configure a static IPv6 route for a destination network with the prefix 2001:DB8::0/32, a next-hop
gateway with the global address 2001:DB8:0:ee44::1, in the non-default VRF named "blue", enter the
following at the general configuration prompt.

device(config)# ipv6 route vrf blue 2001:DB8::0/32 2001:DB8:0:ee44::1

Syntax: [no] ipv6 route vrf vrf-name dest-ipv6-prefix/prefix-length next-hop-ipv6-address

The dest-ip-addr is the route’s destination. The dest-mask is the network mask for the route’s
destination IPv6 address.
The vrf-name is the name of the VRF that contains the next-hop router (gateway) for the route.
The next-hop-ip-addr is the IPv6 address of the next-hop router (gateway) for the route.

NOTE
The vrf needs to be a valid VRF to be used in this command.

IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels

NOTE
This feature is supported only with the IPv6 Layer 3 license on FSX devices and the full Layer 3 image
on other devices.
To enable communication between isolated IPv6 domains using the IPv4 infrastructure, you can
manually configure IPv6 over IPv4 tunnels that provide static point-point connectivity.
As shown in the following illustration, these tunnels encapsulate an IPv6 packet within an IPv4 packet.

FIGURE 2 IPv6 over an IPv4 tunnel

In general, a manually configured tunnel establishes a permanent link between switches in IPv6
domains. A manually configured tunnel has explicitly configured IPv4 addresses for the tunnel source
and destination.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 141

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel configuration notes

This tunneling mechanism requires that the Layer 3 switch at each end of the tunnel run both IPv4 and
IPv6 protocol stacks. The Layer 3 switches running both protocol stacks, or dual-stack routers, can
interoperate directly with both IPv4 and IPv6 end systems and routers. Refer to "Configuring IPv4 and
IPv6 protocol stacks" section in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide.

IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel configuration notes

• The local tunnel configuration must include both source and destination addresses.
• The remote side of the tunnel must have the opposite source/destination pair.
• A tunnel interface supports static and dynamic IPv6 configuration settings and routing protocols.
• Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) is not currently supported with IPv6 tunnels. Make sure tunnel
endpoints do not have duplicate IP addresses.
• Neighbor Discovery (ND) is not supported with IPv6 tunnels.
• If a tunnel source port is a multi-homed IPv4 source, the tunnel will use the first IPv4 address only.
For proper tunnel operation, use the ip address option.

Configuring a manual IPv6 tunnel

You can use a manually configured tunnel to connect two isolated IPv6 domains. You should deploy
this point-to-point tunneling mechanism if you need a permanent and stable connection.
To configure a manual IPv6 tunnel, enter commands such as the following on a Layer 3 Switch
running both IPv4 and IPv6 protocol stacks on each end of the tunnel.

device(config)#interface tunnel 1
device(config-tnif-1)#tunnel source ethernet 1/3/1
device(config-tnif-1)#tunnel destination 10.162.100.1
device(config-tnif-1)#tunnel mode ipv6ip
device(config-tnif-1)#ipv6 enable

This example creates tunnel interface 1 and assigns a link local IPv6 address with an automatically
computed EUI-64 interface ID to it. The IPv4 address assigned to Ethernet interface 1/3/1 is used as
the tunnel source, while the IPv4 address 10.168.100.1 is configured as the tunnel destination. The
tunnel mode is specified as a manual IPv6 tunnel. Finally, the tunnel is enabled. Note that instead of
entering ipv6 enable , you could specify an IPv6 address, for example, ipv6 address
2001:DB8:384d:34::/64 eui-64 , which would also enable the tunnel.
Syntax: [no] interfacetunnel number
For the number parameter, specify a value between 1-8.
Syntax: [no] tunnelsource ipv4-address | ethernet port | loopback number | ve number
The tunnel source can be an IP address or an interface.
For ipv4-address , use 8-bit values in dotted decimal notation.
The ethernet | loopback | ve parameter specifies an interface as the tunnel source. If you specify an
Ethernet interface, also specify the port number associated with the interface. If you specify a
loopback, VE, or interface, also specify the loopback, VE, or number, respectively.
Syntax: [no] tunneldestination ipv4-address
Specify the ipv4-address parameter using 8-bit values in dotted decimal notation.
Syntax: [no] tunnelmode ipv6ip
ipv6ip indicates that this is an IPv6 manual tunnel.
Syntax: ipv6 enable

142 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing IPv6 tunnel statistics

The ipv6 enable command enables the tunnel. Alternatively, you could specify an IPv6 address, which
would also enable the tunnel.
Syntax: ipv6 address ipv6-prefix / prefix-length [ eui-64 ]
The ipv6 address command enables the tunnel. Alternatively, you could enter ipv6 enable , which
would also enable the tunnel.
Specify the ipv6-prefix parameter in hexadecimal format using 16-bit values between colons as
documented in RFC 2373.
Specify the prefix-length parameter as a decimal value. A slash mark (/) must follow the ipv6-prefix
parameter and precede the prefix-length parameter. The eui-64 keyword configures the global address
with an EUI-64 interface ID in the low-order 64 bits. The interface ID is automatically constructed in
IEEE EUI-64 format using the interface’s MAC address.

Clearing IPv6 tunnel statistics

You can clear statistics (reset all fields to zero) for all IPv6 tunnels or for a specific tunnel interface.
For example, to clear statistics for tunnel 1, enter the following command at the Privileged EXEC level
or any of the Config levels of the CLI.

device#clear ipv6 tunnel 1

To clear statistics for all IPv6 tunnels, enter the following command.

device#clear ipv6 tunnel

Syntax: clear ipv6 tunnel [number]

The number parameter specifies the tunnel number.

Displaying IPv6 tunnel information

Use the commands in this section to display the configuration, status, and counters associated with
IPv6 tunnels.

Displaying a summary of tunnel information

To display a summary of tunnel information, enter the following command at any level of the CLI.

device#show ipv6 tunnel

IP6 Tunnels
Tunnel Mode Packet Received Packet Sent
1 configured 0 0
2 configured 0 22419

Syntax: show ipv6tunnel

This display shows the following information.

TABLE 16 IPv6 tunnel summary information

Field Description

Tunnel The tunnel interface number.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 143

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying tunnel interface information

TABLE 16 IPv6 tunnel summary information (Continued)

Field Description

Mode The tunnel mode. Possible modes include the following:

• configured - Indicates a manually configured tunnel.

Packet Received The number of packets received by a tunnel interface. Note that this is the number of packets
received by the CPU. It does not include the number of packets processed in hardware.

Packet Sent The number of packets sent by a tunnel interface. Note that this is the number of packets sent
by the CPU. It does not include the number of packets processed in hardware.

Displaying tunnel interface information

To display status and configuration information for tunnel interface 1, enter the following command at
any level of the CLI.

device#show interfaces tunnel 1

Tunnel1 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is Tunnel
Tunnel source ve 30
Tunnel destination is 10.2.2.10
Tunnel mode ipv6ip
No port name
MTU 1480 bytes, encapsulation IPV4

Syntax: show interfacestunnel number

The number parameter indicates the tunnel interface number for which you want to display
information.

TABLE 17 IPv6 tunnel interface information

Field Description

Tunnel interface status The status of the tunnel interface can be one of the following:

• up - The tunnel mode is set and the tunnel interface is enabled.

• down - The tunnel mode is not set.
• administratively down - The tunnel interface was disabled with the disable command.

Line protocol status The status of the line protocol can be one of the following:

• up - IPv4 connectivity is established.

• down - The line protocol is not functioning and is down.

Hardware is tunnel The interface is a tunnel interface.

Tunnel source The tunnel source can be one of the following:

• An IPv4 address
• The IPv4 address associated with an interface/port.

Tunnel destination The tunnel destination can be an IPv4 address.

144 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying interface level IPv6 settings

TABLE 17 IPv6 tunnel interface information (Continued)

Field Description

Tunnel mode The tunnel mode can be the following:

• ipv6ip - indicates a manually configured tunnel

Port name The port name configured for the tunnel interface.

MTU The setting of the IPv6 maximum transmission unit (MTU).

Displaying interface level IPv6 settings

To display Interface level IPv6 settings for tunnel interface 1, enter the following command at any level
of the CLI.

device#show ipv6 inter tunnel 1

Interface Tunnel 1 is up, line protocol is up
IPv6 is enabled, link-local address is fe80::3:4:2 [Preferred]
Global unicast address(es):
1001::1 [Preferred], subnet is 1001::/64
1011::1 [Preferred], subnet is 1011::/64
Joined group address(es):
ff02::1:ff04:2
ff02::5
ff02::1:ff00:1
ff02::2
ff02::1
MTU is 1480 bytes
ICMP redirects are enabled
No Inbound Access List Set
No Outbound Access List Set
OSPF enabled

The display command above reflects the following configuration.

device#show running-config interface tunnel 1

!
interface tunnel 1
port-name ManualTunnel1
tunnel mode ipv6ip
tunnel source loopback 1
tunnel destination 10.1.1.1
ipv6 address 1011::1/64
ipv6 address 1001::1/64
ipv6 ospf area 0

TABLE 18 Interface level IPv6 tunnel information

Field Description

Interface Tunnel status The status of the tunnel interface can be one of the following:
• up - IPv4 connectivity is established.
• down - The tunnel mode is not set.
• administratively down - The tunnel interface was disabled with the disable command.

Line protocol status The status of the line protocol can be one of the following:
• up - IPv6 is enabled through the ipv6 enable or ipv6 address command.
• down - The line protocol is not functioning and is down.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 145

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying interface level IPv6 settings

146 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SNMP Access

● SNMP overview.............................................................................................................147
● SNMP community strings..............................................................................................147
● User-based security model........................................................................................... 150
● Defining SNMP views....................................................................................................154
● SNMP version 3 traps................................................................................................... 155
● Displaying SNMP Information....................................................................................... 159
● SNMP v3 configuration examples................................................................................. 160

SNMP overview
SNMP is a set of protocols for managing complex networks. SNMP sends messages, called protocol
data units (PDUs), to different parts of a network. SNMP-compliant devices, called agents, store data
about themselves in Management Information Bases (MIBs) and return this data to the SNMP
requesters.
"Security Access" chapter in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Security Configuration Guide introduced a
few methods used to secure SNMP access. They included the following:
• Using ACLs to restrict SNMP access
• Restricting SNMP access to a specific IP address
• Restricting SNMP access to a specific VLAN
• Disabling SNMP access
This section presents additional methods for securing SNMP access to Brocade devices.
Restricting SNMP access using ACL, VLAN, or a specific IP address constitute the first level of defense
when the packet arrives at a Brocade device. The next level uses one of the following methods:
• Community string match In SNMP versions 1 and 2
• User-based model in SNMP version 3
SNMP views are incorporated in community strings and the user-based model.

SNMP community strings

SNMP versions 1 and 2 use community strings to restrict SNMP access. The default passwords for
Web management access are the SNMP community strings configured on the device:
• The default read-only community string is "public". To open a read-only Web management session,
enter “get” and “public” for the user name and password.
• There is no default read-write community string. Thus, by default, you cannot open a read-write
management session using the Web Management Interface. You first must configure a read-write
community string using the CLI. Then you can log on using "set" as the user name and the read-write
community string you configure as the password.
You can configure as many additional read-only and read-write community strings as you need. The
number of strings you can configure depends on the memory on the device. There is no practical limit.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 147

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Encryption of SNMP community strings

The Web Management Interface supports only one read-write session at a time. When a read-write
session is open on the Web Management Interface, subsequent sessions are read-only, even if the
session login is “set” with a valid read-write password.

NOTE
If you delete the startup-config file, the device automatically re-adds the default "public" read-only
community string the next time you load the software.

NOTE
As an alternative to the SNMP community strings, you can secure Web management access using
local user accounts or ACLs. Refer to Security Access chapter in the FastIron Ethernet Switch
Security Configuration Guide.

Encryption of SNMP community strings

The software automatically encrypts SNMP community strings. Users with read-only access or who do
not have access to management functions in the CLI cannot display the strings. For users with read-
write access, the strings are encrypted in the CLI but are shown in the clear in the Web Management
Interface.
Encryption is enabled by default. You can disable encryption for individual strings or trap receivers if
desired. Refer to the next section for information about encryption.

Adding an SNMP community string

The default SNMP community name (string) on a device is "public" with read only privilege.
You can assign other SNMP community strings, and indicate if the string is encrypted or clear. By
default, the string is encrypted.
To add an encrypted community string, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)#snmp-server community private rw

device(config)#write memory

Syntax: snmp-server community [ 0 | 1 ] string ro | rw [ view viewname ] [ standard-ACL-name |

standard-ACL-id ]
The string parameter specifies the community string name. The string can be up to 32 characters long.
The ro | rw parameter specifies whether the string is read-only (ro) or read-write (rw) .

NOTE
If you issue a no snmp-server community public ro command and then enter a write memory
command to save that configuration, the "public" community name is removed and will have no SNMP
access. If for some reason the device is brought down and then brought up, the "no snmp-server
community public ro" command is restored in the system and the "public" community string has no
SNMP access.
The 0 | 1 parameter affects encryption for display of the string in the running-config and the startup-
config file. Encryption is enabled by default. When encryption is enabled, the community string is
encrypted in the CLI regardless of the access level you are using. In the Web Management Interface,
the community string is encrypted at the read-only access level but is visible at the read-write access
level.

148 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SNMP Access

The encryption option can be omitted (the default) or can be one of the following:
• 0 - Disables encryption for the community string you specify with the command. The community
string is shown as clear text in the running-config and the startup-config file. Use this option if you do
not want the display of the community string to be encrypted.
• 1 - Assumes that the community string you enter is encrypted, and decrypts the value before using it.

NOTE
If you want the software to assume that the value you enter is the clear-text form, and to encrypt display
of that form, do not enter 0 or 1 . Instead, omit the encryption option and allow the software to use the
default behavior.

NOTE
If you specify encryption option 1 , the software assumes that you are entering the encrypted form of the
community string. In this case, the software decrypts the community string you enter before using the
value for authentication. If you accidentally enter option 1 followed by the clear-text version of the
community string, authentication will fail because the value used by the software will not match the
value you intended to use.

The command in the example above adds the read-write SNMP community string "private". When you
save the new community string to the startup-config file (using the write memory command), the
software adds the following command to the file.

snmp-server community 1
encrypted-string
rw

To add a non-encrypted community string, you must explicitly specify that you do not want the software
to encrypt the string. Here is an example.

device(config)#snmp-server community 0 private rw

device(config)#write memory

The command in this example adds the string "private" in the clear, which means the string is displayed
in the clear. When you save the new community string to the startup-config file, the software adds the
following command to the file.

snmp-server community 0 private rw

The view viewname parameter is optional. It allows you to associate a view to the members of this
community string. Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters. If no view is specified, access to the full MIB
is granted. The view that you want must exist before you can associate it to a community string. Here is
an example of how to use the view parameter in the community string command.

device(config)#snmp-s community myread ro view sysview

The command in this example associates the view "sysview" to the community string named "myread".
The community string has read-only access to "sysview". For information on how to create views, refer
to SNMP v3 configuration examples on page 160.
The standard-ACL-name | standard-ACL-id parameter is optional. It allows you to specify which ACL
group will be used to filter incoming SNMP packets. You can enter either the ACL name or its ID. Here
are some examples.

device(config)#snmp-s community myread ro view sysview 2

device(config)#snmp-s community myread ro view sysview myACL

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 149

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying the SNMP community strings

The command in the first example indicates that ACL group 2 will filter incoming SNMP packets;
whereas, the command in the second example uses the ACL group called "myACL" to filter incoming
packets.Refer to "Using ACLs to restrict SNMP access" section in the FastIron Ethernet Switch
Security Configuration Guide for more information.

NOTE
To make configuration changes, including changes involving SNMP community strings, you must first
configure a read-write community string using the CLI. Alternatively, you must configure another
authentication method and log on to the CLI using a valid password for that method.

Displaying the SNMP community strings

To display the configured community strings, enter the following command at any CLI level.

device#show snmp server

Contact: Marshall
Location: Copy Center
Community(ro): public
Community(rw): private
Traps
Cold start: Enable
Link up: Enable
Link down: Enable
Authentication: Enable
Locked address violation: Enable
Power supply failure: Enable
Fan failure: Enable
Temperature warning: Enable
STP new root: Enable
STP topology change: Enable
ospf: Enable

Total Trap-Receiver Entries: 4

Trap-Receiver IP Address Community
1 10.95.6.211
2 10.95.5.21

Syntax: show snmp server

NOTE
If display of the strings is encrypted, the strings are not displayed. Encryption is enabled by default.

User-based security model

SNMP version 3 (RFC 2570 through 2575) introduces a User-Based Security model (RFC 2574) for
authentication and privacy services.
SNMP version 1 and version 2 use community strings to authenticate SNMP access to management
modules. This method can still be used for authentication. In SNMP version 3, the User-Based
Security model of SNMP can be used to secure against the following threats:
• Modification of information
• Masquerading the identity of an authorized entity
• Message stream modification
• Disclosure of information

150 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring your NMS

SNMP version 3 also supports View-Based Access Control Mechanism (RFC 2575) to control access at
the PDU level. It defines mechanisms for determining whether or not access to a managed object in a
local MIB by a remote principal should be allowed. For more information, refer to SNMP v3
configuration examples on page 160.)

Configuring your NMS

In order to use the SNMP version 3 features.
1. Make sure that your Network Manager System (NMS) supports SNMP version 3.
2. Configure your NMS agent with the necessary users.
3. Configure the SNMP version 3 features in Brocade devices.

Configuring SNMP version 3 on Brocade devices

Follow the steps given below to configure SNMP version 3 on Brocade devices.
1. Enter an engine ID for the management module using the snmp-server engineid command if you
will not use the default engine ID.Refer to Defining the engine id on page 151.
2. Create views that will be assigned to SNMP user groups using the snmp-server view command.
refer to SNMP v3 configuration examples on page 160 for details.
3. Create ACL groups that will be assigned to SNMP user groups using the access-list command.
4. Create user groups using the snmp-server group command.Refer to Defining an SNMP group on
page 152.
5. Create user accounts and associate these accounts to user groups using the snmp-server user
command.Refer to Defining an SNMP user account on page 153.
If SNMP version 3 is not configured, then community strings by default are used to authenticate
access.

Defining the engine id

A default engine ID is generated during system start up. To determine what the default engine ID of the
device is, enter the show snmp engineid command and find the following line:

Local SNMP Engine ID: 800007c70300e05290ab60

See the section Displaying the Engine ID on page 159 for details.
The default engine ID guarantees the uniqueness of the engine ID for SNMP version 3. If you want to
change the default engine ID, enter the snmp-server engineid local command.

device(config)#snmp-server engineid local 800007c70300e05290ab60

Syntax: [no] snmp-server engineid local hex-string

The local parameter indicates that engine ID to be entered is the ID of this device, representing an
SNMP management entity.

NOTE
Each user localized key depends on the SNMP server engine ID, so all users need to be reconfigured
whenever the SNMP server engine ID changes.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 151

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Defining an SNMP group

NOTE
Since the current implementation of SNMP version 3 does not support Notification, remote engine IDs
cannot be configured at this time.
The hex-string variable consists of 11 octets, entered as hexadecimal values. There are two
hexadecimal characters in each octet. There should be an even number of hexadecimal characters in
an engine ID.
The default engine ID has a maximum of 11 octets:
• Octets 1 through 4 represent the agent's SNMP management private enterprise number as
assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA). The most significant bit of Octet 1 is
"1". For example, "000007c7" is the ID for Brocade Communications, Inc. in hexadecimal. With
Octet 1 always equal to "1", the first four octets in the default engine ID is always "800007c7" (which
is 1991 in decimal).
• Octet 5 is always 03 in hexadecimal and indicates that the next set of values represent a MAC
address.
• Octets 6 through 11 form the MAC address of the lowest port in the management module.

NOTE
Engine ID must be a unique number among the various SNMP engines in the management domain.
Using the default engine ID ensures the uniqueness of the numbers.

Defining an SNMP group

SNMP groups map SNMP users to SNMP views. For each SNMP group, you can configure a read
view, a write view, or both. Users who are mapped to a group will use its views for access control.
To configure an SNMP user group, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#snmp-server group admin v3 auth read all write all

Syntax:[no] snmp-server group groupname { v1 | v2c | v3 { auth | noauth | priv } } [ access {

standard-ACL-id | ipv6 ipv6-ACL-name } ] [ read viewname ] [ write viewname ]

NOTE
This command is not used for SNMP version 1 and SNMP version 2. In these versions, groups and
group views are created internally using community strings. (refer to SNMP community strings on
page 147.) When a community string is created, two groups are created, based on the community
string name. One group is for SNMP version 1 packets, while the other is for SNMP version 2 packets.

The group groupname parameter defines the name of the SNMP group to be created.
The v1 , v2c , or v3 parameter indicates which version of SNMP is used. In most cases, you will be
using v3, since groups are automatically created in SNMP versions 1 and 2 from community strings.
The auth | noauth parameter determines whether or not authentication will be required to access the
supported views. If auth is selected, then only authenticated packets are allowed to access the view
specified for the user group. Selecting noauth means that no authentication is required to access the
specified view. Selecting priv means that an authentication password will be required from the users.
The access standard-ACL-id parameter is optional. It allows incoming SNMP packets to be filtered
based on the standard ACL attached to the group.

152 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Defining an SNMP user account

The ipv6 ipv6-ACL-name option configures IPv6 ACL for SNMP group and allows incoming SNMP
packets to be filtered based on the IPv6 ACL attached to the group.
The read viewname | write viewname parameter is optional. It indicates that users who belong to this
group have either read or write access to the MIB.
The viewname variable is the name of the view to which the SNMP group members have access. If no
view is specified, then the group has no access to the MIB.
The value of viewname is defined using the snmp-server view command. The SNMP agent comes
with the "all" default view, which provides access to the entire MIB; however, it must be specified when
creating the group. The "all" view also allows SNMP version 3 to be backwards compatibility with SNMP
version 1 and version 2.

NOTE
If you will be using a view other than the "all" view, that view must be configured before creating the
user group. Refer to the section SNMP v3 configuration examples on page 160, especially for details
on the include | exclude parameters.

Defining an SNMP user account

The snmp-server user command does the following:
• Creates an SNMP user.
• Defines the group to which the user will be associated.
• Defines the type of authentication to be used for SNMP access by this user.
• Specifies one of the following encryption types used to encrypt the privacy password:
‐ Data Encryption Standard (DES) - A symmetric-key algorithm that uses a 56-bit key.
‐ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) - The 128-bit encryption standard adopted by the
U.S. government. This standard is a symmetric cipher algorithm chosen by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) as the replacement for DES.
Here is an example of how to create an SNMP User account.

device(config)#snmp-s user bob admin v3 access 2 auth md5 bobmd5 priv des bobdes

The CLI for creating SNMP version 3 users has been updated as follows.
Syntax: no snmp-server user name groupname v3 [ [ access standard-ACL-id ] [ [ encrypted ] [auth
md5 md5-password | sha sha-password ] [ priv [ encrypted ] des des-password-key | aes aes-
password-key ] ] ]
The name parameter defines the SNMP user name or security name used to access the management
module.
The groupname parameter identifies the SNMP group to which this user is associated or mapped. All
users must be mapped to an SNMP group. Groups are defined using the snmp-server group
command.

NOTE
The SNMP group to which the user account will be mapped should be configured before creating the
user accounts; otherwise, the group will be created without any views. Also, ACL groups must be
configured before configuring user accounts.

The v3 parameter is required.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 153

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Defining SNMP views

The access standard-ACL-id parameter is optional. It indicates that incoming SNMP packets are
filtered based on the ACL attached to the user account.

NOTE
The ACL specified in a user account overrides the ACL assigned to the group to which the user is
mapped. If no ACL is entered for the user account, then the ACL configured for the group will be used
to filter packets.
The encrypted parameter means that the MD5 or SHA password will be a digest value. MD5 has 16
octets in the digest. SHA has 20. The digest string has to be entered as a hexadecimal string. In this
case, the agent need not generate any explicit digest. If the encrypted parameter is not used, the user
is expected to enter the authentication password string for MD5 or SHA. The agent will convert the
password string to a digest, as described in RFC 2574.
The auth md5 | sha parameter is optional. It defines the type of encryption that the user must have to
be authenticated. Choose between MD5 or SHA encryption. MD5 and SHA are two authentication
protocols used in SNMP version 3.
The md5-password and sha-password define the password the user must use to be authenticated.
These password must have a minimum of 8 characters. If the encrypted parameter is used, then the
digest has 16 octets for MD5 or 20 octets for SHA.

NOTE
Once a password string is entered, the generated configuration displays the digest (for security
reasons), not the actual password.

The priv [encrypted] parameter is optional after you enter the md5 or sha password. The priv
parameter specifies the encryption type (DES or AES) used to encrypt the privacy password. If the
encrypted keyword is used, do the following:
• If DES is the privacy protocol to be used, enter des followed by a 16-octet DES key in hexadecimal
format for the des-password-key . If you include the encrypted keyword, enter a password string of
at least 8 characters.
• If AES is the privacy protocol to be used, enter aes followed by the AES password key. For a small
password key, enter 12 characters. For a big password key, enter 16 characters. If you include the
encrypted keyword, enter a password string containing 32 hexadecimal characters.

Defining SNMP views

SNMP views are named groups of MIB objects that can be associated with user accounts to allow
limited access for viewing and modification of SNMP statistics and system configuration. SNMP views
can also be used with other commands that take SNMP views as an argument. SNMP views reference
MIB objects using object names, numbers, wildcards, or a combination of the three. The numbers
represent the hierarchical location of the object in the MIB tree. You can reference individual objects in
the MIB tree or a subset of objects from the MIB tree.
To configure the number of SNMP views available on the Brocade device, enter the following
command.

device(config)#system-max view 15

Syntax: system-maxview number-of-views

154 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 SNMP version 3 traps

This command specifies the maximum number of SNMPv2 and v3 views that can be configured on a
device. The number of views can be from 10 - 65536. The default is 10 views.
To add an SNMP view, enter one of the following commands.

device(config)#snmp-server view Maynes system included

device(config)#snmp-server view Maynes system.2 excluded
device(config)#snmp-server view Maynes 2.3.*.6 included
device(config)#write mem

NOTE
The snmp-server view command supports the MIB objects as defined in RFC 1445.

Syntax: [no] snmp-serverview name mib_tree included | excluded

The name parameter can be any alphanumeric name you choose to identify the view. The names
cannot contain spaces.
The mib_tree parameter is the name of the MIB object or family. MIB objects and MIB sub-trees can be
identified by a name or by the numbers called Object Identifiers (OIDs) that represent the position of the
object or sub-tree in the MIB hierarchy. You can use a wildcard (*) in the numbers to specify a sub-tree
family.
The included | excluded parameter specifies whether the MIB objects identified by the mib_family
parameter are included in the view or excluded from the view.

NOTE
All MIB objects are automatically excluded from any view unless they are explicitly included; therefore,
when creating views using the snmp-server view command, indicate which portion of the MIB you
want users to access.

For example, you may want to assign the view called "admin" a community string or user group. The
"admin" view will allow access to the Brocade MIBs objects that begin with the 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991 object
identifier. Enter the following command.

device(config)#snmp-server view admin 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991 included

You can exclude portions of the MIB within an inclusion scope. For example, if you want to exclude the
snAgentSys objects, which begin with 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2 object identifier from the admin view, enter
a second command such as the following.

device(config)#snmp-server view admin 1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.2 excluded

NOTE
Note that the exclusion is within the scope of the inclusion.

To delete a view, use the no parameter before the command.

SNMP version 3 traps

Brocade devices support SNMP notifications in SMIv2 format. This allows notifications to be encrypted
and sent to the target hosts in a secure manner.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 155

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Defining an SNMP group and specifying which view is notified of traps

Defining an SNMP group and specifying which view is notified of traps

The SNMP group command allows configuration of a viewname for notification purpose, similar to the
read and write view. The default viewname is "all", which allows access to the entire MIB.
To configure an SNMP user group, first configure SNMPv3 views using the snmp-server view
command. Refer to SNMP v3 configuration examples on page 160. Then enter a command such as
the following.

device(config)#snmp-server group admin v3 auth read all write all

notify all

Syntax:[no] snmp-server group groupname { v1 | v2c | v3 { auth | noauth | priv } } [ access {

standard-ACL-id | ipv6 ipv6-ACL-name } ] [ notify viewname ] [ read viewname ] [ write viewname ]
The group groupname parameter defines the name of the SNMP group to be created.
The v1 , v2c , or v3 parameter indicates which version of SNMP to use. In most cases, you will use
v3, since groups are automatically created in SNMP versions 1 and 2 from community strings.
The auth | noauth parameter determines whether or not authentication will be required to access the
supported views. If auth is selected, then only authenticated packets are allowed to access the view
specified for the user group. Selecting noauth means that no authentication is required to access the
specified view. Selecting priv means that an authentication password will be required from the users.
The access standard-ACL-id allows incoming SNMP packets to be filtered based on the standard ACL
attached to the group.
The ipv6 ipv6-ACL-name option configures IPv6 ACL for SNMP group and allows incoming SNMP
packets to be filtered based on the IPv6 ACL attached to the group.
The read viewname | write viewname parameter is optional. It indicates that users who belong to this
group have either read or write access to the MIB.
The notify view allows administrators to restrict the scope of varbind objects that will be part of the
notification. All of the varbinds need to be in the included view for the notification to be created.
The viewname variable is the name of the view to which the SNMP group members have access. If no
view is specified, then the group has no access to the MIB.

Defining the UDP port for SNMP v3 traps

The SNMP host command enhancements allow configuration of notifications in SMIv2 format, with or
without encryption, in addition to the previously supported SMIv1 trap format.
You can define a port that receives the SNMP v3 traps by entering a command such as the following.

device(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.4.11 version v3 auth security-name port 4/1

Syntax: [no] snmp-server host ip-addr | ipv6-addr version [v1 | v2c community-string | v3 auth |
noauth | priv security-name ] [ port trap-UDP-port-number ]

The ip-addr parameter specifies the IP address of the host that will receive the trap.
For version , indicate one of the following
For SNMP version 1, enter v1 and the name of the community string ( community-string ). This string
is encrypted within the system.

156 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Trap MIB changes

NOTE
If the configured version is v2c, then the notification is sent out in SMIv2 format, using the community
string, but in cleartext mode. To send the SMIv2 notification in SNMPv3 packet format, configure v3 with
auth or privacy parameters, or both, by specifying a security name. The actual authorization and privacy
values are obtained from the security name.
For SNMP version 2c, enter v2 and the name of the community string. This string is encrypted within
the system.
For SNMP version 3, enter one of the following depending on the authorization required for the host:
• ‐ v3 auth security-name : Allow only authenticated packets.
‐ v3 no auth security-name : Allow all packets.
‐ v3 priv security-name : A password is required
For port trap-UDP-port-number , specify the UDP port number on the host that will receive the trap.

Trap MIB changes

To support the SNMP V3 trap feature, the Brocade Enterprise Trap MIB was rewritten in SMIv2 format,
as follows:
• The MIB name was changed from FOUNDRY-SN-TRAP-MIB to FOUNDRY-SN-NOTIFICATION-MIB
• Individual notifications were changed to NOTIFICATION-TYPE instead of TRAP-TYPE.
• As per the SMIv2 format, each notification has an OID associated with it. The root node of the
notification is snTraps (OID enterprise.foundry.0). For example, OID for
snTrapRunningConfigChanged is {snTraps.73}. Earlier, each trap had a trap ID associated with it, as
per the SMIv1 format.

Backward compatibility with SMIv1 trap format

The Brocade device will continue to support creation of traps in SMIv1 format, as before. To allow the
device to send notifications in SMIv2 format, configure the device as described above. The default
mode is still the original SMIv1 format.

Specifying an IPv6 host as an SNMP trap receiver

You can specify an IPv6 host as a trap receiver to ensure that all SNMP traps sent by the device will go
to the same SNMP trap receiver or set of receivers, typically one or more host devices on the network.
To do so, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#snmp-server host ipv6 2001:DB8:89::13

Syntax: snmp-serverhost ipv6 ipv6-address

The ipv6-address must be in hexadecimal format using 16-bit values between colons as documented in
RFC 2373.

SNMP v3 over IPv6

Some FastIron devices support IPv6 for SNMP version 3.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 157

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Restricting SNMP Access to an IPv6 Node

Restricting SNMP Access to an IPv6 Node

You can restrict SNMP access so that the Brocade device can only be accessed by the IPv6 host
address that you specify. To do so, enter a command such as the following .

device(config)#snmp-client ipv6 2001:DB8:89::23

Syntax: snmp-clientipv6 ipv6-address

The ipv6-address must be in hexadecimal format using 16-bit values between colons as documented
in RFC 2373.

Specifying an IPv6 host as an SNMP trap receiver

You can specify an IPv6 host as a trap receiver to ensure that all SNMP traps sent by the Brocade
device will go to the same SNMP trap receiver or set of receivers, typically one or more host devices
on the network. To do so, enter the snmp-server host ipv6 command .

device(config)#snmp-server host ipv6 2001:DB8:89::13

Syntax: snmp-serverhost ipv6 ipv6-address

The ipv6-address must be in hexadecimal format using 16-bit values between colons as documented
in RFC 2373.

Viewing IPv6 SNMP server addresses

Many of the existing show commands display IPv6 addresses for IPv6 SNMP servers. The following
example shows output for the show snmp server command.

device#show snmp server

Contact:
Location:
Community(ro): .....
Traps
Warm/Cold start: Enable
Link up: Enable
Link down: Enable
Authentication: Enable
Locked address violation: Enable
Power supply failure: Enable
Fan failure: Enable
Temperature warning: Enable
STP new root: Enable
STP topology change: Enable
vsrp: Enable
Total Trap-Receiver Entries: 4
Trap-Receiver IP-Address Port-Number Community
1 10.147.201.100
162 .....
2 2001:DB8::200
162 .....
3 10.147.202.100
162 .....
4 2001:DB8::200
162 .....

158 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying SNMP Information

Displaying SNMP Information

This section lists the commands for viewing SNMP-related information.

Displaying the Engine ID

To display the engine ID of a management module, enter a command such as the following.

device#show snmp engineid

Local SNMP Engine ID: 800007c70300e05290ab60
Engine Boots: 3
Engine time: 5

Syntax: show snmp engineid

The engine ID identifies the source or destination of the packet.
The engine boots represents the number of times that the SNMP engine reinitialized itself with the same
engine ID. If the engineID is modified, the boot count is reset to 0.
The engine time represents the current time with the SNMP agent.

Displaying SNMP groups

To display the definition of an SNMP group, enter a command such as the following.

device#show snmp group

groupname = exceptifgrp
security model = v3
security level = authNoPriv
ACL id = 0
IPv6 ACL name: ipv6acl
readview = exceptif
writeview =
none

Syntax: show snmp group

The value for security level can be one of the following.

Security level Authentication

none If the security model shows v1 or v2, then security level is blank. User names are not used to
authenticate users; community strings are used instead.

noauthNoPriv Displays if the security model shows v3 and user authentication is by user name only.

authNoPriv Displays if the security model shows v3 and user authentication is by user name and the MD5 or
SHA algorithm.

Displaying user information

To display the definition of an SNMP user account, enter a command such as the following.

device#show snmp user

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 159

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Interpreting varbinds in report packets

username = bob
ACL id = 2
group = admin
security model = v3
group ACL id = 0
authtype = md5
authkey = 3aca18d90b8d172760e2dd2e8f59b7fe
privtype = des, privkey = 1088359afb3701730173a6332d406eec
engine ID= 800007c70300e052ab0000

Syntax: show snmp user

Interpreting varbinds in report packets

If an SNMP version 3 request packet is to be rejected by an SNMP agent, the agent sends a report
packet that contains one or more varbinds. The varbinds contain additional information, showing the
cause of failures. An SNMP manager application decodes the description from the varbind. The
following table presents a list of varbinds supported by the SNMP agent.

Varbind object Identifier Description

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 11. 2. 1. 3. 0 Unknown packet data unit.

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 12. 1. 5. 0 The value of the varbind shows the engine ID that needs to be used in the snmp-
server engineid command

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 15. 1. 1. 1. 0 Unsupported security level.

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 15. 1. 1. 2. 0 Not in time packet.

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 15. 1. 1. 3. 0 Unknown user name. This varbind may also be generated:

• If the configured ACL for this user filters out this packet.
• If the group associated with the user is unknown.

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 15. 1. 1. 4. 0 Unknown engine ID. The value of this varbind would be the correct authoritative
engineID that should be used.

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 15. 1. 1. 5. 0 Wrong digest.

1. 3. 6. 1. 6. 3. 15. 1. 1. 6. 0 Decryption error.

SNMP v3 configuration examples

The following sections present examples of how to configure SNMP v3.

Example 1
device(config)#snmp-s group admingrp v3 priv read all write all notify all
device(config)#snmp-s user adminuser admingrp v3 auth md5
auth password
priv
privacy password
device(config)#snmp-s host

160 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Example 2

dest-ip
version v3 privacy adminuser

Example 2
device(config)#snmp-server view internet internet included
device(config)#snmp-server view system system included
device(config)#snmp-server community ..... ro
device(config)#snmp-server community ..... rw
device(config)#snmp-server contact isc-operations
device(config)#snmp-server location sdh-pillbox
device(config)#snmp-server host 128.91.255.32 .....
device(config)#snmp-server group ops v3 priv read internet write system
device(config)#snmp-server group admin v3 priv read internet write internet
device(config)#snmp-server group restricted v3 priv read internet
device(config)#snmp-server user ops ops v3 encrypted auth md5
ab8e9cd6d46e7a270b8c9549d92a069 priv encrypted des 0e1b153303b6188089411447dbc32de
device(config)#snmp-server user admin admin v3 encrypted auth md5
0d8a2123f91bfbd8695fef16a6f4207b priv encrypted des 18e0cf359fce4fcd60df19c2b6515448
device(config)#snmp-server user restricted restricted v3 encrypted auth md5
261fd8f56a3ad51c8bcec1e4609f54dc priv encrypted des d32e66152f89de9b2e0cb17a65595f43

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 161

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Example 2

162 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) and Cisco Discovery Protocol
(CDP) Packets

● FDP Overview............................................................................................................... 163

● CDP packets................................................................................................................. 168

FDP Overview
The Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) enables Brocade devices to advertise themselves to other
Brocade devices on the network. When you enable FDP on a Brocade device, the device periodically
advertises information including the following:
• Hostname (device ID)
• Product platform and capability
• Software version
• VLAN and Layer 3 protocol address information for the port sending the update. IP, IPX, and
AppleTalk Layer 3 information is supported.
A Brocade device running FDP sends FDP updates on Layer 2 to MAC address 00-00-00-CC-CC-CC.
Other Brocade devices listening on that address receive the updates and can display the information in
the updates. Brocade devices can send and receive FDP updates on Ethernet interfaces.
FDP is disabled by default.

NOTE
If FDP is not enabled on a Brocade device that receives an FDP update or the device is running a
software release that does not support FDP, the update passes through the device at Layer 2.

FDP configuration
The following sections describe how to enable Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) and how to change
the FDP update and hold timers.

Enabling FDP globally

To enable a Brocade device to globally send FDP packets, enter the following command at the global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)# fdp run

Syntax: [no] fdprun

The feature is disabled by default.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 163

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling FDP at the interface level

Enabling FDP at the interface level

By default, FDP is enabled at the interface level after FDP is enabled on the device.
When FDP is enabled globally, you can disable and re-enable FDP on individual ports.
Disable FDP by entering commands such as the following:

device(config)# int e 2/1

device(config-if-2/1)# no fdp enable

Enable or repenable FDP by entering commands such as the following:

device(config-if-2/1)# fdp enable

Syntax: [no] fdp enable

Specifying the IP management address to advertise

When FDP is enabled, by default, the Brocade device advertises one IPv4 address and one IPv6
address to its FDP neighbors. If desired, you can configure the device to advertise only the IPv4
management address or only the IPv6 management address. You can set the configuration globally
on a Layer 2 switch, or on an interface on a Layer 3 switch.
For example, to configure a Layer 2 switch to advertise the IPv4 address, enter the following
command at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI:

device(config)# fdp advertise ipv4

To configure a Layer 3 switch to advertise the IPv6 address, enter the following command at the
Interface level of the CLI:

device(config-if-2/1)# fdp advertise ipv6

Syntax: fdp advertise ipv4 | ipv6

Changing the FDP update timer

By default, a Brocade device enabled for FDP sends an FDP update every 60 seconds. You can
change the update timer to a value from 5 - 900 seconds.
To change the FDP update timer, enter a command such as the following at the global CONFIG level
of the CLI.

device(config)# fdp timer 120

Syntax: [no] fdp timer secs

The secs parameter specifies the number of seconds between updates and can be from 5 - 900
seconds. The default is 60 seconds.

Changing the FDP hold time

By default, a Brocade device that receives an FDP update holds the information until one of the
following events occurs:
• The device receives a new update.
• 180 seconds have passed since receipt of the last update. This is the hold time.
Once either of these events occurs, the device discards the update.

164 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying FDP information

To change the FDP hold time, enter the fdp holdtime command at the global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)# fdp holdtime 360

Syntax: [no] fdp holdtime secs

The secs parameter specifies the number of seconds a Brocade device that receives an FDP update
can hold the update before discarding it. You can specify from 10 - 255 seconds. The default is 180
seconds.

Displaying FDP information

You can display the following Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) information:
• FDP entries for Brocade neighbors
• Individual FDP entries
• FDP information for an interface on the device you are managing
• FDP packet statistics

NOTE
If the Brocade device has intercepted CDP updates, then the CDP information is also displayed.

Displaying neighbor information

To display a summary list of all the Brocade neighbors that have sent FDP updates to this Brocade
device, enter the show fdp neighbor command.

device# show fdp neighbor

Capability Codes: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source Route Bridge
S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater
(*) indicates a CDP device
Device ID Local Int Holdtm Capability Platform Port ID
-------------- ------------ ------ ---------- ----------- -------------
FastIronB Eth 2/9 178 Router FastIron Rou Eth 2/9

Syntax: show fdp neighbor [ ethernet port ] [ detail ]

The ethernet port parameter lists the information for updates received on the specified port.
The detail parameter lists detailed information for each device.
The show fdp neighbor command, without optional parameters, displays the following information.

TABLE 19 Summary FDP and CDP neighbor information

This line... Displays...

Device ID The hostname of the neighbor.

Local Int The interface on which this Brocade device received an FDP or CDP update for the neighbor.

Holdtm The maximum number of seconds this device can keep the information received in the update before
discarding it.

Capability The role the neighbor is capable of playing in the network.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 165

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying FDP entries

TABLE 19 Summary FDP and CDP neighbor information (Continued)

This line... Displays...

Platform The product platform of the neighbor.

Port ID The interface through which the neighbor sent the update.

To display detailed information, enter the show fdp neighbor detail command.

deviceA# show fdp neighbor detail

Device ID: FastIronB configured as default VLAN1, tag-type8100
Entry address(es):
IP address: 192.168.0.13
IPv6 address (Global): c:a:f:e:c:a:f:e
Platform: FastIron Router, Capabilities: Router
Interface: Eth 2/9
Port ID (outgoing port): Eth 2/9 is TAGGED in following VLAN(s):
9 10 11
Holdtime : 176 seconds
Version :
Foundry, Inc. Router, IronWare Version 07.6.01b1T53 Compiled on Aug 29
2002 at 10:35:21 labeled as B2R07601b1

The show fdp neighbor detail command displays the following information.

TABLE 20 Detailed FDP and CDP neighbor information

Parameter Definition

Device ID The hostname of the neighbor. In addition, this line lists the VLAN memberships and other
VLAN information for the neighbor port that sent the update to this device.

Entry address(es) The Layer 3 protocol addresses configured on the neighbor port that sent the update to this
device. If the neighbor is a Layer 2 Switch, this field lists the management IP address.

Platform The product platform of the neighbor.

Capabilities The role the neighbor is capable of playing in the network.

Interface The interface on which this device received an FDP or CDP update for the neighbor.

Port ID The interface through which the neighbor sent the update.

Holdtime The maximum number of seconds this device can keep the information received in the update
before discarding it.

Version The software version running on the neighbor.

Displaying FDP entries

To display the detailed neighbor information for a specific device, enter the show fdp entry FastIron x
command.

deviceA# show fdp entry FastIronB

Device ID: FastIronB configured as default VLAN1, tag-type8100
Entry address(es):

166 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying FDP information for an interface

Platform: FastIron Router, Capabilities: Router

Interface: Eth 2/9
Port ID (outgoing port): Eth 2/9 is TAGGED in following VLAN(s):
9 10 11
Holdtime : 176 seconds
Version :
Foundry, Inc. Router, IronWare Version 07.6.01b1T53 Compiled on Aug 29
2002 at 10:35:21 labeled as B2R07601b1

Syntax: show fdp entry * | device-id

The * | device-id parameter specifies the device ID. If you enter * , the detailed updates for all neighbor
devices are displayed. If you enter a specific device ID, the update for that device is displayed. For
information about the display, refer to Displaying neighbor information on page 165.

Displaying FDP information for an interface

To display FDP information for an interface, enter a command such as the following.

deviceA# show fdp interface ethernet 2/3

FastEthernet2/3 is up, line protocol is up
Encapsulation ethernet
Sending FDP packets every 5 seconds
Holdtime is 180 seconds

This example shows information for Ethernet port 2/3. The port sends FDP updates every 5 seconds.
Neighbors that receive the updates can hold them for up to 180 seconds before discarding them.
Syntax: show fdp interface [ ethernet port ]
The ethernet port parameter lists the information only for the specified interface.

Displaying FDP and CDP statistics

To display FDP and CDP packet statistics, enter the following command.

deviceA# show fdp traffic

CDP/FDP counters:
Total packets output: 6, Input: 5
Hdr syntax: 0, Chksum error: 0, Encaps failed: 0
No memory: 0, Invalid packet: 0, Fragmented: 0
Internal errors: 0

Syntax: show fdp traffic

Clearing FDP and CDP information

You can clear the following FDP and CDP information:
• Information received in FDP and CDP updates
• FDP and CDP statistics
The same commands clear information for both FDP and CDP.

Clearing FDP and CDP neighbor information

To clear the information received in FDP and CDP updates from neighboring devices, enter the
following command.

device# clear fdp table

Syntax: clear fdp table

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 167

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing FDP and CDP statistics

NOTE
This command clears all the updates for FDP and CDP.

Clearing FDP and CDP statistics

To clear FDP and CDP statistics, enter the following command.

device# clear fdp counters

Syntax: clear fdp counters

CDP packets
Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) packets are used by Cisco devices to advertise themselves to other
Cisco devices. By default, Brocade devices forward these packets without examining their contents.
You can configure a Brocade device to intercept and display the contents of CDP packets. This
feature is useful for learning device and interface information for Cisco devices in the network.
Brocade devices support intercepting and interpreting CDP version 1 and CDP version 2 packets.

NOTE
The Brocade device can interpret only the information fields that are common to both CDP version 1
and CDP version 2.

NOTE
When you enable interception of CDP packets, the Brocade device drops the packets. As a result,
Cisco devices will no longer receive the packets.

Enabling interception of CDP packets globally

To enable the device to intercept and display CDP packets, enter the following command at the global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)# cdp run

Syntax: [no] cdprun

The feature is disabled by default.

Enabling interception of CDP packets on an interface

You can disable and enable CDP at the interface level.
You can enter commands such as the following.

device(config)# int e 2/1

device(config-if-2/1)# cdp enable

168 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying CDP information

Syntax: [no] cdpenable

By default, the feature is enabled on an interface once CDP is enabled on the device.

Displaying CDP information

You can display the following CDP information:
• Cisco neighbors
• CDP entries for all Cisco neighbors or a specific neighbor
• CDP packet statistics

Displaying neighbors
To display the Cisco neighbors the Brocade device has learned from CDP packets, enter the show fdp
neighbors command.

device# show fdp neighbors

Capability Codes: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source Route Bridge
S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater
(*) indicates a Cisco device
Device ID Local Int Holdtm Capability Platform Port ID
-------------- ------------ ------ ---------- ----------- -------------
(*)Router Eth 1/1 124 R cisco RSP4
FastEthernet5/0/0

To display detailed information for the neighbors, enter the show fdp neighbors detail command.

device# show fdp neighbors detail

Device ID: Router
Entry address(es):
IP address: 10.95.6.143
Platform: cisco RSP4, Capabilities: Router
Interface: Eth 1/1, Port ID (outgoing port): FastEthernet5/0/0
Holdtime : 150 seconds
Version :
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) RSP Software (RSP-JSV-M), Version 12.0(5)T1, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc1)
Copyright (c) 1986-1999 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Thu 19-Aug-99 04:12 by cmong

To display information about a neighbor attached to a specific port, enter a command such as the
following.

device# show fdp neighbors ethernet 1/1

Device ID: Router
Entry address(es):
IP address: 10.95.6.143
Platform: cisco RSP4, Capabilities: Router
Interface: Eth 1/1, Port ID (outgoing port): FastEthernet5/0/0
Holdtime : 127 seconds
Version :
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) RSP Software (RSP-JSV-M), Version 12.0(5)T1, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc1)
Copyright (c) 1986-1999 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Thu 19-Aug-99 04:12 by cmong

Syntax: show fdp neighbors [ detail | ethernet port ]

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 169

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying CDP entries

Displaying CDP entries

To display CDP entries for all neighbors, enter the show fdp entry command.

device# show fdp entry *

Device ID: Router
Entry address(es):
IP address: 10.95.6.143
Platform: cisco RSP4, Capabilities: Router
Interface: Eth 1/1, Port ID (outgoing port): FastEthernet5/0/0
Holdtime : 124 seconds
Version :
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) RSP Software (RSP-JSV-M), Version 12.0(5)T1, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc1)
Copyright (c) 1986-1999 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Thu 19-Aug-99 04:12 by cmong

To display CDP entries for a specific device, specify the device ID, as shown in the following example.

device# show fdp entry Router1

Device ID: Router1
Entry address(es):
IP address: 10.95.6.143
Platform: cisco RSP4, Capabilities: Router
Interface: Eth 1/1, Port ID (outgoing port): FastEthernet5/0/0
Holdtime : 156 seconds
Version :
Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software
IOS (tm) RSP Software (RSP-JSV-M), Version 12.0(5)T1, RELEASE SOFTWARE
(fc1)
Copyright (c) 1986-1999 by cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Thu 19-Aug-99 04:12 by cmong

Syntax: show fdp entry * | device-id

Displaying CDP statistics

To display CDP packet statistics, enter the show fdp traffic command.

device# show fdp traffic

CDP counters:
Total packets output: 0, Input: 3
Hdr syntax: 0, Chksum error: 0, Encaps failed: 0
No memory: 0, Invalid packet: 0, Fragmented: 0

Syntax: show fdp traffic

Clearing CDP information

You can clear the following CDP information:
• Cisco Neighbor information
• CDP statistics
To clear the Cisco neighbor information, enter the clear fdp table command.

device# clear fdp table

Syntax: clear fdptable

To clear CDP statistics, enter the following command.

device# clear fdp counters

Syntax:clear fdp counters

170 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) and Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) Packets

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 171

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing CDP information

172 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

● LLDP terms used in this chapter................................................................................... 173

● LLDP overview.............................................................................................................. 174
● LLDP-MED overview.....................................................................................................175
● General LLDP operating principles............................................................................... 177
● MIB support...................................................................................................................182
● Syslog messages.......................................................................................................... 182
● LLDP configuration........................................................................................................182
● LLDP-MED configuration.............................................................................................. 196
● LLDP-MED attributes advertised by the Brocade device.............................................. 206
● Resetting LLDP statistics.............................................................................................. 215
● Clearing cached LLDP neighbor information................................................................ 215

LLDP terms used in this chapter

Endpoint device - An LLDP-MED device located at the network edge, that provides some aspect of IP
communications service based on IEEE 802 LAN technology. An Endpoint device is classified in one of
three class types (I, II, or III) and can be an IP telephone, softphone, VoIP gateway, or conference
bridge, among others.
Link Layer discovery protocol (LLDP) - The Layer 2 network discovery protocol described in the
IEEE 802.1AB standard, Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery. This protocol
enables a station to advertise its capabilities to, and to discover, other LLDP-enabled stations in the
same 802 LAN segments.
LLDP agent - The protocol entity that implements LLDP for a particular IEEE 802 device. Depending on
the configured LLDP operating mode, an LLDP agent can send and receive LLDP advertisements
(frames), or send LLDP advertisements only, or receive LLDP advertisements only.
LLDP media endpoint devices (LLDP-MED) - The Layer 2 network discovery protocol extension
described in the ANSI/TIA-1057 standard, LLDP for Media Endpoint Devices. This protocol enables a
switch to configure and manage connected Media Endpoint devices that need to send media streams
across the network (for example, IP telephones and security cameras).
LLDPDU (LLDP Data Unit) - A unit of information in an LLDP packet that consists of a sequence of
short variable length information elements, known as TLVs. LLDP pass-through is not supported in
conformance to IEEE standard.
MIB (Management Information Base) - A virtual database that identifies each manageable object by its
name, syntax, accessibility, and status, along with a text description and unique object identifier (OID).
The database is accessible by a Network Management Station (NMS) using a management protocol
such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Network connectivity device - A forwarding 802 LAN device, such as a router, switch, or wireless
access point.
Station - A node in a network.
TLV (Type-Length-Value) - An information element in an LLDPDU that describes the type of information
being sent, the length of the information string, and the value (actual information) that will be
transmitted.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 173

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP overview

TTL (Time-to-Live) - Specifies the length of time that the receiving device should maintain the
information acquired through LLDP in its MIB.

LLDP overview
LLDP enables a station attached to an IEEE 802 LAN/MAN to advertise its capabilities to, and to
discover, other stations in the same 802 LAN segments.
The information distributed by LLDP (the advertisement) is stored by the receiving device in a
standard Management Information Base (MIB), accessible by a Network Management System (NMS)
using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The
information also can be viewed from the CLI, using show LLDP commands.
The following diagram illustrates LLDP connectivity

FIGURE 3 LLDP connectivity

Benefits of LLDP
LLDP provides the following benefits:
• Network Management:

174 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP-MED overview

‐ Simplifies the use of and enhances the ability of network management tools in multi-vendor
environments
‐ Enables discovery of accurate physical network topologies such as which devices are
neighbors and through which ports they connect
‐ Enables discovery of stations in multi-vendor environments
• Network Inventory Data:
‐ Supports optional system name, system description, system capabilities and management
address
‐ System description can contain the device product name or model number, version of
hardware type, and operating system
‐ Provides device capability, such as switch, router, or WLAN access point
• Network troubleshooting:
‐ Information generated by LLDP can be used to detect speed and duplex mismatches
‐ Accurate topologies simplify troubleshooting within enterprise networks
‐ Can discover devices with misconfigured or unreachable IP addresses

LLDP-MED overview
LLDP-MED is an extension to LLDP. This protocol enables advanced LLDP features in a Voice over IP
(VoIP) network. Whereas LLDP enables network discovery between Network Connectivity devices,
LLDP-MED enables network discovery between Network Connectivity devices and media Endpoints
such as, IP telephones, softphones, VoIP gateways and conference bridges.
The following diagram illustrates LLDP-MED connectivity.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 175

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Benefits of LLDP-MED

FIGURE 4 LLDP-MED connectivity

Benefits of LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED provides the following benefits:
• Vendor-independent management capabilities, enabling different IP telephony systems to
interoperate in one network.
• Automatically deploys network policies, such as Layer 2 and Layer 3 QoS policies and Voice
VLANs.
• Supports E-911 Emergency Call Services (ECS) for IP telephony
• Collects Endpoint inventory information
• Network troubleshooting
‐ Helps to detect improper network policy configuration

LLDP-MED class
An LLDP-MED class specifies an Endpoint type and its capabilities. An Endpoint can belong to one of
three LLDP-MED class types:
• Class 1 (Generic endpoint) - A Class 1 Endpoint requires basic LLDP discovery services, but does
not support IP media nor does it act as an end-user communication appliance. A Class 1 Endpoint

176 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 General LLDP operating principles

can be an IP communications controller, other communication-related server, or other device

requiring basic LLDP discovery services.
• Class 2 (Media endpoint) - A Class 2 Endpoint supports media streams and may or may not be
associated with a particular end user. Device capabilities include media streaming, as well as all of
the capabilities defined for Class 1 Endpoints. A Class 2 Endpoint can be a voice/media gateway,
conference, bridge, media server, etc.
• Class 3 (Communication endpoint) - A Class 3 Endpoint supports end user IP communication.
Capabilities include aspects related to end user devices, as well as all of the capabilities defined for
Class 1 and Class 2 Endpoints. A Class 3 Endpoint can be an IP telephone, softphone (PC-based
phone), or other communication device that directly supports the end user.
Discovery services defined in Class 3 include location identifier (ECS/E911) information and inventory
management.
The LLDP-MED device class is advertised when LLDP-MED is enabled on a port.

General LLDP operating principles

LLDP and LLDP-MED use the services of the Data Link sublayers, Logical Link Control and Media
Access Control, to transmit and receive information to and from other LLDP Agents (protocol entities
that implement LLDP).
LLDP is a one-way protocol. An LLDP agent can transmit and receive information to and from another
LLDP agent located on an adjacent device, but it cannot solicit information from another LLDP agent,
nor can it acknowledge information received from another LLDP agent.

LLDP operating modes

When LLDP is enabled on a global basis, by default, each port on the Brocade device will be capable of
transmitting and receiving LLDP packets. You can disable a port’s ability to transmit and receive LLDP
packets, or change the operating mode to one of the following:
• Transmit LLDP information only
• Receive LLDP information only

LLDP transmit mode

An LLDP agent sends LLDP packets to adjacent LLDP-enabled devices. The LLDP packets contain
information about the transmitting device and port.
An LLDP agent initiates the transmission of LLDP packets whenever the transmit countdown timing
counter expires, or whenever LLDP information has changed. When a transmit cycle is initiated, the
LLDP manager extracts the MIB objects and formats this information into TLVs. The TLVs are inserted
into an LLDPDU, addressing parameters are prepended to the LLDPDU, and the information is sent out
LLDP-enabled ports to adjacent LLDP-enabled devices.

LLDP receive mode

An LLDP agent receives LLDP packets from adjacent LLDP-enabled devices. The LLDP packets
contain information about the transmitting device and port.
When an LLDP agent receives LLDP packets, it checks to ensure that the LLDPDUs contain the correct
sequence of mandatory TLVs, then validates optional TLVs. If the LLDP agent detects any errors in the
LLDPDUs and TLVs, it drops them in software. TLVs that are not recognized but do not contain basic

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 177

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP packets

formatting errors, are assumed to be valid and are assigned a temporary identification index and
stored for future possible alter retrieval by network management. All validated TLVs are stored in the
neighbor database.

LLDP packets
LLDP agents transmit information about a sending device/port in packets called LLDP Data Units
(LLDPDUs). All the LLDP information to be communicated by a device is contained within a single
1500 byte packet. A device receiving LLDP packets is not permitted to combine information from
multiple packets.
As shown in the following figure, each LLDPDU has three mandatory TLVs, an End of LLDPDU TLV,
plus optional TLVs as selected by network management.

FIGURE 5 LLDPDU packet format

Each LLDPDU consists of an untagged Ethernet header and a sequence of short, variable length
information elements known as type, length, value (TLV).
TLVs have Type, Length, and Value fields, where:
• Type identifies the kind of information being sent
• Length indicates the length (in octets) of the information string
• Value is the actual information being sent (for example, a binary bit map or an alpha-numeric string
containing one or more fields).

TLV support
This section lists the LLDP and LLDP-MED TLV support.

LLDP TLVs
There are two types of LLDP TLVs, as specified in the IEEE 802.3AB standard:
• Basic management TLVs consist of both optional general system information TLVs as well as
mandatory TLVs.
Mandatory TLVs cannot be manually configured. They are always the first three TLVs in the LLDPDU,
and are part of the packet header.
General system information TLVs are optional in LLDP implementations and are defined by the
Network Administrator.
Brocade devices support the following Basic Management TLVs:
• ‐ Chassis ID (mandatory)
‐ Port ID (mandatory)
‐ Time to Live (mandatory)

178 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP-MED TLVs

‐ Port description
‐ System name
‐ System description
‐ System capabilities
‐ Management address
‐ End of LLDPDU
• Organizationally-specific TLVs are optional in LLDP implementations and are defined and encoded
by individual organizations or vendors. These TLVs include support for, but are not limited to, the
IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 standards and the TIA-1057 standard.
Brocade devices support the following Organizationally-specific TLVs:
• ‐ 802.1 organizationally-specific TLVs
Port VLAN ID
VLAN name TLV
• ‐ 802.3 organizationally-specific TLVs
MAC/PHY configuration/status
Power through MDI
Link aggregation
Maximum frame size

LLDP-MED TLVs
Brocade devices honor and send the following LLDP-MED TLVs, as defined in the TIA-1057 standard:
• LLDP-MED capabilities
• Network policy
• Location identification
• Extended power-via-MDI

Mandatory TLVs
When an LLDP agent transmits LLDP packets to other agents in the same 802 LAN segments, the
following mandatory TLVs are always included:
• Chassis ID
• Port ID
• Time to Live (TTL)
This section describes the above TLVs in detail.

Chassis ID

The Chassis ID identifies the device that sent the LLDP packets.
There are several ways in which a device may be identified. A chassis ID subtype, included in the TLV
and shown in the following table, indicates how the device is being referenced in the Chassis ID field.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 179

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

TABLE 21 Chassis ID subtypes

ID subtype Description

0 Reserved

1 Chassis component

2 Interface alias

3 Port component

4 MAC address

5 Network address

6 Interface name

7 Locally assigned

8 - 255 Reserved

Brocade devices use chassis ID subtype 4, the base MAC address of the device. Other third party
devices may use a chassis ID subtype other than 4. The chassis ID will appear similar to the following
on the remote device, and in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

Chassis ID (MAC address): 0000.0033.e2c0

The chassis ID TLV is always the first TLV in the LLDPDU.

Port ID

The Port ID identifies the port from which LLDP packets were sent.
There are several ways in which a port may be identified, as shown in the following table. A port ID
subtype, included in the TLV, indicates how the port is being referenced in the Port ID field.

TABLE 22 Port ID subtypes

ID subtype Description

0 Reserved

1 Interface alias

2 Port component

3 MAC address

4 Network address

5 Interface name

180 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

TABLE 22 Port ID subtypes (Continued)

ID subtype Description

6 Agent circuit ID

7 Locally assigned

8 - 255 Reserved

Brocade devices use port ID subtype 3, the permanent MAC address associated with the port. Other
third party devices may use a port ID subtype other than 3. The port ID appears similar to the following
on the remote device, and in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info).

Port ID (MAC address): 0000.0033.e2d3

The LLDPDU format is shown in LLDP packets on page 178.

The Port ID TLV format is shown below.

FIGURE 6 Port ID TLV packet format

TTL value

The Time to Live (TTL) Value is the length of time the receiving device should maintain the information
acquired by LLDP in its MIB.
The TTL value is automatically computed based on the LLDP configuration settings. The TTL value will
appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display output on the Brocade
device (show lldp local-info).

Time to live: 40 seconds

If the TTL field has a value other than zero, the receiving LLDP agent is notified to completely replace
all information associated with the LLDP agent/port with the information in the received LLDPDU.
If the TTL field value is zero, the receiving LLDP agent is notified that all system information associated
with the LLDP agent/port is to be deleted. This TLV may be used, for example, to signal that the
sending port has initiated a port shutdown procedure.
The LLDPDU format is shown in LLDP packets on page 178.
The TTL TLV format is shown below.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 181

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 MIB support

FIGURE 7 TTL TLV packet format

MIB support
Brocade devices support the following standard management information base (MIB) modules:
• LLDP-MIB
• LLDP-EXT-DOT1-MIB
• LLDP-EXT-DOT3-MIB
• LLDP-EXT-MED-MIB

Syslog messages
Syslog messages for LLDP provide management applications with information related to MIB data
consistency and general status. These Syslog messages correspond to the lldpRemTablesChange
SNMP notifications. Refer to Enabling LLDP SNMP notifications and Syslog messages on page 187.
Syslog messages for LLDP-MED provide management applications with information related to
topology changes. These Syslog messages correspond to the lldpXMedTopologyChangeDetected
SNMP notifications. Refer to Enabling SNMP notifications and Syslog messagesfor LLDP-MED
topology changes on page 197.

LLDP configuration
This section describes how to enable and configure LLDP.
The following table lists the LLDP global-level tasks and the default behavior/value for each task.

TABLE 23 LLDP global configuration tasks and default behavior /value

Global task Default behavior / value when LLDP is enabled

Enabling LLDP on a global basis Disabled

Specifying the maximum number of LLDP Automatically set to 392 neighbors per device
neighbors per device

182 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP configuration notes and considerations

TABLE 23 LLDP global configuration tasks and default behavior /value (Continued)

Global task Default behavior / value when LLDP is enabled

Specifying the maximum number of LLDP Automatically set to 4 neighbors per port
neighbors per port

Enabling SNMP notifications and Syslog messages Disabled

Changing the minimum time between SNMP traps Automatically set to 2 seconds when SNMP notifications and
and Syslog messages Syslog messages for LLDP are enabled

Enabling and disabling TLV advertisements When LLDP transmit is enabled, by default, the Brocade
device will automatically advertise LLDP capabilities, except
for the system description, VLAN name, and power-via-MDI
information, which may be configured by the system
administrator.
Also, if desired, you can disable the advertisement of
individual TLVs.

Changing the minimum time between LLDP Automatically set to 2 seconds

transmissions

Changing the interval between regular LLDP Automatically set to 30 seconds

transmissions

Changing the holdtime multiplier for transmit TTL Automatically set to 4

Changing the minimum time between port Automatically set to 2 seconds

reinitializations

LLDP configuration notes and considerations

• LLDP is supported on Ethernet interfaces only.
• If a port is 802.1X-enabled, the transmission and reception of LLDP packets will only take place while
the port is authorized.
• Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) and Brocade Discovery Protocol (FDP) run independently of LLDP.
Therefore, these discovery protocols can run simultaneously on the same device.
• By default, the Brocade device limits the number of neighbors per port to four, and staggers the
transmission of LLDP packets on different ports, in order to minimize any high-usage spikes to the
CPU.
• By default, the Brocade device forwards LLDP packets even though LLDP is not configured on the
device. This ensures consistency with other protocols and allows transparent forwarding, though it
amounts to noncompliance with IEEE Standards.
• Ports that are in blocking mode (spanning tree) can still receive LLDP packets from a forwarding port.
• Auto-negotiation status indicates what is being advertised by the port for 802.3 auto-negotiation.

Enabling and disabling LLDP

LLDP is enabled by default on individual ports. However, to run LLDP, you must first enable it on a
global basis (on the entire device).

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 183

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling support for tagged LLDP packets

To enable LLDP globally, enter the following command at the global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp run

Syntax:[no] lldp run

Enabling support for tagged LLDP packets

By default, Brocade devices do not accept tagged LLDP packets from other vendors’ devices. To
enable support, apply the command lldp tagged-packets process at the Global CONFIG level of the
CLI. When enabled, the device will accept incoming LLDP tagged packets if the VLAN tag matches
any of the following:
• a configured VLAN on the port
• the default VLAN for a tagged port
• the configured untagged VLAN for a dual-mode port
To enable support for tagged LLDP packets, enter the following command.

device(config)#lldp tagged-packets process

Syntax: [no] lldptagged-packets process

Changing a port LLDP operating mode

When LLDP is enabled on a global basis, by default, each port on the Brocade device will be capable
of transmitting and receiving LLDP packets. You can disable a port’s ability to transmit and receive
LLDP packets, or change the operating mode to one of the following:
• Transmit LLDP information only
• Receive LLDP information only

You can configure a different operating mode for each port on the Brocade device. For example, you
could disable the receipt and transmission of LLDP packets on port e 2/1, configure port e 2/3 to only
receive LLDP packets, and configure port e 2/5 to only transmit LLDP packets.
The following sections show how to change the operating mode.

Enabling and disabling receive and transmit mode

To disable the receipt and transmission of LLDP packets on individual ports, enter a command such
as the following at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#no lldp enable ports e 2/4 e 2/5

The above command disables LLDP on ports 2/4 and 2/5. These ports will not transmit nor receive
LLDP packets.
To enable LLDP on a port after it has been disabled, enter the following command.

device(config)#lldp enable ports e 2/4

Syntax: [no] lldp enable ports ethernet port-list | all

Use the [no] form of the command to disable the receipt and transmission of LLDP packets on a port.

184 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

NOTE
When a port is configured to both receive and transmit LLDP packets and the MED capabilities TLV is
enabled, LLDP-MED is enabled as well. LLDP-MED is not enabled if the operating mode is set to
receive only or transmit only.

Enabling and disabling receive only mode

When LLDP is enabled on a global basis, by default, each port on the Brocade device will be capable of
transmitting and receiving LLDP packets. To change the LLDP operating mode from receive and
transmit mode to receive only mode, simply disable the transmit mode. Enter a command such as the
following at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#no lldp enable transmit ports e 2/4 e 2/5 e 2/6

The above command changes the LLDP operating mode on ports 2/4, 2/5, and 2/6 from transmit and
receive mode to receive only mode.
To change a port LLDP operating mode from transmit only to receive only, first disable the transmit only
mode, then enable the receive only mode. Enter commands such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp enable transmit ports e 2/7 e 2/8 e 2/9

device(config)#lldp enable receive ports e 2/7 e 2/8 e 2/9

The above commands change the LLDP operating mode on ports 2/7, 2/8, and 2/9, from transmit only
to receive only. Note that if you do not disable the transmit only mode, you will configure the port to both
transmit and receive LLDP packets.

NOTE
LLDP-MED is not enabled when you enable the receive only operating mode. To enable LLDP-MED,
you must configure the port to both receive and transmit LLDP packets. Refer to Changing a port LLDP
operating mode.

Syntax:[no] lldp enable receive ports ethernet port-list | all

Use the [no] form of the command to disable the receive only mode.

Enabling and Disabling Transmit Only Mode

When LLDP is enabled on a global basis, by default, each port on the Brocade device will be capable of
transmitting and receiving LLDP packets. To change the LLDP operating mode to transmit only mode,
simply disable the receive mode. Enter a command such as the following at the Global CONFIG level of
the CLI.

device(config)#no lldp enable receive ports e 2/4 e 2/5 e 2/6

The above command changes the LLDP operating mode on ports 2/4, 2/5, and 2/6 from transmit and
receive mode to transmit only mode. Any incoming LLDP packets will be dropped in software.
To change a port LLDP operating mode from receive only to transmit only, first disable the receive only
mode, then enable the transmit only mode. For example, enter commands such as the following at the
Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#no lldp enable receive ports e 2/7 e 2/8

device(config)#lldp enable transmit ports e 2/7 e 2/8

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 185

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring LLDP processing on 802.1x blocked port

The above commands change the LLDP operating mode on ports 2/7 and 2/8 from receive only mode
to transmit only mode. Any incoming LLDP packets will be dropped in software. Note that if you do not
disable receive only mode, you will configure the port to both receive and transmit LLDP packets.

NOTE
LLDP-MED is not enabled when you enable the transmit only operating mode. To enable LLDP-MED,
you must configure the port to both receive and transmit LLDP packets. Refer to Changing a port
LLDP operating mode.
Syntax: [no] lldp enabletransmit ports ethernet port-list | all
Use the [no] form of the command to disable the transmit only mode.

Configuring LLDP processing on 802.1x blocked port

This feature adds support for reception and transmission of Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
packets over an 802.1x blocked port. The default behavior is to drop received LLDP packets and not
to transmit LLDP packets over an 802.1x disabled port. To receive or transmit LLDP packets over
802.1x blocked port or in other words to enable the LLDP processing on 802.1x blocked ports, use the
lldp-pass-through configuration command.

Enabling LLDP processing on 802.1x blocked port

To enable the LLDP processing on all 802.1x blocked ports, enter the following command at the
802.1X configuration mode:

Brocade(config-dot1x)# lldp-pass-through all

Syntax: [no] lldp-pass-through all

To enable LLDP processing on a specific 802.1x blocked port, enter the following command at the
802.1X configuration mode:

Brocade(config-dot1x)# lldp-pass-through ethernet 1/1/1

Syntax: [no] lldp-pass-through ethernet port

Specify the port variable in the format stackable switches-stack-unit/slotnum/portnum
The no form of these commands disables LLDP processing on 802.1x blocked ports.
For more information on LLDP and 801.1x, refer IEEE 802.1AB and IEEE 802.1x.

NOTE
If lldp-pass-through is disabled, the neighboring information is lost only after LLDP timeout period
(default is 120).

Maximum number of LLDP neighbors

You can change the limit of the number of LLDP neighbors for which LLDP data will be retained, per
device as well as per port.

186 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying the maximum number of LLDP neighbors per device

Specifying the maximum number of LLDP neighbors per device

You can change the maximum number of neighbors for which LLDP data will be retained for the entire
system.
For example, to change the maximum number of LLDP neighbors for the entire device to 26, enter the
following command.

device(config)#lldp max-total-neighbors 26

Syntax: [no] lldp max-total-neighbors value

Use the [no] form of the command to remove the static configuration and revert to the default value of
392.
where value is a number between 16 and 8192. The default number of LLDP neighbors per device is
392.
Use the show lldp command to view the configuration.

Specifying the maximum number of LLDP neighbors per port

You can change the maximum number of LLDP neighbors for which LLDP data will be retained for each
port. By default, the maximum number is four and you can change this to a value between one and 64.
For example, to change the maximum number of LLDP neighbors to six, enter the following command.

device(config)#lldp max-neighbors-per-port 6

Syntax: [no] lldp max-neighbors-per-port value

Use the [no] form of the command to remove the static configuration and revert to the default value of
four.
where value is a number from 1 to 64. The default is number of LLDP neighbors per port is four.
Use the show lldp command to view the configuration.

Enabling LLDP SNMP notifications and Syslog messages

SNMP notifications and Syslog messages for LLDP provide management applications with information
related to MIB data updates and general status.
When you enable LLDP SNMP notifications, corresponding Syslog messages are enabled as well.
When you enable LLDP SNMP notifications, the device will send traps and corresponding Syslog
messages whenever there are changes to the LLDP data received from neighboring devices.
LLDP SNMP notifications and corresponding Syslog messages are disabled by default. To enable
them, enter a command such as the following at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp enable snmp notifications ports e 4/2 to 4/6

The above command enables SNMP notifications and corresponding Syslog messages on ports 4/2
and 4/6. By default, the device will send no more than one SNMP notification and Syslog message
within a five second period. If desired, you can change this interval. Refer to Specifying the minimum
time between SNMP traps and Syslog messages on page 188.
Syntax: [no] lldp enablesnmp notifications ports ethernet port-list | all

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 187

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying the minimum time between SNMP traps and Syslog messages

Specifying the minimum time between SNMP traps and Syslog messages
When SNMP notifications and Syslog messages for LLDP are enabled, the device will send no more
than one SNMP notification and corresponding Syslog message within a five second period. If desired,
you can throttle the amount of time between transmission of SNMP traps (lldpRemTablesChange) and
Syslog messages from five seconds up to a value equal to one hour (3600 seconds).

NOTE
Because LLDP Syslog messages are rate limited, some LLDP information given by the system will not
match the current LLDP statistics (as shown in the show lldp statistics command output).

To change the minimum time interval between traps and Syslog messages, enter a command such as
the following.

device(config)#lldp snmp-notification-interval 60

When the above command is applied, the LLDP agent will send no more than one SNMP notification
and Syslog message every 60 seconds.
Syntax: [no] lldp snmp-notification-interval seconds
where seconds is a value between 5 and 3600. The default is 5 seconds.

Changing the minimum time between LLDP transmissions

The LLDP transmit delay timer limits the number of LLDP frames an LLDP agent can send within a
specified time frame. When you enable LLDP, the system automatically sets the LLDP transmit delay
timer to two seconds. If desired, you can change the default behavior from two seconds to a value
between 1 and 8192 seconds.

NOTE
The LLDP transmit delay timer must not be greater than one quarter of the LLDP transmission interval
(CLI command lldp transmit-interval ).

The LLDP transmit delay timer prevents an LLDP agent from transmitting a series of successive LLDP
frames during a short time period, when rapid changes occur in LLDP. It also increases the probability
that multiple changes, rather than single changes, will be reported in each LLDP frame.
To change the LLDP transmit delay timer, enter a command such as the following at the Global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp transmit-delay 7

The above command causes the LLDP agent to wait a minimum of seven seconds after transmitting
an LLDP frame and before sending another LLDP frame.
Syntax: [no] lldp transmit-delay seconds
where seconds is a value between 1 and 8192. The default is two seconds. Note that this value must
not be greater than one quarter of the LLDP transmission interval (CLI command lldp transmit-
interval ).

188 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Changing the interval between regular LLDP transmissions

Changing the interval between regular LLDP transmissions

The LLDP transmit interval specifies the number of seconds between regular LLDP packet
transmissions. When you enable LLDP, by default, the device will wait 30 seconds between regular
LLDP packet transmissions. If desired, you can change the default behavior from 30 seconds to a value
between 5 and 32768 seconds.
To change the LLDP transmission interval, enter a command such as the following at the Global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp transmit-interval 40

The above command causes the LLDP agent to transmit LLDP frames every 40 seconds.
Syntax:[no] lldp transmit-interval seconds
where seconds is a value from 5 to 32768. The default is 30 seconds.

NOTE
Setting the transmit interval or transmit holdtime multiplier, or both, to inappropriate values can cause
the LLDP agent to transmit LLDPDUs with TTL values that are excessively high. This in turn can affect
how long a receiving device will retain the information if it is not refreshed.

Changing the holdtime multiplier for transmit TTL

The holdtime multiplier for transmit TTL is used to compute the actual time-to-live (TTL) value used in
an LLDP frame. The TTL value is the length of time the receiving device should maintain the information
in its MIB. When you enable LLDP, the device automatically sets the holdtime multiplier for TTL to four.
If desired, you can change the default behavior from four to a value between two and ten.
To compute the TTL value, the system multiplies the LLDP transmit interval by the holdtime multiplier.
For example, if the LLDP transmit interval is 30 and the holdtime multiplier for TTL is 4, then the value
120 is encoded in the TTL field in the LLDP header.
To change the holdtime multiplier, enter a command such as the following at the Global CONFIG level
of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp transmit-hold 6

Syntax:[no] lldp transmit-hold value

where value is a number from 2 to 10. The default value is 4.

NOTE
Setting the transmit interval or transmit holdtime multiplier, or both, to inappropriate values can cause
the LLDP agent to transmit LLDPDUs with TTL values that are excessively high. This in turn can affect
how long a receiving device will retain the information if it is not refreshed.

Changing the minimum time between port reinitializations

The LLDP re-initialization delay timer specifies the minimum number of seconds the device will wait
from when LLDP is disabled on a port, until it will honor a request to re-enable LLDP on that port. When
you enable LLDP, the system sets the re-initialization delay timer to two seconds. If desired, you can
change the default behavior from two seconds to a value between one and ten seconds.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 189

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP TLVs advertised by the Brocade device

To set the re-initialization delay timer, enter a command such as the following at the Global CONFIG
level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp reinit-delay 5

The above command causes the device to wait five seconds after LLDP is disabled, before attempting
to honor a request to re-enable it.
Syntax: [no] lldp reinit-delay seconds
where seconds is a value from 1 - 10. The default is two seconds.

LLDP TLVs advertised by the Brocade device

When LLDP is enabled on a global basis, the Brocade device will automatically advertise the following
information, except for the features noted:
General system information:
• Management address
• Port description
• System capabilities
• System description (not automatically advertised)
• System name
802.1 capabilities:
• VLAN name (not automatically advertised)
• Untagged VLAN ID
802.3 capabilities:
• Link aggregation information
• MAC/PHY configuration and status
• Maximum frame size
• Power-via-MDI information (not automatically advertised)
The above TLVs are described in detail in the following sections.

NOTE
The system description, VLAN name, and power-via-MDI information TLVs are not automatically
enabled. The following sections show how to enable these advertisements.

General system information for LLDP

Except for the system description, the Brocade device will advertise the following system information
when LLDP is enabled on a global basis:
• Management address
• Port description
• System capabilities
• System description (not automatically advertised)
• System name

190 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

Management Address

A management address is normally an IPv4 or IPv6 address that can be used to manage the device.
Management address advertising has two modes: default, or explicitly configured. The default mode is
used when no addresses are configured to be advertised for a given port. If any addresses are
configured to be advertised for a given port, then only those addresses are advertised. This applies
across address types, so for example, if just one IPv4 address is explicitly configured to be advertised
for a port, then no IPv6 addresses will be advertised for that port (since none were configured to be
advertised), even if IPv6 addresses are configured within the system.
If no management address is explicitly configured to be advertised, the Brocade device will use the first
available IPv4 address and the first available IPv6 address (so it may advertise IPv4, IPv6 or both). A
Layer 3 switch will select the first available address of each type from those configured on the following
types of interfaces, in the following order of preference:
• Physical port on which LLDP will be transmitting the packet
• Virtual router interface (VE) on a VLAN that the port is a member of
• Dedicated management port
• Loop back interface
• Virtual router interface (VE) on any other VLAN
• Other physical port
• Other interface
For IPv6 addresses, link-local and anycast addresses will be excluded from these searches.
If no IP address is configured on any of the above, the port's current MAC address will be advertised.
To advertise a IPv4 management address, enter a command such as the following:

device(config)#lldp advertise management-address ipv4 10.157.2.1 ports e 1/4

The management address will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI
display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ):

Management address (IPv4): 10.157.2.1

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise management-address ipv4 ipv4 address ports ethernet port list | all
To support an IPv6 management address, there is a similar command that has equivalent behavior as
the IPv4 command.
To advertise an IPv6 management address, enter a command such as the following:

device(config)#lldp advertise management-address ipv6 2001:DB8::90 ports e 2/7

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise management-address ipv6 ipv6 address ports ethernet port list | all
ipv4 address or ipv6 address or both are the addresses that may be used to reach higher layer entities
to assist discovery by network management. In addition to management addresses, the advertisement
will include the system interface number associated with the management address.
For port list , specify the port(s) in the format [ slotnum /] portnum , where slotnum is required on
chassis devices only. You can list all of the ports individually; use the keyword to specify a range of
ports, or a combination of both. To apply the configuration to all ports on the device, use the keyword all
instead of listing the ports individually.

Port description

The port description TLV identifies the port from which the LLDP agent transmitted the advertisement.
The port description is taken from the ifDescr MIB object from MIB-II.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 191

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

By default, the port description is automatically advertised when LLDP is enabled on a global basis. To
disable advertisement of the port description, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise port-description ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The port description will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display
output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

Port description: "GigabitEthernet20"

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise port-description ports ethernet port-list | all

System capabilities

The system capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of the device and indicates whether these
primary functions are enabled. The primary functions can be one or more of the following (more than
one for example, if the device is both a bridge and a router):
• Repeater
• Bridge
• WLAN access point
• Router
• Telephone
• DOCSIS cable device
• Station only (devices that implement end station capability)
• Other
System capabilities for Brocade devices are based on the type of software image in use (e.g., Layer 2
switch or Layer 3 router). The enabled capabilities will be the same as the available capabilities,
except that when using a router image (base or full Layer 3), if the global route-only feature is turned
on, the bridge capability will not be included, since no bridging takes place.
By default, the system capabilities are automatically advertised when LLDP is enabled on a global
basis. To disable this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise system-capabilities ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The system capabilities will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display
output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

System capabilities : bridge

Enabled capabilities: bridge

Syntax: [no] lldp advertisesystem-capabilities ports ethernet port-list | all

System description

The system description is the network entity, which can include information such as the product name
or model number, the version of the system hardware type, the software operating system level, and
the networking software version. The information corresponds to the sysDescr MIB object in MIB-II.
To advertise the system description, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#lldp advertise system-description ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The system description will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display
output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ System description : "Brocade Communications, Inc.,FCX_ADV_ROUTER_SOFT_PACKAGE,

192 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 802.1 capabilities

IronWare Version 07.3.00T7f3 compiled on Sep 26 2011 at

21:15:14 labeled as FCXR07300

NOTE
The contents of the show command output will vary depending on which TLVs are configured to be
advertised.

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise system-description ports ethernet port-list | all

System name

The system name is the system administratively assigned name, taken from the sysName MIB object in
MIB-II. The sysName MIB object corresponds to the name defined with the CLI command hostname .
By default, the system name is automatically advertised when LLDP is enabled on a global basis. To
disable this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise system-name ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The system name will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display output
on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

System name: "FCX624SHPOE-ADV Router"

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise system-name ports ethernet port-list | all

802.1 capabilities
Except for the VLAN name, the Brocade device will advertise the following 802.1 attributes when LLDP
is enabled on a global basis:
• VLAN name (not automatically advertised)
• Untagged VLAN ID

VLAN name

The VLAN name TLV contains the name and VLAN ID of a VLAN configured on a port. An LLDPDU
may include multiple instances of this TLV, each for a different VLAN.
To advertise the VLAN name, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#lldp advertise vlan-name vlan 99 ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The VLAN name will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display output
on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

VLAN name (VLAN 99): "Voice-VLAN-99"

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise vlan-name vlan vlan ID ports ethernet port-list | all
Forvlan ID , enter the VLAN ID to advertise.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 193

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 802.3 capabilities

Untagged VLAN ID

The port VLAN ID TLV advertises the Port VLAN Identifier (PVID) that will be associated with
untagged or priority-tagged frames. If the port is not an untagged member of any VLAN (i.e., the port is
strictly a tagged port), the value zero will indicate that.
By default, the port VLAN ID is automatically advertised when LLDP is enabled on a global basis. To
disable this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise port-vlan-id ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The untagged VLAN ID will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the CLI display
output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

Port VLAN ID: 99

Syntax: [no] lldp advertise port-vlan-id ports ethernet port-list | all

802.3 capabilities
Except for Power-via-MDI information, the Brocade device will advertise the following 802.3 attributes
when LLDP is enabled on a global basis:
• Link aggregation information
• MAC/PHY configuration and status
• Maximum frame size
• Power-via-MDI information (not automatically advertised)

Link aggregation TLV

The link-aggregation time, length, value (TLV) indicates the following:

• Whether the link is capable of being aggregated
• Whether the link is currently aggregated
• The primary trunk port
Brocade devices advertise link aggregation information about standard link aggregation (LACP) as
well as static trunk configuration.
By default, link-aggregation information is automatically advertised when LLDP is enabled on a global
basis. To disable this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise link-aggregation ports e 2/12

Syntax: [no] lldp advertise link-aggregation ports ethernet port-list | all

The link aggregation advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the
CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

Link aggregation: not capable

MAC and PHY configuration status

The MAC and PHY configuration and status TLV includes the following information:
• Auto-negotiation capability and status
• Speed and duplex mode
• Flow control capabilities for auto-negotiation

194 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

• maximum port speed advertisement

• If applicable, indicates if the above settings are the result of auto-negotiation during link initiation or of
a manual set override action
The advertisement reflects the effects of the following CLI commands:
• speed-duplex
• flow-control
• gig-default
• link-config
By default, the MAC/PHY configuration and status information are automatically advertised when LLDP
is enabled on a global basis. To disable this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise mac-phy-config-status ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The MAC/PHY configuration advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device,
and in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ 802.3 MAC/PHY : auto-negotiation enabled

Advertised capabilities: 10baseT-HD, 10baseT-FD, 100baseTX-HD, 100baseTX-FD,
fdxSPause, fdxBPause, 1000baseT-HD, 1000baseT-FD
Operational MAU type: 100BaseTX-FD

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise mac-phy-config-status ports ethernet port-list | all

Maximum frame size

The maximum frame size TLV provides the maximum 802.3 frame size capability of the port. This value
is expressed in octets and includes the four-octet Frame Check Sequence (FCS). The default maximum
frame size is 1522. The advertised value may change depending on whether the aggregated-vlan or
jumbo CLI commands are in effect.

NOTE
On 48GC modules in non-jumbo mode, the maximum size of ping packets is 1486 bytes and the
maximum frame size of tagged traffic is no larger than 1581 bytes.

By default, the maximum frame size is automatically advertised when LLDP is enabled on a global
basis. To disable this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise max-frame-size ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The maximum frame size advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in
the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

Maximum frame size: 1522 octets

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise max-frame-size ports ethernet port-list | all

Power-via-MDI

The power-via-MDI TLV provides general information about Power over Ethernet (POE) capabilities and
status of the port. It indicates the following:
• POE capability (supported or not supported)
• POE status (enabled or disabled)

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 195

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP-MED configuration

• Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) power pair - indicates which pair of wires is in use and whether
the pair selection can be controlled. The Brocade implementation always uses pair A, and cannot
be controlled.
• Power class - Indicates the range of power that the connected powered device has negotiated or
requested.

NOTE
The power-via-MDI TLV described in this section applies to LLDP. There is also a power-via-MDI TLV
for LLDP-MED devices, which provides extensive POE information. Refer to Extended power-via-MDI
information on page 207.

To advertise the power-via-MDI information, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#lldp advertise power-via-mdi ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The power-via-MDI advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the
CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ 802.3 Power via MDI: PSE port, power enabled, class 0

Power Pair : A (not controllable)

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise power-via-mdi ports ethernet port-list | all

LLDP-MED configuration
This section provides the details for configuring LLDP-MED.
The following table lists the global and interface-level tasks and the default behavior/value for each
task.

TABLE 24 LLDP-MED configuration tasks and default behavior / value

Task Default behavior / value

Global CONFIG-level tasks

Enabling LLDP-MED on a global basis Disabled

Enabling SNMP notifications and Syslog Disabled

messages for LLDP-MED topology
change

Changing the Fast Start Repeat Count The system automatically sets the fast start repeat count to 3 when a
Network Connectivity Device receives an LLDP packet from an
Endpoint that is newly connected to the network.

NOTE
The LLDP-MED fast start mechanism is only intended to run on links
between Network Connectivity devices and Endpoint devices. It does
not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including
between Network Connectivity devices, or to other types of links.

Interface-level tasks

196 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling LLDP-MED

TABLE 24 LLDP-MED configuration tasks and default behavior / value (Continued)

Task Default behavior / value

Defining a location ID Not configured

Defining a network policy Not configured

Enabling LLDP-MED
When LLDP is enabled globally, LLDP-MED is enabled if the LLDP-MED capabilities TLV is also
enabled. By default, the LLDP-MED capabilities TLV is automatically enabled. To enable LLDP, refer to
Enabling and disabling LLDP on page 183.

NOTE
LLDP-MED is not enabled on ports where the LLDP operating mode is receive only or transmit only.
LLDP-MED is enabled on ports that are configured to both receive and transmit LLDP packets and have
the LLDP-MED capabilities TLV enabled.

Enabling SNMP notifications and Syslog messagesfor LLDP-MED

topology changes
SNMP notifications and Syslog messages for LLDP-MED provide management applications with
information related to topology changes. For example, SNMP notifications can alert the system
whenever a remote Endpoint device is connected to or removed from a local port. SNMP notifications
identify the local port where the topology change occurred, as well as the device capability of the
remote Endpoint device that was connected to or removed from the port.
When you enable LLDP-MED SNMP notifications, corresponding Syslog messages are enabled as
well. When you enable LLDP-MED SNMP notifications, the device will send traps and Syslog messages
when an LLDP-MED Endpoint neighbor entry is added or removed.
SNMP notifications and corresponding Syslog messages are disabled by default. To enable them, enter
a command such as the following at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp enable snmp med-topo-change-notifications ports e 4/4 to 4/6

Syntax:[no] lldp enable snmp med-topo-change-notifications ports ethernet port-list | all

Changing the fast start repeat count

The fast start feature enables a Network Connectivity Device to initially advertise itself at a faster rate
for a limited time when an LLDP-MED Endpoint has been newly detected or connected to the network.
This feature is important within a VoIP network, for example, where rapid availability is crucial for
applications such as emergency call service location (E911).
The fast start timer starts when a Network Connectivity Device receives the first LLDP frame from a
newly detected Endpoint.
The LLDP-MED fast start repeat count specifies the number of LLDP packets that will be sent during
the LLDP-MED fast start period. By default, the device will send three packets at one-second intervals.
If desired, you can change the number of packets the device will send per second, up to a maximum of
10.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 197

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Defining a location id

NOTE
The LLDP-MED fast start mechanism is only intended to run on links between Network Connectivity
devices and Endpoint devices. It does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements,
including between Network Connectivity devices, or to other types of links.
To change the LLDP-MED fast start repeat count, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)#lldp med fast-start-repeat-count 5

The above command causes the device to send five LLDP packets during the LLDP-MED fast start
period.
Syntax: [no] lldp medfast-start-repeat-count value
where value is a number from 1 to 10, which specifies the number of packets that will be sent during
the LLDP-MED fast start period. The default is 3.

Defining a location id
The LLDP-MED Location Identification extension enables the Brocade device to set the physical
location that an attached Class III Endpoint will use for location-based applications. This feature is
important for applications such as IP telephony, for example, where emergency responders need to
quickly determine the physical location of a user in North America that has just dialed 911.
For each port, you can define one or more of the following location ID formats:
• Geographic location (coordinate-based)
• Civic address
• Emergency Call Services (ECS) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
The above location ID formats are defined in the following sections.

Coordinate-based location
Coordinate-based location is based on the IETF RFC 3825 [6] standard, which specifies a Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) option for the coordinate-based geographic location of a client.
When you configure an Endpoint location information using the coordinate-based location, you specify
the latitude, longitude, and altitude, along with resolution indicators (a measure of the accuracy of the
coordinates), and the reference datum (the map used for the given coordinates).
To configure a coordinate-based location for an Endpoint device, enter a command such as the
following at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp med location-id coordinate-based latitude

-78.303 resolution 20 longitude 34.27 resolution 18 altitude meters 50 resolution 16
wgs84

Syntax: [no] lldp med location-id coordinate-based latitude degrees resolution bits longitude
degrees resolution bits altitude floors number resolution bits | meters number resolution bits
datum
latitude degrees is the angular distance north or south from the earth equator measured through 90
degrees. Positive numbers indicate a location north of the equator and negative numbers indicate a
location south of the equator.
resolution bits specifies the precision of the value given for latitude. A smaller value increases the area
within which the device is located. For latitude, enter a number between 1 and 34.

198 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

longitude degrees is the angular distance from the intersection of the zero meridian. Positive values
indicate a location east of the prime meridian and negative numbers indicate a location west of the
prime meridian.
resolution bits specifies the precision of the value given for longitude. A smaller value increases the
area within which the device is located. For longitude resolution, enter a number between 1 and 34.
altitude floors number is the vertical elevation of a building above the ground, where 0 represents the
floor level associated with the ground level at the main entrance and larger values represent floors that
are above (higher in altitude) floors with lower values. For example, 2 for the 2nd floor. Sub-floors can
be represented by non-integer values. For example, a mezzanine between floor 1 and floor 2 could be
represented as 1.1. Similarly, the mezzanines between floor 4 and floor 5 could be represented as 4.1
and 4.2 respectively. Floors located below ground level could be represented by negative values.
resolution bits specifies the precision of the value given for altitude. A smaller value increases the area
within which the device is located. For floors resolution, enter the value 0 if the floor is unknown, or 30 if
a valid floor is being specified.
altitude meters number is the vertical elevation in number of meters, as opposed to floors.
resolution bits specifies the precision of the value given for altitude. A smaller value increases the area
within which the device is located. For meters resolution, enter a value from 0 to 30.
Datum is the map used as the basis for calculating the location. Specify one of the following:
• wgs84 - (geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich
• nad83-navd88 - North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich;
The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). Use this
datum when referencing locations on land. If land is near tidal water, use nad83-mllw (below).
• nad83-mllw - North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich; The
associated vertical datum is mean lower low water (MLLW). Use this datum when referencing
locations on water, sea, or ocean.

Example coordinate-based location configuration

The following shows an example coordinate-based location configuration for the Sears Tower, at the
following location.
103rd Floor233 South Wacker DriveChicago, IL 60606

device(config)#lldp med location-id coordinate-based latitude 41.87884 resolution 18

longitude 87.63602 resolution 18 altitude floors 103 resolution 30 wgs84

The above configuration shows the following:

• Latitude is 41.87884 degrees north (or 41.87884 degrees).
• Longitude is 87.63602 degrees west (or 87.63602 degrees).
• The latitude and longitude resolution of 18 describes a geo-location area that is latitude 41.8769531
to latitude 41.8789062 and extends from -87.6367188 to -87.6347657 degrees longitude. This is an
area of approximately 373412 square feet (713.3 ft. x 523.5 ft.).
• The location is inside a structure, on the 103rd floor.
• The WGS 84 map was used as the basis for calculating the location.

Example coordinate-based location advertisement

The coordinate-based location advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device,
and in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ MED Location ID

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 199

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring civic address location

Data Format: Coordinate-based

Latitude Resolution : 20 bits
Latitude Value : -78.303 degrees
Longitude Resolution : 18 bits
Longitude Value : 34.27 degrees
Altitude Resolution : 16 bits
Altitude Value : 50. meters
Datum : WGS 84

Configuring civic address location

When you configure a media Endpoint location using the address-based location, you specify the
location the entry refers to, the country code, and the elements that describe the civic or postal
address.
To configure a civic address-based location for LLDP-MED, enter commands such as the following at
the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp med location-id civic-address refers-to client country US elem 1

CA elem 3 "Santa Clara" elem 6 "4980 Great America Pkwy" elem 24 95054 elem 27 5
elem 28 551 elem 29 office elem 23 "John Doe"

Syntax: [no] lldp med location-id civic-address refers-to elem country country code elem CA type
value [ elem CA type value ] [ elem CA type value ] ....
refers-to elem describes the location that the entry refers to. Specify one of the following:
• client
• dhcp-server
• network-element
where dhcp-server or network-element should only be used if it is known that the Endpoint is in
close physical proximity to the DHCP server or network element.
country code is the two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters.

• CA - Canada
• DE - Germany
• JP - Japan
• KR - Korea
• US - United States
CA type is a value from 0 - 255, that describes the civic address element. For example, a CA type of
24 specifies a postal or zip code. Valid elements and their types are listed in the following table.
value is the actual value of the elem CA type , above. For example, 95123 for the postal or zip code.
Acceptable values are also listed in the following table.

NOTE
If the value of an element contains one or more spaces, use double quotation marks (") at the
beginning and end of the string. For example, elem 3 "Santa Clara" .

TABLE 25 Elements used with civic address

Civic Address Description Acceptable values / examples

(CA) type

0 Language The ISO 639 language code used for presenting the address
information.

200 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

TABLE 25 Elements used with civic address (Continued)

Civic Address Description Acceptable values / examples

(CA) type

1 National subdivisions Examples:

(state, canton, region,
Canada - Province
province, or prefecture)
Germany - State

Japan - Metropolis

Korea - Province

United States - State

2 County, parish, gun (JP), Examples:

or district (IN)
Canada - County

Germany - County

Japan - City or rural area

Korea - County

United States - County

3 City, township, or shi (JP) Examples:

Canada - City or town

Germany - City

Japan - Ward or village

Korea - City or village

United States - City or town

4 City division, borough, Examples:

city district, ward, or chou
Canada - N/A
(JP)
Germany - District

Japan - Town

Korea - Urban district

United States - N/A

5 Neighborhood or block Examples:

Canada - N/A

Germany - N/A

Japan - City district

Korea - Neighborhood

United States - N/A

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 201

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

TABLE 25 Elements used with civic address (Continued)

Civic Address Description Acceptable values / examples

(CA) type

6 Street Examples:

Canada - Street

Germany - Street

Japan - Block

Korea - Street

United States - Street

16 Leading street direction N (north), E (east), S (south), W (west), NE, NW, SE, SW

17 Trailing street suffix N (north), E (east), S (south), W (west), NE, NW, SE, SW

18 Street suffix Acceptable values for the United States are listed in the United
States Postal Service Publication 28 [18], Appendix C.

Example: Ave, Place

19 House number The house number (street address)

Example: 1234

20 House number suffix A modifier to the house number. It does not include parts of the
house number.

Example: A, 1/2

21 Landmark or vanity A string name for a location. It conveys a common local designation
address of a structure, a group of buildings, or a place that helps to locate the
place.

Example: UC Berkeley

22 Additional location An unstructured string name that conveys additional information

information about the location.

Example: west wing

23 Name (residence and Identifies the person or organization associated with the address.
office occupant)
Example: Textures Beauty Salon

24 Postal / zip code The valid postal / zip code for the address.

Example: 95054-1234

25 Building (structure) The name of a single building if the street address includes more
than one building or if the building name is helpful in identifying the
location.

Example: Law Library

202 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

TABLE 25 Elements used with civic address (Continued)

Civic Address Description Acceptable values / examples

(CA) type

26 Unit (apartment, suite) The name or number of a part of a structure where there are
separate administrative units, owners, or tenants, such as separate
companies or families who occupy that structure. Common
examples include suite or apartment designations.

Example: Apt 27

27 Floor Example: 4

28 Room number The smallest identifiable subdivision of a structure.

Example: 7A

29 Placetype The type of place described by the civic coordinates. For example, a
home, office, street, or other public space.

Example: Office

30 Postal community name When the postal community name is defined, the civic community
name (typically CA type 3) is replaced by this value.

Example: Alviso

31 Post office box (P.O. box) When a P.O. box is defined, the street address components (CA
types 6, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20) are replaced with this value.

Example: P.O. Box 1234

32 Additional code An additional country-specific code that identifies the location. For
example, for Japan, this is the Japan Industry Standard (JIS)
address code. The JIS address code provides a unique address
inside of Japan, down to the level of indicating the floor of the
building.

128 Script The script (from ISO 15924 [14]) used to present the address
information.

Example: Latn

NOTE
If not manually configured, the system assigns the default value
Latn

255 Reserved

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 203

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring emergency call service

Example civic address location advertisement

The Civic address location advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and
in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info) .

+ MED Location ID
Data Format: Civic Address
Location of: Client
Country : "US"
CA Type : 1
CA Value : "CA"
CA Type : 3
CA Value : "Santa Clara"
CA Type : 6
CA Value : "4980 Great America Pkwy."
CA Type : 24
CA Value : "95054"
CA Type : 27
CA Value : "5"
CA Type : 28
CA Value : "551"
CA Type : 29
CA Value : "office"
CA Type : 23
CA Value : "John Doe"

Configuring emergency call service

The Emergency Call Service (ECS) location is used specifically for Emergency Call Services
applications.
When you configure a media Endpoint location using the emergency call services location, you specify
the Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) from the North America Numbering Plan format,
supplied to the Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) for ECS purposes.
To configure an ECS-based location for LLDP-MED, enter a command such as the following at the
Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#lldp med location-id ecs-elin 4082071700

Syntax: [no] lldp med location-id ecs-elin number ports ethernet port-list | all
number is a number from 10 to 25 digits in length.

Example ECS ELIN location advertisements

The ECS ELIN location advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in
the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ MED Location ID
Data Format: ECS ELIN
Value : 4082071700

Defining an LLDP-MED network policy

An LLDP-MED network policy defines an Endpoint VLAN configuration (VLAN type and VLAN ID) and
associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 priorities that apply to a specific set of applications on a port.

204 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP-MED network policy configuration syntax

NOTE
This feature applies to applications that have specific real-time network policy requirements, such as
interactive voice or video services. It is not intended to run on links other than between Network
Connectivity devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not advertise the multitude of network policies
that frequently run on an aggregated link.
To define an LLDP-MED network policy for an Endpoint, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#lldp med network-policy application voice tagged vlan 99 priority 3

dscp 22 port e 2/6

The network policy advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and in the
CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ MED Network Policy

Application Type : Voice
Policy Flags : Known Policy, Tagged
VLAN ID : 99
L2 Priority : 3
DSCP Value : 22

NOTE
Endpoints will advertise a policy as "unknown" in the show lldp neighbor detail command output, if it
is a policy that is required by the Endpoint and the Endpoint has not yet received it.

LLDP-MED network policy configuration syntax

The CLI syntax for defining an LLDP-MED network policy differs for tagged, untagged, and priority
tagged traffic. Refer to the appropriate syntax, below.

For tagged traffic

Syntax: [no] lldp med network-policy application application type taggedvlan vlan ID priority 0-7
dscp 0-63 ports ethernet port-list | all

For untagged traffic

Syntax:[no] lldp med network-policy application application type untagged dscp 0-63 ports
ethernet port-list | all

For priority-tagged traffic

Syntax:[no] lldp med network-policy application application type priority-tagged priority 0-7 dscp
0-63 ports ethernet port-list | all
application type indicates the primary function of the applications defined by this network policy.
Application type can be one of the following:
• guest-voice - Limited voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP telephony handsets
or similar devices that support interactive voice services.
• guest-voice-signaling - Limited voice service for use in network topologies that require a different
policy for guest voice signaling than for guest voice media.
• softphone-voice - Softphone voice service for use with multi-media applications that work in
association with VoIP technology, enabling phone calls direct from a PC or laptop. Softphones do not

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 205

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP-MED attributes advertised by the Brocade device

usually support multiple VLANs, and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single
tagged data-specific VLAN. Note that when a network policy is defined for use with an untagged
VLAN, the Layer 2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value is relevant.
• streaming-video - Applies to broadcast- or multicast-based video content distribution and similar
applications that support streaming video services requiring specific network policy treatment. Video
applications that rely on TCP without buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.
• video-conferencing - Applies to dedicated video conferencing equipment and similar devices that
support real-time interactive video/audio services.
• video-signaling - For use in network topologies that require a separate policy for video signaling
than for video media. Note that this application type should not be advertised if all the same network
policies apply as those advertised in the video conferencing policy TLV.
• voice - For use by dedicated IP telephony handsets and similar devices that support interactive
voice services.
• voice-signaling - For use in network topologies that require a different policy for voice signaling
than for voice media. Note that this application type should not be advertised if all the same network
policies apply as those advertised in the voice policy TLV.
• tagged vlan vlan id specifies the tagged VLAN that the specified application type will use.
• untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format.
• priority-tagged indicates that the device uses priority-tagged frames. In this case, the device uses
the default VLAN (PVID) of the ingress port.
• priority 0 -7 indicates the Layer 2 priority value to be used for the specified application type. Enter 0
to use the default priority.
• dscp 0 - 63 specifies the Layer 3 Differentiated Service codepoint priority value to be used for the
specified application type. Enter 0 to use the default priority.

LLDP-MED attributes advertised by the Brocade device

LLDP-MED attributes are only advertised on a port if LLDP-MED is enabled (which is done by
enabling the LLDP-MED capabilities TLV), the port operating mode is receive and transmit (the
default), and the port has received an LLDP-MED advertisement from an Endpoint. By default, the
Brocade device will automatically advertise the following LLDP-MED attributes when the above criteria
are met:
• LLDP-MED capabilities
• Location ID
• Network policy
• Power-via-MDI information

NOTE
Although the Location ID and Network policy attributes are automatically advertised, they will have no
effect until they are actually defined.

LLDP-MED capabilities
When enabled, LLDP-MED is enabled, and the LLDP-MED capabilities TLV is sent whenever any
other LLDP-MED TLV is sent. When disabled, LLDP-MED is disabled and no LLDP-MED TLVs are
sent.
The LLDP-MED capabilities advertisement includes the following information:

206 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Extended power-via-MDI information

• The supported LLDP-MED TLVs

• The device type (Network Connectivity device or Endpoint (Class 1, 2, or 3))
By default, LLDP-MED information is automatically advertised when LLDP-MED is enabled. To disable
this advertisement, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise med-capabilities ports e 2/4 to 2/12

NOTE
Disabling the LLDP-MED capabilities TLV disables LLDP-MED.

To re-enable the LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV (and LLDP-MED) after it has been disabled, enter a
command such as the following.

device(config)#lldp advertise med-capabilities ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The LLDP-MED capabilities advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote device, and
in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ MED capabilities: capabilities, networkPolicy, location, extendedPSE MED device

type : Network Connectivity

Syntax: [no] lldp advertisemed-capabilities ports ethernet port-list | all

Extended power-via-MDI information

The extended Power-via-MDI TLV enables advanced power management between LLDP-MED
Endpoints and Network Connectivity Devices. This TLV provides significantly more information than the
802.1AB Power-via-MDI TLV referenced in 802.3 capabilities on page 194. For example, this TLV
enables an Endpoint to communicate a more precise required power level, thereby enabling the device
to allocate less power to the Endpoint, while making more power available to other ports.
The LLDP-MED Power-via-MDI TLV advertises an Endpoint IEEE 802.3af power-related information,
including the following:
• Power type - indicates whether the LLDP-MED device transmitting the LLPDU is a power sourcing
device or a powered device:
‐ Power sourcing device/equipment (PSE) - This is the source of the power, or the device
that integrates the power onto the network. Power sourcing devices/equipment have
embedded POE technology. In this case, the power sourcing device is the Brocade POE
device.
‐ Powered device (PD) - This is the Ethernet device that requires power and is situated on
the other end of the cable opposite the power sourcing device.
• Power source - The power source being utilized by a PSE or PD, for example, primary power
source, backup power source, or unknown.
For Endpoint devices, the power source information indicates the power capability of the Network
Connectivity Device it is attached to. When the Network Connectivity device advertises that it is using its
primary power source, the Endpoint should expect to have uninterrupted access to its available power.
Likewise, if the Network Connectivity device advertises that it is using backup power, the Endpoint
should not expect continuous power. The Endpoint may additionally choose to power down non-
essential subsystems or to conserve power as long as the PSE is advertising that it is operating on
backup power.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 207

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

NOTE
Brocade devices always advertise the power source as "unknown".

• Power priority - The in-line power priority level for the PSE or PD:
‐ 3 - low
‐ 2 - high
‐ 1 - critical
‐ unknown
• Power level - The total power, in tenths of watts, required by a PD from a PSE, or the total power a
PSE is capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable based on its current configuration.
If the exact power is not known for a PSE or PD, it will advertise the power level associated with its
802.3af power class listed in the following table.

TABLE 26 802.3af power classes

Power class Minimum power level output at the PSE Maximum power levels at the PD

0 15.4 watts 0.44 - 12.95 watts

1 4.0 watts 0.44 - 3.84 watts

2 7.0 watts 3.84 - 6.49 watts

3 15.4 watts 6.49 - 12.95 watts

For a PD (Endpoint device), the power level represents the maximum power it can consume during
normal operations in its current configuration, even if its actual power draw at that instance is less than
the advertised power draw.
For a PSE (Network Connectivity device), the power level represents the amount of power that is
available on the port at the time. If the PSE is operating in reduced power (i.e., it is using backup
power), the reduced power capacity is advertised as long as the condition persists.
By default, LLDP-MED power-via-MDI information is automatically advertised when LLDP-MED is
enabled, the port is a POE port, and POE is enabled on the port. To disable this advertisement, enter
a command such as the following.

device(config)#no lldp advertise med-power-via-mdi ports e 2/4 to 2/12

The LLDP-MED power-via-MDI advertisement will appear similar to the following on the remote
device, and in the CLI display output on the Brocade device (show lldp local-info ).

+ MED Extended Power via MDI

Power Type : PSE device
Power Source : Unknown Power Source
Power Priority : Low (3)
Power Value : 6.5 watts (PSE equivalent: 7005 mWatts)

Syntax:[no] lldp advertise med-power-via-mdi ports ethernet port-list | all

208 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying LLDP statistics and configuration settings

Displaying LLDP statistics and configuration settings

You can use the following CLI show commands to display information about LLDP settings and
statistics:
• show lldp - Displays a summary of the LLDP configuration settings.
• show lldp statistics - Displays LLDP global and per-port statistics.
• show lldp neighbors - Displays a list of the current LLDP neighbors.
• show lldp neighbors detail - Displays the details of the latest advertisements received from LLDP
neighbors.
• show lldp local-info - Displays the details of the LLDP advertisements that will be transmitted on
each port.
This above show commands are described in this section.

LLDP configuration summary

To display a summary of the LLDP configuration settings on the device, enter the show lldp command
at any level of the CLI.
The following shows an example report.

device#show lldp
LLDP transmit interval : 10 seconds
LLDP transmit hold multiplier : 4 (transmit TTL: 40 seconds)
LLDP transmit delay : 1 seconds
LLDP SNMP notification interval : 5 seconds
LLDP reinitialize delay : 1 seconds
LLDP-MED fast start repeat count : 3
LLDP maximum neighbors : 392
LLDP maximum neighbors per port : 4

Syntax: show lldp

The following table describes the information displayed by the show lldp statistics command.

Field Description

LLDP transmit interval The number of seconds between regular LLDP packet transmissions.

LLDP transmit hold The multiplier used to compute the actual time-to-live (TTL) value of an LLDP
multiplier advertisement. The TTL value is the transmit interval multiplied by the transmit hold
multiplier.

LLDP transmit delay The number of seconds the LLDP agent will wait after transmitting an LLDP frame and
before transmitting another LLDP frame.

LLDP SNMP The number of seconds between transmission of SNMP LLDP traps
notification interval (lldpRemTablesChange) and SNMP LLDP-MED traps
(lldpXMedTopologyChangeDetected).

LLDP reinitialize delay The minimum number of seconds the device will wait from when LLDP is disabled on a
port, until a request to re-enable LLDP on that port will be honored.

LLDP-MED fast start The number of seconds between LLDP frame transmissions when an LLDP-MED
repeat count Endpoint is newly detected.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 209

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying LLDP statistics

Field Description

LLDP maximum The maximum number of LLDP neighbors for which LLDP data will be retained, per
neighbors device.

LLDP maximum The maximum number of LLDP neighbors for which LLDP data will be retained, per port.
neighbors per port

Displaying LLDP statistics

The show lldp statistics command displays an overview of LLDP neighbor detection on the device,
as well as packet counters and protocol statistics. The statistics are displayed on a global basis.
The following shows an example report.

device#show lldp statistics

Last neighbor change time: 23 hours 50 minutes 40 seconds ago
Neighbor entries added : 14
Neighbor entries deleted : 5
Neighbor entries aged out : 4
Neighbor advertisements dropped : 0
Port Tx Pkts Rx Pkts Rx Pkts Rx Pkts Rx TLVs Rx TLVs Neighbors
Total Total w/Errors Discarded Unrecognz Discarded Aged Out
1 60963 75179 0 0 0 0 4
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 60963 60963 0 0 0 0 0
4 60963 121925 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 60974 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Syntax: show lldp statistics

NOTE
You can reset LLDP statistics using the CLI command clear LLDP statistics . Refer to Resetting
LLDP statistics on page 215.

The following table describes the information displayed by the show lldp statistics command.

Field Description

Last neighbor change time The elapsed time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) since a neighbor last advertised
information. For example, the elapsed time since a neighbor was last added,
deleted, or its advertised information changed.

Neighbor entries added The number of new LLDP neighbors detected since the last reboot or since the last
time the clear lldp statistics all command was issued.

Neighbor entries deleted The number of LLDP neighbors deleted since the last reboot or since the last time
the clear lldp statistics all command was issued.

210 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying LLDP neighbors

Field Description

Neighbor entries aged out The number of LLDP neighbors dropped on all ports after the time-to-live expired.

Note that LLDP entries age out naturally when a port cable or module is
disconnected or when a port becomes disabled. However, if a disabled port is re-
enabled, the system will delete the old LLDP entries.

Neighbor advertisements The number of valid LLDP neighbors the device detected, but could not add. This
dropped can occur, for example, when a new neighbor is detected and the device is already
supporting the maximum number of neighbors possible. This can also occur when
an LLDPDU is missing a mandatory TLV or is not formatted correctly.

Port The local port number.

Tx Pkts Total The number of LLDP packets the port transmitted.

Rx Pkts Total The number of LLDP packets the port received.

Rx Pkts w/Errors The number of LLDP packets the port received that have one or more detectable
errors.

Rx Pkts Discarded The number of LLDP packets the port received then discarded.

Rx TLVs Unrecognz The number of TLVs the port received that were not recognized by the LLDP local
agent. Unrecognized TLVs are retained by the system and can be viewed in the
output of the show LLDP neighbors detail command or retrieved through SNMP.

Rx TLVs Discarded The number of TLVs the port received then discarded.

Neighbors Aged Out The number of times a neighbor information was deleted because its TTL timer
expired.

Displaying LLDP neighbors

The show lldp neighbors command displays a list of the current LLDP neighbors per port.
The following shows an example report.

device#show lldp neighbors

Lcl Port Chassis ID Port ID Port Description System Name
1 0000.0034.0fc0 0000.0034.0fc0 GigabitEthernet9/1 FastIron Supe~
1 0000.0001.4000 0000.0001.4000 GigabitEthernet0/1/1 FastIron SX Swi~
3 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.0203 GigabitEthernet4 FastIron SX 8~
4 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.0202 GigabitEthernet3 FastIron SX 8~
4 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.0210 GigabitEthernet17 FastIron SX 8~
15 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.020f GigabitEthernet16 FastIron SX 8~
16 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.020e GigabitEthernet15 FastIron SX 8~
17 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.0211 GigabitEthernet18 FastIron SX 8~
18 0000.0011.0200 0000.0011.0210 GigabitEthernet17 FastIron SX 8~

Syntax:show lldp neighbors

The following table describes the information displayed by the show lldp neighbors command.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 211

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying LLDP neighbors detail

Field Description

Lcl Port The local LLDP port number.

Chassis ID The identifier for the chassis.

Brocade devices use the base MAC address of the device as the Chassis ID.

Port ID The identifier for the port.

Brocade devices use the permanent MAC address associated with the port as the port ID.

Port Description The description for the port.

Brocade devices use the ifDescr MIB object from MIB-II as the port description.

System Name The administratively-assigned name for the system.

Brocade devices use the sysName MIB object from MIB-II, which corresponds to the CLI
hostname command setting.

NOTE
A tilde (~) at the end of a line indicates that the value in the field is too long to display in full and
is truncated.

Displaying LLDP neighbors detail

The show lldp neighbors detail command displays the LLDP advertisements received from LLDP
neighbors.
The following shows an example show lldp neighbors detail report.

NOTE
The show lldp neighbors detail output will vary depending on the data received. Also, values that
are not recognized or do not have a recognizable format, may be displayed in hexadecimal binary
form.

device#show lldp neighbors detail ports e 1/9

Local port: 1/9
Neighbor: 0000.0018.cc03, TTL 101 seconds
+ Chassis ID (network address): 10.43.39.151
+ Port ID (MAC address): 0000.0018.cc03
+ Time to live: 120 seconds
+ Port description : "LAN port"
+ System name : "regDN 1015,MITEL 5235 DM"
+ System description : "regDN 1015,MITEL 5235 DM,h/w rev 2,ASIC rev 1,f/w\
Boot 02.01.00.11,f/w Main 02.01.00.11"
+ System capabilities : bridge, telephone
Enabled capabilities: bridge, telephone
+ Management address (IPv4): 10.43.39.151
+ 802.3 MAC/PHY : auto-negotiation enabled
Advertised capabilities: 10BaseT-HD, 10BaseT-FD, 100BaseTX-HD,
100BaseTX-FD
Operational MAU type : 100BaseTX-FD
+ MED capabilities: capabilities, networkPolicy, extendedPD
MED device type : Endpoint Class III
+ MED Network Policy
Application Type : Voice
Policy Flags : Known Policy, Tagged

212 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying LLDP configuration details

VLAN ID : 300
L2 Priority : 7
DSCP Value : 7
+ MED Extended Power via MDI
Power Type : PD device
Power Source : Unknown Power Source
Power Priority : High (2)
Power Value : 6.2 watts (PSE equivalent: 6656 mWatts)
+ MED Hardware revision : "PCB Version: 2"
+ MED Firmware revision : "Boot 02.01.00.11"
+ MED Software revision : "Main 02.01.00.11"
+ MED Serial number : ""
+ MED Manufacturer : "Mitel Corporation"
+ MED Model name : "MITEL 5235 DM"
+ MED Asset ID : ""

A backslash (\) at the end of a line indicates that the text continues on the next line.
Except for the following field, the fields in the above output are described in the individual TLV
advertisement sections in this chapter.

Field Description

Neighbor The source MAC address from which the packet was received, and the remaining TTL for the neighbor
entry.

Syntax: show lldp neighbors detail [ ports ethernet port-list | all ]

If you do not specify any ports or use the keyword all , by default, the report will show the LLDP
neighbor details for all ports.

Displaying LLDP configuration details

The show lldp local-info command displays the local information advertisements (TLVs) that will be
transmitted by the LLDP agent.

NOTE
The show lldp local-info output will vary based on LLDP configuration settings.

The following shows an example report.

device#show lldp local-info ports e 20

Local port: 20
+ Chassis ID (MAC address): 0000.0033.e2c0
+ Port ID (MAC address): 0000.0033.e2d3
+ Time to live: 40 seconds
+ System name: "FCX624SHPOE-ADV Router"
+ Port description: "GigabitEthernet20"
+ System description : "Brocade Communications,
Inc.

FCX_ADV_ROUTER_SOFT_PACKAGE,
IronWare Version 07.3.00T7f3 compiled on Sep 26 2011 at 21:15:14 labeled
as FCXR07300"
+ System capabilities : bridge
Enabled capabilities: bridge
+ 802.3 MAC/PHY : auto-negotiation enabled
Advertised capabilities: 10BaseT-HD, 10BaseT-FD, 100BaseTX-HD,
100BaseTX-FD, fdxSPause, fdxBPause, 1000BaseT-HD,
1000BaseT-FD
Operational MAU type: 100BaseTX-FD
+ 802.3 Power via MDI: PSE port, power enabled, class 2
Power Pair : A (not controllable)

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 213

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 LLDP and LLDP-MED

+ Link aggregation: not capable

+ Maximum frame size: 1522 octets
+ MED capabilities: capabilities, networkPolicy, location, extendedPSE
MED device type : Network Connectivity
+ MED Network Policy
Application Type : Voice
Policy Flags : Known Policy, Tagged
VLAN ID : 99
L2 Priority : 3
DSCP Value : 22
+ MED Network Policy
Application Type : Video Conferencing
Policy Flags : Known Policy, Tagged
VLAN ID : 100
L2 Priority : 5
DSCP Value : 10
+ MED Location ID
Data Format: Coordinate-based location
Latitude Resolution : 20 bits
Latitude Value : -78.303 degrees
Longitude Resolution : 18 bits
Longitude Value : 34.27 degrees
Altitude Resolution : 16 bits
Altitude Value : 50. meters
Datum : WGS 84
+ MED Location ID
Data Format: Civic Address
Location of: Client
Country : "US"
CA Type : 1
CA Value : "CA"
CA Type : 3
CA Value : "Santa Clara"
CA Type : 6
CA Value : "4980 Great America Pkwy."
CA Type : 24
CA Value : "95054"
CA Type : 27
CA Value : "5"
CA Type : 28
CA Value : "551"
CA Type : 29
CA Value : "office"
CA Type : 23
CA Value : "John Doe"
+ MED Location ID
Data Format: ECS ELIN
Value : "1234567890"
+ MED Extended Power via MDI
Power Type : PSE device
Power Source : Unknown Power Source
Power Priority : Low (3)
Power Value : 6.5 watts (PSE equivalent: 7005 mWatts) + Port VLAN ID: 99
+ Management address (IPv4): 10.1.1.121
+ VLAN name (VLAN 99): "Voice-VLAN-99"

NOTE
The contents of the show output will vary depending on which TLVs are configured to be advertised.
A backslash (\) at the end of a line indicates that the text continues on the next line.
The fields in the above output are described in the individual TLV advertisement sections in this
chapter.
Syntax: show lldp local-info [ ports ethernet port-list | all ]
If you do not specify any ports or use the keyword all , by default, the report will show the local
information advertisements for all ports.

214 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Resetting LLDP statistics

Resetting LLDP statistics

To reset LLDP statistics, enter the clear lldp statistics command at the Global CONFIG level of the
CLI. The Brocade device will clear the global and per-port LLDP neighbor statistics on the device (refer
to Displaying LLDP statistics on page 210).

device#clear lldp statistics

Syntax: clear lldp statistics [ ports ethernet port-list | all ]

If you do not specify any ports or use the keyword all , by default, the system will clear lldp statistics on
all ports.

Clearing cached LLDP neighbor information

The Brocade device clears cached LLDP neighbor information after a port becomes disabled and the
LLDP neighbor information ages out. However, if a port is disabled then re-enabled before the neighbor
information ages out, the device will clear the cached LLDP neighbor information when the port is re-
enabled.
If desired, you can manually clear the cache. For example, to clear the cached LLDP neighbor
information for port e 20, enter the following command at the Global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device#clear lldp neighbors ports e 20

Syntax: clear lldp neighbors [ ports ethernet port-list | all ]

If you do not specify any ports or use the keyword all , by default, the system will clear the cached
LLDP neighbor information for all ports.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 215

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing cached LLDP neighbor information

216 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hardware Component Monitoring

● Traffic Limitations in Mixed Environments.....................................................................217

● Virtual cable testing.......................................................................................................217
● Digital optical monitoring............................................................................................... 220
● FastIron Fiber-optic Transceivers................................................................................. 225

Traffic Limitations in Mixed Environments

Packet loss can occur in environments that mix SX hardware modules of different generations.
The following table lists the modules by generation:

TABLE 27 SX Hardware Generations

First Second Third

SX-FI2XGMR4 SX-FI2XGMR6 SX-FI48GPP

SX-FI2XGMR4-PREM SX-FI2XGMR6-PREM SX-FI-2XG

SX-FI424100FX SX-FI2XGMR6-PREM6 SX-FI-8XG

SX-FI42XG-BNDL-2CX4 SX-FI624100FX SX-FI-24HF

SX-FI424C SX-FI624C SX-FI-24GPP

SX-FI424P SX-FI624HF

SX-FI424F SX-FI624P

SX-FI424HF SX-FI62XG

SX-FI42XG

Throughput is 100 percent when only SX third-generation modules are used.

Virtual cable testing

Most FastIron devices support Virtual Cable Test (VCT) technology. VCT technology enables the
diagnosis of a conductor (wire or cable) by sending a pulsed signal into the conductor, then examining
the reflection of that pulse. This method of cable analysis is referred to as Time Domain Reflectometry
(TDR). By examining the reflection, the Brocade device can detect and report cable statistics such as
local and remote link pair, cable length, and link status.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 217

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Virtual Cable Testing configuration notes

Virtual Cable Testing configuration notes

• VCT is supported on copper ports only. It is not supported on fiber ports.
• VCT is only supported when Ethernet port speed is configured to Auto. VCT does not work on ports
with fixed speeds.
• VCT is not supported on the following:
‐ ICX 6610-24F
‐ SX-FI24GPP
‐ SX-FI48GPP
‐ SX-FI2XG
‐ SX-FI8XG
‐ SX-FI24HF
• The port to which the cable is connected must be enabled when you issue the command to
diagnose the cable. If the port is disabled, the command is rejected.
• If the port is operating at 100 Mbps half-duplex, the TDR test on one pair will fail.
• If the remote pair is set to forced 100 Mbps, any change in MDI/MDIX may cause the device to
interpret the Multilevel Threshold-3 (MLT-3) as a reflected pulse, in which case, the device will
report a faulty condition. In this scenario, it is recommended that you run the TDR test a few times,
clearing the registers before each test, for accurate results.

Virtual Cable Test command syntax

To diagnose a cable using TDR, enter commands such as the following at the Privileged EXEC level
of the CLI.

device# phy cable-diagnostics tdr 1/1/1

The clear-diag tdr command clears results of any previous TDR test from test registers for port 1/1/1
(port 1 on slot 1 on device 1).

NOTE
It is recommended that you clear the TDR test registers before each test.

device# clear cable-diagnostics tdr 1/1/1

The command in the previous example diagnoses the cable attached to port 1/1/1.
When you issue the phy cable-diagnostics command, the command brings the port down for a
second or two, and then immediately brings the port back up.
Syntax: clear cable-diagnostics tdr stackid/slot/port
Syntax: phy cable-diagnostics tdr stackid/slot/port

Viewing the results of the cable analysis

To display the results of the cable analysis, enter a command such as the one shown in the following
examples at the Privileged EXEC level of the CLI.
In the first example, the command displays TDR test results for port 1, slot 1 on device 1 in the stack.
The results indicate that the port is down or the cable is not connected.

device>show cable-diagnostics tdr 1/1/1

218 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hardware Component Monitoring

Port Speed Local pair Pair Length Remote pair Pair status
--------- ----- ---------- ----------- ----------- -----------
-- ----- ------- ----- ------ ----------
01 UNKWN Pair A <=3 M Open
Pair B <=3 M Open
Pair C <=3 M Open
Pair D <=3 M Open

In the second test example, the TDR test results for the same port show details for an active port.

device>show cable-diagnostics tdr 1/1/1

Port Speed Local pair Pair Length Remote pair Pair status
--------- ----- ---------- ----------- ----------- -----------
01 1000M Pair A <50M Pair B Terminated
Pair B <50M Pair A Terminated
Pair C <50M Pair D Terminated
Pair D <50M Pair C Terminated

Syntax: show cable-diagnostics tdr stackid/slot/port

In the output shown, "Local pair" indicates the assignment of wire pairs from left to right, where Pair A is
the left-most pair. The following table shows the "Local pair" mapping to the T568A pin/pair and color
assignment from the TIA/EIA-568-B standard.

TABLE 28 Local pair definition

Local pair T568A pair and color assignment

Pair A Pair 3 (green)

Pair B Pair 2 (orange)

Pair C Pair 1 (blue)

Pair D Pair 4 (brown)

The following figure illustrates the T568A pin/pair assignment.

FIGURE 8 T568A pin/pair assignment

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 219

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Digital optical monitoring

The following table describes the fields shown in the show cable-diagnostics port command output.

TABLE 29 Cable statistics

Field Meaning

Port The port that was tested.

Speed The port current line speed.

Local pair The local link name. Refer to the previous local pair definition table.

Pair Length The cable length when terminated, or the distance to the point of fault when the line is not up.

Remote pair The remote link name.

Pair status The status of the link. This field displays one of the following:

• Terminated: The link is up.

• Shorted: A short is detected in the cable.
• Open: An opening is detected in the cable.
• ImpedMis: The impedance is mismatched.
• Failed: The TDR test failed.

Digital optical monitoring

You can configure your Brocade device to monitor optical transceivers in the system, either globally or
by specified ports. When this feature is enabled, the system will monitor the temperature and signal
power levels for the optical transceivers in the specified ports. Console messages and Syslog
messages are sent when optical operating conditions fall below or rise above the XFP, SFP, and SFP
+ manufacturer recommended thresholds.

Digital optical monitoring configuration limitations

A Brocade chassis device can monitor a maximum of 24 SFPs and 12 XFPs.

NOTE
A Brocade ICX 6650 device allows all ports to support Digital Optical Monitoring (DOM).

Enabling digital optical monitoring

To enable optical monitoring on all Brocade-qualified optics installed in the device, use the following
command.

device(config)#optical-monitor

220 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Setting the alarm interval

To enable optical monitoring on a specific port, use the following command.

device(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

device(config-if-e10000-1/1)#optical-monitor

To enable optical monitoring on a range of ports, use the following command.

device(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 to 1/2

device(config-mif-e10000-1/1-1/2)#optical-monitor

Syntax: [no] optical-monitor

Use the no form of the command to disable digital optical monitoring.

Setting the alarm interval

You can optionally change the interval between which alarms and warning messages are sent. For all
Brocade devices except the ICX 6650, the default interval is three minutes. The minimum and default
interval for the ICX 6650 is eight minutes and a value of one through seven minutes generates an error
message. To change the interval, use the following command.

device(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 to 1/2

device(config-mif-e10000-1/1-1/2)#optical-monitor 10

Syntax: [no] optical-monitor [ alarm-interval ]

For alarm-interval, enter a value between 1 and 65535. For the ICX 6650 enter a value between 8 and
65535. Enter 0 to disable alarms and warning messages.

NOTE
The commands no optical-monitor and optical-monitor 0 perform the same function. That is, they
both disable digital optical monitoring.

Displaying information about installed media

Use the show media , show media slot , and show media ethernet commands to obtain information
about the media devices installed per device, per slot, and per port. The results displayed from these
commands provide the Type, Vendor, Part number, Version and Serial number of the SFP, SFP+, or
XFP optical device installed in the port. If there is no SFP, SFP+, or XFP optical device installed in a
port, the "Type" field will display "EMPTY".
On ICX 6430 and ICX 6450 devices, 1G copper ports will always be shown with the type as 1G M-C
(Gig-Copper), even if the ports are not connected.
Use the show media command to obtain information about the media devices installed in a device.

device# show media

Port 1/1/1: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/2: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/3: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/4: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/5: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/6: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/7: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/8: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/9: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/10: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/11: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/12: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/13: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/14: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 221

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Viewing optical monitoring information

Port 1/1/15: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)

Port 1/1/16: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/17: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/18: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/19: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/20: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/21: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/22: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/23: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/1/24: Type : 1G M-C (Gig-Copper)
Port 1/2/1: Type : 10GE SR 300m (SFP +)
Port 1/2/2: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/2/3: Type : 1G Twinax 1m (SFP)
Port 1/2/4: Type : 1G Twinax 1m (SFP)

Use the show media slot command to obtain information about the media device installed in a slot.

device# show media slot 1

Port 1/1: Type : 1G M-SX(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version:
Part# : PL-XPL-VC-S13-19 Serial#: 425HC109
Port 1/2: Type : 1G M-SX(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version:
Part# : PL-XPL-VC-S13-19 Serial#: 411HC0AH
Port 1/3: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/4: Type : 1G M-SX(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version: X1
Part# : FTRJ-8519-3 Serial#: H11654K
Port 1/5: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/6: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/7: Type : 100M M-FX-IR(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version: A
Part# : FTLF1323P1BTR-FD Serial#: UCT000T
Port 1/8: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/9: Type : 100M M-FX-LR(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version: A
Part# : FTLF1323P1BTL-FD Serial#: UD3085J
Port 1/10: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/11: Type : 100M M-FX-SR(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version: A
Part# : FTLF1217P2BTL-F1 Serial#: UCQ003J
Port 1/12: Type : EMPTY
Port 1/13: Type : 100M M-FX-IR(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version: A
Part# : FTLF1323P1BTR-F1 Serial#: PCA2XC5

Use the show media ethernet command to obtain information about the media device installed in a
port.

device# show media e 1/17

Port 1/17: Type : 1G M-SX(SFP)
Vendor: Brocade Communications, Inc. Version:
Part# : PL-XPL-VC-S13-19 Serial#: 425HC109

Use the show media validation command to find out whether the connected optic modules are
supported or not on Brocade devices.
device# show media validation
Port Supported Vendor Type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/2/1 Yes FINISAR CORP. 1GE M-SX(SFP)
1/2/2 Yes BROCADE 10GE Twinax 1m (SFP +)
2/2/1 Yes BROCADE 10GE SR 300m (SFP +)
2/2/3 Yes BROCADE 10GE SR 300m (SFP +)

Syntax: show media [ validation [ ethernet [ unit / slot / port ] | slot slot-num | stack stack-id ] |
ethernet [ unit / slot / port ] | slot slot-num | stack stack-id ]

Viewing optical monitoring information

You can view temperature and power information for qualified XFPs, SFPs, and SFP+ installed in a
FastIron device.

222 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hardware Component Monitoring

Use the show optic command to view information about an XFP, SFP, or SFP+ installed in a particular
port. The following shows example output.
Optical monitoring feature will not work in the following scenarios:
• The port is DOWN.
• The port is configured as a stacking port.
• The the optic module does not support optical monitoring.
• For ICX 6430 devices only:
‐ If an SFP+ optic is inserted in an SFP only port, the optic will not initialize.
‐ If an SFP optic is inserted in an SFP+ only port, the optic will not initialize.
‐ If an optic is inserted into a device that supports both SFP and SFP+ optics, use the speed-
duplex command to set the port speed correctly.

device#show optic 13
Port Temperature Tx Power Rx Power Tx Bias Current
+----+-----------+----------+------------+-------------------+
13 33.2968 C -005.4075 dBm -007.4328 dBm 6.306 mA
Normal Normal Normal Normal

Syntax: showoptic port-number

Use the show optic slot on a FastIron X Series chassis to view information about all qualified XFPs,
SFPs, and SFP+ in a particular slot. The following shows example output.

device>show optic slot 4

Port Temperature Tx Power Rx Power Tx Bias Current
+----+-----------+----------+------------+-------------------+
4/1 30.8242 C -001.8822 dBm -002.5908 dBm 41.790 mA
Normal Normal Normal Normal
4/2 31.7070 C -001.4116 dBm -006.4092 dBm 41.976 mA
Normal Normal Normal Normal
4/3 30.1835 C -000.5794 dBm 0.000 mA
Normal Low-Alarm Normal Low-Alarm
4/4 0.0000 C 0.000 mA
Normal Normal Normal Normal

Syntax:show optic slot slot-number

NOTE
The show optic slot command is supported on the FSX 800 and FSX 1600 only.

NOTE
The show optic function takes advantage of information stored and supplied by the manufacturer of the
XFP, SFP, or SFP+ transceiver. This information is an optional feature of the Multi-Source Agreement
standard defining the optical interface. Not all component suppliers have implemented this feature set.
In such cases where the XFP, SFP, or SFP+ transceiver does not supply the information, a "Not
Available" message will be displayed for the specific port on which the module is installed.

The following table describes the information displayed by the show optic command.

TABLE 30 Output from the show optic command

Field Description

Port The Brocade port number.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 223

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Viewing optical transceiver thresholds

TABLE 30 Output from the show optic command (Continued)

Field Description

Temperature • The operating temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the optical transceiver.

• The alarm status, as described in the next table.

Tx Power • The transmit power signal, in decibels (dB), of the measured power referenced to one milliwatt
(mW).
• The alarm status, as described in the next table.

Rx Power • The receive power signal, in decibels (dB), of the measured power referenced to one milliwatt
(mW).
• The alarm status, as described in the next table.

Tx Bias Current • The transmit bias power signal, in milliamperes (mA).

• The alarm status, as described in the next table.

For Temperature, Tx Power, Rx Power, and Tx Bias Current in the show optic command output,
values are displayed along with one of the following alarm status values: Low-Alarm, Low-Warn,
Normal, High-Warn or High-Alarm. The thresholds that determine these status values are set by the
manufacturer of the optical transceivers. The following table describes each of these status values.

TABLE 31 Alarm status value description

Status value Description

Low-Alarm Monitored level has dropped below the "low-alarm" threshold set by the manufacturer of the optical
transceiver.

Low-Warn Monitored level has dropped below the "low-warn" threshold set by the manufacturer of the optical
transceiver.

Normal Monitored level is within the "normal" range set by the manufacturer of the optical transceiver.

High-Warn Monitored level has climbed above the "high-warn" threshold set by the manufacturer of the optical
transceiver.

High-Alarm Monitored level has climbed above the "high-alarm" threshold set by the manufacturer of the
optical transceiver.

Viewing optical transceiver thresholds

The thresholds that determine the alarm status values for an optical transceiver are set by the
manufacturer of the XFP, SFP, or SFP+. To view the thresholds for a qualified optical transceiver in a
particular port, use the show optic threshold command as shown below.

device>show optic threshold 2/2

Port 2/2 sfp monitor thresholds:
Temperature High alarm 5a00 90.0000 C
Temperature Low alarm d300 -45.0000 C
Temperature High warning 5500 85.0000 C
Temperature Low warning d800 -40.0000 C
Supply Voltage High alarm 9088

224 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages for optical transceivers

Supply Voltage Low alarm 7148

Supply Voltage High warning 8ca0
Supply Voltage Low warning 7530
TX Bias High alarm 7530 60.000 mA
TX Bias Low alarm 01f4 1.000 mA
TX Bias High warning 61a8 50.000 mA
TX Bias Low warning 05dc 3.000 mA
TX Power High alarm 1f07 -001.0001 dBm
TX Power Low alarm 02c4 -011.4996 dBm
TX Power High warning 18a6 -001.9997 dBm
TX Power Low warning 037b -010.5012 dBm
RX Power High alarm 2710 000.0000 dBm
RX Power Low alarm 0028 -023.9794 dBm
RX Power High warning 1f07 -001.0001 dBm
RX Power Low warning 0032 -023.0102 dBm

Syntax:show optic threshold port

For Temperature, Supply Voltage, TX Bias, TX Power, and RX Power, values are displayed for each of
the following four alarm and warning settings: High alarm, Low alarm, High warning, and Low warning.
The hexadecimal values are the manufacturer internal calibrations, as defined in the SFF-8472
standard. The other values indicate at what level (above the high setting or below the low setting) the
system should send a warning message or an alarm. Note that these values are set by the
manufacturer of the optical transceiver, and cannot be configured.

Syslog messages for optical transceivers

The system generates Syslog messages for optical transceivers in the following circumstances:
• The temperature, supply voltage, TX Bias, TX power, or TX power value goes above or below the
high or low warning or alarm threshold set by the manufacturer.
• The optical transceiver does not support digital optical monitoring.
• The optical transceiver is not qualified, and therefore not supported by Brocade.
For details about the above Syslog messages, refer to Syslog messages for optical transceivers.

FastIron Fiber-optic Transceivers

The fiber-optic transceivers listed in the following table are supported on all FastIron devices.

TABLE 32 FastIron fiber-optic transceivers

Label Type Brocade part number Supports Digital

Optical Monitoring?

E1MG-BXD 1000Base-BXD 33005-000 No

E1MG-BXU 1000Base-BXU 33006-000 No

E1MG-LHA-OM 1000Base-LHA 33212-100 Yes

E1MG-LX-OM 1000Base-LX 33211-100 Yes

E1MG-100FX-LR-OM 100Base-FX-LR, 40 km 33226-100 Yes

E1MG-100FX-OM 100Base-FX 33224-100 Yes

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 225

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hardware Component Monitoring

TABLE 32 FastIron fiber-optic transceivers (Continued)

Label Type Brocade part number Supports Digital

Optical Monitoring?

E1MG-100FX-IR-OM 100Base-FX-IR, 15 km 33225-100 Yes

E1MG-SX-OM 1000Base-SX 33210-100 Yes

E1MG-TX 1000Base-T Copper 33002-100 No

10G-XFP-ER 10GBase-ER XFP, 40 km 33013-000 Yes

10G-XFP-LR 10GBase-LR XFP, 10 km 33012-000 Yes

10G-XFP-SR 10GBase-SR XFP 33011-000 Yes

10G-XFP-ZR 10GBase-ZR XFP, 80 km 33014-000 Yes

10G-XFP-ZRD 10GBase-ZRD XFP, 80 km 33063-000 to 33107-000 Yes

10G-SFPP-SR 10GE SR SFP+ 57-0000075-01 Yes

10G-SFPP-LR 10GE LR SFP+ 57-0000076-01 Yes

10G-SFPP-TWX-0101 FCoE 1M Active Cable 58-1000026-01 No

10G-SFPP-TWX-0301 FCoE 3M Active Cable 58-1000027-01 No

10G-SFPP-TWX-0501 FCoE 5M Active Cable 58-1000023-01 No

10G-SFPP-ER 10GBase-ER SFP+, 40 km 57-0000085-01 Yes

10G-SFPP-LRM 10GBase-LRM SFP+ 57-0000084-01 Yes

E1MG-LHB 1000Base-LHB 33004-000 No

10G-SFPP-USR 10GE Ultra Short Reach (USR) SFP+ 57-1000130-01 Yes

100m on OM3 MMF

10GE ZR SFPP 10GE ZR 80km ((SFP+)) 1550.0 nm 57-1000180-01 Yes

Used on Port 1/3/8

40G-QSFP-C-0101 40GE QSFP Direct Attached Copper 58-0000033-01 No

Cable, 1m (stacking)

Used for stacking only.

40G-QSFP-C-0501 40GE QSFP Direct Attached Copper 58-0000035-01 No

Cable, 5m (stacking)

Used for stacking only.

226 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Hardware Component Monitoring

TABLE 32 FastIron fiber-optic transceivers (Continued)

Label Type Brocade part number Supports Digital

Optical Monitoring?

40Ge LR4 40GE-LR4 10km (QSFP + LC) 57-1000263-01 Yes

40GE-SR4 100m (QSFP+) 57-1000128-1 Yes

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 227

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 FastIron Fiber-optic Transceivers

228 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

● Basic system management........................................................................................... 229

● RMON support.............................................................................................................. 240
● sFlow.............................................................................................................................245
● Utilization list for an uplink port..................................................................................... 263

Basic system management

The following sections contain procedures for basic system management tasks.

Viewing system information

You can access software and hardware specifics for a Brocade Layer 2 switch or Layer 3 switch. For
software specifics, refer to the section Software versions installed and running on a device on page 90
in the FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide.
To view the software and hardware details for the system, enter the show version command. The
following shows example output.

NOTE
The output may vary depending on the device on which you run the show version.

device# show version

==========================================================================
Active Management CPU [Slot-9]:
SW: Version 04.3.00b17T3e3 Copyright (c) 1996-2008 Brocade Communications, Inc.,
Inc.
Compiled on Sep 25 2008 at 04:09:20 labeled as SXR04300b17
(4031365 bytes) from Secondary sxr04300b17.bin
BootROM: Version 04.0.00T3e5 (FEv2)
HW: ANR-Chassis FastIron SX 1600-PREM (PROM-TYPE SX-FIL3U)
Serial #: TExxxxxxxx
==========================================================================
SL 3: SX-FI424C 24-port Gig Copper
Serial #: CYxxxxxxxxx
P-ASIC 4: type 00D1, rev D2 subrev 00
P-ASIC 5: type 00D1, rev D2 subrev 00
==========================================================================
SL 9: SX-FI8GMR4 8-port Management
Serial #: CHxxxxxxxx
P-ASIC 16: type 00D1, rev D2 subrev 00
==========================================================================
SL 14: SX-FI42XGW 2-port 10G LAN/WAN
Serial #: Invalid
P-ASIC 26: type 01D1, rev 00 subrev 00
P-ASIC 27: type 01D1, rev 00 subrev 00
==========================================================================
Active Management Module:
660 MHz Power PC processor 8541 (version 32/0020) 66 MHz bus
512 KB boot flash memory
16384 KB code flash memory
512 MB DRAM
The system uptime is 2 minutes 13 seconds
The system : started=warm start reloaded=by "reload"

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 229

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Viewing configuration information

*** NOT FOR PRODUCTION ***

*** AUTO SHUTDOWN IS OFF. PLEASE ACTIVATE WITH auto-shutdown ***

The following hardware details are listed in the output of the show version command:
• Chassis type
• PROM type (if applicable)
• Chassis serial number
• Management and interface module serial numbers and ASIC types
For a description of the software details in the output of the show version command, refer to the
section Software versions installed and running on a device on page 90 in the FastIron Ethernet
Switch Administraiton Guide.
Starting with FastIron 08.0.30, you can view the serial number pluggable modules. If there are no
pluggable modules on the device, the serial number of the fixed modules on the device is displayed.
The following is an example of the show version output on an ICX 7750.
device# show version
Copyright (c) 1996-2014 Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
UNIT 1: compiled on Dec 22 2014 at 12:35:56 labeled as SWR08030b1
(20833985 bytes) from Secondary SWR08030b1.bin
SW: Version 08.0.30b1T203
UNIT 2: compiled on Dec 22 2014 at 12:35:56 labeled as SWR08030b1
(20833985 bytes) from Secondary SWR08030b1.bin
SW: Version 08.0.30b1T203
Compressed Boot-Monitor Image size = 1835008, Version:10.1.03T205
(swz10103b003)
HW: Stackable ICX7750-26Q
Internal USB: Serial #: 40D41E003CF90029
Vendor: UNIGEN, Total size = 1910 MB
==========================================================================
UNIT 1: SL 1: ICX7750-20QXG 20-port Management Module
Serial #:CRK2234J00V
License: ICX7750_L3_SOFT_PACKAGE (LID: etmHHIJlFFx)
P-ASIC 0: type B850, rev 03 Chip BCM56850_A2
==========================================================================
UNIT 1: SL 2: ICX7750-QSFP 6-port QSFP 240G Module
==========================================================================
UNIT 1: SL 3: ICX7750-6Q 6-port QSFP 240G Module
Serial #:PR320400290
==========================================================================
UNIT 2: SL 1: ICX7750-48XGF 48-port Management Module
Serial #:CRH2234J00M
License: ICX7750_L3_SOFT_PACKAGE (LID: etjHHIJlFFo)
==========================================================================
UNIT 2: SL 2: ICX7750-QSFP 6-port QSFP 240G Module
==========================================================================
UNIT 2: SL 3: ICX7750-6Q 6-port QSFP 240G Module
Serial #:PR320400289
==========================================================================
1500 MHz Power PC processor (version 8023/0022) 88 MHz bus
8192 KB boot flash memory
2048 MB code flash memory
256 MB DRAM
STACKID 1 system uptime is 14 minute(s) 30 second(s)
STACKID 2 system uptime is 14 minute(s) 6 second(s)
The system: started=warm start reloaded=by "reload"

Syntax: show version

Viewing configuration information

You can view a variety of configuration details and statistics with the show option. The show option
provides a convenient way to check configuration changes before saving them to flash.
The show options available will vary for Layer 2 Switches and Layer 3 Switches and by configuration
level.

230 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling the display of the elapsed timestamp for port statistics reset

To determine the available show commands for the system or a specific level of the CLI, enter the
following command.

device#show ?

Syntax: show option

You also can enter "show" at the command prompt, then press the TAB key.

Enabling the display of the elapsed timestamp for port statistics reset
Whenever the port statistics of a device are cleared globally or on an interface, the counter values of the
received and transmitted packets on the device are reset for all the ports or for an interface,
respectively.
The elapsed time after the most recent reset of the port statistics counters can be displayed in the
output of the show statistics command by configuring the port-statistics-reset-timestamp enable
command. By default, the display of the elapsed timestamp information is disabled.
The elapsed time is calculated as the time between the most recent reset of the port statistics counters
and the time when the show statistics command is executed.
The following list provides details of the conditions under which the port statistics counters are reset and
also explains the elapsed time calculation considerations.
• When the port statistics are cleared individually using the clear statistics ethernet command. The
elapsed time is calculated and displayed only for that particular interface.
• When the port statistics are cleared globally using the clear statistics command. The port statistics
counters for all the ports, including management ports, are cleared and the elapsed time is calculated
and displayed for each of the interfaces.
• When the management interface is cleared using the clear statistics management command. The
port statistics counters specific to management ports are cleared. The elapsed time is calculated and
displayed for the management interface.
• If the system is reloaded (hard reboot or soft reboot), the port statistics on the device are cleared
automatically. In this case, the time when the ports are cleared during the reload is considered as the
most recent reset time.
• In a stacking device, the Elapsed Timestamp information is applicable for other unit's ports. In case
of a switchover, all the port statistics are cleared and the elapsed time is calculated and displayed for
all ports.
• If hitless failover is enabled and if any unit is reloaded, the statistics of the reloading device's
interfaces are cleared. In this case, the time when the ports are cleared during the reload is
considered as the most recent reset time.
• The elapsed time is not impacted when the Network Time Protocol (NTP) syncs up with a different
time other than the recorded time.

Viewing port statistics

Port statistics are polled by default every 10 seconds.
You can view statistics for ports by entering the following show commands:
• show interfaces
• show configuration
• show statistics
The Elapsed Timestamp information is displayed in the output of the following show commands:

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 231

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

• show statistics
• show statistics brief
• show statistics ethernet
• show statistics management

NOTE
The port-statistics-reset-timestamp enable command must be configured to have the Elapsed
Timestamp information displayed in the output.
To display the statistics, enter a command such as the following.

device# show statistics ethernet 1/1/13

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pvid Pri MAC Name
1/1/13 Up Forward Full 1G None No 1 0
748e.f893.065c

Port 1/1/13 Counters:

*Last time counter reset (Elapsed Timestamp): 1 hour(s) 21
minute(s) 12 second(s)
InOctets 50218819740 OutOctets 50216689676
InPkts 63180119 OutPkts 63428168
InBroadcastPkts 5 OutBroadcastPkts 3
InMulticastPkts 63180114 OutMulticastPkts 63428165
InUnicastPkts OutUnicastPkts
InBadPkts
InFragments
InDiscards OutErrors
CRC Collisions
InErrors LateCollisions
InGiantPkts 0
InShortPkts
InJabber
InFlowCtrlPkts OutFlowCtrlPkts
InBitsPerSec 97441855 OutBitsPerSec 97432612
InPktsPerSec 153280 OutPktsPerSec 153972
InUtilization 100.00% OutUtilization 100.00%

Syntax: show statistics [ ethernet | port ]

TABLE 33 Port statistics in the show statistics command

Parameter Description

Port configuration

Port The port number.

Link The link state.

State The STP state.

Dupl The mode (full-duplex or half-duplex).

Speed The port speed.

Trunk The trunk group number, if the port is a member of a trunk group.

Tag Whether the port is a tagged member of a VLAN.

232 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

TABLE 33 Port statistics in the show statistics command (Continued)

Parameter Description

Pvid The port default VLAN ID of the port.

Priori The QoS forwarding priority of the port (level0 - level7).

MAC The MAC address of the port.

Name The name of the port, if you assigned a name.

Statistics

*Last time counter reset The elapsed time between the most recent reset of the port statistics counters and
(Elapsed Timestamp) the time when the show statistics command is executed.

InOctets The total number of good octets and bad octets received.

OutOctets The total number of good octets and bad octets sent.

InPkts The total number of packets received. The count includes rejected and local packets
that are not sent to the switching core for transmission.

OutPkts The total number of good packets sent. The count includes unicast, multicast, and
broadcast packets.

InBroadcastPkts The total number of good broadcast packets received.

OutBroadcastPkts The total number of good broadcast packets sent.

InMulticastPkts The total number of good multicast packets received.

OutMulticastPkts The total number of good multicast packets sent.

InUnicastPkts The total number of good unicast packets received.

OutUnicastPkts The total number of good unicast packets sent.

InBadPkts The total number of packets received for which one of the following is true:

• The CRC is invalid.

• The packet is oversized.
• Jabbers: The packets are longer than 1518 octets and have a bad FCS.
• Fragments: The packets was less than 64 octets long and have a bad FCS.
• The packet is undersized (short).

InFragments The total number of packets received for which both of the following is true:

• The length is less than 64 bytes.

• The CRC is invalid.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 233

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

TABLE 33 Port statistics in the show statistics command (Continued)

Parameter Description

InDiscards The total number of packets that were received and then dropped due to a lack of
receive buffers.

OutErrors The total number of packets with internal transmit errors such as TX underruns.

CRC The total number of packets received for which all of the following is true:

• The data length is between 64 bytes and the maximum allowable frame size.
• No Collision or Late Collision is detected.
• The CRC is invalid.

Collisions The total number of packets received in which a Collision event was detected.

InErrors The total number of packets received that had Alignment errors or PHY errors.

NOTE

Excessive errors for some counters usually indicate a problem. When you operate at
a half-duplex setting, some data link errors incrementing in Frame Check Sequence
(FCS), alignment, runts, and collision counters are normal. Generally, a one percent
ratio of errors to total traffic is acceptable for half-duplex connections. If the ratio of
errors to input packets is greater than two or three percent, performance degradation
could be noticed.

In half-duplex environments, it is possible for both the switch and the connected
device to sense the wire and transmit at exactly the same time and result in a
collision. Collisions may cause runts, errors in FCS, and alignment errors due to the
frame not being completely copied to the wire, resulting in fragmented frames. When
you operate at full-duplex, errors in FCS, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC),
alignment, and runt counters must be minimal.

LateCollisions The total number of packets received in which a Collision event was detected, but
for which a receive error (Rx Error) event was not detected.

InGiantPkts The total number of packets for which all of the following is true:

• The data length is longer than the maximum allowable frame size.
• No Rx Error is detected.

NOTE
Packets are counted for this statistic regardless of whether the CRC is valid or
invalid.

234 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Viewing STP statistics

TABLE 33 Port statistics in the show statistics command (Continued)

Parameter Description

InShortPkts The total number of packets received for which all of the following is true:

• The data length is less than 64 bytes.

• No Rx Error is detected.
• No Collision or Late Collision is detected.

NOTE
Packets are counted for this statistic regardless of whether the CRC is valid or
invalid.

InJabber The total number of packets received for which all of the following is true:

• The data length is longer than the maximum allowable frame size.
• No Rx Error is detected.
• The CRC is invalid.

InFlowCtrlPkts The total number of flow control packets received.

OutFlowCtrlPkts The total number of flow control packets transmitted.

InBitsPerSec The number of bits received per second.

OutBitsPerSec The number of bits sent per second.

InPktsPerSec The number of packets received per second.

OutPktsPerSec The number of packets sent per second.

InUtilization The percentage of the port bandwidth used by received traffic.

OutUtilization The percentage of the port bandwidth used by sent traffic.

Viewing STP statistics

You can view a summary of STP statistics for Layer 2 Switches and Layer 3 Switches. STP statistics
are by default polled every 10 seconds.
To view spanning tree statistics, enter the show span command. To view STP statistics for a VLAN,
enter the span vlan command.

Clearing statistics
You can clear statistics for many parameters using the clear command.
To determine the available clear commands for the system, enter the clear command at the Privileged
EXEC level of the CLI.

device#clear ?

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 235

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Traffic counters for outbound traffic

Syntax: clear option

You also can enter "clear" at the command prompt, then press the TAB key.

Traffic counters for outbound traffic

You can configure traffic counters (also called transmit counters) that enable the Brocade device to
count the following packet types on a port or port region:
• broadcast packets
• multicast packets
• unicast packets
• dropped packets due to congestion and egress filtering
Depending on the parameters specified with the traffic counter configuration, traffic counters record
the number of outbound packets from any combination of the following sources:
• a specific port or all ports in a specific port region
• a specific VLAN or all VLANs
• a specific 802.1p priority queue or all priority queues

Traffic counters configuration notes

Consider the following rules when configuring traffic counters for outbound traffic.
• This feature is supported on FastIron X Series devices only.
• This feature is supported in the Layer 2 and Layer 3 codes.
• This feature applies to physical ports only, including 10 Gbps Ethernet ports and trunk ports. It does
not apply to virtual interfaces.
• Once the enhanced traffic counters are read using the show transmit-counter values command,
the counters are cleared (reset to zero).
• For each port region, you can enable a maximum of two traffic counters, regardless of whether
traffic counters are enabled on individual ports or on all ports in the port region.
• Traffic counters increase for bridged filtered outbound traffic when any of the following conditions
occur:
‐ The port is disabled or the link is down.
‐ The port or port region does not belong to the VLAN specified in the transmit counter
configuration.
‐ A Layer 2 protocol (e.g., spanning tree) has the port in a Blocked state.
‐ The source port needs to be suppressed for multi-target packets.
‐ The priority queue specified in the traffic counter is not allowed for some other reason.
‐ Unknown unicast and unregistered multicast packets are filtered.

Traffic counters configuration syntax

This section provides the syntax and configuration examples for enhanced traffic counters.

To configure traffic counters for outbound traffic on a specific port, enter a command such as the
following.

device(config)#transmit-counter 4 port 18 only vlan 1 prio 7 enable

The above command creates and enables traffic counter 4 on port 18. The device will count the
number of packets sent out on port 18 that are in VLAN 1 and have a priority queue of 7.

236 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying enhanced traffic counter profiles

To configure traffic counters for outbound traffic in a specific port region, enter a command such as the
following.

device(config)#transmit-counter 1 port 1 region vlan all prio all enable

The above command creates and enables traffic counter 1 on all ports that are in the same port region
as port 1. The device will count the number of packets transmitted in this port region that belong to any
VLAN and have any assigned priority queue.
Syntax: [no] transmit-counter counter-ID port [slotnum /] port-num { only | region} vlan {vlan-ID |
all } priority {priority-queue | all} enable
Enter the no form of the command to remove the outbound traffic counter.
The counter-ID parameter identifies the traffic counter. You can configure up to 64 traffic counters.
Enter a number from 1 - 64.
The slotnum parameter is required on chassis devices.
The port-num parameter is the port number to which enhanced traffic counters will apply. Enter the port
number followed by only to apply the enhanced traffic counter to a specific port, or enter the port
number followed by region to apply the enhanced traffic counter to all of the ports in the port region.
The vlan-ID parameter identifies the VLAN ID for which outbound traffic will be counted. Enter a number
from 0 - 4095 or enter all to indicate all VLANs.
The priority-queue parameter identifies the 802.1p priority queue for which traffic will be counted. Enter
a number from 0 - 7 or enter all to indicate all priority queues.

Displaying enhanced traffic counter profiles

To display the details of the traffic counters configured on your device, enter the show transmit-
counter profiles command. The following shows an example output.

device#show transmit-counter profiles

Tx Counter Port(s) Vlan Id Priority Device Set
1 1 - 12 All All Dev 0 Set0
4 18 1 7 Dev 1 Set0
10 13 - 24 100 All Dev 1 Set1

Displaying enhanced traffic counter statistics

To display the traffic counters for outbound traffic, enter the show transmit-counter profiles
command.

NOTE
Once the enhanced traffic counters are displayed, the counters are cleared (reset to zero).

The following shows an example output.

device#show transmit-counter values 1

Transmit Queue Counter Values for Counter 1:
Transmitted Frames:
Known Unicast : 17204
Multicast & Unknown Unicast : 2797
Broadcast : 5
Dropped Frames:
Bridge Egress Filtered : 2
Congestion Drops : 0
device#show transmit-counter values 4
Transmit Queue Counter Values for Counter 4:
Transmitted Frames:

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 237

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 6610 and FCX devices

Known Unicast : 124

Multicast & Unknown Unicast : 2752
Broadcast : 0
Dropped Frames:
Bridge Egress Filtered : 37
Congestion Drops : 0

Syntax: show transmit-counter values number

where number identifies a valid enhanced traffic counter and is a value from 1 - 64.

TABLE 34 Outbound traffic counter statistics

This line... Displays...

Transmitted frames

Known Unicast The number of known unicast packets transmitted.

Multicast & Unknown The number of multicast and unknown unicast packets transmitted.
Unicast

Broadcast The number of broadcast packets transmitted.

Dropped Frames

Bridge Egress Filtered The number of bridged outbound packets that were filtered and dropped.

This number includes the number of packets that were dropped because of any one of
the following conditions:

• The port was disabled or the link was down.

• The port or port region does not belong to the VLAN specified in the transmit
counter configuration.
• A Layer 2 protocol (e.g., spanning tree) had the port in a Blocked state.
• The source port was suppressed for multi-target packets.
• The priority queue specified in the traffic counter was not allowed for some other
reason.
• Unknown unicast and unregistered multicast packets were filtered.

Congestion Drops The number of outbound packets that were dropped because of traffic congestion.

Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 6610 and FCX devices

The show interface command displays the number of packets on a port that were queued for each
QoS priority (traffic class) and dropped because of congestion.

NOTE
These counters do not include traffic on management ports or for a stack member unit that is down.

The egress queue counters display at the end of the show interface command output as shown in the
following example.

device#show interface e 1/1/1

GigabitEthernet1/1/1 is up, line protocol is up
Hardware is GigabitEthernet, address is 0000.0077.8080 (bia 0000.0077.8080)

238 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 7750 devices

Configured speed auto, actual 1Gbit, configured duplex fdx, actual fdx
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual none
Member of L2 VLAN ID 52, port is untagged, port state is FORWARDING
BPDU guard is Disabled, ROOT protect is Disabled
Link Error Dampening is Disabled
STP configured to ON, priority is level0, mac-learning is enabled
Flow Control is config enabled, oper enabled, negotiation disabled
mirror disabled, monitor disabled
Not member of any active trunks
Not member of any configured trunks
No port name
Inter-Packet Gap (IPG) is 96 bit times
IP MTU 1500 bytes
300 second input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
300 second output rate: 256 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
215704 packets output, 13805066 bytes, 0 underruns
Transmitted 0 broadcasts, 215704 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions
Relay Agent Information option: Disabled
Egress queues:
Queue counters Queued packets Dropped Packets
0 0 0
1 0 0
2 1 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
7 215703 0

Syntax: show interface [ ethernet port]

Specify the port variable in the format stack-unit/slotnum/portnum.

TABLE 35 Egress queue statistics

Parameter Description

Queue counters The QoS traffic class.

Queued packets The number of packets queued on the port for the given traffic class.

Dropped packets The number of packets for the given traffic class that were dropped because of congestion.

Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 7750 devices

Viewing egress queue counters on ICX 7750 devices.
For a port, the show interface command displays the number of packets that were queued for each
QoS priority (traffic class) and dropped because of congestion. The egress queue counters are
displayed at the end of the show interface command output as shown in the following example.

NOTE
This command output displays the total of unicast and multicast counters for any particular QOS priority.
Brocade# show interface ethernet 1/1/1
10GigabitEthernet 1/1/1 is down, line protocol is down
Port down for 16 hours 16 minutes 48 seconds
Hardware is 10GigabitEthernet , address is 748e.f8f9.6280 (bia 748e.f8f9.6280)
Interface type is 40Gig Fiber
Configured speed 40Gbit, actual unknown, configured duplex fdx, actual unknown
Configured mdi mode AUTO, actual unknown

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 239

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing the egress queue counters

Member of L2 VLAN ID 1, port is untagged, port state is BLOCKING

BPDU guard is Disabled, ROOT protect is Disabled, Designated protect is Disabled
Link Error Dampening is Disabled
STP configured to ON, priority is level0, mac-learning is enabled
Flow Control is enabled
Mirror disabled, Monitor disabled
Mac-notification is disabled
Not member of any active trunks
Not member of any configured trunks
No port name
IPG MII 96 bits-time, IPG GMII 96 bits-time
MTU 1500 bytes
300 second input rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
300 second output rate: 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% utilization
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 ignored
0 runts, 0 giants
0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns
Transmitted 0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 unicasts
0 output errors, 0 collisions
Relay Agent Information option: Disabled

Egress queues:
Queue counters Queued packets Dropped Packets
0 0 0
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
6 0 0
7 0 0

Clearing the egress queue counters

You can clear egress queue statistics (reset them to zero), using the clear statistics and clear
statistics ethernet port command.
Syntax: clear statistics [ ethernet port]
Specify the port variable in the format stack-unit/slotnum/portnum.

RMON support
The Brocade RMON agent supports the following groups. The group numbers come from the RMON
specification (RFC 1757):

NOTE
RFC 1757 is obsolete and is replaced by RFC 2819 for the Brocade ICX devices.
• Statistics (RMON Group 1)
• History (RMON Group 2)
• Alarms (RMON Group 3)
• Events (RMON Group 9)
The CLI allows you to make configuration changes to the control data for these groups, but you need a
separate RMON application to view and display the data graphically.

240 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Maximum number of entries allowed in the RMON control table

Maximum number of entries allowed in the RMON control table

You can specify the maximum number of entries allowed in the RMON control table, including alarms,
history, and events. The default number of RMON entries allowed in the RMON control table is 2048 on
the FSX 800 and FSX 1600. The maximum number of RMON entries supported is 32768.
To set the maximum number of allowable entries to 3000 in the RMON history table, enter commands
such as the following.

device(config)#system-max rmon-entries 3000

device(config)#write mem
device(config)#exit
device#reload

NOTE
You must save the change to the startup-config file and reload or reboot. The change does not take
effect until you reload or reboot.
Syntax: system-max rmon-entries value
where value can be:
• 1536 - 32768 for FSX 800 and FSX 1600 devices

Statistics (RMON group 1)

Count information on multicast and broadcast packets, total packets sent, undersized and oversized
packets, CRC alignment errors, jabbers, collision, fragments and dropped events is collected for each
port on a Brocade Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch.
The statistics group collects statistics on promiscuous traffic across an interface. The interface group
collects statistics on total traffic into and out of the agent interface.
No configuration is required to activate collection of statistics for the Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch.
This activity is by default automatically activated at system start-up.
You can view a textual summary of the statistics for all ports by entering the following CLI command.

device#show rmon statistics

Ethernet statistics 1 is active, owned by monitor
Interface 1/1 (ifIndex 1) counters
Octets 0
Drop events 0 Packets 0
Broadcast pkts 0 Multicast pkts 0
CRC alignment errors 0 Undersize pkts 0
Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0
Jabbers 0 Collisions 0
64 octets pkts 0 65 to 127 octets pkts 0
128 to 255 octets pkts 0 256 to 511 octets pkts 0
512 to 1023 octets pkts 0 1024 to 1518 octets pkts 0

Syntax: show rmon statistics [ethernet port]

NOTE
Though 48GC modules receive oversized packets and jabbers, they do not support count information
for oversized packets and jabbers and the output of the show rmon statistics command reports 0 for
both of these counters.

The port parameter specifies the port number. You can use the physical port number or the SNMP port
number. The physical port number is based on the product.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 241

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

The SNMP numbers of the ports start at 1 and increase sequentially. For example, if you are using a
Chassis device and slot 1 contains an 8-port module, the SNMP number of the first port in slot 2 is 9.
The physical port number of the same port is 2/1.
This command shows the following information.

TABLE 36 Export configuration and statistics

Parameter Definition

Octets The total number of octets of data received on the network.

This number includes octets in bad packets. This number does not include framing bits but
does include Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets.

Drop events Indicates an overrun at the port. The port logic could not receive the traffic at full line rate
and had to drop some packets as a result.

The counter indicates the total number of events in which packets were dropped by the
RMON probe due to lack of resources. This number is not necessarily the number of packets
dropped, but is the number of times an overrun condition has been detected.

Packets The total number of packets received.

This number includes bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets.

Broadcast pkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.

This number does not include multicast packets.

Multicast pkts The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.

CRC alignment The total number of packets received that were from 64 - 1518 octets long, but had either a
errors bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).

The packet length does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

Undersize pkts The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise
well formed.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

Fragments The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and had either a bad
FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).

It is normal for this counter to increment, since it counts both runts (which are normal
occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

242 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

TABLE 36 Export configuration and statistics (Continued)

Parameter Definition

Oversize packets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise
well formed.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

NOTE
48GC modules do not support count information on oversized packets and report 0.

Jabbers The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad
FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).

NOTE
This definition of jabber is different from the definition in IEEE-802.3 section 8.2.1.5
(10BASE5) and section 10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents define jabber as the
condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range to detect jabber is between
20 ms and 150 ms.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

NOTE
48GC modules do not support count information on jabbers and report 0.

Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

64 octets pkts The total number of packets received that were 64 octets long.

This number includes bad packets.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

65 to 127 octets The total number of packets received that were 65 - 127 octets long.
pkts
This number includes bad packets.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

128 to 255 octets The total number of packets received that were 128 - 255 octets long.
pkts
This number includes bad packets.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

256 to 511 octets The total number of packets received that were 256 - 511 octets long.
pkts
This number includes bad packets.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 243

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 History (RMON group 2)

TABLE 36 Export configuration and statistics (Continued)

Parameter Definition

512 to 1023 octets The total number of packets received that were 512 - 1023 octets long.
pkts
This number includes bad packets.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

1024 to 1518 The total number of packets received that were 1024 - 1518 octets long.
octets pkts
This number includes bad packets.

This number does not include framing bits but does include FCS octets.

History (RMON group 2)

All active ports by default will generate two history control data entries per active Brocade Layer 2
Switch port or Layer 3 Switch interface. An active port is defined as one with a link up. If the link goes
down the two entries are automatically deleted.
Two history entries are generated for each device:
• A sampling of statistics every 30 seconds
• A sampling of statistics every 30 minutes
The history data can be accessed and displayed using any of the popular RMON applications
A sample RMON history command and its syntax is shown below.

device(config)#rmon history 1 interface 1 buckets 10 interval 10 owner nyc02

Syntax: rmon historyentry-number interface port buckets number interval sampling-interval owner
text-string
You can modify the sampling interval and the bucket (number of entries saved before overwrite) using
the CLI. In the above example, owner refers to the RMON station that will request the information.

NOTE
To review the control data entry for each port or interface, enter the show rmon history command.

Alarm (RMON group 3)

Alarm is designed to monitor configured thresholds for any SNMP integer, time tick, gauge or counter
MIB object. Using the CLI, you can define what MIB objects are monitored, the type of thresholds that
are monitored (falling, rising or both), the value of those thresholds, and the sample type (absolute or
delta).
An alarm event is reported each time that a threshold is exceeded. The alarm entry also indicates the
action (event) to be taken if the threshold be exceeded.
A sample CLI alarm entry and its syntax is shown below.

device(config)#rmon alarm 1 ifInOctets.6 10 delta rising-threshold 100 1 falling

threshold 50 1 owner nyc02

244 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Event (RMON group 9)

Syntax: rmon alarm entry-number MIB-object. interface numsampling timesample type-threshold

type-threshold value event number -threshold type-threshold valueevent-number owner text-string

Event (RMON group 9)

There are two elements to the Event Group--the event control table and the event log table .
The event control table defines the action to be taken when an alarm is reported. Defined events can be
found by entering the CLI command, show event. The Event Log Table collects and stores reported
events for retrieval by an RMON application.
A sample entry and syntax of the event control table is shown below.

device(config)# rmon event 1 description ‘testing a longer string’ trap public owner
nyc02

Syntax: rmon eventevent-entry description text-string {log | trap | log-and-trap} owner rmon-station

NOTE
FastIron devices currently support only the trap option.

sFlow

NOTE
FastIron devices support sFlow version 5 by default.
sFlow is a standards-based protocol that allows network traffic to be sampled at a user-defined rate for
the purpose of monitoring traffic flow patterns and identifying packet transfer rates on user-specified
interfaces.
When sFlow is enabled on a Layer 2 or Layer 3 switch, the system performs the following sFlow-related
tasks:
• Samples traffic flows by copying packet header information
• Identifies ingress and egress interfaces for the sampled flows
• Combines sFlow samples into UDP packets and forwards them to the sFlow collectors for analysis
• Forwards byte and packet count data, or counter samples, to sFlow collectors
sFlow is described in RFC 3176, "InMon Corporation's sFlow: A Method for Monitoring Traffic in
Switched and Routed Networks".
On ICX and FCX Series devices, you can use QoS queue 1 for priority traffic, even when sFlow is
enabled on the port. This differs from FastIron X Series devices, which support seven priorities instead
of eight when sFlow is enabled. In this case, QoS queue 1 is reserved for sFlow and is not used by
other packets. Any non-sFlow packets assigned to QoS queue 1 will be directed to QoS queue 0.

sFlow version 5
sFlow version 5 enhances and modifies the format of the data sent to the sFlow collector. sFlow version
5 introduces several new sFlow features and also defines a new datagram syntax used by the sFlow
agent to report flow samples and interface counters to the sFlow collector.
sFlow version 5 adds support for the following:

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 245

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sFlow support for IPv6 packets

• sFlow version 5 datagrams

• Sub-agent support
• Configurable sFlow export packet size
• Support for the new data field and sample type length in flow samples
• Configurable interval for exporting Brocade-specific data structure
sFlow version 5 is backward-compatible with sFlow version 2. By default, the sFlow agent exports
sFlow version 5 flow samples by default, but you can configure the device to export the data in sFlow
version 2 format. You can switch between sFlow version 2 and sFlow version 5 formats. The sFlow
collector automatically parses each incoming sample and decodes it based on the version number.
The configuration procedures for sFlow version 5 are the same as for sFlow version 2, except where
explicitly noted. Configuration procedures for sFlow are in the section Configuring and enabling sFlow
on page 249. The features and CLI commands that are specific to sFlow version 5 are described in
the section sFlow version 5 feature configuration on page 256.

sFlow support for IPv6 packets

The Brocade implementation of sFlow features support IPv6 packets. This support includes extended
router information and extended gateway information in the sampled packet. Note that sFlow support
for IPv6 packets exists only on devices running software that supports IPv6.
The configuration procedures for this feature are the same as for IPv4, except where the collector is a
link-local address on a Layer 3 switch. For details refer to Specifying the collector on page 250.

Extended router information

IPv6 sFlow sampled packets include the following extended router information:
• IP address of the next hop router
• Outgoing VLAN ID
• Source IP address prefix length
• Destination IP address prefix length
Note that in IPv6 devices, the prefix lengths of the source and destination IP addresses are collected if
BGP is configured and the route lookup is completed. In IPv4 devices, this information is collected only
if BGP is configured on the devices.

Extended gateway information

If BGP is enabled, extended gateway information is included in IPv6 sFlow sampled packets, including
the following BGP information about a packet destination route:
• The Autonomous System number for the router
• The source IP Autonomous System of the route
• The source peer Autonomous System for the route
• The Autonomous System patch to the destination

NOTE
Autonomous System communities and local preferences are not included in the sampled packets.
To obtain extended gateway information, use "struct extended_gateway" as described in RFC 3176.

246 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 IPv6 packet sampling

IPv6 packet sampling

IPv6 sampling is performed by the packet processor. The system uses the sampling rate setting to
selectively mark the monitoring bit in the header of an incoming packet. Marked packets tell the CPU
that the packets are subject to sFlow sampling.

sFlow configuration considerations

This section lists the sFlow configuration considerations on Brocade devices.
On ICX and FCX Series devices, you can use QoS queue 1 for priority traffic, even when sFlow is
enabled on the port. This differs from FastIron X Series devices, which support seven priorities instead
of eight when sFlow is enabled. In this case, QoS queue 1 is reserved for sFlow and is not used by
other packets. Any non-sFlow packets assigned to QoS queue 1 will be directed to QoS queue 0.
If ICX and FCX stacks are rebooted, sFlow is disabled on standby and member units until the
configuration is synchronized between the Active and Standby Controllers.

sFlow and hardware support

• Brocade devices support sFlow packet sampling of inbound traffic only. These devices do not sample
outbound packets. However, Brocade devices support byte and packet count statistics for both traffic
directions.
• sFlow is supported on all Ethernet ports (10/100, Gbps, and 10 Gbps)

sFlow and CPU utilization

Enabling sFlow may cause a slight and noticeable increase of up to 20% in CPU utilization. In typical
scenarios, this is normal behavior for sFlow, and does not affect the functionality of other features on
the switch.

sFlow and agent address

The sampled sFlow data sent to the collectors includes an agent_address field. This field identifies the
IP address of the device that sent the data:
• On a Layer 2 switch, agent_address is the Layer 2 switch management IP address. You must
configure the management IP address in order to export sFlow data from the device. If the switch has
both an IPv4 and IPv6 address, the agent_address is the IPv4 address. If the switch has an IPv6
address only, the agent_address is the global IPv6 address.
• On a Layer 3 switch with IPv6 interfaces only, sFlow looks for an IPv6 address in the following order,
and uses the first address found:
‐ The first IPv6 address on the lowest-numbered loopback interface
‐ The first IPv6 address on the lowest-numbered VE interface
‐ The first IPv6 address on any interface
• On a Layer 3 switch with both IPv4 and IPv6 interfaces, or with IPv4 interfaces only, sFlow looks for
an IP address in the following order, and uses the first address found:
‐ The IPv4 router ID configured by the ip router-id command
‐ The first IPv4 address on the lowest-numbered loopback interface
‐ The first IPv4 address on the lowest-numbered virtual interface
‐ The first IPv4 address on any interface

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 247

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sFlow and source IP address

NOTE
The device uses the router ID only if the device also has an IP interface with the same address.
Router ID is not supported on IPv6 devices.

NOTE
If an IP address is not already configured when you enable sFlow, the feature uses the source
address 0.0.0.0. To display the agent_address, enable sFlow, then enter the show sflow command.
Refer to Enabling sFlow forwarding on page 254 and Displaying sFlow information on page 260.

NOTE
In sFlow version 5, you can set an arbitrary IPv4 or IPv6 address as the sFlow agent IP address. Refer
to Specifying the sFlow agent IP address on page 256.

sFlow and source IP address

When the sFlow packet is sent to the sFlow collector, by default, the IP address of the outgoing
interface is used in the sFlow datagram.
However, you can specify the source interface, from which the IP address is selected for the sFlow
datagram, using the sflow source command. The Ethernet, VE, or loopback interface can be
configured as the source interface for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.

sFlow source IP address configuration notes

• The first IP address in the interface IP address list is considered the source IP address.
• If the sFlow destination is IPv6, and the sFlow source is configured for an IPv6 address, then an
IPv6 address will be selected from the configured interface.
• If the sFlow destination is IPv4, and the sFlow source is configured for IPv4 address, then an IPv4
address will be selected from the configured interface.
• At any point of time, only one source of the Ethernet, VE, or loopback interface can be specified as
the source interface.
• Upon configuring another source for an IPv4 or IPv6 address, any previously configured source for
the IPv4 or IPv6 address will be deleted.
• If the source IP address is not configured, by default, the IP address of the outgoing interface will be
used in the sFlow datagram.
• You can configure IPv4 and IPv6 source interfaces independently.
• In case of LAG, the sFlow source configuration is valid only for the primary port.
• The sFlow source IP configuration is supported on sFlow version 2 and sFlow version 5 and is valid
only for the router build.
• Addition and deletion of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses on an sFlow source interface will trigger the
following events:
‐ If the added IP address is the first IP address in the table, then it will be considered as the
source IP address.
‐ If the added IP address is positioned on top of the IP table (due to IP address sequence
order), then it will be reassigned as the source IP address.
‐ If the IP address that is used as the source IP is deleted, the next IP address on the same
interface will be considered as the source IP address.
‐ If all the IP addresses are deleted from the source interface, the IP address of the outgoing
interface is used in the sFlow datagram.

248 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sFlow and source port

sFlow and source port

By default, sFlow sends data to the collector out of UDP source port 8888, but you can specify a
different source port. For more information, refer to Changing the sFlow source port on page 254.

sFlow and sampling rate

The sampling rate is the average ratio of the number of packets incoming on an sFlow enabled port, to
the number of flow samples taken from those packets. sFlow sampling can affect performance in some
configurations.
Note that on the FastIron devices, the configured sampling rate and the actual rate are the same. The
software does not adjust the configured sampling rate as on other Brocade devices.

NOTE
The value range for sampling rate is from 8 through 1073741823 on the Brocade ICX 6430, Brocade
ICX 6450, Brocade ICX 6610, Brocade ICX 6650, FCX, and FSX 800 and FSX 1600 devices. The value
range for sampling rate is from 256 through 1073741823 on Brocade ICX 7750, Brocade ICX 7450, and
Brocade ICX 7250. The default value is 4096 for all devices.

sFlow and port monitoring

• ICX and FCX Series devices support sFlow and port monitoring together on the same port.
• FastIron X Series devices support port monitoring and sFlow together on the same device. The
caveat is that these features cannot be configured together within the same port region on non-third-
generation modules. The following third-generation SX modules support sFlow and mirroring on the
same port:
‐ SX-FI48GPP
‐ SX-FI-24GPP
‐ SX-FI-24HF
‐ SX-FI-2XG
‐ SX-FI-8XG

Configuring and enabling sFlow

NOTE
The commands in this section apply to sFlow version 2 and sFlow version 5. CLI commands that are
specific to sFlow version 5 are documented in sFlow version 5 feature configuration on page 256.
To configure sFlow, perform the following tasks:
• Optional - If your device supports sFlow version 5, change the version used for exporting sFlow data
• Specify collector information. The collector is the external device to which you are exporting the
sFlow data. You can specify up to four collectors.
• Optional - Change the polling interval
• Optional - Change the sampling mode to include dropped packets
• Optional - Change the sampling rate
• Optional - Change the sFlow source IP address
• Optional - Change the sFlow source port
• Enable sFlow globally

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 249

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying the collector

• Enable sFlow forwarding on individual interfaces

• Enable sFlow forwarding on individual trunk ports
• If your device supports sFlow version 5, configure sFlow version 5 features

Specifying the collector

sFlow exports traffic statistics to an external collector. You can specify up to four collectors. You can
specify more than one collector with the same IP address if the UDP port numbers are unique. You
can have up to four unique combinations of IP addresses and UDP port numbers.

Specifying an sFlow collector on IPv4 devices

To specify an sFlow collector on an IPv4 device, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#sflow destination 10.10.10.1

This command specifies a collector with IPv4 address 10.10.10.1, listening for sFlow data on UDP port
6343.
Syntax: [no] sflow destination ip-addr [ dest-udp-port | vrf]
The ip-addr parameter specifies the IP address of the collector.
The dest-udp-port parameter specifies the UDP port on which the sFlow collector will be listening for
exported sFlow data. The default port number is 6343. For information on VRF parameter, see the
FastIron Layer 3 Routing Configuration Guide .
The sampled sFlow data sent to the collectors includes an agent_address field. This field identifies the
device that sent the data. Refer to sFlow and agent address on page 247.

Specifying an sFlow collector on IPv6 devices

To specify an sFlow collector on an IPv6 device, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#sflow destination ipv6 2001:DB8:0::0b:02a

This command specifies a collector with IPv6 address 2001:DB8::0b:02a, listening for sFlow data on
UDP port 6343.
Syntax: [no] sflow destination ipv6 ip-addr [dest-udp-port]
The ip-addr parameter specifies the IP address of the collector.
The dest-udp-port parameter specifies the UDP port on which the sFlow collector will be listening for
exported sFlow data. The default port number is 6343.
If the IPv6 address you specify is a link-local address on a Layer 3 switch, you must also specify the
outgoing-interface ethernet port-num or the ve port-num. This identifies the outgoing interface through
which the sampled packets will be sent.
The sampled sFlow data sent to the collectors includes an agent_address field. This field identifies the
device that sent the data. Refer to sFlow and agent address on page 247.

Changing the polling interval

The polling interval defines how often sFlow byte and packet counter data for a port are sent to the
sFlow collectors. If multiple ports are enabled for sFlow, the Brocade device staggers transmission of
the counter data to smooth performance. For example, if sFlow is enabled on two ports and the polling
interval is 20 seconds, the Brocade device sends counter data every ten seconds. The counter data

250 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Changing the sampling mode

for one of the ports are sent after ten seconds, and counter data for the other port are sent after an
additional ten seconds. Ten seconds later, new counter data for the first port are sent. Similarly, if sFlow
is enabled on five ports and the polling interval is 20 seconds, the Brocade device sends counter data
every four seconds.
The default polling interval is 20 seconds. You can change the interval to a value from 0 to 4294967295
seconds. The interval value applies to all interfaces on which sFlow is enabled. If you set the polling
interval to 0, counter data sampling is disabled.
To change the polling interval, enter a command such as the following at the global CONFIG level of the
CLI.

device(config)#sflow polling-interval 30

Syntax: [no] sflow polling-interval secs

The secs parameter specifies the interval and can be from 0 through 4294967295 seconds. The default
is 20 seconds. If you specify 0, counter data sampling is disabled.

Changing the sampling mode

On all devices other than the Brocade ICX 7750, Brocade ICX 7450, and Brocade ICX 7250, by default,
only the non-dropped packets are included for sFlow sampling.

The dropped packets are not included in the sFlow samples that are sent to the sFlow collector. The
sampling mode can be changed to include the dropped packets using the sflow sample-mode
command.

NOTE
The sflow sample-mode command is not supported on Brocade ICX 7750, Brocade ICX 7450,
Brocade ICX 7250, Brocade ICX 6430, Brocade ICX 6650, and FSX 800/1600 devices.

Changing the sampling rate

The sampling rate is the average ratio of the number of packets incoming on an sFlow-enabled port, to
the number of flow samples taken from those packets.
You can change the default (global) sampling rate. You also can change the rate on an individual port,
overriding the default sampling rate of 4096. With a sampling rate of 4096, on average, one in every
4096 packets forwarded on an interface is sampled.

Configuration considerations

The sampling rate is a fraction in the form 1/N, meaning that, on average, one out of every N packets
will be sampled. The sflow sample command at the global level or port level specifies N, the
denominator of the fraction. Thus a higher number for the denominator means a lower sampling rate
since fewer packets are sampled. Likewise, a lower number for the denominator means a higher
sampling rate because more packets are sampled. For example, if you change the denominator from
512 to 128, the sampling rate increases because four times as many packets will be sampled.

NOTE
Brocade recommends that you do not change the denominator to a value lower than the default.
Sampling requires CPU resources. Using a low denominator for the sampling rate can cause high CPU
utilization.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 251

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

Configured rate and actual rate

When you enter a sampling rate value, this value is the configured rate as well as the actual sampling
rate .
Change to global rate
If you change the global sampling rate, the change is applied to all sFlow-enabled ports except those
ports on which you have already explicitly set the sampling rate. For example, suppose that sFlow is
enabled on ports 1/1, 1/2, and 5/1. If you configure the sampling rate on port 1/1 but leave the other
two ports using the default rate, then a change to the global sampling rate applies to ports 1/2 and 5/1
but not port 1/1. sFlow assumes that you want to continue using the sampling rate you explicitly
configured on an individual port even if you globally change the sampling rate for the other ports.
Module rate
While different ports on a module may be configured to have different sampling rates, the hardware for
the module will be programmed to take samples at a single rate (the module sampling rate). The
module sampling rate will be the highest sampling rate (i.e. lowest number) configured for any of the
ports on the module.
When ports on a given module are configured with different sampling rates, the CPU discards some of
the samples supplied by the hardware for ports with configured sampling rates which are lower than
the module sampling rate. This is referred to as subsampling, and the ratio between the port sampling
rate and the module sampling rate is known as the subsampling factor. For example, if the module in
slot 4 has sFlow enabled on ports 4/2 and 4/8, and port 4/2 is using the default sampling rate of 512,
and port 4/8 is configured explicitly for a rate of 2048, then the module sampling rate will be 512
because this is this highest port sampling rate (lowest number). The subsampling factor for port 4/2
will be 1, meaning that every sample taken by the hardware will be exported, while the subsampling
factor for port 4/8 will be 4, meaning that one out of every four samples taken by the hardware will be
exported. Whether a port's sampling rate is configured explicitly, or whether it uses the global default
setting, has no effect on the calculations.
You do not need to perform any of these calculations to change a sampling rate. For simplicity, the
syntax information in this section lists the valid sampling rates. You can display the rates you entered
for the default sampling rate, module rates, and all sFlow-enabled ports by entering the show sflow
command. Refer to Displaying sFlow information on page 260.
Sampling rate for new ports
When you enable sFlow on a port, the port's sampling rate is set to the global default sampling rate.
This also applies to ports on which you disable and then re-enable sFlow. The port does not retain the
sampling rate it had when you disabled sFlow on the port, even if you had explicitly set the sampling
rate on the port.

Changing the default sampling rate

To change the default (global) sampling rate, enter a command such as the following at the global
CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)#sflow sample 2048

Syntax: [no] sflow samplenum

The num parameter specifies the average number of packets from which each sample will be taken.
The value range for sampling rate is from 8 through 1073741823 on Brocade ICX 6430, Brocade ICX
6450, Brocade ICX 6610, Brocade ICX 6650, FCX, and FSX 800 and FSX 1600 devices. The value
range for sampling rate on Brocade ICX 7750, Brocade ICX 7450, and Brocade ICX 7250 is from 256
through 1073741823. The default value is 4096 for all devices. The software rounds the value you
enter to the next higher odd power of 2. This value becomes the actual default sampling rate and is
one of the following:

252 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

• 8
• 16
• 32
• 64
• 128
• 256
• 512
• 1024
• 2048
• 4096
• 8192
• 16384
• 32768
• 65536
• 131072
• 262144
• 524288
• 1048576
• 2097152
• 4194304
• 8388608
• 16777216
• 33554432
• 67108864
• 134217728
• 268435456
• 536870912
• 1073741823
For example, if the configured sampling rate is 1000, then the actual rate is 1024 and 1 in 1024 packets
are sampled by the hardware.

Changing the sampling rate of a module

You cannot change a module sampling rate directly. You can change a module sampling rate only by
changing the sampling rate of a port on that module.

Changing the sampling rate on a port

You can configure an individual port to use a different sampling rate than the global default sampling
rate. This is useful in cases where ports have different bandwidths. For example, if you are using sFlow
on 10/100 ports and Gbps Ethernet ports, you might want to configure the Gbps ports to use a higher
sampling rate (and thus gather fewer samples per number of packets) than the 10/100 ports.
To change the sampling rate on an individual port, enter a command such as the following at the
configuration level for the port.

device(config-if-1/1)#sflow sample 8192

Syntax: [no] sflow samplenum

The num parameter specifies the average number of packets from which each sample will be taken.
The software rounds the value you enter up to the next odd power of 2. The actual sampling rate
becomes one of the values listed in the section Changing the sampling rate.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 253

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Changing the sFlow source port

NOTE
Configuring a sampling rate on a port that is the primary port of a trunk applies that same sampling
rate to all ports in the trunk.

Changing the sampling rate for a trunk port

You can configure an individual static trunk port to use a different sampling rate than the global default
sampling rate. This feature is also supported on LACP trunk ports. This feature is useful in cases
where ports have different bandwidths. For example, if you are using sFlow on 10/100 ports and Gbps
Ethernet ports, you might want to configure the Gbps ports to use a higher sampling rate (and thus
gather fewer samples per number of packets) than the 10/100 ports.
To configure a static trunk port to use a different sampling rate than the global default sampling rate,
enter commands such as the following:

device(config)#trunk e 4/1 to 4/8

device(config-trunk-4/1-4/8)sflow sample 8192

Syntax: [no] sflow samplenum

The num parameter specifies the average number of packets from which each sample will be taken.
The software rounds the value you enter up to the next odd power of 2. The actual sampling rate
becomes one of the values listed in the section Changing the sampling rate.

NOTE
Configuring a sampling rate on only the port that is the primary port of a trunk automatically applies
that same sampling rate to all ports in the trunk.

Changing the sFlow source port

By default, sFlow sends data to the collector using UDP source port 8888, but you can change the
source UDP port to any port number in the range 1025-65535.
To change the source UDP port, enter a command such as the following:

device(config)#sflow source-port 8000

Syntax: [no] sflow source-port num

The num parameter specifies the sFlow source port.

Enabling sFlow forwarding

sFlow exports data only for the interfaces on which you enable sFlow forwarding. You can enable
sFlow forwarding on Ethernet interfaces.
To enable sFlow forwarding, perform the following:
• Globally enable the sFlow feature
• Enable sFlow forwarding on individual interfaces
• Enable sFlow forwarding on individual trunk ports

254 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Command syntax for enabling sFlow forwarding

NOTE
Before you enable sFlow, make sure the device has an IP address that sFlow can use as its source
address. Refer to sFlow and agent address on page 247 for the source address requirements.

NOTE
When you enable sFlow forwarding on an 802.1X-enabled interface, the samples taken from the
interface include the username used to obtain access to either or both the inbound and outbound ports,
if that information is available. For information about 802.1X, refer to "802.1X Port Security" chapter in
the FastIron Ethernet Switch Security Configuration Guide

Command syntax for enabling sFlow forwarding

This section shows how to enable sFlow forwarding.

Globally enabling sFlow forwarding

To enable sFlow forwarding, you must first enable it on a global basis, then on individual interfaces or
trunk ports, or both.
To globally enable sFlow forwarding, enter the following command.

device(config)#sflow enable

You can now enable sFlow forwarding on individual ports as described in the next two sections.
Syntax: [no] sflow enable

Enabling sFlow forwarding on individual interfaces

To enable sFlow forwarding enter commands such as the following.

device(config)#sflow enable
device(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 to 1/8
device(config-mif-1/1-1/8)#sflow forwarding

These commands globally enable sFlow, then enable sFlow forwarding on Ethernet ports 1/1 - 1/8. You
must use both the sflow enable and sflow forwarding commands to enable the feature.
Syntax: [no] sflow enable
Syntax: [no] sflow forwarding

Enabling sFlow forwarding on individual trunk ports

This feature is supported on individual ports of a static trunk group. It is also supported on LACP trunk
ports.

NOTE
When you enable sFlow forwarding on a trunk port, only the primary port of the trunk group forwards
sFlow samples.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 255

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sFlow version 5 feature configuration

To enable sFlow forwarding on a trunk port, enter commands such as the following.

device(config)#sflow enable
device(config)#trunk e 4/1 to 4/8
device(config-trunk-4/1-4/8)#config-trunk-ind
device(config-trunk-4/1-4/8)#sflow forwarding e 4/2

These commands globally enable sFlow, then enable sFlow forwarding on trunk port e 4/2. You must
use both the sflow enable and sflow forwarding commands to enable the feature.
Syntax: [no] sflow enable
Syntax: [no] sflow forwarding

sFlow version 5 feature configuration

NOTE
The commands in this section are supported when sFlow version 5 is enabled on the device. These
commands are not supported with sFlow version 2. sFlow version 5 also supports all of the sFlow
configuration commands in Configuring and enabling sFlow on page 249.
When sFlow version 5 is enabled on the device, you can do the following:
• Specify the sFlow version (version 2 or version 5)
• Specify the sFlow agent IP address
• Specify the maximum flow sample size
• Export CPU and memory usage Information to the sFlow collector
• Specify the polling interval for exporting CPU and memory usage information to the sFlow collector
• Export CPU-directed data (management traffic) to the sFlow collector

Egress interface ID for sampled broadcast and multicast packets

For broadcast and multicast traffic, the egress interface ID for sampled traffic is always 0x80000000.
When broadcast and multicast packets are sampled, they are usually forwarded to more than one port.
However, the output port field in an sFlow datagram supports the display of one egress interface ID
only. Therefore, the sFlow version 5 agent always sets the output port ID to 0x80000000 for broadcast
and multicast packets that are sampled.

Specifying the sFlow version format

If your device supports sFlow version 5, you can optionally specify the version used for exporting
sFlow data. Refer Specifying the sFlow agent IP address on page 256.

Specifying the sFlow agent IP address

The sampled sFlow data sent to the collectors includes an agent_address field. This field identifies the
device (the sFlow agent) that sent the data. By default, the device automatically selects the sFlow
agent IP address based on the configuration, as described in the section sFlow and agent address on
page 247. Alternatively, you can configure the device to instead use an arbitrary IPv4 or IPv6 address
as the sFlow agent IP address.
To specify an IPv4 address as the sFlow agent IP address, enter a command such as the following

device(config)#sflow agent-ip 10.10.10.1

256 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying the version used for exporting sFlow data

Syntax: [no] sflow agent-ipipv4-addr

The ipv4-addr specifies the address of the device that sent the data.
To specify an IPv6 address as the sFlow agent IP address, enter a command such as the following.

device(config)#sflow agent-ip FE80::240:D0FF:FE48:4672

Syntax: [no] sflow agent-ipipv6-addr

The ipv6-addr the address of the device that sent the data.

Specifying the version used for exporting sFlow data

By default, when sFlow is enabled globally on the Brocade device, the sFlow agent exports sFlow data
in version 5 format. You can change this setting so that the sFlow agent exports data in version 2
format. You can switch between versions without rebooting the device or disabling sFlow.

NOTE
When the sFlow version number is changed, the system will reset sFlow counters and flow sample
sequence numbers.

To specify the sFlow version used for exporting sFlow data, enter the following command.

device(config)#sflow version 2

Syntax: [no] sflow version[2 | 5 ]

The default is 5.

Specifying the maximum flow sample size

With sFlow version 5, you can specify the maximum size of the flow sample sent to the sFlow collector.
If a packet is larger than the specified maximum size, then only the contents of the packet up to the
specified maximum number of bytes is exported. If the size of the packet is smaller than the specified
maximum, then the entire packet is exported.
For example, to specify 1024 bytes as the maximum flow sample size, enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow max-packet-size 1024

Syntax: [no] sflow max-packet-sizesize

For both sFlow version 2 and version 5, the default maximum flow sample size is 256 bytes.
For sFlow version 5, the maximum flow sample size is 1300 bytes.

Exporting CPU and memory usage information to the sFlow collector

With sFlow version 5, you can optionally configure the sFlow agent on the Brocade device to export
information about CPU and memory usage to the sFlow collector.
To export CPU usage and memory usage information, enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow export system-info

Syntax: [no] sflow export system-info

By default, CPU usage information and memory usage information are not exported.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 257

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying the polling interval for exporting CPU and memory usage information to the sFlow collector

Specifying the polling interval for exporting CPU and memory usage information to the sFlow
collector
The polling interval defines how often sFlow data for a port is sent to the sFlow collector. With sFlow
version 5, you can optionally set the polling interval used for exporting CPU and memory usage
information.
For example, to set the polling interval for exporting CPU and memory usage information to 30
seconds, enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow export system-info 30

Syntax: [no] sflow export system-infoseconds

You can specify a polling interval from 5 seconds to 1,800 seconds (30 minutes). The default polling
interval for exporting CPU and memory usage information is 300 seconds (5 minutes).

Exporting CPU-directed data (management traffic) to the sFlow collector

You can select which and how often data destined to the CPU (for example, Telnet sessions) is sent to
the sFlow collector.
CLI commands allow you to do the following:
• Enable the sFlow agent to export CPU-directed data
• Specify the sampling rate for exported CPU-directed data

Enabling the sFlow agent to export CPU-directed data

To enable the sFlow agent on a Brocade device to export data destined to the CPU to the sFlow
collector, enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow export cpu-traffic

Syntax: [no] sflow export cpu-traffic

By default, this feature is disabled. The sFlow agent does not send data destined to the CPU to the
sFlow collector.

Specifying the sampling rate for exported CPU-directed data

The sampling rate is the average ratio of the number of packets incoming on an sFlow-enabled port, to
the number of flow samples taken from those packets. You can optionally set the sampling rate for
CPU-directed data exported to the sFlow collector. For example, to set this sampling rate to 2048,
enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow export cpu-traffic 2048

Syntax: [no] sflow export cpu-traffic

The default sampling rate depends on the Brocade device being configured. Refer to Changing the
sampling rate on page 251 for the default sampling rate for each kind of Brocade device.

Configuring sFlow with Multi-VRFs

sFlow is a traffic monitoring protocol that supports VRFs. sFlow provides traffic sampling on configured
ports based on sample rate and port information to a collector. By default, sFlow uses the

258 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

management VRF to send the samples to the collector. See the section Management VRFs on page 21
for information on management VRFs. If no management VRF is configured, sFlow uses the default
VRF, and this default VRF ID will be assigned to any configured collector that does not have a user-
included VRF.
Collectors can be added and per VRF so that collectors can be spread out across different VRFs. The
sFlow forwarding port can belong to a non-default VRF, and captured sFlow packets will have correct
sample routing next hop information.
sFlow forwarding ports can come from ports belonging to any VRF. The port does not have to be in the
same VRF as the collector. sFlow collects packets from all sFlow forwarding ports, even if they do not
belong to a VRF, compiles the packets into the sFlow samples, and sends the samples to the particular
collector with no filtering for VRF membership. For counter samples, sample statistics from each port
are sent to each collector specified, even if the port and collector do not belong to a VRF instance.
To distinguish collected packets from different VRFs, refer to the in vlan and out vlan data fields for
each captured ingress packet. For example, when two collected packets are from different VRFs but
have the same source/destination IP and the same incoming/outgoing port, the VLAN field differs in the
two samples. A VLAN/VE can only belong to one VRF. The collector does not have any VRF
knowledge, but, based on the VLAN fields, the collector can distinguish which packet came from which
VLAN/VRF.
To configure an sFlow collector and specify a VRF, enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow destination 10.10.10.vrf customer1

device(config)#

Syntax: [no] sflow destination [ ipaddress | ipv6 ipv6-address ] [ udp-port-number ] [ vrf vrf-name ]
To disable the management VRF in sFlow, enter the following command.

device(config)# sflow management-vrf disable

device(config)#

Syntax: [no] sflow management-vrf-disable

To display sFlow configuration and statistics, enter the following command.

device(config)# show sflow

sFlow version: 5
sFlow services are enabled.
sFlow management VRF is disabled.
sFlow agent IP address: 10.37.230.21
Collector IP 10.37.224.233, UDP 6343, Configured VRF: green
UDP source port: 8888 (Default)
Polling interval is 20 seconds.
Configured default sampling rate: 1 per 500 packets.
Actual default sampling rate: 1 per 500 packets.
The maximum sFlow sample size: 128.
sFlow exporting cpu-traffic is disabled.
100 UDP packets exported
80 sFlow flow samples collected.
sFlow ports: ethe 4/1/5
Module Sampling Rates
---------------------
Port Sampling Rates
-------------------
Port=4/1/5, configured rate=500, actual rate=500

Syntax: show sflow

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 259

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying sFlow information

Displaying sFlow information

To display sFlow configuration information and statistics, enter the following command at any level of
the CLI.

device#show sflow
sFlow version:5
sFlow services are enabled.
sFlow agent IP address: 10.123.123.1
sFlow source IP address: 5.5.5.5
sFlow source IPv6 address: 4545::2
4 collector destinations configured:
Collector IP 192.168.4.204, UDP 6343
Collector IP 192.168.4.200, UDP 6333
Collector IP 192.168.4.202, UDP 6355
Collector IP 192.168.4.203, UDP 6565
Configured UDP source port: 33333
Polling interval is 0 seconds.
Configured default sampling rate: 1 per 512 packets
Actual default sampling rate: 1 per 512 packets
Sample mode: Non-dropped packets
The maximum sFlow sample size:512
exporting cpu-traffic is enabled
exporting cpu-traffic sample rate:16
exporting system-info is enabled
exporting system-info polling interval:20 seconds
10552 UDP packets exported
24127 sFlow samples collected.
sFlow ports: ethe 1/2 to 1/12 ethe 1/15 ethe 1/25 to 1/26 ethe 4/1 ethe 5/10 to
5/20 ethe 8/1 ethe 8/4
Module Sampling Rates
---------------------
Slot 1 configured rate=512, actual rate=512
Slot 3 configured rate=0, actual rate=0
Slot 4 configured rate=10000, actual rate=32768
Slot 5 configured rate=512, actual rate=512
Slot 7 configured rate=0, actual rate=0
Slot 8 configured rate=512, actual rate=512
Port Sampling Rates
-------------------
Port 8/4, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 8/1, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 5/20, configured rate=3000, actual rate=8192, Subsampling factor=16
Port 5/19, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 5/18, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 5/17, configured rate=1500, actual rate=2048, Subsampling factor=4
Port 5/16, configured rate=1500, actual rate=2048, Subsampling factor=4
Port 5/15, configured rate=1500, actual rate=2048, Subsampling factor=4
Port 5/14, configured rate=1500, actual rate=2048, Subsampling factor=4
Port 5/13, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 5/12, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 5/11, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 5/10, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 4/1, configured rate=10000, actual rate=32768, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/26, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/25, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/15, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/12, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
...continued on next page...
...continued from previous page...
Port 1/11, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/10, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/9, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/8, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/7, configured rate=1000, actual rate=2048, Subsampling factor=4
Port 1/6, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/5, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/4, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/3, configured rate=512, actual rate=512, Subsampling factor=1
Port 1/2, configured rate=1000, actual rate=2048, Subsampling factor=4

Syntax: show sflow

The show sflow command displays the following information.

260 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

TABLE 37 sFlow information

Parameter Definition

sFlow version The version of sFlow enabled on the device, which can be one of the following:

• 2
• 5

sFlow services The feature state, which can be one of the following:

• disabled
• enabled

sFlow agent IP address The IP address that sFlow is using in the agent_address field of packets sent to the
collectors. Refer to sFlow and agent address on page 247.

sFlow source IP address The IPv4 address that sFlow is using as the source IP address in the sFlow datagram.

sFlow source IPv6 The IPv6 address that sFlow is using as the source IP address in the sFlow datagram.
address

Collector The collector information. The following information is displayed for each collector:

• IP address
• UDP port

If more than one collector is configured, the line above the collectors indicates how
many have been configured.

Configured UDP source The UDP source port used to send data to the collector.
port

Polling interval The port counter polling interval.

Configured default The configured global sampling rate. If you changed the global sampling rate, the value
sampling rate you entered is shown here. The actual rate calculated by the software based on the
value you entered is listed on the next line, "Actual default sampling rate".

Actual default sampling The actual default sampling rate.

rate

Sample mode Indicates whether only the non-dropped packets or all the packets, including the
dropped packets, are included for sFlow sampling.

The maximum sFlow The maximum size of a flow sample sent to the sFlow collector.
sample size

exporting cpu-traffic Indicates whether or not the sFlow agent is configured to export data destined to the
CPU (e.g., Telnet sessions) to the sFlow collector:

• enabled
• disabled

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 261

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing sFlow statistics

TABLE 37 sFlow information (Continued)

Parameter Definition

exporting cpu-traffic The sampling rate for CPU-directed data, which is the average ratio of the number of
sample rate incoming packets on an sFlow-enabled port, to the number of flow samples taken from
those packets.

exporting system-info Indicates whether or not the sFlow agent is configured to export information about CPU
and memory usage to the sFlow collector:

• enabled
• disabled

exporting system-info Specifies the interval, in seconds, that sFlow data is sent to the sFlow collector.
polling interval

UDP packets exported The number of sFlow export packets the Brocade device has sent.

NOTE
Each UDP packet can contain multiple samples.

sFlow samples collected The number of sampled packets that have been sent to the collectors.

sFlow ports The ports on which you enabled sFlow.

Module Sampling Rates The configured and actual sampling rates for each module. If a module does not have
any sFlow-enabled ports, the rates are listed as 0.

Port Sampling Rates The configured and actual sampling rates for each sFlow-enabled port.

The Subsampling factor indicates how many times the sampling rate of the port's
module is multiplied to achieve the port's sampling rate. Because of the way the actual
sampling rates are computed, the Subsampling factors are always whole numbers.

Clearing sFlow statistics

To clear the UDP packet and sFlow sample counters in the show sflow display, enter the following
command.

device#clear statistics

Syntax: clear statistics

This command clears the values in the following fields of the show sflow display:
• UDP packets exported
• sFlow samples collected

NOTE
This command also clears the statistics counters used by other features.

262 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Utilization list for an uplink port

Utilization list for an uplink port

You can configure uplink utilization lists that display the percentage of a given uplink port bandwidth that
is used by a specific list of downlink ports. The percentages are based on 30-second intervals of RMON
packet statistics for the ports. Both transmit and receive traffic is counted in each percentage.

NOTE
This feature is intended for ISP or collocation environments in which downlink ports are dedicated to
various customers’ traffic and are isolated from one another. If traffic regularly passes between the
downlink ports, the information displayed by the utilization lists does not provide a clear depiction of
traffic exchanged by the downlink ports and the uplink port.
Each uplink utilization list consists of the following:
• Utilization list number (1, 2, 3, or 4)
• One or more uplink ports
• One or more downlink ports
Each list displays the uplink port and the percentage of that port bandwidth that was utilized by the
downlink ports over the most recent 30-second interval.
You can configure up to four bandwidth utilization lists.

Utilization list for an uplink port command syntax

To configure an uplink utilization list, enter commands such as the following. The commands in this
example configure a link utilization list with port 1/1 as the uplink port and ports 1/2 and 1/3 as the
downlink ports.

device(config)#relative-utilization 1 uplink eth 1/1 downlink eth 1/2 to 1/3

device(config)#write memory

Syntax: [no] relative-utilization num uplink ethernet [to port | port...] downlink ethernet port [to port
| [port...]
The num parameter specifies the list number. You can configure up to four lists. Specify a number from
1 - 4.
The uplink ethernet parameters and the port numbers you specify after the parameters indicate the
uplink ports.
The downlink ethernet parameters and the port numbers you specify after the parameters indicate the
downlink ports.

Displaying utilization percentages for an uplink

After you configure an uplink utilization list, you can display the list to observe the percentage of the
uplink bandwidth that each of the downlink ports used during the most recent 30-second port statistics
interval. The number of packets sent and received between the two ports is listed, as well as the ratio of
each individual downlink port packets relative to the total number of packets on the uplink.
To display an uplink utilization list, enter a command such as the following at any level of the CLI.

device#show relative-utilization 1
uplink: ethe 1
30-sec total uplink packet count = 3011

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 263

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Network Monitoring

packet count ratio (%)

1/ 2:60 1/ 3:40

In this example, ports 1/2 and 1/3 are sending traffic to port 1/1. Port 1/2 and port 1/3 are isolated (not
shared by multiple clients) and typically do not exchange traffic with other ports except for the uplink
port, 1/1.
Syntax: show relative-utilizationnum
The num parameter specifies the list number.

NOTE
The example above represents a pure configuration in which traffic is exchanged only by ports 1/2 and
1/1, and by ports 1/3 and 1/1. For this reason, the percentages for the two downlink ports equal 100%.
In some cases, the percentages do not always equal 100%. This is true in cases where the ports
exchange some traffic with other ports in the system or when the downlink ports are configured
together in a port-based VLAN.
In the following example, ports 1/2 and 1/3 are in the same port-based VLAN.

device#show relative-utilization 1
uplink: ethe 1
30-sec total uplink packet count = 3011
packet count ratio (%)
1/ 2:100 1/ 3:100

Here is another example showing different data for the same link utilization list. In this example, port
1/2 is connected to a hub and is sending traffic to port 1/1. Port 1/3 is unconnected.

device#show relative-utilization 1
uplink: ethe 1
30-sec total uplink packet count = 2996
packet count ratio (%)
1 /2:100 1/ 3:---

264 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System Monitoring

● Overview of system monitoring..................................................................................... 265

● Configure system monitoring........................................................................................ 266
● System monitoring on FCX and ICX devices................................................................ 268
● System monitoring for Fabric Adapters.........................................................................270
● System monitoring for Cross Bar.................................................................................. 273
● System monitoring for Packet Processors.................................................................... 275

Overview of system monitoring

System monitoring (sysmon) is a utility that runs as a background process and monitors connections
and components of the device for specific errors and logs them. It has a default policy that controls the
parameters that are monitored and actions to be taken if a fault is detected. These policies include the
type of errors, the threshold for errors to be logged, and the frequency of checking for errors. You can
use the CLI commands to configure these policies.
The sysmon utility monitors the hardware error registers to identify errors and failures. You can
configure the sysmon timer to define how frequently the sysmon utility queries the hardware error
registers. The data generated by the sysmon utility is written to either the sysmon internal log or to the
syslog.
Sysmon starts the timer based on the specified timer setting, with the default value as three minutes.
After the interval specified by the timer, the utility checks the hardware error registers. If the sysmon
utility detects an error in a hardware error register, it increments the relevant error count by 1.
Otherwise, it restarts the timer and waits for the given interval. Hardware error registers are cleared
when read, so after Sysmon reads the value, they are reset to zero.
Sysmon checks the value of the error counters it maintains and the values specified in the sysmon
threshold. If the value of the error counters exceeds the matching threshold, it takes the action specified
(logs internally or to the syslog). Otherwise, it restarts the timer and waits for the specified interval
before checking for errors again.
To ensure that logging repeating errors does not cause the logs to overflow, you can specify a back-off
value that allows the utility to skip the specified number of error instances before logging again. If the
error count is smaller than the specified log back-off value, the utility logs the error to the internal log or
syslog, restarts the timer and waits for the specified interval before checking for errors again.

Configuration notes and feature limitations

• While system monitoring is supported on all FastIron devices, the types of errors monitored vary
according to devices. On FSX devices, the sysmon utility monitors the following for errors:
‐ Fabric Adapter (FA) for processing and link errors.
‐ Cross Bar (XBAR) or Switch Fabric Module (SFM) for processing and link errors.
‐ Packet processor (PP) for link errors.
On FCX and ICX devices, the sysmon utility monitors the following errors:

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 265

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configure system monitoring

• ‐ Link errors.
‐ ECC errors.
• By default, system monitoring starts on system boot up and runs in the background every three
minutes. You can configure, disable, or enable, the time interval through the CLI; however, if you
define the system monitoring interval at the global level, this value overrides the individual settings.
Valid range for the sysmon timer is 1 to 60 minutes.
• You can define a system monitoring threshold that is defined as N/W, where N is the number of
error events in a specified window (W) of consecutive polling periods. When the threshold is
reached, the action that is defined is performed. The threshold enables the sysmon utility to ignore
random errors that occur because of corrupted data coming in to the device, and perform the action
only for errors generated because of device failure. A threshold of 1/W means no threshold.
• You can choose the log action as either to the internal sysmon buffer or to the syslog. If you choose
the internal sysmon buffer, logs that are written beyond the limit of the sysmon buffer rolls over. On
the other hand, if you choose logging to syslog, messages are sent to the configured syslog
servers.

Configure system monitoring

You can use the following commands at the privileged EXEC level to globally configure the sysmon
utility:
• disable system-monitoring all on page 266
• enable system-monitoring all on page 266
• sysmon timer on page 267
In addition, you can enable or disable system monitoring for each event type from the CLI, with each
event type having separate threshold and log back off values.

disable system-monitoring all

Disables system monitoring at the global level for all types.

Syntax disable system-monitoring all

Modes Privileged EXEC mode.

Usage Guidelines Disabling sysmon at the global level disables any individually configured and enabled sysmon tasks as
well. However, any sysmon configuration that is made, including global and event-specific configuration
are retained.

Examples The following example disables system monitoring:

Brocade# disable system-monitoring all

enable system-monitoring all

Enables system monitoring at the global level for all event types.

Syntax enable system-monitoring all

266 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon timer

Modes Privileged EXEC mode.

Usage Guidelines This command enables system monitoring globally, and covers all event-specific system monitoring
configuration as well. If specific configuration is not made for different types, default values defined at
the global level are used.

Examples The following example enables all system monitoring tasks at the global level:

Brocade# enable system-monitoring all

sysmon timer

Configures the global system monitoring timer.

Syntax sysmon timer minutes

Parameters minutes
Specifies the system monitoring timer in minutes. The range of values is 1 through 60. The
default value is 3.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Examples The following example sets the system monitoring timer to five minutes:

Brocade(config)# sysmon timer 5

sysmon log-backoff

Defines the number of times to skip logging an event before logging again at the global level. The no
form of this command resets the parameter to default value.

Syntax sysmon log-backoff number

no sysmon log-backoff

Parameters number
Specifies the number of times to skip an event logging before logging again.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Logging every error may not provide any new information, but adds significantly to the number of error
entries that need to be analyzed. You can configure the system monitoring utility to ignore a certain
number of errors (within a stream of consecutive errors) before writing the entry to the log again.
This option helps you further isolate issues that randomly occur from issues because of device failure.
The sysmon utility keeps a counter of the number of times the threshold value is exceed. If the number
exceeds the back-off value, the error is logged as specified by the action option.

Examples The following example sets the number of times to skip logging to 20.

Brocade(config)# sysmon log-backoff 20

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 267

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon threshold

sysmon threshold

Defines the threshold for errors at the global level. The no form of this command resets the threshold
configuration to default values.

Syntax sysmon threshold events polling-interval

no sysmon threshold

Parameters events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through 10.
When expressed in the command, the default value is 2.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events. When expressed in
the command, the default value is 10.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The type-specific threshold values that you define overrides the global threshold value for each event.
However, if you define the global value later, the latest value prevails. The threshold is defined as N/W,
where N is the number of events, and W is the number of consecutive polling periods. When the
threshold is reached, actions configured for this event type will take place. Note that a threshold of 1/W
implies that there is no threshold, and the action will always be triggered.

Examples The following example sets the threshold to 3 events over 7 consecutive polling periods:

Brocade(config)# sysmon threshold 3 7

System monitoring on FCX and ICX devices

On FCX and ICX devices, system monitoring monitors the following errors:
• ECC errors.
• Link errors.
These errors are monitored on a stack unit basis.
Use the following commands configure and display the status of system monitoring on fabric adaptors:
• sysmon ecc-error on page 268
• sysmon link-error on page 269

sysmon ecc-error

Configures how sysmon handles ECC errors. The no version of this command disables system
monitoring on internal ECC errors.

268 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon link-error

Syntax sysmon ecc-error -count { threshold events polling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none |
syslog } }

no sysmon fa error-count

Parameters threshold
Defines the threshold for errors. The threshold is defined as N/W, where N is the number of
events, and W is the number of consecutive polling periods. When the threshold is reached,
actions configured for this event type will take place. Note that a threshold of 1/W implies
that there is no threshold, and the action will always be triggered.

events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through
10.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events.

log-backoff
If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally to
syslog as defined by the action). The log back-off count skips configured number of logs
before logging again.

action
Specifies the action to take when error count exceeds the specified threshold and log back-
off values.

none
The error is logged in the internal sysmon logs. This is the default value.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FCX and ICX devices.

Examples The following example configures system monitoring for fabric adaptor errors:

Brocade(config)# sysmon ecc-error threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon ecc-error action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon ecc-error log-backoff 15

sysmon link-error

Configures how sysmon handles link errors. The no version of this command disables system
monitoring on link errors.

Syntax sysmon link-error { threshold events polling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none | syslog } }

no sysmon link-error

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 269

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System monitoring for Fabric Adapters

Parameters threshold
Defines the threshold for errors. The threshold is defined as N/W, where N is the number of
events, and W is the number of consecutive polling periods. When the threshold is reached,
actions configured for this event type will take place. Note that a threshold of 1/W implies
that there is no threshold, and the action will always be triggered.

events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through
10.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events.

log-backoff
If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally to
syslog as defined by the action). The log back-off count skips configured number of logs
before logging again.

action
Specifies the action to take when the error count exceeds the specified threshold and log
back-off values.

none
The error is logged in the internal sysmon logs. This is the default value.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FCX and ICX devices.

Examples The following example configures system monitoring for fabric adaptor errors:

Brocade(config)# sysmon link-error threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon link-error action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon link-error log-backoff 15

System monitoring for Fabric Adapters

On FSX devices, system monitoring for fabric adaptors monitor errors such as the following:
• End of Packet (EoP) or Start of Packet (SoP) errors
• Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors
• Packets dropped due to congestion
In addition to the error count, sysmon also checks for connectivity of FA links. This happens at the
interval defined by the sysmon-timer command generally or specifically for FA.
Use the following commands configure and display the status of system monitoring on fabric adaptors:

270 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon fa error-count

• sysmon fa error-count on page 271

• sysmon fa link on page 272
• show sysmon counters on page 278
• show sysmon logs on page 278
• show sysmon config on page 282

sysmon fa error-count

Configures how sysmon handles fabric adaptor-related errors. The no version of this command disables
system monitoring on fabric adaptors.

Syntax sysmon fa error-count { threshold events polling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none |
syslog } }

no sysmon fa error-count

Parameters threshold
Defines the threshold for errors. The threshold is defined as N/W, where N is the number of
events, and W is the number of consecutive polling periods. When the threshold is reached,
actions configured for this event type will take place. Note that a threshold of 1/W implies
that there is no threshold, and the action will always be triggered.

events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through
10.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events.

log-backoff
If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally to
syslog as defined by the action). The log back-off count skips configured number of logs
before logging again.

action
Specifies the action to take when a fabric adapter error count exceeds the specified
threshold and log back-off values.

none
The error is logged in the internal sysmon logs. This is the default value.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FSX devices.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 271

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon fa link

Examples The following example configures system monitoring for fabric adaptor errors:

Brocade(config)# sysmon fa error-count threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon fa error-count action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon fa error-count log-backoff 15

sysmon fa link

Configures system monitoring for link errors on all or specified fabric adaptors. The no form of this
command resets the parameters to default values.

Syntax sysmon fa link { threshold events polling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none | syslog } }

no sysmon fa link

Parameters threshold
Defines the failure threshold for the fabric adapter link error event. The threshold is defined
as N/W, where N is the number of events, and W is the number of consecutive polling
periods. When the threshold is reached, actions configured for this event type will take
place. Note that a threshold of 1/W implies that there is no threshold, and no event will be
triggered.

events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through
10.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events.

log-backoff
If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally). The
log back-off count skips configured number of logs before logging again. This avoids
overflow of the internal log or of the syslog.

action
Specifies the action to take when a fabric adapter link error exceeds the specified threshold
and log back-off values.

none
No action is taken. This is the default.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FSX devices.

272 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System monitoring for Cross Bar

Examples The following example configures the sysmon options for fabric adaptor links:

Brocade(config)# sysmon fa link threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon fa link action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon fa link log-backoff 15

System monitoring for Cross Bar

On FSX devices, errors typically detected in the cross bar include:
• Bad (IP) headers
• Bad length errors
• Reformat errors
Besides the error count, sysmon also checks for connectivity of SFM/XBAR links. This happens at the
interval defined by the sysmon-timer command generally or specifically for cross bar.
Use the following commands to configure and display the statistics of cross bar or switch fabric module:
• sysmon xbar error-count on page 273
• sysmon xbar link on page 274
• show sysmon logs on page 278
• show sysmon counters on page 278
• show sysmon config on page 282
• show sysmon system sfm on page 283

sysmon xbar error-count

Configures system monitoring for cross bar errors. The no form of this command resets the parameters
to default values.

Syntax sysmon xbar error-count { threshold events polling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none |
syslog } }

no sysmon xbar error-count

Parameters threshold
Defines the failure threshold for the cross bar error-count event. The threshold is defined as
N/W, where N is the number of events, and W is the number of consecutive polling periods.
When the threshold is reached, actions configured for this event type will take place. Note
that a threshold of 1/W implies that there is no threshold, and no event will be triggered.

events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through
10.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events.

log-backoff

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 273

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon xbar link

If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally). The
log back-off count skips configured number of logs before logging again. This avoids
overflow of the internal log or of the syslog.

action
Specifies the action to take when the error count exceeds the specified threshold and log
back-off values.

none
No action is taken.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FSX devices.

Examples The following example configures system monitoring for cross bar errors.

Brocade(config)# sysmon xbar error-count threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon xbar error-count action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon xbar error-count log-backoff 15

sysmon xbar link

Configures the sysmon parameters for the crossbar link. The no form of this command resets the
parameters to default values.

Syntax sysmon xbar link { threshold events polling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none | syslog } }

no sysmon xbar link

Parameters threshold
Defines the failure threshold for the fabric adapter error-count event. The threshold is
defined as N/W, where N is the number of events, and W is the number of consecutive
polling periods. When the threshold is reached, actions configured for this event type will
take place. Note that a threshold of 1/W implies that there is no threshold, and no event will
be triggered.

events
Specifies the threshold in terms of the number of events. Valid values are 1 through
10.

polling-interval
Specifies the number of polling windows. The device polls the internal registers at the
interval specified by the sysmon timer value. Valid values 1-32. However, the polling
window number must be equal or greater than the number of events.

log-backoff
If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally). The
log back-off count skips configured number of logs before logging again. This avoids
overflow of the internal log or of the syslog.

274 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System monitoring for Packet Processors

action
Specifies the action to take when the error count exceeds the specified threshold and log
back-off values.

none
No action is taken.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FSX devices.

Examples The following example configures system monitoring for cross bar link errors:

Brocade(config)# sysmon xbar link threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon xbar link action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon xbar link log-backoff 15

System monitoring for Packet Processors

On FSX devices, errors typically detected in packet processors include:
• Parity errors
• Error Checking Code (ECC) errors
• ConfigTable0 errors
• TCAM error
• TCAM action parity errors
• Token bucket priority parity errors
• State variable parity errors
• Link list RAM ECC errors
• FBUF RAM ECC errors
• Egress VLAN parity errors
• Ingress VLAN parity errors
• Layer 2 port isolation parity errors
• Layer 3 port isolation parity errors
• VIDX parity errors
Besides the error count, sysmon also checks for connectivity of SFM/XBAR links. This happens at the
interval defined by the sysmon-timer command generally or specifically for cross bar.
Use the following commands to configure and display the statistics of cross bar or switch fabric module:
• sysmon pp error-count on page 276
• show sysmon logs on page 278
• show sysmon counters on page 278
• show sysmon config on page 282

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 275

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 sysmon pp error-count

sysmon pp error-count

Configures the sysmon monitoring parameters for error events in packet processors. The no form of
this command resets the parameters to default values.

Syntax sysmon pp error-count { threshold eventspolling-interval | log-backoff value | action { none |

syslog } }

no sysmon pp error-count

Parameters threshold
Defines the failure threshold for the fabric adapter error-count event. The threshold is
defined as N/W, where N is the number of events, and W is the number of consecutive
polling periods. When the threshold is reached, actions configured for this event type will
take place. Note that a threshold of 1/W implies that there is no threshold, and no event will
be triggered.

log-backoff
If an error condition persists, it will be continuously logged (internally and/or externally). The
log back-off count skips configured number of logs before logging again. This avoids
overflow of the internal log or of the syslog.

action
Specifies the action to take when the error count exceeds the specified threshold and log
back-off values.

none
No action is taken. This is the default action.

syslog
The error is logged to syslog.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This is a global configuration for all packet processors-- you cannot configure sysmon parameters for
individual packet processors. However, you can display the logs for individual packet processors by
specifying the packet processor identifier.
This command is supported only on FSX devices.

Examples The following example configures system monitoring on packet processors:

Brocade(config)# sysmon pp error-count threshold 3 7

Brocade(config)# sysmon pp error-count action syslog
Brocade(config)# sysmon pp error-count log-backoff 15

clear sysmon counters

Clears sysmon counters for all or specific event types.

Syntax clear sysmon counters all

clear sysmon counters fa { error | link } { all | decimal }

276 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System Monitoring

clear sysmon counters pp error { all | decimal }

clear sysmon counters xbar { error | link } { all | decimal }

clear sysmon counters { ecc-error | link-error }

Parameters all
Clears all sysmon counters.

fa
Clears the fabric adaptor sysmon counters.

error
Clears the fabric adaptor error counters. You can specify all or a fabric adaptor,
identified by the index.

link
Clears the fabric adaptor sysmon counters for links. You can specify all or a fabric
adaptor identified by the index.

pp error
Clears packet processor sysmon counters. You can specify all or a packet processor
identified by the index.

xbar
Clears cross bar sysmon counters for cross bar. You can specify all or a cross bar identified
by the index.

error
Clears the cross bar sysmon error counters. You can specify all or a cross bar
identified by the index.

link
Clears the cross bar sysmon counters for links. You can specify all or a cross bar
identified by the index.

ecc-error
Clears the ECC error count on FCX and ICX devices. This option is not supported on FSX
devices.

stack-unit
Specifies the stack unit on which errors to be cleared.

all
Specifies that all stack units are cleared of errors.

link-error
Clears the link error count on FCX and ICX devices. This option is not supported on FSX
devices.

stack-unit
Specifies the stack unit on which errors to be cleared.

all

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 277

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 show sysmon logs

Specifies that all stack units are cleared of errors.

Modes Global configuration mode.

Examples The following example clears the fabric adaptor sysmon counters.

Brocade(config)# clear sysmon counters fa error all

show sysmon logs

Displays the entries written to syslog for all event types if the action specified is to log them into
syslog. If the action specified is none , the sysmon logs display nothing.

Syntax show sysmon logs

Modes Privileged EXEC mode.

Global configuration mode.

Examples The following example displays the syslog entries that were made by sysmon if the action specified
either at the global level or type level was to log the events to syslog. If the action specified was none ,
no syslog entries exist.

Brocade(config)# show sysmon logs

Aug 3 03:59:22:C:Sysmon:XBAR LINK: SFM1/XBAR1/FPORT0 -- NO SYNC
Aug 3 03:59:22:C:Sysmon:FA Link: SLOT9/FA16/Link0 -- HG.Link error
Aug 3 03:58:22:W:Sysmon:PP ERROR: SLOT4/PP6 error occurred
Aug 3 03:59:34:W:Sysmon:FA ERROR: SLOT1/FA0 error occurred
Aug 3 03:60:34:W:Sysmon:XBAR ERROR: SFM1/XBAR1/FPORT2 -error occurred

The following table describes the output of this command:

TABLE 38 show sysmon log s command output fields

Field Description

Date and time Aug 3 03:59:22

Critical or Warning A ‘C’ indicates a critical error and a ‘W’ indicates a warning.

Sysmon Message coming from Sysmon

Event type Possible values are FA ERROR, FA Link, XBAR ERROR, XBAR LINK, or PP ERROR

Component identifier Identifies the component of the system where the error was detected

Error A brief description of the error

show sysmon counters

Displays sysmon counters for all or specific event types.

278 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System Monitoring

Syntax show sysmon counters type { error | link }

show sysmon counters { ecc-error | link-error }

Parameters type
The event type for which sysmon counters are displayed. For FSX devices, the options are
all, fa (fabric adapter), pp (packet processor), and xbar (cross bar). For FCX and ICX
devices, the options are ecc-error and link-error. The default value is all.

error
Displays the error counter for the specified event type.

link
Displays the link error counters. You can specify either all or specific links.

ecc-error
Displays the ECC error count on FCX and ICX devices. This option is not supported on FSX
devices.

stack-unit
Specifies the stack unit on which errors to be displayed.

all
Displays errors for all stack units.

link-error
Displays the link error count on FCX and ICX devices. This option is not supported on FSX
devices.

stack-unit
Specifies the stack unit on which errors to be displayed.

all
Displays errors for all stack units.

Modes Privileged EXEC mode.

Global configuration mode.

Examples The following displays all fabric adaptor statistics on an FSX device:

Brocade# show sysmon counters fa link all

Sysmon FA HG.link error detected (number of times)
FA-link0 FA-
link1 FA-link2 FA-link3
SLOT FA-dev Sync/FC(RX,TX) Sync/
FC(RX,TX) Sync/FC(RX,TX)Sync/FC(RX,TX)
1 0 0/(0,0) 0/(0,0) 0/
(0,0) 0/(0,0)
2 2 0/(0,0) 0/(0,0) 0/
(0,0) 0/(0,0)
9 16 1751/(1750,1750) 0/(0,0) 0/
(0,0) 0/(0,0)
9 17 0/(0,0) 0/(0,0) 0/
(0,0) 0/(0,0)

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 279

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System Monitoring

The following example displays the error events that sysmon has recorded for the fabric adaptor 0.

Brocade# show sysmon counters fa error 0

Sysmon error detected on: SLOT 1, FA 0(number of times)
****PUMA Device 0 VOQUnit0 error detect
Set 0 EnQ Drop detect = 0
Set 1 EnQ Drop detect = 0
Set 2 EnQ Drop detect = 0
Set 3 EnQ Drop detect = 0
tail drop detect = 0 filter drop detect = 0, ecc drop detect = 0
****PUMA Device 0 VOQUnit1 error detect
Set 0 EnQ Drop detect = 0
Set 1 EnQ Drop detect = 0
Set 2 EnQ Drop detect = 0
Set 3 EnQ Drop detect = 0
tail drop detect = 0 filter drop detect = 0, ecc drop detect = 0
****PUMA Device 0 CRX error detect
CRC detect = 0, Lost SOP.EOP detect = 0, no egress Buf detect = 0
fifo full detect = 0, UC congest detect = 0, MC congest detect = 0
bad buf alloc detect = 0, e2e drop detect = 0

The following example shows the crossbar errors for the switch fabric module 0.

Brocade# show sysmon counters xbar error 0

Sysmon SFM 1 xbar 0 HG.link Rx error detected (number of times)
HG.link BadLen BadHeader ReformatErr
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 0 0
9 0 0 0
10 0 0 0
11 0 0 0

The following example displays the cross bar link errors for the SFM module 0.

Brocade# show sysmon counters xbar link 0

Sysmon SFM 0 xbar 1 HG.link NO-SYNC detected (number of times)
HG.link NO-SYNC
0 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 1757
6 0
7 0
8 0
9 0
10 0
11 0

The following example displays the error counter for the specified packet processor 0.

Brocade# show sysmon counter pp error 0

Sysmon error detected on: SLOT 1, PP 0(number of times)
****PUMA Device 0 Buffer SRAM error detect
Ingress buffer error detect = 0
Egress buffer error detect = 1
****PUMA Device 0 Control SRAM error detect
CSU : Parity error detect = 0, ECC error detect = 0
LPM0: Parity error detect = 0, ECC error detect = 0
LPM1: Parity error detect = 0, ECC error detect = 0
LPM2: Parity error detect = 0, ECC error detect = 0
LPM3: Parity error detect = 0, ECC error detect = 0

280 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 System Monitoring

The following example displays all error counter data on an FCX device:

Brocade(config)#show sysmon counters all

Sysmon error detected on: Stacking Unit 1 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 1 (FCX) Link error detect
Port 24
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 25
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 26
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 27
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon error detected on: Stacking Unit 2 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 2 (FCX) Link error detect
Port 24
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 25
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 26
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 27
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon error detected on: Stacking Unit 3 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 3 (FCX) Link error detect
Port 24
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 25
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 26
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 27
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon error detected on: Stacking Unit 4 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 4 (FCX) Link error detect
Port 24
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 25
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 26
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 27
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon error detected on: Stacking Unit 5 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 5 (FCX) Link error detect
Port 24
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 25
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 26
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
Port 27
Link error detect = 0 remote fault detect = 0 lane error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon ECC error detected on: Stacking Unit 1 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 1 (ICX) ecc error detect
ECC one-time error detect = 0 ECC two-time error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon ECC error detected on: Stacking Unit 2 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 2 (ICX) ecc error detect
ECC one-time error detect = 0 ECC two-time error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon ECC error detected on: Stacking Unit 3 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 3 (ICX) ecc error detect
ECC one-time error detect = 0 ECC two-time error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon ECC error detected on: Stacking Unit 4 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 4 (ICX) ecc error detect
ECC one-time error detect = 0 ECC two-time error detect = 0
==========================
Sysmon ECC error detected on: Stacking Unit 5 (number of times)
****Stacking unit 5 (ICX) ecc error detect

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 281

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 show sysmon config

ECC one-time error detect = 0 ECC two-time error detect = 0

==========================

show sysmon config

Displays the complete sysmon configuration, including the global configuration and the event-specific
configuration.

Syntax show sysmon config

Modes User EXEC mode.

Privileged EXEC mode.

Examples The following command displays the sysmon configuration an FSX device. The global configuration is
displayed first, followed by the configuration for specific events.

Brocade> show sysmon config

======================================
System Monitoring (Sysmon) is: enabled
Sysmon timer = 3 minutes
======================================
Threshold: Times error detected / Consecutive times event polling.
Log Backoff Number: Number of times skip log before log again.
======================================
Sysmon Event: FA_ERROR_COUNT (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog
Sysmon Event: FA_LINK (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog
Sysmon Event: XBAR_ERROR_COUNT (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog
Sysmon Event: XBAR_LINK (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog
Sysmon Event: PP_ERROR_COUNT (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog

The following example displays the sysmon configuration on an FCX device:

Brocade(config)#show sysmon config

======================================
System Monitoring (Sysmon) is: enabled
Sysmon timer = 3 minutes
======================================
Threshold: Times error detected / Consecutive times event polling.
Log Backoff Numner: Number of times skip log before log again.
======================================
Sysmon Event: LINK_STATUS (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog
Sysmon Event: ECC_STATS (Enabled)
Threshold: 2/10
Log Backoff Number: 10
Action: log(internal) /syslog

282 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 show sysmon system sfm

show sysmon system sfm

Displays the status of the switch fabric modules.

Syntax show sysmon system sfm { all | number }

Parameters all
Displays the statistics for all SFMs on the device.

number
Specifies the SFM ID for which the statistics is to be displayed.

Modes User EXEC mode.

Privileged EXEC mode.
Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is supported only on FSX devices.

Examples The following command displays the statistics for all SFMs on the device.

Brocade(config)# show sysmon system sfm all

SFM= 1,Xbar= 2
X-link Status FlowCtrl FA-dev/Link Status FlowCtrl
2 OK 0x0 19/0 OK 0x0
3 OK 0x0 13/0 OK 0x0
4 OK 0x0 0/1 OK --
5 OK 0x0 3/0 OK 0x0
7 OK 0x0 10/1 OK --
8 OK 0x0 7/0 OK 0x0
9 OK 0x0 17/0 OK 0x0
=======================================================
SFM= 1,Xbar= 3
X-link Status FlowCtrl FA-dev/Link Status FlowCtrl
1 OK 0x0 17/1 OK 0x0
2 OK 0x0 3/1 OK 0x0
4 OK 0x0 0/2 OK --
5 OK 0x0 19/1 OK 0x0
7 OK 0x0 10/2 OK --
10 OK 0x0 7/1 OK 0x0
11 OK 0x0 13/1 OK 0x0
=======================================================

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 283

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 show sysmon system sfm

284 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog

● About Syslog messages................................................................................................285

● Displaying Syslog messages........................................................................................ 286
● Syslog service configuration......................................................................................... 287

About Syslog messages

Brocade software can write syslog messages to provide information at the following severity levels:
• Emergencies
• Alerts
• Critical
• Errors
• Warnings
• Notifications
• Informational
• Debugging
The device writes the messages to a local buffer.
You also can specify the IP address or host name of up to six Syslog servers. When you specify a
Syslog server, the Brocade device writes the messages both to the system log and to the Syslog server.
Using a Syslog server ensures that the messages remain available even after a system reload. The
Brocade local Syslog buffer is cleared during a system reload or reboot, but the Syslog messages sent
to the Syslog server remain on the server.

NOTE
To enable the Brocade device to retain Syslog messages after a soft reboot (reload command). Refer
to Retaining Syslog messages after a soft reboot on page 293.
The Syslog service on a Syslog server receives logging messages from applications on the local host or
from devices such as a Layer 2 Switch or Layer 3 Switch. Syslog adds a time stamp to each received
message and directs messages to a log file. Most Unix workstations come with Syslog configured.
Some third party vendor products also provide Syslog running on NT.
Syslog uses UDP port 514 and each Syslog message thus is sent with destination port 514. Each
Syslog message is one line with Syslog message format. The message is embedded in the text portion
of the Syslog format. There are several subfields in the format. Keywords are used to identify each
subfield, and commas are delimiters. The subfield order is insensitive except that the text subfield
should be the last field in the message. All the subfields are optional.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 285

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying Syslog messages

Displaying Syslog messages

To display the Syslog messages in the device local buffer, enter the show logging command at any
level of the CLI. The following shows an example display output.

device>#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 3 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dec 15 19:04:14:A:Fan 1, fan on right connector, failed
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
Dec 15 18:46:17:I:Interface ethernet 4, state up
Dec 15 18:45:21:I:Bridge topology change, vlan 4095, interface 4, changed
state to forwarding
Dec 15 18:45:15:I:Warm start

For information about the Syslog configuration information, time stamps, and dynamic and static
buffers, refer to Displaying the Syslog configuration on page 287.

Enabling real-time display of Syslog messages

By default, to view Syslog messages generated by a Brocade device, you need to display the Syslog
buffer or the log on a Syslog server used by the Brocade device.
You can enable real-time display of Syslog messages on the management console. When you enable
this feature, the software displays a Syslog message on the management console when the message
is generated. However, to enable display of real-time Syslog messages in Telnet or SSH sessions,
you also must enable display within the individual sessions.
To enable real-time display of Syslog messages, enter the following command at the global CONFIG
level of the CLI.

device(config)#logging console

Syntax: [no] loggingconsole

This command enables the real-time display of Syslog messages on the serial console. You can enter
this command from the serial console or a Telnet or SSH session.

Enabling real-time display for a Telnet or SSH session

To also enable the real-time display for a Telnet or SSH session, enter the following command from
the Privileged EXEC level of the session.

telnet@device#terminal monitor
Syslog trace was turned ON

Syntax: terminal monitor

Notice that the CLI displays a message to indicate the status change for the feature. To disable the
feature in the management session, enter the terminal monitor command again. The command
toggles the feature on and off.

telnet@device#terminal monitor
Syslog trace was turned OFF

286 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying real-time Syslog messages

Here is an example of how the Syslog messages are displayed.

telnet@device#terminal monitor
Syslog trace was turned ON
SYSLOG: <9>device, Power supply 2, power supply on left connector, failed
SYSLOG: <14>device, Interface ethernet 6, state down
SYSLOG: <14>device, Interface ethernet 2, state up

Displaying real-time Syslog messages

Any terminal logged on to a Brocade switch can receive real-time Syslog messages when the terminal
monitor command is issued.

Syslog service configuration

The procedures in this section describe how to perform the following Syslog configuration tasks:
• Specify a Syslog server. You can configure the Brocade device to use up to six Syslog servers. (Use
of a Syslog server is optional. The system can hold up to 1000 Syslog messages in an internal
buffer.)
• Change the level of messages the system logs.
• Change the number of messages the local Syslog buffer can hold.
• Display the Syslog configuration.
• Clear the local Syslog buffer.
Logging is enabled by default, with the following settings:
• Messages of all severity levels (Emergencies - Debugging) are logged.
• By default, up to 50 messages are retained in the local Syslog buffer. This can be changed.
• No Syslog server is specified.

Displaying the Syslog configuration

To display the Syslog parameters currently in effect on a Brocade device, enter the following command
from any level of the CLI.

device>#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 3 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dec 15 19:04:14:A:Fan 1, fan on right connector, failed
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
Dec 15 18:46:17:I:Interface ethernet 1/4, state up
Dec 15 18:45:21:I:Bridge topology change, vlan 4095, interface 4, changed
state to forwarding
Dec 15 18:45:15:I:Warm start

Syntax:show logging
The Syslog display shows the following configuration information, in the rows above the log entries
themselves.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 287

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Static and dynamic buffers

TABLE 39 CLI display of Syslog buffer configuration

Field Definition

Syslog logging The state (enabled or disabled) of the Syslog buffer.

messages dropped The number of Syslog messages dropped due to user-configured filters. By default, the
software logs messages for all Syslog levels. You can disable individual Syslog levels, in
which case the software filters out messages at those levels. Refer to Disabling logging of a
message level on page 291. Each time the software filters out a Syslog message, this
counter is incremented.

flushes The number of times the Syslog buffer has been cleared by the clear logging command or
equivalent Web Management Interface option. Refer to Clearing the Syslog messages from
the local buffer on page 294.

overruns The number of times the dynamic log buffer has filled up and been cleared to hold new
entries. For example, if the buffer is set for 100 entries, the 101st entry causes an overrun.
After that, the 201st entry causes a second overrun.

level The message levels that are enabled. Each letter represents a message type and is
identified by the key (level code) below the value. If you disable logging of a message level,
the code for that level is not listed.

messages logged The total number of messages that have been logged since the software was loaded.

level code The message levels represented by the one-letter codes.

Static and dynamic buffers

The software provides two buffers:
• Static - logs power supply failures, fan failures, and temperature warning or shutdown messages
• Dynamic - logs all other message types
In the static log, new messages replace older ones, so only the most recent message is displayed. For
example, only the most recent temperature warning message will be present in the log. If multiple
temperature warning messages are sent to the log, the latest one replaces the previous one. The
static buffer is not configurable.
The message types that appear in the static buffer do not appear in the dynamic buffer. The dynamic
buffer contains up to the maximum number of messages configured for the buffer (50 by default), then
begins removing the oldest messages (at the bottom of the log) to make room for new ones.
The static and dynamic buffers are both displayed when you display the log.

device#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 3 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dec 15 19:04:14:A:Fan 1, fan on right connector, failed
Dec 15 19:00:14:A:Fan 2, fan on left connector, failed
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
Dec 15 18:46:17:I:Interface ethernet 4, state up
Dec 15 18:45:21:I:Bridge topology change, vlan 4095, interface 4, changed
state to forwarding
Dec 15 18:45:15:I:Warm start

288 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Clearing log entries

Notice that the static buffer contains two separate messages for fan failures. Each message of each
type has its own buffer. Thus, if you replace fan 1 but for some reason that fan also fails, the software
replaces the first message about the failure of fan 1 with the newer message. The software does not
overwrite the message for fan 2, unless the software sends a newer message for fan 2.

Clearing log entries

When you clear log entries, you can selectively clear the static or dynamic buffer, or you can clear both.
For example, to clear only the dynamic buffer, enter the following command at the Privileged EXEC
level.

device#clear logging dynamic-buffer

Syntax: clear logging [ dynamic-buffer | static-buffer ]

You can specify dynamic-buffer to clear the dynamic buffer or static-buffer to clear the static buffer. If
you do not specify a buffer, both buffers are cleared.

Time stamps
The contents of the time stamp differ depending on whether you have set the time and date on the
onboard system clock:
• If you have set the time and date on the onboard system clock, the date and time are shown in the
following format.
mm dd hh:mm:ss
where
• ‐ mm - abbreviation for the name of the month
‐ dd - day
‐ hh - hours
‐ mm - minutes
‐ ss - seconds
For example, "Oct 15 17:38:03" means October 15 at 5:38 PM and 3 seconds.
• If you have not set the time and date on the onboard system clock, the time stamp shows the amount
of time that has passed since the device was booted, in the following format.
num d num h num m num s
where
• ‐ num d - day
‐ num h - hours
‐ num m - minutes
‐ num s - seconds
For example, "188d1h01m00s" means the device had been running for 188 days, 11 hours, one minute,
and zero seconds when the Syslog entry with this time stamp was generated.

Example of Syslog messages on a device with the onboard clock set

The example shows the format of messages on a device where the onboard system clock has been set.
Each time stamp shows the month, the day, and the time of the system clock when the message was

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 289

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Disabling or re-enabling Syslog

generated. For example, the system time when the most recent message (the one at the top) was
generated was October 15 at 5:38 PM and 3 seconds.

device#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 38 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dec 15 19:04:14:A:Fan 1, fan on right connector, failed
Dec 15 19:00:14:A:Fan 2, fan on left connector, failed
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
Oct 15 17:38:03:warning:list 101 denied tcp 10.157.22.191(0)(Ethernet 18
0000.001f.77ed) -> 10.99.4.69(http), 1 event(s)
Oct 15 07:03:30:warning:list 101 denied tcp 10.157.22.26(0)(Ethernet 18
0000.001f.77ed) -> 10.99.4.69(http), 1 event(s)
Oct 15 06:58:30:warning:list 101 denied tcp 10.157.22.198(0)(Ethernet 18
0000.001f.77ed) -> 10.99.4.69(http), 1 event(s)

Example of Syslog messages on a device wih the onboard clock not set

The example shows the format of messages on a device where the onboard system clock is not set.
Each time stamp shows the amount of time the device had been running when the message was
generated. For example, the most recent message, at the top of the list of messages, was generated
when the device had been running for 21 days, seven hours, two minutes, and 40 seconds.

device#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 38 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
21d07h02m40s:warning:list 101 denied tcp 10.157.22.191(0)(Ethernet 4/18
0000.001f.77ed) -> 10.99.4.69(http), 1 event(s)
19d07h03m30s:warning:list 101 denied tcp 10.157.22.26(0)(Ethernet 4/18
0000.001f.77ed) -> 10.99.4.69(http), 1 event(s)
17d06h58m30s:warning:list 101 denied tcp 10.157.22.198(0)(Ethernet 4/18
0000.001f.77ed) -> 10.99.4.69(http), 1 event(s)

Disabling or re-enabling Syslog

Syslog is enabled by default. To disable it, enter the logging on command at the global CONFIG
level.

device(config)#no logging on

Syntax: [no] logging on [ udp-port ]

The udp-port parameter specifies the application port used for the Syslog facility. The default is 514.
To re-enable logging, re-enter the logging on command.

device(config)#logging on

This command enables local Syslog logging with the following defaults:
• Messages of all severity levels (Emergencies - Debugging) are logged.
• Up to 50 messages are retained in the local Syslog buffer.
• No Syslog server is specified.

290 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Specifying a Syslog server

Specifying a Syslog server

To specify a Syslog server, enter the logging host command.

device(config)#logging host 10.0.0.99

Syntax: logginghost ip-addr | server-name

Specifying an additional Syslog server

To specify an additional Syslog server, enter the logging host command again. You can specify up to
six Syslog servers.

device(config)#logging host 10.0.0.99

Syntax: logginghost ip-addr | server-name

Disabling logging of a message level

To change the message level, disable logging of specific message levels. You must disable the
message levels on an individual basis.
For example, to disable logging of debugging and informational messages, enter the following
commands.

device(config)#no logging buffered debugging

device(config)#no logging buffered informational

Syntax: [no] loggingbuffered level | num-entries

The level parameter can have one of the following values:
• alerts
• critical
• debugging
• emergencies
• errors
• informational
• notifications
• warnings
The commands in the example above change the log level to notification messages or higher. The
software will not log informational or debugging messages. The changed message level also applies to
the Syslog servers.

Changing the number of entries the local buffer can hold

You also can use the logging buffered command to change the number of entries the local Syslog
buffer can store. For example.

device(config)#logging buffered 1000

device(config)#write memory
device(config)#exit
device#reload

Syntax:[no] logging buffered num

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 291

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Local buffer configuration notes

The default number of messages is 50. For FastIron devices, you can set the Syslog buffer limit from 1
- 1000 entries.

Local buffer configuration notes

• You must save the configuration and reload the software to place the change into effect.
• If you decrease the size of the buffer, the software clears the buffer before placing the change into
effect.
• If you increase the size of the Syslog buffer, the software will clear some of the older locally
buffered Syslog messages.

Changing the log facility

The Syslog daemon on the Syslog server uses a facility to determine where to log the messages from
the Brocade device. The default facility for messages the Brocade device sends to the Syslog server is
"user". You can change the facility using the following command.

NOTE
You can specify only one facility. If you configure the Brocade device to use two Syslog servers, the
device uses the same facility on both servers.

device(config)#logging facility local0

Syntax: loggingfacility facility-name

The facility-name can be one of the following:
• kern - kernel messages
• user - random user-level messages
• mail - mail system
• daemon - system daemons
• auth - security or authorization messages
• syslog - messages generated internally by Syslog
• lpr - line printer subsystem
• news - netnews subsystem
• uucp - uucp subsystem
• sys9 - cron/at subsystem
• sys10 - reserved for system use
• sys11 - reserved for system use
• sys12 - reserved for system use
• sys13 - reserved for system use
• sys14 - reserved for system use
• cron - cron/at subsystem
• local0 - reserved for local use
• local1 - reserved for local use
• local2 - reserved for local use
• local3 - reserved for local use
• local4 - reserved for local use
• local5 - reserved for local use
• local6 - reserved for local use
• local7 - reserved for local use

292 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying interface names in Syslog messages

Displaying interface names in Syslog messages

By default, an interface slot number (if applicable) and port number are displayed when you display
Syslog messages. If you want to display the name of the interface instead of its number, enter the
following command:

FastIron(config)# ip show-portname

This command is applied globally to all interfaces on Layer 2 Switches and Layer 3 Switches.
Syntax:[no] Ip show-portname
By default, Syslog messages show the interface type, such as "ethernet", and so on. For example, you
see the following

SYSLOG: <14>0d00h02m18s:ICX6610-48P Router System: Interface ethernet 1/1/5, state up

However, if ip show-portname is configured and a name has been assigned to the port, the port name
replaces the interface type as in the example below, where "port5_name" is the name of the port.

SYSLOG: <14>0d00h02m18s:ICX6610-48P Router System: Interface port5_name 1/1/5, state

up

Also, when you display the messages in the Syslog, you see the interface name under the Dynamic Log
Buffer section. The actual interface number is appended to the interface name. For example, if the
interface name is "lab" and its port number is "2", you see "lab2" displayed as in the example below:

device# show logging

Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 3 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Static Log Buffer:
Dec 15 19:04:14:A:Fan 1, fan on right connector, failed
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 entries):
Dec 15 18:46:17:I:Interface ethernet Lab2
, state up
Dec 15 18:45:15:I:Warm start

Displaying TCP or UDP port numbers in Syslog messages

The command ip show-service-number-in-log allows you to change the display of TCP or UDP
application information from the TCP or UDP well-known port name to the TCP or UDP port number.
For example, when this command is in effect, the Brocade device will display http (the well-known port
name) instead of 80 (the port number) in the output of show commands, and other commands that
contain application port information. By default, Brocade devices display TCP or UDP application
information in named notation.
To display TCP or UDP port numbers instead of their names, enter the following command.

device(config)#ip show-service-number-in-log

Syntax: [no] ip show-service-number-in-log

Retaining Syslog messages after a soft reboot

You can configure the device to save the System log (Syslog) after a soft reboot (reload command).

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 293

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog reboot configuration considerations

Syslog reboot configuration considerations

• If the Syslog buffer size was set to a different value using the CLI command logging buffered , the
System log will be cleared after a soft reboot, even when this feature (logging persistence) is in
effect. This will occur only with a soft reboot immediately following a Syslog buffer size change. A
soft reboot by itself will not clear the System log. To prevent the system from clearing the System
log, leave the number of entries allowed in the Syslog buffer unchanged.
• This feature does not save Syslog messages after a hard reboot. When the Brocade device is
power-cycled, the Syslog messages are cleared.
• If logging persistence is enabled and you load a new software image on the device, you must first
clear the log if you want to reload the device. (Refer to Clearing the Syslog messages from the local
buffer on page 294.)
To configure the device to save the System log messages after a soft reboot, enter the following
command.

device(config)#logging persistence

Syntax: [no] logging persistence

Enter no logging persistence to disable this feature after it has been enabled.

Clearing the Syslog messages from the local buffer

To clear the Syslog messages stored in the local buffer of the Brocade device, enter the clear logging
command.

device#clear logging

Syntax: clear logging

Syslog messages for hardware errors

NOTE
This feature is supported on FastIron X Series devices only. It is not supported on FCX and ICX
devices.
FastIron Chassis devices support the display of hardware read and write errors encountered on a slot
or module during bootup and during normal system operations. There are four types of errors, which
may cause the system to disable or power down the modules on which they occur:
• Configuration read error
• Configuration write error
• Memory read error
• Memory write error
The following shows examples of some hardware errors in the show logging display output.

device>#show logging
Syslog logging: enabled (0 messages dropped, 0 flushes, 0 overruns)
Buffer logging: level ACDMEINW, 3 messages logged
level code: A=alert C=critical D=debugging M=emergency E=error
I=informational N=notification W=warning
Dynamic Log Buffer (50 lines):
0d00h00m27s:I:System: Interface ethernet mgmt1, state up
0d00h00m26s:N:powered On switch Fabric
0d00h00m17s:N:powered On switch Fabric
0d00h00m08s:I:System: Warm start

294 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog

0d00h00m08s:I:SNMP: read-only community added by from session

0d00h00m02s:A:System: Module in slot 5 encountered unrecoverable PCI bridge
validation failure. Module will be deleted.
0d00h00m02s:A:System: Module in slot 5 encountered unrecoverable PCI config read
failure. Module will be deleted.
0d00h00m02s:A:System: Module in slot 5 encountered PCI config read error: Bus 10, Dev
3, Reg Offset 0.
0d00h00m00s:W:System: Fan speed changed automatically to 1

Syslog messages (alerts) for hardware errors are listed in Brocade Syslog messages on page 297.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 295

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages for hardware errors

296 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

● Brocade Syslog messages............................................................................................297

This section lists all of the Syslog messages. Note that some of the messages apply only to Layer 3
switches.

NOTE
This chapter does not list Syslog messages that can be displayed when a debug option is enabled.
The messages are listed by message level, in the following order, then by message type:
• Emergencies (none)
• Alerts
• Critical
• Errors
• Warnings
• Notifications
• Informational
• Debugging

Brocade Syslog messages

Message num-modules modules and 1 power supply, need more
power supply!!

Explanation Indicates that the chassis needs more power supplies to run the modules
in the chassis.

The num-modules parameter indicates the number of modules in the

chassis.

Message Level Alert

Message Fan num , location , failed

Explanation A fan has failed.

The num is the fan number.

The location describes where the failed fan is in the chassis.

Message Level Alert

Message MAC Authentication failed for mac-address on

portnum

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 297

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation RADIUS authentication was successful for the specified mac-address on

the specified portnum ; however, the VLAN returned in the RADIUS
Access-Accept message did not refer to a valid VLAN or VLAN ID on the
Brocade device. This is treated as an authentication failure.

Message Level Alert

Message MAC Authentication failed for mac-address on

portnum (Invalid User)

Explanation RADIUS authentication failed for the specified mac-address on the

specified portnum because the MAC address sent to the RADIUS server
was not found in the RADIUS server users database.

Message Level Alert

Message MAC Authentication failed for mac-address on

portnum (No VLAN Info received from RADIUS
server)

Explanation RADIUS authentication was successful for the specified mac-address on

the specified portnum ; however, dynamic VLAN assignment was enabled
for the port, but the RADIUS Access-Accept message did not include
VLAN information. This is treated as an authentication failure.

Message Level Alert

Message MAC Authentication failed for mac-address on

portnum (Port is already in another radius given
vlan)

Explanation RADIUS authentication was successful for the specified mac-address on

the specified portnum ; however, the RADIUS Access-Accept message
specified a VLAN ID, although the port had previously been moved to a
different RADIUS-assigned VLAN. This is treated as an authentication
failure.

Message Level Alert

Message MAC Authentication failed for mac-address on

portnum (RADIUS given vlan does not exist)

Explanation RADIUS authentication was successful for the specified mac-address on

the specified portnum ; however, the RADIUS Access-Accept message
specified a VLAN that does not exist in the Brocade configuration. This is
treated as an authentication failure.

Message Level Alert

298 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message MAC Authentication failed for mac-address on

portnum (RADIUS given VLAN does not match with
TAGGED vlan)

Explanation Multi-device port authentication failed for the mac-address on a tagged port
because the packet with this MAC address as the source was tagged with
a VLAN ID different from the RADIUS-supplied VLAN ID.

Message Level Alert

Message Management module at slot slot-num state changed

from module-state to module-state .

Explanation Indicates a state change in a management module.

The slot-num indicates the chassis slot containing the module.

The module-state can be one of the following:

• active
• standby
• crashed
• coming-up
• unknown

Message Level Alert

Message OSPF LSA Overflow, LSA Type = lsa-type

Explanation Indicates an LSA database overflow.

The lsa-type parameter indicates the type of LSA that experienced the
overflow condition. The LSA type is one of the following:

• 1 - Router
• 2 - Network
• 3 - Summary
• 4 - Summary
• 5 - External

Message Level Alert

Message OSPF Memory Overflow

Explanation OSPF has run out of memory.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered PCI

config read error: Bus PCI-bus-number , Dev PCI-

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 299

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

device-number , Reg Offset PCI-config-register-

offse t .

Explanation The module encountered a hardware configuration read error.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered PCI

config write error: Bus PCI-bus-number , Dev PCI-
device-number , Reg Offset PCI-config-register-
offset .

Explanation The module encountered a hardware configuration write error.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered PCI

memory read error: Mem Addr memory-address

Explanation The module encountered a hardware memory read error.

The memory-address is in hexadecimal format.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered PCI

memory write error: Mem Addr memory-address .

Explanation The module encountered a hardware memory write error.

The memory-address is in hexadecimal format.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered

unrecoverable PCI bridge validation failure.
Module will be deleted.

Explanation The module encountered an unrecoverable (hardware) bridge validation

failure. The module will be disabled or powered down.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered

unrecoverable PCI config read failure. Module
will be deleted.

300 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation The module encountered an unrecoverable hardware configuration read

failure. The module will be disabled or powered down.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered

unrecoverable PCI config write failure. Module
will be deleted.

Explanation The module encountered an unrecoverable hardware configuration write

failure. The module will be disabled or powered down.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered

unrecoverable PCI device validation failure.
Module will be deleted.

Explanation The module encountered an unrecoverable (hardware) device validation

failure. The module will be disabled or powered down.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered

unrecoverable PCI memory read failure. Module
will be deleted.

Explanation The module encountered an unrecoverable hardware memory read failure.

The module will be disabled or powered down.

Message Level Alert

Message System: Module in slot slot-num encountered

unrecoverable PCI memory write failure. Module
will be deleted.

Explanation The module encountered an unrecoverable hardware memory write failure.

The module will be disabled or powered down.

Message Level Alert

Message System: No Free Tcam Entry available. System will

be unstable

Explanation You must reboot the device.

Message Level Alert

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 301

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message System: Temperature is over shutdown level,

system is going to be reset in num seconds

Explanation The chassis temperature has risen above shutdown level. The system will
be shut down in the amount of time indicated.

Message Level Alert

Message Temperature degrees C degrees, warning level

warn-degrees C degrees, shutdown level shutdown-
degrees C degrees

Explanation Indicates an over temperature condition on the active module.

The degrees value indicates the temperature of the module.

The warn-degrees value is the warning threshold temperature configured

for the module.

The shutdown-degrees value is the shutdown temperature configured for

the module.

Message Level Alert

Message Authentication shut down portnum due to DOS

attack

Explanation Denial of Service (DoS) attack protection was enabled for multi-device port
authentication on the specified portnum , and the per-second rate of
RADIUS authentication attempts for the port exceeded the configured limit.
The Brocade device considers this to be a DoS attack and disables the
port.

Message Level Critical

Message BGP4: Not enough memory available to run BGP4

Explanation The device could not start the BGP4 routing protocol because there is not
enough memory available.

Message Level Debug

Message DOT1X: Not enough memory

Explanation There is not enough system memory for 802.1X authentication to take
place. Contact Brocade Technical Support.

Message Level Debug

302 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message No of prefixes received from BGP peer ip-addr

exceeds maximum prefix-limit...shutdown

Explanation The Layer 3 switch has received more than the specified maximum number
of prefixes from the neighbor, and the Layer 3 switch is therefore shutting
down its BGP4 session with the neighbor.

Message Level Error

Message IPv6: IPv6 protocol disabled on the device from

session-id

Explanation IPv6 protocol was disabled on the device during the specified session.

Message Level Informational

Message IPv6: IPv6 protocol enabled on the device from

session-id

Explanation IPv6 protocol was enabled on the device during the specified session.

Message Level Informational

Message MAC Filter applied to port port-id by username

from session-id (filter id= filter-ids )

Explanation Indicates a MAC address filter was applied to the specified port by the
specified user during the specified session.

session-id can be console, telnet, ssh, or snmp.

filter-ids is a list of the MAC address filters that were applied.

Message Level Informational

Message MAC Filter removed from port port-id by username

from session-id (filter id= filter-ids )

Explanation Indicates a MAC address filter was removed from the specified port by the
specified user during the specified session.

session-id can be console, telnet, ssh, or snmp.

filter-ids is a list of the MAC address filters that were removed.

Message Level Informational

Message Security: Password has been changed for user

username from session-id

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 303

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation Password of the specified user has been changed during the specified
session ID or type. session-id can be console, telnet, ssh, or snmp.

Message Level Informational

Message device-name : Logical link on interface ethernet

slot#/port# is down.

Explanation The specified ports were logically brought down while singleton was
configured on the port.

Message Level Informational

Message device-name : Logical link on interface ethernet

slot#/port# is up.

Explanation The specified ports were logically brought up while singleton was
configured on the port.

Message Level Informational

Message user-name login to PRIVILEGED mode

Explanation A user has logged into the Privileged EXEC mode of the CLI.

The user-name is the user name.

Message Level Informational

Message user-name login to USER EXEC mode

Explanation A user has logged into the USER EXEC mode of the CLI.

The user-name is the user name.

Message Level Informational

Message user-name logout from PRIVILEGED mode

Explanation A user has logged out of Privileged EXEC mode of the CLI.

The user-name is the user name.

Message Level Informational

Message user-name logout from USER EXEC mode

304 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation A user has logged out of the USER EXEC mode of the CLI.

The user-name is the user name.

Message Level Informational

Message ACL ACL id added | deleted | modified from

console | telnet | ssh| snmp session

Explanation A user created, modified, deleted, or applied an ACL through an SNMP,

console, SSH, or Telnet session.

Message Level Informational

Message Bridge is new root, vlan vlan-id , root ID root-

id

Explanation A Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) topology change has occurred, resulting
in the Brocade device becoming the root bridge.

The vlan-id is the ID of the VLAN in which the STP topology change
occurred.

The root-id is the STP bridge root ID.

Message Level Informational

Message Bridge root changed, vlan vlan-id , new root ID

string , root interface portnum

Explanation A Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) topology change has occurred.

The vlan-id is the ID of the VLAN in which the STP topology change
occurred.

The root-id is the STP bridge root ID.

The portnum is the number of the port connected to the new root bridge.

Message Level Informational

Message Bridge topology change, vlan vlan-id , interface

portnum , changed state to stp-state

Explanation A Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) topology change has occurred on a port.

The vlan-id is the ID of the VLAN in which the STP topology change
occurred.

The portnum is the port number.

The stp-state is the new STP state and can be one of the following:

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 305

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

• disabled
• blocking
• listening
• learning
• forwarding
• unknown

Message Level Informational

Message Cold start

Explanation The device has been powered on.

Message Level Informational

Message DHCP: snooping on untrusted port portnum , type

number, drop

Explanation The device has indicated that the DHCP client receives DHCP server reply
packets on untrusted ports, and packets are dropped.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address Cannot

apply an ACL or MAC filter on a port member of a
VE (virtual interface)

Explanation The RADIUS server returned an IP ACL or MAC address filter, but the port
is a member of a virtual interface (VE).

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address cannot

remove inbound ACL

Explanation An error occurred while removing the inbound ACL.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address Downloading

a MAC filter, but MAC filter have no effect on
router port

Explanation The RADIUS server returned an MAC address filter, but the portnum is a
router port (it has one or more IP addresses).

Message Level Informational

306 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address Downloading

an IP ACL, but IP ACL have no effect on a switch
port

Explanation The RADIUS server returned an IP ACL, but the portnum is a switch port
(no IP address).

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X:port portnum - MAC mac address Error -

could not add all MAC filters

Explanation The Brocade device was unable to implement the MAC address filters
returned by the RADIUS server.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address Invalid MAC

filter ID - this ID doesn't exist

Explanation The MAC address filter ID returned by the RADIUS server does not exist in
the Brocade configuration.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address Invalid MAC

filter ID - this ID is user defined and cannot be
used

Explanation The port was assigned a MAC address filter ID that had been dynamically
created by another user.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address is

unauthorized because system resource is not
enough or the invalid information to set the
dynamic assigned IP ACLs or MAC address filters

Explanation 802.1X authentication failed for the Client with the specified mac address
on the specified portnum either due to insufficient system resources on the
device, or due to invalid IP ACL or MAC address filter information returned
by the RADIUS server.

Message Informational
Level

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 307

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message DOT1X: port portnum - MAC mac address Port is

already bound with MAC filter

Explanation The RADIUS server returned a MAC address filter, but a MAC address
filter had already been applied to the port.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X:port portnum - MAC mac address This device

doesn't support ACL with MAC Filtering on the
same port

Explanation The RADIUS server returned a MAC address filter while an IP ACL was
applied to the port, or returned an IP ACL while a MAC address filter was
applied to the port.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: Port portnum is unauthorized because

system resource is not enough or the invalid
information to set the dynamic assigned IP ACLs
or MAC address filters

Explanation 802.1X authentication could not take place on the port. This happened
because strict security mode was enabled and one of the following
occurred:

• Insufficient system resources were available on the device to apply an IP

ACL or MAC address filter to the port
• Invalid information was received from the RADIUS server (for example,
the Filter-ID attribute did not refer to an existing IP ACL or MAC address
filter)

Message Informational
Level

Message DOT1X: Port portnum currently used vlan-id

changes to vlan-id due to dot1x-RADIUS vlan
assignment

Explanation A user has completed 802.1X authentication. The profile received from the
RADIUS server specifies a VLAN ID for the user. The port to which the
user is connected has been moved to the VLAN indicated by vlan-id .

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: Port portnum currently used vlan-id is set

back to port default vlan-id vlan-id

308 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation The user connected to portnum has disconnected, causing the port to be
moved back into its default VLAN, vlan-id .

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: Port portnum , AuthControlledPortStatus

change: authorized

Explanation The status of the interface controlled port has changed from unauthorized
to authorized.

Message Level Informational

Message DOT1X: Port portnum , AuthControlledPortStatus

change: unauthorized

Explanation The status of the interface controlled port has changed from authorized to
unauthorized.

Message Level Informational

Message Enable super | port-config | read-only password

deleted | added | modified from console | telnet
| ssh| snmp OR Line password deleted | added |
modified from console | telnet | ssh| snmp

Explanation A user created, re-configured, or deleted an Enable or Line password

through the SNMP, console, SSH, or Telnet session.

Message Level Informational

Message ERR_DISABLE: Interface ethernet portnum err-

disable recovery timeout

Explanation Errdisable recovery timer expired and the port has been reenabled.

Message Level Informational

Message ERR_DISABLE: Interface ethernet 16, err-disable

recovery timeout

Explanation If the wait time (port is down and is waiting to come up) expires and the
port is brought up the following message is displayed.

Message Level Informational

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 309

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message ERR_DISABLE: Link flaps on port ethernet 16

exceeded threshold; port in err-disable state

Explanation The threshold for the number of times that a port link toggles from "up" to
"down" and "down" to "up" has been exceeded.

Message Level Informational

Message Interface portnum , line protocol down

Explanation The line protocol on a port has gone down.

The portnum is the port number.

Message Level Informational

Message Interface portnum , line protocol up

Explanation The line protocol on a port has come up.

The portnum is the port number.

Message Level Informational

Message Interface portnum , state down

Explanation A port has gone down.

The portnum is the port number.

Message Level Informational

Message Interface portnum , state up

Explanation A port has come up.

The portnum is the port number.

Message Level Informational

Message MAC Based Vlan Disabled on port port id

Explanation A MAC Based VLAN has been disabled on a port

Message Level Informational

Message MAC Based Vlan Enabled on port port id

310 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation A MAC Based VLAN has been enabled on a port.

Message Level Informational

Message MAC Filter added | deleted | modified from

console | telnet | ssh| snmp session filter id =
MAC filter ID , src MAC = Source MAC address |
any, dst MAC = Destination MAC address | any

Explanation A user created, modified, deleted, or applied this MAC address filter
through the SNMP, console, SSH, or Telnet session.

Message Level Informational

Message MSTP: BPDU-guard interface ethernet port-number

detect (Received BPDU), putting into err-disable
state.

Explanation BPDU guard violation occurred in MSTP.

Message Level Informational

Message OPTICAL MONITORING: port port-number is not

capable.

Explanation The optical transceiver is qualified by Brocade, but the transceiver does not
support digital optical performance monitoring.

Message Level Informational

Message Port p priority changed to n

Explanation A port priority has changed.

Message Level Informational

Message Port portnum , srcip-security max-ipaddr-per-int

reached.Last IP= ipaddr

Explanation The address limit specified by the srcip-security max-ipaddr-per-

interface command has been reached for the port.

Message Level Informational

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 311

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message Port portnum , srcip-security max-ipaddr-per-int

reached.Last IP= ipaddr

Explanation The address limit specified by the srcip-security max-ipaddr-per-

interface command has been reached for the port.

Message Level Informational

Message Security: console login by username to USER |

PRIVILEGE EXEC mode

Explanation The specified user logged into the device console into the specified EXEC
mode.

Message Level Informational

Message Security: console logout by username

Explanation The specified user logged out of the device console.

Message Level Informational

Message Security: telnet | SSH login by username from src

IP i p-address , src MAC mac-address to USER |
PRIVILEGE EXEC mode

Explanation The specified user logged into the device using Telnet or SSH from either
or both the specified IP address and MAC address. The user logged into
the specified EXEC mode.

Message Level Informational

Message Security: telnet | SSH logout by username from

src IP ip-address, src MAC mac-address to USER |
PRIVILEGE EXEC mode

Explanation The specified user logged out of the device. The user was using Telnet or
SSH to access the device from either or both the specified IP address and
MAC address. The user logged out of the specified EXEC mode.

Message Level Informational

Message SNMP read-only community | read-write community |

contact | location | user | group | view |
engineld | trap [host] [ value -str ] deleted |
added | modified from console | telnet | ssh|
snmp session

312 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation A user made SNMP configuration changes through the SNMP, console,
SSH, or Telnet session.

[ value-str ] does not appear in the message if SNMP community or

engineld is specified.

Message Level Informational

Message SNMP Auth. failure, intruder IP: ip-addr

Explanation A user has tried to open a management session with the device using an
invalid SNMP community string.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the host that sent the invalid community
string.

Message Level Informational

Message SSH | telnet server enabled | disabled from

console | telnet | ssh| snmp session [by user
username ]

Explanation A user enabled or disabled an SSH or Telnet session, or changed the SSH
enable/disable configuration through the SNMP, console, SSH, or Telnet
session.

Message Level Informational

Message startup-config was changed or startup-config was

changed by user-name

Explanation A configuration change was saved to the startup-config file.

The user-name is the user ID, if they entered a user ID to log in.

Message Level Informational

Message STP: Root Guard Port port-number, VLAN vlan-ID

consistent (Timeout).

Explanation Root guard unblocks a port.

Message Level Informational

Message STP: Root Guard Port port-number , VLAN vlan-ID

inconsistent (Received superior BPDU).

Explanation Root guard blocked a port.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 313

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message Level Informational

Message STP: VLAN vlan id BPDU-Guard on Port port id

triggered (Received BPDU), putting into err-
disable state

Explanation The BPDU guard feature has detected an incoming BPDU on {vlan-id, port-
id}

Message Level Informational

Message STP: VLAN vlan id Root-Protect Port port id ,

Consistent (Timeout)

Explanation The root protect feature goes back to the consistent state.

Message Level Informational

Message STP: VLAN vlan id Root-Protect Port port id ,

Inconsistent (Received superior BPDU)

Explanation The root protect feature has detected a superior BPDU and goes into the
inconsistent state on { vlan-id , port-id }.

Message Level Informational

Message STP: VLAN vlan-id BPDU-guard port port-number

detect (Received BPDU), putting into err-disable
state

Explanation STP placed a port into an errdisable state for BPDU guard.

Message Level Informational

Message STP: VLAN 1 BPDU-guard port port-number detect

(Received BPDU), putting into err-disable state.

Explanation BPDU guard violation in occurred in STP or RSTP.

Message Level Informational

Message Syslog server IP-address deleted | added |

modified from console | telnet | ssh| snmp OR
Syslog operation enabled | disabled from console
| telnet | ssh| snmp

314 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation A user made Syslog configuration changes to the specified Syslog server
address, or enabled or disabled a Syslog operation through the SNMP,
console, SSH, or Telnet session.

Message Level Informational

Message SYSTEM: Optic is not Brocade-qualified ( port-

number )

Explanation Brocade does not support the optical transceiver.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Fan fan id (from left when facing right

side), ok

Explanation The fan status has changed from fail to normal.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Fan speed changed automatically to fan

speed

Explanation The system automatically changed the fan speed to the speed specified in
this message.

Message Level Informational

Message System: No free TCAM entry. System will be

unstable

Explanation There are no TCAM entries available.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is added from the unit / slot / port to
unit / slot / port on VLANs vlan-id to vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is added to a range of interfaces, which are members of

the specified VLAN range.

Message Level Informational

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 315

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is added to the unit / slot / port to
unit / slot / port on vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is added to a range of interfaces, which are members of

the specified VLAN.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is added to portnumber unit / slot / port
on VLAN vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is added to an interface and the interface is a member of

the specified VLAN.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is deleted from the unit/slot/port to
unit / slot / port on vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is deleted from a range of interfaces, which are members
of the specified VLAN.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is deleted from et he unit / slot / port
to unit / slot / port on VLANs vlan-id to vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is deleted from a range of interfaces, which are members
of the specified VLAN range.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is deleted from portnumber unit / slot /
port on vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is deleted from an interface and the interface is a member
of the specified VLAN.

Message Level Informational

316 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message System: Static MAC entry with MAC Address mac-

address is deleted from portnumber unit / slot /
port on VLANs vlan-id to vlan-id

Explanation A MAC address is deleted from an interface and the interface is a member
of the specified VLAN range.

Message Level Informational

Message telnet | SSH| access [by username ] from src IP

source ip address , src MAC source MAC address
rejected, n attempts

Explanation There were failed SSH, or Telnet login access attempts from the specified
source IP and MAC address.

• [by user username ] does not appear if telnet or SSH clients are
specified.
• n is the number of times this SNMP trap occurred in the last five
minutes, or other configured number of minutes.

Message Informational
Level

Message Trunk group ( ports ) created by 802.3ad link-

aggregation module.

Explanation 802.3ad link aggregation is configured on the device, and the feature has
dynamically created a trunk group (aggregate link).

The ports variable is a list of the ports that were aggregated to make the
trunk group.

Message Level Informational

Message user username added | deleted | modified from

console | telnet | ssh| snmp

Explanation A user created, modified, or deleted a local user account through the
SNMP, console, SSH, or Telnet session.

Message Level Informational

Message vlan vlan id added | deleted | modified from

console | telnet | ssh| snmp session

Explanation A user created, modified, or deleted a VLAN through the SNMP, console,
SSH, or Telnet session.

Message Level Informational

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 317

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message Warm start

Explanation The system software (flash code) has been reloaded.

Message Level Informational

Message Stack: Stack unit unit# has been deleted to the

stack system

Explanation The specified unit has been deleted from the stacking system.

Message Level Informational

Message Stack unit unitNumber has been elected as ACTIVE

unit of the stack system

Explanation The specified unit in a stack has been elected as the Master unit for the
stacking system.

Message Level Informational

Message Stack: Stack unit unit# has been added to the

stack system

Explanation The specified unit has been added to the stacking system.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Management MAC address changed to

mac_address

Explanation The management MAC address of a stacking system has been changed

Message Level Informational

Message System: Stack unit unit# Fan fan#

( description ), failed

Explanation The operational status of a fan in the specified unit in a stack changed from
normal to failure.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Stack unit unit# Power supply power-

supply# is down

318 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation The operational status of a power supply of the specified unit in a stack
changed from normal to failure.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Stack unit unit# Power supply power-

supply# is up

Explanation The operational status of a power supply of the specified unit in a stack
changed from failure to normal.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Stack unit unit# Fan fan#

( description ), ok

Explanation The operational status of a fan in the specified unit in a stack changed from
failure to normal.

Message Level Informational

Message System: Stack unit unitNumbe r Temperature

actual-temp C degrees, warning level warning-temp
C degrees, shutdown level shutdown-temp C degrees

Explanation The actual temperature reading for a unit in a stack is above the warning
temperature threshold.

Message Level Informational

Message vlan vlan-id Bridge is RootBridge mac-address

(MgmtPriChg)

Explanation 802.1W changed the current bridge to be the root bridge of the given
topology due to administrative change in bridge priority.

Message Level Informational

Message vlan vlan-id Bridge is RootBridge mac-address

(MsgAgeExpiry)

Explanation The message age expired on the Root port so 802.1W changed the current
bridge to be the root bridge of the topology.

Message Level Informational

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 319

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message vlan vlan-id interface portnum Bridge TC Event

(DOT1wTransition)

Explanation 802.1W recognized a topology change event in the bridge. The topology
change event is the forwarding action that started on a non-edge
Designated port or Root port.

Message Level Informational

Message vlan vlan-id interface portnum STP state - state

(DOT1wTransition)

Explanation 802.1W changed the state of a port to a new state: forwarding, learning,
blocking. If the port changes to blocking, the bridge port is in discarding
state.

Message Level Informational

Message vlan vlan-id New RootBridge mac-address RootPort

portnum (BpduRcvd)

Explanation 802.1W selected a new root bridge as a result of the BPDUs received on a
bridge port.

Message Level Informational

Message vlan vlan-id New RootPort portnum (RootSelection)

Explanation 802.1W changed the port role to Root port, using the root selection
computation.

Message Level Informational

Message ACL exceed max DMA L4 cam resource, using flow

based ACL instead

Explanation The port does not have enough Layer 4 CAM entries for the ACL.

To correct this condition, allocate more Layer 4 CAM entries. To allocate

more Layer 4 CAM entries, enter the following command at the CLI
configuration level for the interface:

ip access-group max-l4-cam num

Message Level Notification

Message ACL insufficient L4 cam resource, using flow

based ACL instead

320 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation The port does not have a large enough CAM partition for the ACLs

Message Level Notification

Message ACL insufficient L4 session resource, using flow

based ACL instead

Explanation The device does not have enough Layer 4 session entries.

To correct this condition, allocate more memory for sessions. To allocate

more memory, enter the following command at the global CONFIG level of
the CLI interface:

system-max session-limit num

Message Level Notification

Message ACL port fragment packet inspect rate rate

exceeded on port portnum

Explanation The fragment rate allowed on an individual interface has been exceeded.

The rate indicates the maximum rate allowed.

The portnum indicates the port.

This message can occur if fragment thottling is enabled.

Message Level Notification

Message ACL system fragment packet inspect rate rate

exceeded

Explanation The fragment rate allowed on the device has been exceeded.

The rate indicates the maximum rate allowed.

This message can occur if fragment thottling is enabled.

Message Level Notification

Message Authentication Disabled on portnum

Explanation The multi-device port authentication feature was disabled on the on the
specified portnum .

Message Level Notification

Message Authentication Enabled on portnum

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 321

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation The multi-device port authentication feature was enabled on the on the
specified portnum .

Message Level Notification

Message BGP Peer ip-addr DOWN (IDLE)

Explanation Indicates that a BGP4 neighbor has gone down.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the neighbor BGP4 interface with the
Brocade device.

Message Level Notification

Message BGP Peer ip-addr UP (ESTABLISHED)

Explanation Indicates that a BGP4 neighbor has come up.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the neighbor BGP4 interface with the
Brocade device.

Message Level Notification

Message DHCP: snooping on untrusted port portnum , type

number, drop

Explanation Indicates that the DHCP client receives DHCP server reply packets on
untrusted ports, and packets are dropped.

Message Level Notification

Message DOT1X issues software but not physical port down

indication of Port portnum to other software
applications

Explanation The device has indicated that the specified is no longer authorized, but the
actual port may still be active.

Message Level Notification

Message DOT1X issues software but not physical port up

indication of Port portnum to other software
applications

Explanation The device has indicated that the specified port has been authenticated,
but the actual port may not be active.

Message Level Notification

322 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message DOT1X: Port port_id Mac mac_address -user user_id

- RADIUS timeout for authentication

Explanation The RADIUS session has timed out for this 802.1x port.

Message Level Notification

Message ISIS L1 ADJACENCY DOWN system-id on circuit

circuit-id

Explanation The Layer 3 switch adjacency with this Level-1 IS-IS has gone down.

The system-i d is the system ID of the IS-IS.

The circuit-id is the ID of the circuit over which the adjacency was
established.

Message Level Notification

Message ISIS L1 ADJACENCY UP system-id on circuit

circuit-id

Explanation The Layer 3 switch adjacency with this Level-1 IS-IS has come up.

The system-id is the system ID of the IS-IS.

The circuit-id is the ID of the circuit over which the adjacency was
established.

Message Level Notification

Message ISIS L2 ADJACENCY DOWN system-id on circuit

circuit-id

Explanation The Layer 3 switch adjacency with this Level-2 IS-IS has gone down.

The system-id is the system ID of the IS-IS.

The circuit-id is the ID of the circuit over which the adjacency was
established.

Message Level Notification

Message ISIS L2 ADJACENCY UP system-id on circuit

circuit-id

Explanation The Layer 3 switch adjacency with this Level-2 IS-IS has come up.

The system-id is the system ID of the IS-IS.

The circuit-id is the ID of the circuit over which the adjacency was
established.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 323

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message Level Notification

Message Local ICMP exceeds burst-max burst packets,

stopping for lockup seconds!!

Explanation The number of ICMP packets exceeds the burst-max threshold set by the
ip icmp burst command. The Brocade device may be the victim of a
Denial of Service (DoS) attack.

All ICMP packets will be dropped for the number of seconds specified by
the lockup value. When the lockup period expires, the packet counter is
reset and measurement is restarted.

Message Level Notification

Message Local TCP exceeds burst-max burst packets,

stopping for lockup seconds!!

Explanation The number of TCP SYN packets exceeds the burst-max threshold set by
the ip tcp burst command. The Brocade device may be the victim of a
TCP SYN DoS attack.

All TCP SYN packets will be dropped for the number of seconds specified
by the locku p value. When the lockup period expires, the packet counter is
reset and measurement is restarted.

Message Notification
Level

Message Local TCP exceeds num burst packets, stopping for

num seconds!!

Explanation Threshold parameters for local TCP traffic on the device have been
configured, and the maximum burst size for TCP packets has been
exceeded.

The first num is the maximum burst size (maximum number of packets
allowed).

The second num is the number of seconds during which additional TCP
packets will be blocked on the device.

NOTE
This message can occur in response to an attempted TCP SYN attack.

Message Notification
Level

Message MAC Authentication RADIUS timeout for mac_address

on port port_id

324 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Explanation The RADIUS session has timed out for the MAC address for this port.

Message Level Notification

Message MAC Authentication succeeded for mac-address on

portnum

Explanation RADIUS authentication was successful for the specified mac-address on

the specified portnum .

Message Level Notification

Message Module was inserted to slot slot-num

Explanation Indicates that a module was inserted into a chassis slot.

The slot-num is the number of the chassis slot into which the module was
inserted.

Message Level Notification

Message Module was removed from slot slot-num

Explanation Indicates that a module was removed from a chassis slot.

The slot-num is the number of the chassis slot from which the module was
removed.

Message Level Notification

Message OSPF interface state changed,rid router-id , intf

addr ip-addr , state ospf-state

Explanation Indicates that the state of an OSPF interface has changed.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the interface IP address.

The ospf-state indicates the state to which the interface has changed and
can be one of the following:

• down
• loopback
• waiting
• point-to-point
• designated router
• backup designated router
• other designated router
• unknown

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 325

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF intf authen failure, rid router-id , intf

addr ip-addr , pkt src addr src-ip-addr , error
type error-type , pkt type pkt-type

Explanation Indicates that an OSPF interface authentication failure has occurred.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The src-ip-addr is the IP address of the interface from which the Brocade
device received the authentication failure.

The error-type can be one of the following:

• bad version
• area mismatch
• unknown NBMA neighbor
• unknown virtual neighbor
• authentication type mismatch
• authentication failure
• network mask mismatch
• hello interval mismatch
• dead interval mismatch
• option mismatch
• unknown

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF intf config error, rid router-id , intf addr

ip-addr , pkt src addr src-ip-addr , error type
error-type , pkt type pkt-type

Explanation Indicates that an OSPF interface configuration error has occurred.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The src-ip-addr is the IP address of the interface from which the Brocade
device received the error packet.

The error-type can be one of the following:

326 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

• bad version
• area mismatch
• unknown NBMA neighbor
• unknown virtual neighbor
• authentication type mismatch
• authentication failure
• network mask mismatch
• hello interval mismatch
• dead interval mismatch
• option mismatch
• unknown

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF intf rcvd bad pkt, rid router-id , intf addr
ip-addr , pkt src addr src-ip-add r, pkt type
pkt-type

Explanation Indicates that an OSPF interface received a bad packet.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The src-ip-addr is the IP address of the interface from which the Brocade
device received the authentication failure.

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF intf rcvd bad pkt: Bad Checksum, rid ip-
addr , intf addr ip-addr , pkt size num , checksum
num , pkt src addr ip-addr , pkt type type

Explanation The device received an OSPF packet that had an invalid checksum.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 327

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The rid ip-addr is the Brocade router ID.

The intf addr ip-addr is the IP address of the Brocade interface that received
the packet.

The pkt size num is the number of bytes in the packet.

The checksum num is the checksum value for the packet.

The pkt src addr ip-addr is the IP address of the neighbor that sent the
packet.

The pkt type type is the OSPF packet type and can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state acknowledgement
• unknown (indicates an invalid packet type)

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF intf rcvd bad pkt: Bad Packet type, rid ip-
addr, intf addr ip-addr , pkt size num , checksum
num , pkt src addr ip-addr , pkt type type

Explanation The device received an OSPF packet with an invalid type.

The parameters are the same as for the Bad Checksum message. The pkt
type type value is "unknown", indicating that the packet type is invalid.

Message Level Notification

Message OSPF intf rcvd bad pkt: Invalid packet size, rid
ip-addr, intf addr ip-addr, pkt size num ,
checksum num , pkt src addr ip-addr , pkt type
type

Explanation The device received an OSPF packet with an invalid packet size.

The parameters are the same as for the Bad Checksum message.

Message Level Notification

Message OSPF intf rcvd bad pkt: Unable to find associated

neighbor, rid ip-addr, intf addr ip-addr, pkt
size num , checksum num , pkt src addr ip-addr ,
pkt type type

Explanation The neighbor IP address in the packet is not in the list of OSPF neighbors
in the Brocade device.

The parameters are the same as for the Bad Checksum message.

328 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message Level Notification

Message OSPF intf retransmit, rid router-id, intf addr i

p-addr, nbr rid nbr- router-id , pkt type is pkt-
type, LSA type lsa-type , LSA id lsa-id, LSA rid
lsa-router-id

Explanation An OSPF interface on the Brocade device has retransmitted a Link State
Advertisement (LSA).

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The nbr-router-id is the router ID of the neighbor router.

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

The lsa-type is the type of LSA.

The lsa-id is the LSA ID.

The lsa-router-id is the LSA router ID.

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF LSDB approaching overflow, rid router-id ,

limit num

Explanation The software is close to an LSDB condition.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The num is the number of LSAs.

Message Level Notification

Message OSPF LSDB overflow, rid router-id, limit num

Explanation A Link State Database Overflow (LSDB) condition has occurred.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The num is the number of LSAs.

Message Level Notification

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 329

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message OSPF max age LSA, rid router-id , area area-id ,

LSA type lsa-type , LSA id lsa-id , LSA rid lsa-
router-id

Explanation An LSA has reached its maximum age.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The area-id is the OSPF area.

The lsa-type is the type of LSA.

The lsa-id is the LSA ID.

The lsa-router-id is the LSA router ID.

Message Level Notification

Message OSPF nbr state changed, rid router-id , nbr addr

ip-addr , nbr rid nbr-router-Id , state ospf-
state

Explanation Indicates that the state of an OSPF neighbor has changed.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the neighbor.

The nbr-router-id is the router ID of the neighbor.

The ospf-state indicates the state to which the interface has changed and
can be one of the following:

• down
• attempt
• initializing
• 2-way
• exchange start
• exchange
• loading
• full
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF originate LSA, rid router-id , area area-

id , LSA type lsa-type , LSA id lsa-id , LSA
router id lsa-router-id

Explanation An OSPF interface has originated an LSA.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The area-id is the OSPF area.

The lsa-type is the type of LSA.

330 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The lsa-id is the LSA ID.

The lsa-router-id is the LSA router ID.

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF virtual intf authen failure, rid router-id ,

intf addr ip-addr , pkt src addr src-ip-addr ,
error type error-type , pkt type pkt-type

Explanation Indicates that an OSPF virtual routing interface authentication failure has
occurred.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The src-ip-addr is the IP address of the interface from which the Brocade
device received the authentication failure.

The error-type can be one of the following:

• bad version
• area mismatch
• unknown NBMA neighbor
• unknown virtual neighbor
• authentication type mismatch
• authentication failure
• network mask mismatch
• hello interval mismatch
• dead interval mismatch
• option mismatch
• unknown

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF virtual intf config error, rid router-id ,

intf addr ip-addr , pkt src addr src-ip-addr ,
error type error-type , pkt type pkt-type

Explanation Indicates that an OSPF virtual routing interface configuration error has
occurred.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 331

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The src-ip-addr is the IP address of the interface from which the Brocade
device received the error packet.

The error-type can be one of the following:

• bad version
• area mismatch
• unknown NBMA neighbor
• unknown virtual neighbor
• authentication type mismatch
• authentication failure
• network mask mismatch
• hello interval mismatch
• dead interval mismatch
• option mismatch
• unknown

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF virtual intf rcvd bad pkt, rid router-id ,

intf addr ip-addr , pkt src addr src-ip-addr ,
pkt type pkt-type

Explanation Indicates that an OSPF interface received a bad packet.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The src-ip-addr is the IP address of the interface from which the Brocade
device received the authentication failure.

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

332 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message OSPF virtual intf retransmit, rid router-id , intf

addr ip-addr , nbr rid nbr-router-id , pkt type is
pkt-type , LSA type lsa-type , LSA id lsa-id , LSA
rid lsa-router-id

Explanation An OSPF interface on the Brocade device has retransmitted a Link State
Advertisement (LSA).

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the interface on the Brocade device.

The nbr-router-id is the router ID of the neighbor router.

The packet-type can be one of the following:

• hello
• database description
• link state request
• link state update
• link state ack
• unknown

The lsa-type is the type of LSA.

The lsa-id is the LSA ID.

The lsa-router-id is the LSA router ID.

Message Notification
Level

Message OSPF virtual intf state changed, rid router-id ,

area area-id , nbr ip-addr , state ospf-state

Explanation Indicates that the state of an OSPF virtual routing interface has changed.

The router-id is the router ID of the router the interface is on.

The area-id is the area the interface is in.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the OSPF neighbor.

The ospf-state indicates the state to which the interface has changed and
can be one of the following:

• down
• loopback
• waiting
• point-to-point
• designated router
• backup designated router
• other designated router
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 333

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

Message OSPF virtual nbr state changed, rid router-id ,

nbr addr ip-addr , nbr rid nbr-router-id , state
ospf-state

Explanation Indicates that the state of an OSPF virtual neighbor has changed.

The router-id is the router ID of the Brocade device.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the neighbor.

The nbr-router-id is the router ID of the neighbor.

The ospf-state indicates the state to which the interface has changed and
can be one of the following:

• down
• attempt
• initializing
• 2-way
• exchange start
• exchange
• loading
• full
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message Transit ICMP in interface portnum exceeds num

burst packets, stopping for num seconds!!

Explanation Threshold parameters for ICMP transit (through) traffic have been
configured on an interface, and the maximum burst size for ICMP packets
on the interface has been exceeded.

The portnum is the port number.

The first num is the maximum burst size (maximum number of packets
allowed).

The second num is the number of seconds during which additional ICMP
packets will be blocked on the interface.

NOTE
This message can occur in response to an attempted Smurf attack.

Message Notification
Level

Message Transit TCP in interface portnum exceeds num

burst packets, stopping for num seconds!

Explanation Threshold parameters for TCP transit (through) traffic have been configured
on an interface, and the maximum burst size for TCP packets on the
interface has been exceeded.

334 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The portnum is the port number.

The first num is the maximum burst size (maximum number of packets
allowed).

The second num is the number of seconds during which additional TCP
packets will be blocked on the interface.

NOTE
This message can occur in response to an attempted TCP SYN attack.

Message Notification
Level

Message VRRP intf state changed, intf portnum , vrid

virtual-router-id , state vrrp-state VRRP (IPv6)
intf state changed, intf portnum , vrid virtual-
router-id , state vrrp-state

Explanation A state change has occurred in a Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

(VRRP) or VRRP-E IPv4 or IPv6 interface.

The portnum is the port or interface where VRRP or VRRP-E is configured.

The virtual-router-id is the virtual router ID (VRID) configured on the

interface.

The vrrp-state can be one of the following:

• init
• master
• backup
• unknown

Message Notification
Level

Message DOT1X security violation at port portnum ,

malicious MAC address detected: mac-address

Explanation A security violation was encountered at the specified port number.

Message Level Warning

Message Dup IP ip-addr detected, sent from MAC mac-addr

interface portnum

Explanation Indicates that the Brocade device received a packet from another device on
the network with an IP address that is also configured on the Brocade
device.

The ip-addr is the duplicate IP address.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 335

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The mac-addr is the MAC address of the device with the duplicate IP
address.

The portnum is the Brocade port that received the packet with the duplicate
IP address. The address is the packet source IP address.

Message Warning
Level

Message IGMP/MLD no hardware vidx, broadcast to the

entire vlan. rated limited number

Explanation IGMP or MLD snooping has run out of hardware application VLANs. There
are 4096 application VLANs per device. Traffic streams for snooping
entries without an application VLAN are switched to the entire VLAN and to
the CPU to be dropped. This message is rate-limited to appear a maximum
of once every 10 minutes. The rate-limited number shows the number on
non-printed warnings.

Message Warning
Level

Message IGMP/MLD: vlanId(portId) is V1 but rcvd V2 from

nbr ipAddr

Explanation Port has received a query with a MLD version that does not match the port
MLD version. This message is rated-limited to appear a maximum of once
every 10 hours.

Message Level Warning

Message Latched low RX Power | TX Power | TX Bias Current

| Supply Voltage | Temperature warning alarm |
warning, port port-number

Explanation The optical transceiver on the given port has risen above or fallen below
the alarm or warning threshold.

Message Level Warning

Message list ACL-num denied ip-proto src-ip-addr ( src-

tcp / udp-port ) (Ethernet portnum mac-addr ) -
dst-ip-addr ( dst-tcp / udp-port ), 1 event(s)

Explanation Indicates that an Access Control List (ACL) denied (dropped) packets.

The ACL-num indicates the ACL number. Numbers 1 - 99 indicate standard

ACLs. Numbers 100 - 199 indicate extended ACLs.

The ip-proto indicates the IP protocol of the denied packets.

The src-ip-addr is the source IP address of the denied packets.

336 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The src-tcp / udp-port is the source TCP or UDP port, if applicable, of the
denied packets.

The portnum indicates the port number on which the packet was denied.

The mac-addr indicates the source MAC address of the denied packets.

The dst-ip-addr indicates the destination IP address of the denied packets.

The dst-tcp / udp-port indicates the destination TCP or UDP port number, if
applicable, of the denied packets.

Message Warning
Level

Message MAC filter group denied packets on port portnum,

src macaddr mac-addr , num packets

Explanation Indicates that a MAC address filtergroup configured on a port has denied
packets.

The portnum is the port on which the packets were denied.

The mac-addr is the source MAC address of the denied packets.

The num indicates how many packets matching the values above were
dropped during the five-minute interval represented by the log entry.

Message Level Warning

Message multicast no software resource: resource-name ,

rate-limited number

Explanation IGMP or MLD snooping has run out of software resources. This message
is rate-limited to appear a maximum of once every 10 minutes. The rate-
limited number shows the number of non-printed warnings.

Message Level Warning

Message No global IP! cannot send IGMP msg.

Explanation The device is configured for ip multicast active but there is no configured
IP address and the device cannot send out IGMP queries.

Message Level Warning

Message No of prefixes received from BGP peer ip-addr

exceeds warning limit num

Explanation The Layer 3 switch has received more than the allowed percentage of
prefixes from the neighbor.

The ip-addr is the IP address of the neighbor.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 337

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Syslog messages

The num is the number of prefixes that matches the percentage you
specified. For example, if you specified a threshold of 100 prefixes and 75
percent as the warning threshold, this message is generated if the Layer 3
switch receives a 76th prefix from the neighbor.

Message Warning
Level

Message rip filter list list-num direction V1 | V2 denied

ip-addr , num packets

Explanation Indicates that a RIP route filter denied (dropped) packets.

The list-num is the ID of the filter list.

The direction indicates whether the filter was applied to incoming packets or
outgoing packets. The value can be one of the following:

• in
• out

The V1 or V2 value specifies the RIP version (RIPv1 or RIPv2).

The ip-addr indicates the network number in the denied updates.

The num indicates how many packets matching the values above were
dropped during the five-minute interval represented by the log entry.

Message Warning
Level

Message Temperature is over warning level.

Explanation The chassis temperature has risen above the warning level.

Message Level Warning

338 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

● Power over Ethernet overview...................................................................................... 339

● Enabling and disabling Power over Ethernet................................................................ 351
● Disabling support for PoE legacy power-consuming devices....................................... 352
● Enabling the detection of PoE power requirements advertised through CDP...............353
● Setting the maximum power level for a PoE power-consuming device........................ 354
● Setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device........................................ 355
● Setting the power budget for a PoE interface module on an FSX device..................... 356
● Setting the inline power priority for a PoE port .............................................................357
● Resetting PoE parameters............................................................................................ 358
● Displaying Power over Ethernet information................................................................. 359
● Inline power on PoE LAG ports.....................................................................................371
● Decouple PoE and datalink operations on PoE ports................................................... 373

Power over Ethernet overview

This section provides an overview of the requirements for delivering power over the LAN as defined by
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc. (IEEE) in specifications 802.3af (PoE) and
802.3at (PoE+ and High PoE).
Brocade PoE devices provide Power over Ethernet, compliant with the standards described in the IEEE
802.3af specification for delivering inline power. Brocade devices are compliant with both the 802.3af
and 802.3at specifications. The 802.3af specification defined the original standard for delivering power
over existing network cabling infrastructure, enabling multicast-enabled full streaming audio and video
applications for converged services, such as Voice over IP (VoIP), Wireless Local Area Access (WLAN)
points, IP surveillance cameras, and other IP technology devices. The 802.3at specification expands
the standards to support higher power levels for more demanding powered devices, such as video IP
phones, pan-tilt-zoom cameras, and high-power outdoor antennas for wireless access points. Except
where noted, this document uses the term PoE to refer to PoE, PoE+, and High PoE.
For a list of the FastIron devices and modules that support PoE, PoE+, High PoE, Power over HDBaseT
(PoH), or a combination, refer to the FastIron Ethernet Switch Feature and Standards Support Matrix.
PoE technology eliminates the need for an electrical outlet and dedicated UPS near IP powered
devices. With power-sourcing equipment such as a BrocadeFastIron PoE device, power is consolidated
and centralized in wiring closets, improving the reliability and resilience of the network.

Power over Ethernet terms used in this chapter

The following terms are introduced in this chapter:
• High PoE - Covered by IEEE 802.3at 2009, provides up to 60 Watts of power.
• IP powered device (PD) or power-consuming device - The Ethernet device that requires power. It
is situated on the end of the cable opposite the power-sourcing equipment.
• PoE+ - Covered by IEEE 802.at, provides up to 25.5 Watts of power.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 339

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Methods for delivering Power over Ethernet

• PoH - Covered by IEEE 802.3at 2009 and sometimes called power over HDBaseT, provides up to
95 Watts of power to power-consuming devices.
• Power-sourcing device or Power-sourcing equipment (PSE) - The source of the power, or the
device that integrates the power onto the network. Power sourcing devices and equipment have
embedded PoE technology. The Brocade FastIron PoE device is a power sourcing device.

Methods for delivering Power over Ethernet

There are two methods for delivering Power over Ethernet (PoE) as defined in the 802.3af and 802.3at
specifications:
• Endspan - Power is supplied through the Ethernet ports on a power-sourcing device. With the
Endspan solution, power can be carried over the two data pairs (Alternative A) or the two spare
pairs (Alternative B).
• Midspan - Power is supplied by an intermediate power-sourcing device placed between the switch
and the PD. With the Midspan solution, power is carried over the two spare pairs (Alternative B).
With both methods, power is transferred over four conductors, between the two pairs. 802.3af- and
802.3at-compliant PDs are able to accept power from either set of pairs.
Brocade PoE devices use the Endspan method, compliant with the 802.3af and 802.3at standards.
The Endspan and Midspan methods are described in more detail in the following sections.

NOTE
All 802.3af- and 802.3at-compliant power-consuming devices are required to support both application
methods defined in the 802.3af and 802.3at specification.

PoE endspan method

The PoE Endspan method uses the Ethernet switch ports on power-sourcing equipment, such as a
BrocadeFastIron PoE switch, which has embedded PoE technology to deliver power over the network.
With the Endspan solution, there are two supported methods of delivering power. In Alternative A, four
wires deliver data and power over the network. Specifically, power is carried over the live wire pairs
that deliver data as illustrated in the following figure. In Alternative B, the four wires of the spare pairs
are used to deliver power over the network. Brocade PoE devices support Alternative A.
The Endspan method is shown in the following illustration.

340 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PoE midspan method

FIGURE 9

PoE midspan method

The PoE Midspan method uses an intermediate device, usually another PD, to inject power into the
network. The intermediate device is positioned between the switch and the PD and delivers power over
the network using the spare pairs of wires (Alternative B). The intermediate device has multiple
channels (typically 6 to 24), and each of the channels has data input and a data-plus-power RJ-45
output connector.
The Midspan method is illustrated in the following figure.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 341

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PoE autodiscovery

FIGURE 10

PoE autodiscovery
PoE autodiscovery is a detection mechanism that identifies whether an installed device is 802.3af- or
802.3at-compatible. When you plug a device into an Ethernet port that is capable of providing inline
power, the autodiscovery mechanism detects whether the device requires power and how much power
is needed. The autodiscovery mechanism also has a disconnect protection mechanism that shuts
down the power once a PD has been disconnected from the network or when a faulty PD has been
detected. This feature enables safe installation and prevents high-voltage damage to equipment.
PoE autodiscovery is achieved by periodically transmitting current or test voltages that can detect
when a PD is attached to the network. When an 802.3af- or 802.3at-compatible device is plugged into
a PoE, PoE+, or PoH port, the PD reflects test voltage back to the power-sourcing device (the Brocade
device), ultimately causing the power to be switched on. Devices not compatible with 802.3af do not
reflect test voltage back to the power-sourcing device.

Power class
A power class determines the amount of power a PD receives from power-sourcing equipment. When
a valid PD is detected, the Brocade PoE device performs power classification by inducing a specific
voltage and measuring the current consumption of the PD. Depending on the measured current, the
appropriate class is assigned to the PD. PDs that do not support classification are assigned a class of
0 (zero). The following table shows the different power classes and their respective power
consumption needs.

342 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

TABLE 40 Power classes for PDs

Class Usage Power (watts) from Power-Sourcing Device

Standard PoE PoE+ High PoE Power over

HDBaseT (PoH)

0 default 15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4

1 optional 4 4 4 4

2 optional 7 7 7 7

3 optional 15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4

4 optional N/A 301 601 2 95

Power specifications
The 802.3af (PoE) standard limits power to 15.4 watts (44 to 50 volts) from the power-sourcing device,
in compliance with safety standards and existing wiring limitations. Though limited by the 802.3af
standard, 15.4 watts of power was ample for most PDs, which consumed an average of 5 to 12 watts of
power (IP phones, wireless LAN access points, and network surveillance cameras each consume an
average of 3.5 to 9 watts of power). The 802.3at 2008 (PoE+) standard nearly doubles the power,
providing 30 watts (52 to 55 volts) from the power-sourcing device. The 802.3at 2009 (High PoE)
standard increases available power again, to 60 watts for High PoE and 95 watts for Power over
HDBase-T (PoH).

NOTE
PoH ports on Brocade devices allocate 95 watts for PoE+, High PoE, and PoH PDs.

The PoE power supply provides power to the PoE circuitry block and ultimately to PoE power-
consuming devices. The number of PoE power-consuming devices that one PoE power supply can
support depends on the number of watts required by each power-consuming device and the capacity of
the power supply or power supplies. Each PoE or PoE+ port supports a maximum of 15.4 or 30 watts of
power per power-consuming device. Each PoH port supports a maximum of 95 watts of power (lower
wattage can be negotiated through LLDP messages).
As an example, if each PoE power-consuming device attached to a FastIron PoE device is budgeted to
consume 30 watts of power, one 720- or 748-watt power supply can power up to 24 PoE ports. With the
exception of the ICX6430-C12 and the ICX6450-C12-PD, FastIron platforms support either a second
power supply or an external power supply (EPS) to augment PoE power budget, depending on the
product. Refer to the power supply specifications in the Brocade FastIron hardware installation guide for
the appropriate FastIron device.
By default, a FastIron device pre-allocates power of 15.4 for a physically operational PoE configured
port, 30 watts for a PoE+ configured port, and 95 watts for a PoH port. However, in an ICX 6450-C12
device that is operational without a direct power supply and has pass-through power, there is no pre-
allocation. Instead, power is allocated only when a powered device is connected to the port. By default,
the amount of power allocated depends on the power class of the powered device.

1 First eight ports of Brocade ICX 7450-24P or ICX 7450-48P supply 95w unless PD negotiates lower power requirement through LLDP
protocol messages.
2 Maximum power required for High PoE is 60 watts.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 343

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Dynamic upgrade of PoE power supplies

Dynamic upgrade of PoE power supplies

NOTE
This section applies to the FSX 800 and FSX 1600 chassis with PoE power supplies.
PoE+ requires higher power levels than standard PoE. In a chassis running software release 07.2.00
or higher, POE power supplies (SX-ACPWR-POE) are upgraded dynamically to 52 or 54 volts,
depending on the maximum operating voltage the power supplies are capable of. The preferred
voltage mode for PoE+ is 54 volts.
For safety reasons, all PoE power supplies installed in the chassis must operate at the same voltage
mode, either 52 volts or 54 volts. The system selects the voltage mode of the power supply with the
lowest supported voltage as the voltage mode for all PoE power supplies installed in the chassis. For
example, in an FSX 800 chassis with one 52-volt capable PoE power supply and one 54-volt capable
PoE power supply, both power supplies are configured dynamically to operate at 52 volts.
PoE+ voltage selection occurs during each of the following events:
• When the device is powered ON or is rebooted
• When a PoE power supply is installed in the chassis
• When a PoE power supply is removed from the chassis
These events are described in detail in the following sections.

NOTE
A PoE power supply upgrade does not persist beyond a single power cycle. An upgrade occurs
automatically each time a power supply is re-inserted in the chassis.
You can use the show inline power detail command to display detailed information about the PoE
power supplies installed in a FastIron PoE device. For more information, refer to section Displaying
detailed information about PoE power supplies on page 364.

CAUTION

The SX-POE-AC-PWR power supply is designed exclusively for use with the BrocadeFSX PoE
devices. The power supply produces extensive power to support 802.3af and 802.3at
applications. Installing the power supply in a device other than the BrocadeFSX PoE device will
cause extensive damage to your equipment.

Voltage selection during bootup

During bootup, the system selects the voltage mode (either 52 volts or 54 volts) of the power supply
with the lowest supported voltage as the voltage mode for all PoE power supplies installed in the
chassis. For example, if there is at least one power supply that supports 52 volts maximum, then all
power supplies are configured to operate at 52 volts, even if other supplies are 54 volts-capable. Once
the operating voltage is applied, the system displays and logs a warning message similar to the
following:

device(config)#
Power supply 1 (from left when facing front side) detected.
Power supply 1 (from left when facing front side) is up.
WARNING: PoE power supplies in slots 1 are down rev. PoE/PoE+ function will work,
but output power may be less than 50V under worst case load.

If all power supplies are 54 volts-capable, then all power supplies are configured to operate at 54 volts.
In this case, the system does not display or log a warning message.

344 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Voltage selection when a PoE power supply is installed

Voltage selection when a PoE power supply is installed

When a PoE power supply is hotswapped into the chassis, the system automatically adjusts the voltage
to match that of the PoE power supply or supplies that are currently installed in the chassis.
The following examples describe how the voltage is selected when a PoE power supply is installed:
• If a 54 volt-capable power supply is installed in a chassis that is operating with 52 volt-capable power
supplies, the newly installed power supply is set to operate at 52 volts.
• If a 54 volt-capable power supply is installed in a chassis that is operating with 54 volt-capable power
supplies, the newly installed power supply is set to operate at 54 volts.
• If a 52 volt-capable power supply is installed in a chassis that is operating with 54 volt-capable power
supplies that are actively providing power, the system rejects the newly installed power supply since
it cannot safely operate with the 54 volt-capable power supplies. In this case, the 52-volt power
supply is powered OFF, and an error message similar to the following is displayed on the console.

device(config)#
Power supply 1 (from left when facing front side) detected.
Power supply 1 (from left when facing front side) is up.
Shutting down power supply in slot 1 because it is not compatible with the existing
PoE power supplies. Please remove and replace.

When the system is next reloaded, the power supply voltage will be selected as described in the section
Voltage selection during bootup on page 344.
• If a 52 volt-capable power supply is installed in a chassis that is operating with 54 volt-capable power
supplies that are not actively providing power, the system configures the power supplies to operate at
52 volts. In this case, the newly installed 52-volt power supply is not powered OFF, and a message
similar to the following is displayed on the console.

NOTE: Automatically downgraded all PoE power supplies to 52V.

Voltage selection when a PoE power supply is removed

If a 52 volt PoE power supply is removed from the chassis, the system surveys the remaining power
supplies to determine if they are 54 volts-capable. If the remaining supplies are 54 volts-capable and
the system is not currently providing power to any PDs, the software upgrades the voltage of all
supplies to 54 volts. The system displays and log a message similar to the following:

NOTE: Automatically upgraded all PoE power supplies to 54V.

However, if the system is currently providing power to one or more PDs, the system does not upgrade
the voltage level. When the system is next reloaded, the power supply voltage is selected as described
in the section Voltage selection during bootup on page 344.

Power over Ethernet cabling requirements

The 802.3af and 802.3at standards currently support PoE and PoE+ on 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet
ports operating over standard Category 5 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable or better. If your network
uses cabling categories less than Category 5, you cannot implement PoE without first upgrading your
cables to Category 5 UTP cable or better. PoH has the following cabling requirements based on
distance:
• Cat 5e - 25 meters
• Cat 6/6a - 55 meters
• Cat 7 - 100 meters.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 345

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Supported powered devices

Supported powered devices

Brocade PoE devices support a wide range of IP powered devices, including the following:
• Voice over IP (VoIP) phones
• Wireless LAN access points
• IP surveillance cameras
The following sections briefly describe these IP powered devices.

VoIP
Voice over IP (VoIP) is the convergence of traditional telephony networks with data networks. VoIP
uses the existing data network infrastructure as the transport system for both services. Voice is
traditionally transported on a network that uses circuit-switching technology, but data networks are
built on packet-switching technology. To achieve this convergence, technology has been developed to
take a voice signal, which originates as an analog signal, and transport it within a digital medium. This
is done by devices such as VoIP telephones that receive the originating tones and place them in UDP
packets. The size and frequency of these UDP packets depends on the coding / decoding (CODEC)
technology that has been implemented in the VoIP telephone or device. The VoIP control packets use
TCP/IP format.

IP surveillance cameras
IP surveillance technology provides digital streaming of video over Ethernet, providing real-time,
remote access to video feeds from cameras.
The main benefit of using IP surveillance cameras on the network is that you can view surveillance
images from any computer on the network. If you have access to the Internet, you can securely
connect from anywhere in the world to view a chosen facility or even a single camera from your
surveillance system. By using a Virtual Private Network (VPN) or the company intranet, you can
manage password-protected access to images from the surveillance system. Similar to secure
payment over the Internet, images and information are kept secure and can be viewed only by
approved personnel.

Installing PoE firmware

This section lists the PoE firmware file types supported and the procedure to install them on the FSX,
FCX, and ICX devices.

Firmware image file types

The following table lists PoE firmware files. The firmware files are specific to each device and cannot
be used in any other device.

TABLE 41 PoE Firmware files

Product PoE Firmware

FSX Gen 1 & 2 modules fsx_poe_06.0.6.fw

FSX Gen 3 modules fsx_poeplus_02.1.0.fw

346 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Installing PoE firmware with TFTP

TABLE 41 PoE Firmware files (Continued)

Product PoE Firmware

FCX fcx_poeplus_02.1.0.b004.fw

ICX 64xx icx64xx_poeplus_02.1.0.b004.fw

ICX 6450-C12 icx64xxc12_poeplus_02.03.09.fw

ICX 6610 fcx_poeplus_02.1.0.b004.fw

ICX 7250 icx72xx_poeplus_01.6.1.b009.fw

ICX 7450 icx74xx_poh_01.6.1.b009.fw

Installing PoE firmware with TFTP

PoE firmware is stored in the PoE controller of the FastIron switch. You can install PoE firmware from
the TFTP server on a FastIron switch using CLI commands. To do so, you should have a valid firmware
image on the TFTP server.

NOTE
The PoE firmware upgrade feature is not supported in FIPS mode on Brocade devices.

NOTE
You can install PoE firmware only on one switch at a time. To install PoE firmware on stacked units, you
need to install it individually on every switch in the stack.

NOTE
The CLI syntax to install PoE firmware is different on FSX, FCX, and ICX platforms.

NOTE
Installation of PoE firmware interrupts PoE services on the individual device or module as it is
upgraded. PoE service restarts once PoE firmware installation is complete.
1. Place the PoE firmware on a TFTP server to which the Brocade device has access.
2. Copy the PoE firmware from the TFTP server into the switch as shown in the following examples. Be
sure to use the correct file image for the platform.
To install PoE firmware on FCX and ICX platforms, use the inline power install-firmware stack-
unit command as shown in the following example.

device# inline power install-firmware stack-unit 1 tftp 10.120.54.161

fcx_poeplus_07400.fw

Syntax: inline power install-firmware [stack-unit |unit-number] tftp ip-address filename

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 347

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

To install PoE firmware on an FSX platform, use the inline power install-firmware command as
shown in the example.

device# inline power install-firmware module 1 tftp 10.120.54.161

fsx_poe_07400.fw

Syntax: inline power install-firmware module slot tftp ip-address filename

Stack-unit (FCX and ICX platforms) refers to the unit-id of the switch. If the switch is not a part of
the stack, the unit number will be the default value. The default value for stack-unit is 1.
Slot (FSX platform) refers to the slot of the PoE module.
ip-address refers to the IP address of the TFTP server.
Filename refers to the name of the file, including the pathname.
ip-address refers to the IP address of the tftp server.
Filename refers to the name of the file, including the pathname.
To install firmware on a stack, you need to install firmware on one switch at a time with the inline
power install-firmware stack-unit command.

deviceFamily_Stack# inline power install-firmware stack-unit 3 tftp 10.20.65.51

icx64xx_poeplus_02.1.0.b004.fw

The process of PoE installation begins. You should see output similar to the following.

Family_Stack# Flash Memory Write (8192 bytes per dot) ..............

tftp download successful stackId = 3 file name = poe-fw
Sending PoE Firmware to Stack Unit 3.
Flash Memory Write (8192 bytes per dot) ...................
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/1 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/2 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/3 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/4 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/5 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/6 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/7 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/8 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/9 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/10 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/11 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/12 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/13 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/14 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/15 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/16 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/17 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/18 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/19 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/20 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/21 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/22 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/23 because of power management.
PoE: Power disabled on port 3/1/24 because of power management.
U3-MSG: PoE Warning: Upgrading firmware in slot 1....DO NOT HOTSWAP OR POWER DOWN
THE MODULE.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending download command...
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...TPE response received.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending erase command...
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...erase command...accepted.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...erasing firmware memory...
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...erasing firmware memory...completed
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending program command...
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending program command...accepted.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...programming firmware...takes around 12
minutes....
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....10 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....20 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....30 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....40 percent completed.

348 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Upgrading the PoE firmware file using SCP

U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....50 percent completed.

U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....60 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....70 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....80 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....90 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....100 percent completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...programming firmware...completed.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...upgrading firmware...completed. Module
will be reset.
U3-MSG: PoE Info: Resetting module in slot 1....completed.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/13. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/14. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/15. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/16. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/17. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/18. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/19. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/20. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/21. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/22. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/23. Will retry when more
power budget.
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 3/1/24. Will retry when more
power budget.

3. After the firmware is downloaded into the controller, the controller resets and reboots with the new
PoE firmware, You should see output similar to the following.
[MEMBER]local-3@ICX6450-24P Router>Download request from active unit 1 mac =
748e.f8dc.b39c
Downloading - poe.fw
Done.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults.....
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults. Step 1: Writing port defaults on module in
slot 1....
PoE Info: Programming Brocade Defaults: Step 2: Writing PM defaults on module in
slot 1.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults. Step 3: Writing user byte 0xf0 on module
in slot 1.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults. Step 4: Saving settings on module in slot
1.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults....completed.

[MEMBER]local-3@ICX6450-24P Router>

NOTE
If you are attempting to transfer a file using TFTP but have received an error message, refer to
Firmware image file types on page 346.

Upgrading the PoE firmware file using SCP

To use the PoE feature, download the PoE firmware file. You can then install it using SCP as shown in
the following procedure.

NOTE
In a stack, you must install the PoE firmware on each individual member unit.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 349

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 PoE and CPU utilization

1. Place the PoE firmware file on an SCP-enabled host to which the Brocade device has access.
2. Copy the PoE firmware file from the SCP-enabled host into the switch by entering the following
command on the SCP-enabled host.
For FCX, ICX 6430, ICX 6450, ICX 6610, ICX 7250, and ICX 7450 devices:
pscp firmware hostname@management-ip:firmware:stackid:stack-id

For FSX devices:

pscp firmware hostname@management-ip:firmware:moduleid:module-id
For example:
C:/>pscp fsx_poe_07400.fw [email protected]:firmware:stackid:1

The process of PoE firmware installation begins. In the FastIron device CLI, you should see output
similar to the following.
Brocade(config)# scp download successful stackId = 1 file name = poe-fw
Sending PoE Firmware to Stack Unit 1.
PoE Warning: Upgrading firmware in slot 1....DO NOT SWITCH OVER OR POWER DOWN
THE UNIT.
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending download command...
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...TPE response received.
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending erase command...
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...erase command...accepted.
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...erasing firmware memory...
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...erasing firmware memory...completed
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending program command...
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...sending program command...accepted.
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...programming firmware...takes around 6
minutes....
Brocade(config)# U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....10 percent
completed.

U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....20 percent completed.

U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....30 percent completed.
U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....40 percent completed.

U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....50 percent completed.

U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....60 percent completed.
U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....70 percent completed.
U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....80 percent completed.
U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....90 percent completed.
U1-MSG: PoE Info: Firmware Download on slot 1.....100 percent completed.
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...programming firmware...completed.
PoE Info: FW Download on slot 1...upgrading firmware...completed. Module will
be reset.
3. After the firmware file is loaded into the device, the device resets and reboots with the new PoE
firmware. You should see output similar to the following.
PoE Info: Resetting in slot 1....
PoE Info: Resetting module in slot 1....completed.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults.....
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults. Step 1: Writing port defaults on
module in slot 1....
PoE Info: Programming Brocade Defaults: Step 2: Writing PM defaults on module
in slot 1.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults. Step 3: Writing user byte 0xf0 on
module in slot 1.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults. Step 4: Saving settings on module in
slot 1.
PoE Info: Programming Brocade defaults....completed

PoE and CPU utilization

Depending on the number of PoE-configured ports that have active power devices, there may be a
slight and noticeable increase of up to 15 percent in CPU utilization. This is normal behavior for PoE
and in typical scenarios does not affect the functionality of other features on the switch.

350 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling and disabling Power over Ethernet

Enabling and disabling Power over Ethernet

To enable a port to receive inline power for power-consuming devices, use the inline power command
for the appropriate port. Here is an example.

device# configure terminal

device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1
device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power

Once you have entered the commands to enable inline power, the console displays the following
message.

device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# PoE Info: Power enabled on port 1/1/1.

The following example disables inline power on a range of ports.

ICX7250-48P Router# configure terminal
ICX7250-48P Router(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1 to 1/1/48
ICX7250-48P Router(config-mif-1/1/1-1/1/48)# no inline power
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/1 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/2 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/3 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/4 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/5 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/6 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/7 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/8 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/9 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/10 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/11 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/12 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/13 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/14 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/15 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/16 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/17 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/18 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/19 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/20 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/21 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/22 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/23 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/24 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/25 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/26 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/27 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/28 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/29 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/30 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/31 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/32 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/33 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/34 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/35 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/36 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/37 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/38 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/39 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/40 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/41 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/42 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/43 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/44 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/45 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/46 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/47 because of admin off.
PoE: Power disabled on port 1/1/48 because of admin off.

ICX7250-48P Router(config-mif-1/1/1-1/1/48)#

Syntax: [no] inline power [device/slot/port] [to device/slot/port]

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 351

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Disabling support for PoE legacy power-consuming devices

Use the no form of the command to disable the port from receiving inline power.

NOTE
Inline power should not be configured between two switches, as it may cause unexpected behavior.

NOTE
FastIron PoE and PoE+ devices can automatically detect whether a power-consuming device is
802.3af- or 802.3at-compliant.

Disabling support for PoE legacy power-consuming devices

Brocade PoE devices automatically support most legacy power-consuming devices (devices not
compliant with 802.3af 802.3at), as well as all 802.3af- and 802.3at-compliant devices. If desired, you
can disable and re-enable support for legacy PoE power-consuming devices on a global basis (on the
entire device) or on individual slots (FSX 800 and FSX 1600 chassis devices only). When you disable
legacy support, 802.3af- and 802.3at-compliant devices are not affected.
To disable support for legacy power-consuming devices on a non-stackable device, enter the following
command at the global CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config)# no legacy-inline-power

To disable support for legacy power-consuming devices on a stackable device, enter the following
command at the stack unit CONFIG level of the CLI.

device(config-unit-2)# no legacy-inline-power

On chassis devices, you can disable support for legacy power-consuming devices per slot. To disable
legacy support on all ports in slot 2, enter the following command at the global CONFIG level of the
CLI.

device(config)# no legacy-inline-power 2

NOTE
The no legacy-inline-power command does not require a software reload if it is entered prior to
connecting the PDs. If the command is entered after the PDs are connected, the configuration must be
saved (write memory ) and the software reloaded after the change is placed into effect.
Syntax: [no] legacy-inline-power [slotnum]

NOTE
By default, the inline-power command reserves 30 watts. On PoH ports, inline-power reserves 95
watts.

To re-enable support for legacy power-consuming devices after it has been disabled, enter the
legacy-inline-power command (without the no parameter).
The slotnum variable is required for chassis devices when you disable or re-enable legacy support on
a slot.

352 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Enabling the detection of PoE power requirements advertised through CDP

Use the show run command to view whether support for PoE legacy power-consuming devices is
enabled or disabled.
The following example turns off support for legacy inline power on an FSX 800.

SX800-3J31-u7(config)# leg
legacy-inline-power set legacy (capacitance-based) PD detection -
default
SX800-3J31-u7(config)# legacy-inline-power
DECIMAL Slot number
<cr>
SX800-3J31-u7(config)# legacy-inline-power 8
SX800-3J31-u7(config)# no leg
legacy-inline-power set legacy (capacitance-based) PD detection -
default
SX800-3J31-u7(config)# no legacy-inline-power 8

The following example turns off legacy inline power for a single stack unit.

ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config)# no legacy-inline-power

The following example turns off legacy inline power support on the entire stack.

ICX7250-24-3J32# configure terminal

ICX7250-24-3J32 (config)# stack unit 12
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config)# no legacy-inline-power

Enabling the detection of PoE power requirements advertised through

CDP
Many power-consuming devices, such as Cisco VoIP phones and other vendors’ devices, use the Cisco
Discovery Protocol (CDP) to advertise their power requirements to power-sourcing devices, such as
Brocade PoE devices. Brocade power-sourcing equipment is compatible with Cisco and other vendors’
power consuming devices and can detect and process power requirements for these devices
automatically.

NOTE
If you configure a port with a maximum power level or a power class for a power-consuming device, the
power level or power class takes precedence over the CDP power requirement. If you want a device to
adhere to the CDP power requirement, do not configure a power level or power class on the associated
port.

Command syntax for PoE power requirements

To enable the Brocade device to detect CDP power requirements, enter the following commands.

device# configure terminal

device(config)# cdp run

Syntax: [no] cdp run

Use the no form of the command to disable the detection of CDP power requirements.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 353

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Setting the maximum power level for a PoE power-consuming device

Setting the maximum power level for a PoE power-consuming device

When PoE is enabled on a port to which a power-consuming device, or PD, is attached, by default, a
Brocade PoE device supplies 15.4 watts of power at the RJ-45 jack, minus any power loss through the
cables. A PoE+ device supplies either 15.4 or 30 watts of power (depending on the type of PD
connected to the port), minus any power loss through the cables. A PoH device supplies 15.4, 30, or
95 watts of power (depending on the type of PD connected to the port), minus any power loss through
the cables.
As an example, a PoE port with a default maximum power level of 15.4 watts receives a maximum of
12.95 watts of power after 2.45 watts of power loss through the cable. This is compliant with the IEEE
802.3af and 802.3at specifications for delivering inline power. Devices that are configured to receive
less PoE power, for example, 4.0 watts of power, experience a lower rate of power loss through the
cable.
If desired, you can manually configure the maximum amount of power that the Brocade PoE device
supplies at the RJ-45 jack.

Considerations for setting power levels

Consider the following when enabling this feature:
• There are two ways to configure the power level for a PoE, PoE+, or High PoE power-consuming
device. The first method is discussed in this section. The other method is provided in the section
Setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device on page 355. For each PoE port, you
can configure either a maximum power level or a power class. You cannot configure both. You can,
however, configure a maximum power level on one port and a power class on another port.
• The Brocade PoE, PoE+, or High PoE device adjusts the power on a port only if there are available
power resources. If power resources are not available, the following message is displayed on the
console and in the Syslog:
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 1/1/21. Will retry when more
power budget.
• If you are not using High PoE or PoH devices in any of the first 8 ports of the ICX7450-48P or
ICX7450-24P, Brocade recommends that you limit the power on those ports using the inline power
power-limit command. Limiting power with the inline power power-by-class 4 command does not
work for the ICX7450 because Class 4 encompasses 30-95W. However, Class 4 on units that do
not support PoH or High Power is still 30W.
• FastIron devices pre-allocate power as per the configured maximum power for a physically
operational PoE, PoE+, or High PoE configured port. However, in an ICX 6450-C12 device that is
operational without direct power supply and that has pass-through power, there is no pre-allocation
of power. Instead, power is allocated only when a powered device is connected to the port.

Configuring power levels command syntax

To configure the maximum power level for a power-consuming device, use the inline power power-
limit command as shown in the following example.

device# configure terminal

device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1
device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power power-limit 14000

These commands enable inline power on interface ethernet 1 in slot 1 of unit 1 and set the PoE power
level to 14,000 milliwatts (14 watts).
Syntax: inline power power-limit power-level

354 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device

The power level variable is the maximum power level in number of milliwatts. The following values are
supported:
• PoE - Enter a value from 1000 through 15,400. The default is 15,400.
• PoE+ - Enter a value from 1000 through 30,000. The default is 30,000.
• PoH - Enter a value from 1000 through 95,000. The default is 95,000. Value is always adjusted to
nearest multiple of 5.

NOTE
Do not configure a power level higher than the default listed. Setting the power level higher than the
default could damage the PD.

For information about resetting the maximum power level, refer to Resetting PoE parameters on page
358.

Setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device

A power class specifies the maximum amount of power that a Brocade PoE, PoE+, or PoH device
supplies to a power-consuming device. The following table shows the different power classes and their
respective maximum power allocations.

TABLE 42 Power classes for PDs

Class Usage Power (watts) from Power-Sourcing Device

Standard PoE PoE+ Power over HDBaseT

(PoH)

0 default 15.4 15.4 15.4

1 optional 4 4 4

2 optional 7 7 7

3 optional 15.4 15.4 15.4

4 optional 15.4 30 95

Refer to Considerations for setting power levels on page 354 for essential information. Consider the
following points when setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device.
• The power class includes any power loss through the cables. For example, a PoE port with a power
class of 3 (15.4 watts) receives a maximum of 12.95 watts of power after 2.45 watts of power loss
through the cable. This is compliant with the IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at specifications for delivering
inline power. Devices that are configured to receive less PoE power, for example, class 1 devices
(4.0 watts), experience a lower rate of power loss through the cable.
• The Brocade PoE, PoE+, or PoH device adjusts the power on a port only if there are available power
resources. If power resources are not available, the following message is displayed on the console
and in the Syslog:
PoE: Failed power allocation of 30000 mwatts on port 1/1/21. Will retry when more
power budget.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 355

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Setting the power class command syntax

Setting the power class command syntax

To configure the power class for a PoE power consuming device, enter commands such as the
following.

ICX7250-48P Switch# configure terminal

ICX7250-48P Switch(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1
ICX7250-48P Switch(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power power-by-class 4
Warning: Inline power configuration on port 1/1/1 has been modified.
ICX7250-48P Switch(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# show inline power 1

Power Capacity: Total is 720000 mWatts. Current Free is 690000 mWatts.

Power Allocations: Requests Honored 3 times

Port Admin Oper ---Power(mWatts)--- PD Type PD Class Pri Fault/

State State Consumed Allocated Error
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/1 On On 14460 30000 802.3af Class 3 3 n/a

These commands enable inline power on interface ethernet 1 in slot 1 of unit 1 and set the power
class to 2.
Syntax: inline power power-by-class class value
The class value variable is the power class. Enter a value between 0 and 4. The default is 0. The table
in Setting the power class for a PoE power-consuming device on page 355 shows the different power
classes and their respective maximum power allocations.
For information about resetting the power class, refer to Resetting PoE parameters on page 358.

Setting the power budget for a PoE interface module on an FSX

device
By default, each PoE and PoE+ interface module has a maximum power budget of 65535 watts.
On an FSX device, you can change the amount of power allocated to each PoE or PoE+ interface
module installed in the chassis.

NOTE
FSX does not support PoH.
To change the power allocation on an FSX device, use the inline power budget command as shown
in the following example.

device(config)# inline power budget 150000 module 7

In the previous example, the command allocates 150000 milliwatts (150 watts) to the PoE interface
module in slot 7. The command takes effect immediately. The results are displayed in the "power
budget" column in the show inline power detail output. The configuration (inline power budget
150000 module 7) is displayed in the show running-config output.
Syntax: inline power budget num module slot
The num variable is the number of milliwatts to allocate to the module. Enter a value from 0 through
65535000.
The slot variable specifies where the PoE or PoE+ module resides in the chassis.

356 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Setting the inline power priority for a PoE port

Setting the inline power priority for a PoE port

In a configuration where PoE power-consuming devices collectively have a greater demand for power
than the PoE power supply or supplies can provide, the FastIron PoE device must place the PoE ports
that it cannot power in standby or denied mode (waiting for power) until the available power increases.
The available power increases when one or more PoE ports are powered down, or, if applicable, when
an additional PoE power supply is installed in the FastIron PoE device.
When PoE ports are in standby or denied mode (waiting for power) and the FastIron PoE device
receives additional power resources, by default, the device allocates newly available power to the
standby ports in priority order, with the highest priority ports first, followed by the next highest priority
ports, and so on. Within a given priority, standby ports are considered in ascending order, by slot
number and then by port number, provided enough power is available for the ports. For example, PoE
port 1/1/11 should receive power before PoE port 1/2/1. However, if PoE port 1/1/11 needs 12 watts of
power and PoE port 1/2/1 needs 10 watts of power, but only 11 watts of power become available on the
device, the FastIron PoE device allocates the power to port 1/2/1 because it does not have sufficient
power for port 1/1/11.
You can configure an inline power priority on PoE ports, so that ports with a higher inline power priority
take precedence over ports with a low inline power priority. For example, if a new PoE port comes
online and the port is configured with a high priority, if necessary (if power is already fully allocated to
power consuming devices), the FastIron PoE device removes power from a PoE port or ports that have
a lower priority and allocates the power to the PoE port that has the higher value.
Ports that are configured with the same inline power priority are given precedence based on the slot
number and port number in ascending order, provided enough power is available for the port. For
example, if both PoE port 1/1/2 and PoE port 1/2/1 have a high inline power priority value, PoE port
1/1/2 receives power before PoE port 1/2/1. However, if PoE port 1/1/2 needs 12 watts of power and
PoE port 1/2/1 needs 10 watts of power, but only 11 watts of power become available on the device, the
FastIron PoE device allocates the power to PoE port 1/2/1 because it does not have sufficient power for
port 1/1/2. By default, all ports are configured with a low inline power priority.

Command syntax for setting the inline power priority for a PoE port
To configure an inline power priority for a PoE port on a FastIron PoE device, use the inline power
priority command as shown in the following example.
ICX7250-48P Switch# configure terminal
ICX7250-48P Switch(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1
ICX7250-48P Switch(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power
decouple-datalink Decouple PoE from data link operational behavior
power-by-class Allocate power based on class of the power devices
power-limit Allocate power based on specified limit
priority Priority class for the purpose of power management
<cr>
ICX7250-48P Switch(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power priority
DECIMAL Priority value 1..3 (highest..lowest)
<cr>
ICX7250-48P Switch(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power priority 1
Warning: Inline power configuration on port 1/1/1 has been modified.

In the previous example, the command enables inline power on interface ethernet 1 in slot 1 of unit 1
and sets the inline power priority level to high.
Syntax: [no] inline power priority priority num
The priority num parameter is the inline power priority number. The default is 3 (low priority). You can
specify one of the following values:

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 357

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Resetting PoE parameters

• 3 - Low priority
• 2 - High priority
• 1 - Critical priority
Use the inline power command without a priority number to reset a port priority to the default (low)
priority.
Use the no inline power command to disable the port from receiving inline power.
For information about resetting the inline power priority, refer to "Resetting PoE parameters."
To view the inline power priority for all PoE ports, issue the show inline power command at the
Privileged EXEC level of the CLI. Refer to "Displaying PoE operational status."

Resetting PoE parameters

You can override or reset PoE port parameters including power priority, power class, and maximum
power level. To do so, you must specify each PoE parameter in the CLI command line. This section
provides some CLI examples.

NOTE
When you reset PoE parameters on an FSX 800 or FSX 1600, you reset the parameters for the entire
PoE chassis.
1--Changing a PoE port power priority from low to high
To change a PoE port power priority from low (the default value) to high and keep the current
maximum configured power level of 3000, enter commands such as the following.

device# configure terminal

device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1
device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power priority 2 power-limit 3000

You must specify both the inline power priority and the maximum power level (power-limit command),
even though you are keeping the current configured maximum power level at 3000. If you do not
specify the maximum power level, the device will apply the default value. Also, you must specify the
inline power priority before specifying the power limit.
2--Changing a port power class from 2 to 3
To change a port power class from 2 (7 watts maximum) to 3 (15.4 watts maximum) and keep the
current configured power priority of 2, enter commands such as the following.

device#configure terminal
device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1
device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power priority 2 power-by-class 3

You must specify both the power class and the inline power priority, even though you are not changing
the power priority. If you do not specify the power priority, the device will apply the default value of 3
(low priority). Also, you must specify the inline power priority before specifying the power class.
The following example sets PoE parameters on interface 2/1/1 in stack unit 12.

ICX7250-24-3J32# configure terminal

ICX7250-24-3J32(config)# stack unit 12
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config)# interface ethernet 2/1/1
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config-if-e1000-2/1/1)# inline power
decouple-datalink Decouple PoE from data link operational behavior
power-by-class Allocate power based on class of the power devices
power-limit Allocate power based on specified limit

358 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying Power over Ethernet information

priority Priority class for the purpose of power management

<cr>
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config-if-e1000-2/1/1)# inline power priority
DECIMAL Priority value 1..3 (highest..lowest)
<cr>
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config-if-e1000-2/1/1)# inline power priority 3
power-by-class Allocate power based on class of the power devices
power-limit Allocate power based on specified limit
<cr>
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config-if-e1000-2/1/1)# inline power priority 3 power-limit 14000
ICX7250-24-3J32-u12(config-if-e1000-2/1/1)#

Displaying Power over Ethernet information

The show commands described in this section are available for viewing PoE operational status, PD
data, and PoE power supply status.

Displaying PoE operational status

The show inline power command displays operational information about Power over Ethernet.
You can view the PoE operational status for the entire device, for a specific PoE module only, or for a
specific interface only. In addition, you can use the show inline power detail command to display in-
depth information about PoE power supplies. To display PoE data specific to PD ports, use the show
inline power pd command.
The following example displays show inline power command output for a PoE device.

ICX7250-48P Router# show inline power

Power Capacity: Total is 720000 mWatts. Current Free is 384000 mWatts.

Power Allocations: Requests Honored 146 times

Port Admin Oper ---Power(mWatts)--- PD Type PD Class Pri Fault/

State State Consumed Allocated Error
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/1 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/2 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/3 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/4 On On 6573 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/5 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/6 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/7 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/8 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/9 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/10 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/11 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/12 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/13 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/14 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/15 On On 5915 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/16 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/17 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/18 On On 6573 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/19 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/20 On On 6573 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/21 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/22 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/23 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/24 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/25 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/26 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/27 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/28 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/29 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 359

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

1/1/30 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a

1/1/31 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/32 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/33 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/34 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/35 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/36 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/37 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/38 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/39 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/40 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/41 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/42 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/43 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/44 On On 6479 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/45 On On 6291 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/46 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/47 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
1/1/48 On On 6385 7000 802.3af Class 2 3 n/a
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 306950 336000

Syntax: show inline power [device/slot/port]

TABLE 43 Field definitions for the show inline power command

Column Definition

Power Capacity The total PoE power supply capacity and the amount of available power (current free) for PoE
power consuming devices. Both values are shown in milliwatts.

Power The number of times the device fulfilled PoE requests for power.
Allocations

Port The slot number and port number.

Admin State Specifies whether or not Power over Ethernet has been enabled on the port. This value can be
one of the following:

• On - The inline power command was issued on the port.

• Off - The inline power command has not been issued on the port.

Oper State Shows the status of inline power on the port. This value can be one of the following:

• On - The PoE power supply is delivering inline power to the PD.

• Off - The PoE power supply is not delivering inline power to the PD.
• Denied - The port is in standby mode (waiting for power) because the device does not
currently have enough available power for the port.

NOTE
When you enable a port using the CLI, it may take 12 or more seconds before the operational
state of that port is displayed correctly in the show inline power output.

Power The number of current, actual milliwatts that the PD is consuming.

Consumed

Power The number of milliwatts allocated to the port. This value is either the default or configured
Allocated maximum power level, or the power class that was automatically detected by the device.

360 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

TABLE 43 Field definitions for the show inline power command (Continued)

Column Definition

PD Type The type of PD connected to the port. This value can be one of the following:

• 802.3at - The PD connected to this port is 802.3at-compliant.802.3af - The PD connected to

this port is 802.3af-compliant.
• Legacy - The PD connected to this port is a legacy product (not 802.3af-compliant).
• N/A - Power over Ethernet is configured on this port, and one of the following is true:

‐ The device connected to this port is a non-powered device.

‐ No device is connected to this port.
‐ The port is in standby or denied mode (waiting for power).

PD Class Determines the maximum amount of power a PD receives. The table in the section Setting the
power class for a PoE power-consuming device on page 355 shows the different power classes
and their respective maximum power allocations.

This field can also be "Unknown" when the device attached to the port cannot advertise its
power class.

NOTE
If an 802.3at PD with a class 4 value is connected to a Brocade FastIron switch, the switch must
be running FastIron release 08.0.20 or later to be able to perform the necessary power
negotiations.

Pri The port in-line power priority , which determines the order in which the port will receive power
while in standby mode (waiting for power). Ports with a higher priority will receive power before
ports with a low priority. This value can be one of the following:

• 3 - Low priority
• 2 - High priority
• 1 - Critical priority

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 361

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying PoE data specific to PD ports

TABLE 43 Field definitions for the show inline power command (Continued)

Column Definition

Fault/Error If applicable, this is the fault or error that occurred on the port. This value can be one of the
following:

• critical temperature - The PoE chip temperature limit rose above the safe operating level,
thereby powering down the port.
• detection failed - discharged capacitor - The port failed capacitor detection (legacy PD
detection) because of a discharged capacitor. This can occur when connecting a non-PD on
the port.
• detection failed - out of range capacitor - The port failed capacitor detection (legacy PD
detection) because of an out-of-range capacitor value. This can occur when connecting a
non-PD on the port.
• internal h/w fault - A hardware problem has hindered port operation.
• lack of power - The port has shut down due to lack of power.
• main supply voltage high - The voltage was higher than the maximum voltage limit, thereby
tripping the port.
• main supply voltage low - The voltage was lower than the minimum voltage limit, thereby
tripping the port.
• overload state - The PD consumes more power than the maximum limit configured on the
port, based on the default configuration, user configuration, or CDP configuration.
• over temperature - The port temperature rose above the temperature limit, thereby powering
down the port.
• PD DC fault - A succession of underload and overload states, or a PD DC/DC fault, caused
the port to shutdown.
• short circuit - A short circuit was detected on the port delivering power.
• underload state - The PD consumes less power than the minimum limit specified in the
802.3af standard.
• voltage applied from ext src - The port failed capacitor detection (legacy PD detection)
because the voltage applied to the port was from an external source.

Total The total power in milliwatts being consumed by all PDs connected to the Interface module, and
the total power in milliwatts allocated to all PDs connected to the Interface module.

Grand Total The total number of current, actual milliwatts being consumed by all PDs connected to the
FastIron PoE device, and the total number of milliwatts allocated to all PDs connected to the
FastIron PoE device.

Displaying PoE data specific to PD ports

The show inline power pd command displays operational information specific to the PD ports.
This command displays information about the number of PD ports available, how much PD power is
available to PSE, how much PD power is currently switched to PSE, and the PD port level status.
If a PD module is present, then the command displays the following global power information for the
PD ports:
• Total PD power available to PSE
• Total PD power switched to PSE

362 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

In the absence of valid PSU power, the total PD power switched is equal to that available to PSE, as
shown in the following example.
device# show inline power pd
Number of PD Ports: 2
Total PD Power Available to PSE: 22400
Total PD Power Switched to PSE: 22400
Port Oper Oper Fault/
State Mode Error
--------------------------------
1/2/1 On 802.3at n/a
1/2/2 On 802.3at n/a

The following shows an example of the show inline power pd display output on a PoE device with the
internal PSU up and no PD ports on.
device# show inline power pd
Number of PD Ports: 2
Total PD Power Available to PSE: 0
Total PD Power Switched to PSE: 0

Port Oper Oper Fault/

State Mode Error
--------------------------------
1/2/1 Off n/a n/a
1/2/2 Off n/a n/a

The following shows an example of the show inline power pd display output on a PoE device with the
internal PSU up and one PD port on in the AT mode.
device# show inline power pd
Number of PD Ports: 2
Total PD Power Available to PSE: 0
Total PD Power Switched to PSE: 0

Port Oper Oper Fault/

State Mode Error
--------------------------------
1/2/1 On 802.3at n/a
1/2/2 Off n/a n/a

The following shows an example of the show inline power pd display output on a PoE device with the
internal PSU down and two PD ports on in the AT mode.
device# show inline power pd
Number of PD Ports: 2
Total PD Power Available to PSE: 22400
Total PD Power Switched to PSE: 22400

Port Oper Oper Fault/

State Mode Error
--------------------------------
1/2/1 On 802.3at n/a
1/2/2 On 802.3at n/a

The following example of the show inline power pd command output is displayed for devices such as
the ICX 6430-C12 that do not support PD ports.
device# show inline power pd
The cli is not applied to this platform

Syntax: show inline power pd

TABLE 44 Field definitions for the show inline power pd command

Column Definition

Number of PD Ports The number of PD ports in the system.

Total PD Power Total PD power available to PSE.

Available to PSE

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 363

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying detailed information about PoE power supplies

TABLE 44 Field definitions for the show inline power pd command (Continued)

Column Definition

Total PD Power Total PD power switched to PSE. It is either 0 or the total available power.
Switched to PSE

Port The port number of the PD port.

Oper State The operational state of the PD port. This value can be one of the following:

• On - The PD port is linked to a PSE port and is consuming power.

• Off - The PD port is not linked to a PSE port and is not consuming power.

Oper Mode The operational mode of the PD port. This value is meaningful if Oper State is On. This
value can be one of the following:

• 802.3af - The PD port is operating in the AF mode.

• 802.3at - The PD port is operating in the AT mode.
• n/a - The PD port is not operational.

Fault/Error Shows the error or fault conditions affecting the PD port. This value can be one of the
following:

• An error or fault code is displayed.

• n/a - No error or fault condition on the PD port.

Displaying detailed information about PoE power supplies

The show inline power detail command displays detailed operational information about the PoE
power supplies in FastIron PoE switches. The command output differs on FCX POE+ switches
compared to FSX Series and ICX switches.
The following is an example of the show inline power detail command output on an FCX POE+
switch.

device# show inline power detail

Power Supply Data On stack 1:
++++++++++++++++++
Power Supply #1:
Max Curr: 7.5 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 410 Watts
POE Details Info. On Stack 1 :
General PoE Data:
+++++++++++++++++
Firmware
Version
--------
02.1.0
Cumulative Port State Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
#Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports
Admin-On Admin-Off Oper-On Oper-Off Off-Denied Off-No-PD Off-Fault
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
45 3 0 48 0 45 0
Cumulative Port Power Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
#Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power
Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation
-----------------------------------------------
0 0 45 0.0 W 0.0 W
Power Supply Data On stack 2:

364 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

++++++++++++++++++
Power Supply Data:
++++++++++++++++++
Power Supply #1:
Max Curr: 7.5 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 410 Watts
POE Details Info. On Stack 2 :
General PoE Data:
+++++++++++++++++
Firmware
Version
--------
02.1.0
... continued on next page...
Slot #Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power Power
Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation Budget
------------------------------------------------------------------
3 0 0 48 513.468 W 739.200 W 65535.0 W
4 0 0 48 1349.320 W 1440.0 W 65535.0 W
------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:0 0 96 1862.788 W 2179.200 W 131070.0 W
... continued from previous page...
Cumulative Port State Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
#Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports
Admin-On Admin-Off Oper-On Oper-Off Off-Denied Off-No-PD Off-Fault
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 4 0 24 0 20 0
Cumulative Port Power Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
#Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power
Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation
-----------------------------------------------
20 0 0 0.0 W 0.0 W
Power Supply Data On stack 3:
++++++++++++++++++
Power Supply #1:
Max Curr: 7.5 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 410 Watts
POE Details Info. On Stack 3 :
General PoE Data:
+++++++++++++++++
Firmware
Version
--------
02.1.0
Cumulative Port State Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
#Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports
Admin-On Admin-Off Oper-On Oper-Off Off-Denied Off-No-PD Off-Fault
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
22 2 0 24 0 22 0
Cumulative Port Power Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
#Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power
Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation
-----------------------------------------------
0 10 12 0.0 W 0.0 W

The following is an example of the show inline power detail command output on a FSX Series PoE
switch.

device# show inline power detail

Power Supply Data:
++++++++++++++++++
PoE+ Max Operating Voltage: 54 V
Power Supply #1:
Model Number: 32004000
Serial Number: 093786124716
Firmware Ver: 1.6
Test Date: 9/12/09 (mm/dd/yy)
H/W Status: 807
Max Curr: 50.0 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 2500 Watts

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 365

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

PoE Capacity: 2260 Watts

Consumption: 2095 Watts
General PoE Data:
+++++++++++++++++
Slot Firmware
Version
--------------
3 Device 1: 02.1.0 Device 2: 02.1.0
4 Device 1: 02.1.0 Device 2: 02.1.0
6 02.1.0
7 Device 1: 02.1.0 Device 2: 02.1.0
8 02.1.0
Cumulative Port State Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Slot #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports
Admin-On Admin-Off Oper-On Oper-Off Off-Denied Off-No-PD Off-Fault
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 48 0 48 0 0 0 0
4 48 0 48 0 0 0 0
6 24 0 0 24 0 24 0
7 48 0 4 44 44 0 0
8 24 0 0 24 0 24 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:192 0 100 92 44 48 0
... continued on next page...
... continued from previous page...
Cumulative Port Power Data:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Slot #Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power Power
Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation Budget
------------------------------------------------------------------
3 0 0 48 513.90 W 739.200 W 65535.0 W
4 0 0 48 1346.497 W 1440.0 W 65535.0 W
6 0 0 24 0.0 W 0.0 W 65535.0 W
7 0 0 48 43.72 W 61.600 W 65535.0 W
8 0 0 24 0.0 W 0.0 W 65535.0 W
------------------------------------------------------------------
Total:0 0 192 1902.659 W 2240.800 W 327675.0 W

The following is an example of show inline power detail command output for an ICX 7250 stack.

ICX7250-48p-3J32-u10#show inline power detail

Power Supply Data On stack 1:

++++++++++++++++++

Power Supply Data:

++++++++++++++++++

Power Supply #1:

Max Curr: 13.3 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 720 Watts
Power Supply #2:
Max Curr: 6.6 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 360 Watts
Power Supply #3:
Max Curr: 6.6 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 360 Watts

POE Details Info. On Stack 1 :

General PoE Data:

+++++++++++++++++

Firmware
Version
----------------
01.2.1 Build 003

366 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

Cumulative Port State Data:

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++

#Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports

Admin-On Admin-Off Oper-On Oper-Off Off-Denied Off-No-PD Off-Fault
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
48 0 0 48 0 47 1

Cumulative Port Power Data:

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++

#Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power

Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation
-----------------------------------------------
0 0 48 0.0 W 0.0 W

ICX7250-48p-3J32-u10#

The following example provides details on an ICX 7250 connected to an EPS.

ICX7250-24P Router# show chassis

The stack unit 1 chassis info:

Power supply 1 (NA - AC - PoE) present, status ok

Power supply 1 Fan Air Flow Direction: Front to Back
Power supply 2 (NA - DC - PoE) present, status ok

Fan 1 ok, speed (manual): [[1]]<->2

Fan 2 ok, speed (manual): [[1]]<->2

Fan controlled temperature:

Rule 1/2 (MGMT THERMAL PLANE): 49.0 deg-C
Rule 2/2 (PoE THERMAL PLANE): 40.5 deg-C

Fan speed switching temperature thresholds:

Rule 1/2 (MGMT THERMAL PLANE):
Speed 1: NM<----->93 deg-C
Speed 2: 82<----->105 deg-C (shutdown)
Rule 2/2 (PoE THERMAL PLANE):
Speed 1: NM<----->58 deg-C
Speed 2: 49<----->105 deg-C (shutdown)

Fan 1 Air Flow Direction: Front to Back

Fan 2 Air Flow Direction: Front to Back
Slot 1 Current Temperature: 49.0 deg-C (Sensor 1), 39.5 deg-C (Sensor 2)
Slot 2 Current Temperature: NA
Warning level.......: 100.0 deg-C
Shutdown level......: 105.0 deg-C
Boot Prom MAC : cc4e.24b4.906c
Management MAC: cc4e.24b4.906c

ICX7250-24P Router# show inline power

Power Capacity: Total is 720000 mWatts. Current Free is 0 mWatts.

Power Allocations: Requests Honored 82 times

Port Admin Oper ---Power(mWatts)--- PD Type PD Class Pri Fault/

State State Consumed Allocated Error
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/1 On On 28264 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/2 On On 28921 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/3 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/4 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/5 On On 28452 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/6 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/7 On On 28452 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/8 On On 28358 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/9 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/10 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/11 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 367

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

1/1/12 On On 28170 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a

1/1/13 On On 28264 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/14 On On 28264 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/15 On On 26010 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/16 On On 28358 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/17 On On 28546 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/18 On On 28640 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/19 On On 28640 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/20 On On 28640 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/21 On On 28640 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/22 On On 28640 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/23 On On 28452 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
1/1/24 On On 28640 30000 802.3at Class 4 3 n/a
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 679371 720000

ICX7250-24P Router# show inline power detail

Power Supply Data On stack 1:

++++++++++++++++++

Power Supply Data:

++++++++++++++++++

Power Supply #1:

Max Curr: 6.6 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 360 Watts
Power Supply #2:
Max Curr: 6.6 Amps
Voltage: 54.0 Volts
Capacity: 360 Watts

POE Details Info. On Stack 1 :

General PoE Data:

+++++++++++++++++

Firmware
Version
----------------
01.6.1 Build 009

Cumulative Port State Data:

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++

#Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports #Ports

Admin-On Admin-Off Oper-On Oper-Off Off-Denied Off-No-PD Off-Fault
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
24 0 24 0 0 0 0

Cumulative Port Power Data:

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++

#Ports #Ports #Ports Power Power

Pri: 1 Pri: 2 Pri: 3 Consumption Allocation
-----------------------------------------------
0 0 24 679.371 W 720.0 W

ICX7250-24P Router#

Syntax: show inline power detail

368 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

TABLE 45 Field definitions for the show inline power detail command

Column Definition

Power supply data

PoE+ Max Operating Voltage This field is applicable to FSX 800 and FSX 1600 PoE+ chassis devices only. It
displays the maximum operating voltage supported by the PoE power supply.
Possible values are:

• 52 V
• 54 V

Model Number The manufacturing part number of the PoE power supply. Values are eight digits in
length and begin with "32" or "30" for example:

• 32016000
• 32007000

Serial Number The serial number of the PoE power supply, for example, AA100730213.

Firmware Ver The PoE power supply firmware version.

Test Date The PoE power supply firmware test date in the format mm/dd/yyyy.

H/W Status The PoE power supply hardware status code. This field is used by Brocade
Technical Support for troubleshooting.

Max Curr The PoE power supply maximum current capacity.

Voltage The PoE power supply current input voltage.

Capacity The PoE power supply total power capacity (in watts).

PoE Capacity The PoE power supply PoE power capacity (in watts).

Consumption The total number of watts consumed by PoE power consuming devices and PoE
modules in the system, plus any internal or cable power loss.

NOTE
Under the lower total inline power consumption level by Powered Devices (PDs) on
FSX 800 and FSX 1600 devices, the power consumption displayed by the power
supply units (PSUs) is inaccurately displayed as lower than the actual power
consumption of the PSUs due to the sensitivity limitations of power supply
measurements.

General PoE data

Slot The device/slot/port number.

Firmware Version The firmware version for the device/slot/port.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 369

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

TABLE 45 Field definitions for the show inline power detail command (Continued)

Column Definition

Cumulative port state data

NOTE
When you enable a port using the CLI, it may take 12 or more seconds before the operational state of that port is
displayed correctly in the show inline power output.

Slot The Interface device/slot/port number.

#Ports Admin-On The number of ports on the Interface module on which the inline power command
was issued.

#Ports Admin-Off The number of ports on the Interface module on which the inline power command
was not issued.

#Ports Oper-On The number of ports on the Interface module that are receiving inline power from
the PoE power supply.

#Ports Oper-Off The number of ports on the Interface module that are not receiving inline power
from the PoE power supply.

#Ports Off-Denied The number of ports on the Interface module that were denied power because of
insufficient power.

#Ports Off-No-PD The number of ports on the Interface module to which no PDs are connected.

#Ports Off-Fault The number of ports on the Interface module that are not receiving power because
of a subscription overload.

Total The totals for all of the fields in the Cumulative Port State Data report.

Cumulative port power data

Slot The device/slot/port number.

#Ports Pri: 1 The number of PoE ports on the Interface module that have a PoE port priority of 1.

#Ports Pri: 2 The number of PoE ports on the Interface module that have a PoE port priority of 2.

#Ports Pri: 3 The number of PoE ports on the Interface module that have a PoE port priority of 3.

Power Consumption The total number of watts consumed by PoE power consuming devices, plus any
cable loss.

Power Allocation The number of watts allocated to the Interface module PoE ports. This value is the
sum of the ports’ default or configured maximum power levels, or power classes
automatically detected by the FastIron PoE device.

370 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Inline power on PoE LAG ports

TABLE 45 Field definitions for the show inline power detail command (Continued)

Column Definition

Power Budget The power budget allocated to the slot. The default value is 65535 watts. Any other
value indicates that the power budget was configured using the CLI command
inline power budget .

Total The totals for all of the fields in the Cumulative Port Power Data report.

Inline power on PoE LAG ports

The inline power on Power over Ethernet (PoE) LAG ports feature allows you to enable inline power on
PoE LAG ports with the introduction of a new inline power ethernet command, available in global
configuration mode.

Without the inline power ethernet command, you cannot enable inline power on any secondary LAG
ports because the interface configuration mode is not available for LAG secondary ports to run the
inline power command.
You can configure inline power in interface configuration mode on a port that is not a member of a LAG.
If that port then becomes part of a LAG, you can use the inline power ethernet command to configure
inline power parameters on any other port in that LAG.
LAG operational changes can affect the PoE power state unless the decouple-datalink keyword is
used as a command option when configuring inline power on the LAG ports. For more information, refer
to “Decouple the PoE and datalink operations on PoE ports.”
After configuring inline power on PoE ports, you can verify the configuration using the show running-
config command. If you have configured inline power on a regular PoE port in either global
configuration or interface configuration mode, the inline power configuration commands display under
the interface configuration level. If a regular PoE port becomes a PoE LAG port, or a PoE LAG port is
configured under global configuration mode, the inline power configuration commands display under the
global configuration level. If a LAG is removed, the inline power configuration commands for all ports
display under the interface configuration level.

WARNING
If you downgrade to a release earlier than 08.0.01, there is no backwards compatibility for the inline
power ethernet command or the decouple-datalink keyword.

Restriction
If you want to keep decoupling in place on a PoE port when you configure the inline power ethernet
command to change its other parameters, for example, priority, you must also configure the decouple-
datalink keyword.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 371

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring inline power on PoE ports in a LAG

Configuring inline power on PoE ports in a LAG

Perform the following steps to configure and deploy a link aggregation group (LAG) on the required
PoE ports on both the Brocade power sourcing equipment (PSE) and the PD. This task also enables
inline power on the PoE ports.

1. Configure a LAG.
The following example onfigures a static LAG named mylag with an ID of 5.

Device(config)# lag "mylag" static id 5

2. Configure ports into the LAG membership.
The following example configures the four ports, 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/1/3, and 1/1/4, into the LAG
membership.

Device(config-lag-mylag)# ports ethernet 1/1/1 to 1/1/4

3. Configure a primary port for the LAG.
The following example configures port 1/1/1 as the primary port.

Device(config-lag-mylag)# primary-port 1/1/1

4. Deploy the LAG.
The following example deploys the mylag LAG.

Device(config-lag-mylag)# deploy
5. Configure inline power on the primary port with the power-by-class option.
The following example configures inline power on the primary port,1/1/1, with power-by-class option
3.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/1 power-by-class 3

6. Configure inline power on a secondary port with the default option.
The following example configures inline power on port 1/1/2 with the default option.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/2

7. Configure inline power on a secondary port with the power management option.
The following example configures inline power on port 1/1/3 with power management option 2. The
range is 1 (lowest) to 3 (highest). The default is 1.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/3 priority 2

8. Configure inline power on a secondary port, specifying the actual power value.
The following example configures inline power on the port 1/1/4, specifying an actual power value of
12000 mWatts.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/4 power-limit 12000

372 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Decouple PoE and datalink operations on PoE ports

Decouple PoE and datalink operations on PoE ports

Although PoE and datalink operations are functionally independent of each other, some datalink
operations affect the operational behavior of PoE ports. The Decoupling of PoE and Datalink
Operations feature allows you to override the current default behavior.

The following are some example datalink operations that can affect the operational state of the PoE on
PoE ports:
• Using disable or enable CLI on the power sourcing equipment (PSE) port interface
• Adding or deleting a tagged PSE port from a VLAN or VLAN group
• The PSE port enters an ErrDisable state
• Adding or deleting a PSE port from a LAG and deploying it
When the optional decouple-datalink keyword is configured using the inline power or inline power
ethernet command, the datalink operational behavior on a PoE port does not affect the power state of
the powered device (PD) that is connecting to the port. You can also configure the power limits and
power-management priority. The inline power command is available in interface configuration mode for
most PoE ports, and the inline power ethernet command is available in global configuration mode for
LAG ports.
The feature Decoupling of Inline Power and Datalink Operations on PoE Ports is useful when a PoE
port is powering a PD that serves a PSE device such as the ICX 6450-C12-PD.

NOTE
The decouple-datalink keyword was introduced in Release 08.0.01 to support the Decoupling of PoE
and Datalink Operations feature. Decoupling of inline power and datalinks is not supported in releases
earlier than Release 08.0.01.

WARNING
If you downgrade to a release earlier than 08.0.01, there is no backwards compatibility for the
decouple-datalink keyword or the inline power ethernet command.

Restriction
If you want to keep decoupling in place on a PoE port when you configure the inline power ethernet
command to change its other parameters, for example, priority, you must also configure the decouple-
datalink keyword.

Decoupling of PoE and datalink operations on PoE LAG ports

Perform the following steps to decouple the behavior of the Power over Ethernet (PoE) and the datalink
operations for PoE Link Aggregation Group (LAG) ports.

This task provides a method of overriding the current default behavior of datalink operations that affect
the operation of PoE ports. If you use the optional decouple-datalink keyword when enabling inline
power with the inline power ethernet command, the datalink operational behavior on a PoE port does
not affect the power state of the powered device (PD) that is connecting to the port.
Configure this task on the Brocade PSE for any PoE ports that require the decoupling of inline power
and datalink operations. Any Layer 2 features can then be configured and deployed on these PoE ports.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 373

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Decoupling of PoE and datalink operations on regular PoE ports

To avoid the disruption of inline power after the LAG ports are powered up, perform the following
configuration steps in order.
1. Configure inline power on the primary port with the power-by-class option.
The following example configures inline power on the primary port,1/1/1, with power-by-class option
3 and decouples the datalink operations and the inline power for this port.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/1 decouple-datalink power-by-class 3

2. Configure inline power on a secondary port with the default option.
The following example configures inline power on port 1/1/2 and decouples the datalink operations
and the inline power for this port.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/2 decouple-datalink

3. Configure inline power on a secondary port with the power-management priority option.
The following example configures inline power on port 1/1/3 with power-management priority 2 and
decouples the datalink operations and the inline power for this port.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/3 decouple-datalink priority 2

4. Configure inline power on a secondary port, specifying the actual power value.
The following example configures inline power on the port 1/1/4, specifying an actual power value of
12000 mWatts, and decouples the datalink operations and the inline power for this port.

Device(config)# inline power ethernet 1/1/4 decouple-datalink power-limit 12000

5. Configure a LAG.
The following example configures a static LAG named mylag with an ID of 5.

Device(config)# lag "mylag" static id 5

6. Configure ports into the LAG membership.
The following example configures the four ports, 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/1/3, and 1/1/4, into the LAG
membership.

Device(config-lag-mylag)# ports ethernet 1/1/1 to 1/1/4

7. Configure a primary port for the LAG.
The following example configures port 1/1/1 as the primary port.

Device(config-lag-mylag)# primary-port 1/1/1

8. Deploy the LAG.
The following example deploys the mylag LAG.

Device(config-lag-mylag)# deploy
LAG mylag deployed successfully!

Decoupling of PoE and datalink operations on regular PoE ports

Use this procedure to decouple PoE and datalink operations on regular PoE ports.

While PoE and datalink operations are functionally independent of each other, some datalink
operations affect the operational behavior of PoE ports. When the optional decouple-datalink
keyword is configured using the inline power command, the datalink operational behavior on a PoE
port does not affect the power state of the powered device (PD) that is connecting to the port. You can

374 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

also configure the power limits and power-management priority. The inline power command is
available in interface configuration mode for most PoE ports and the inline power ethernet command
is available in global configuration mode for LAG ports.
Perform the following steps to enable inline power and decouple the behavior of the Power over
Ethernet (PoE) and the datalink operations for regular PoE ports. This task provides a method of
overriding the current default behavior of datalink operations that affect the operation of PoE ports. If
you use the optional decouple-datalink keyword when enabling inline power using the inline power
command, the datalink operational behavior on a PoE port does not affect the power state of the
powered device (PD) that is connecting to the port.

NOTE
To enable inline power and decouple PoE and datalink operations on PoE LAG ports, refer to
“Decoupling of PoE and datalink operations on PoE LAG ports.”
Perform this task on the Brocade PSE for any PoE ports that require the decoupling of PoE operations
and datalink operations. Any Layer 2 features can then be configured and deployed on these PoE ports.
1. Enable interface configuration for a PoE port.
The following example enters interface configuration mode for Ethernet port 1/1/1.

Device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/1

2. Configure inline power on the Ethernet 1/1/1 port with the power-by-class option.
The following example configures inline power on the PoE port, Ethernet 1/1/1, with power-by-class
option 3 and decouples the datalink operations from the PoE operations for this port.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# inline power decouple-datalink power-by-class 3

3. Enable interface configuration for Ethernet 1/1/2 port.
The following example enters interface configuration mode for Ethernet port 1/1/2.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/1)# interface ethernet 1/1/2

4. Configure inline power on Ethernet 1/1/2 port with the default option.
The following example configures inline power on Ethernet 1/1/2 port and decouples the datalink
operations from the PoE operations for this port.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/2)# inline power decouple-datalink

5. Enable interface configuration for Ethernet 1/1/3 port.
The following example enters interface configuration mode for Ethernet port 1/1/3.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/2)# interface ethernet 1/1/3

6. Configure inline power on Ethernet port 1/1/3 with the power-management priority option.
The following example configures inline power on port 1/1/3 with power-management priority 2 and
decouples the datalink operations from the PoE operations for this port.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/3)# inline power decouple-datalink priority 2

7. Enables interface configuration for Ethernet 1/1/4 port.
The following example enters interface configuration mode for Ethernet port 1/1/4.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/3)# interface ethernet 1/1/4

8. Configure inline power on Ethernet 1/1/4 port, specifying the actual power value.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 375

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Power over Ethernet

The following example configures inline power on Ethernet port 1/1/4 port, specifies an actual power
value of12000 mWatts, and decouples the datalink operations and the PoE operations for this port.

Device(config-if-e1000-1/1/4)# inline power decouple-datalink power-limit 12000

376 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 40 Gbps Breakout Ports

● Overview of 40 Gbps breakout ports.............................................................................377

● Configuring 40 Gbps breakout ports............................................................................. 378
● Configuring sub-ports....................................................................................................379
● Removing breakout configuration................................................................................. 381
● Displaying information for breakout ports......................................................................383

Overview of 40 Gbps breakout ports

A 40 Gbps breakout cable can be used on ICX 7750 standalone units to break out certain 40 Gbps
ports into four 10 Gbps sub-ports.
The 40 Gbps breakout cable is available for use on ICX 7750-48C, ICX 7750-48F, and ICX 7750-26Q
models.

NOTE
Any interface-level configuration must be removed from a 40 Gbps port before it can be broken out into
sub-ports. Refer to Configuring 40 Gbps breakout ports on page 378 for more information.

NOTE
Breakout can be configured only when the device is in store-and-forward mode. Breakout is not
supported in cut-through mode.

NOTE
Stacking cannot be enabled on ICX 7750 units that have breakout configuration on any 40 Gbps ports.
Ports available for breakout are shown for each model in the following table. Refer to the ICX 7750
Ethernet Switch Hardware Installation Guide for information on installing breakout cables.

TABLE 46 ICX 7750 ports available for breakout

ICX 7750-48C ICX 7750-48F ICX 7750-26Q

Module 1 N/A N/A 1/1/5 through 1/1/16 (12 ports)

Module 2 1/2/1 through 1/2/6 (6 ports) 1/2/1 through 1/2/6 (6 ports) 1/2/1 through 1/2/6 (6 ports)

Module 3 1/3/1 through 1/3/6 (6 ports) 1/3/1 through 1/3/6 (6 ports) 1/3/1 through 1/3/6 (6 ports)

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 377

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring 40 Gbps breakout ports

Configuring 40 Gbps breakout ports

Use the breakout ethernet command to divide available ICX 7750 40 Gbps ports into four 10 Gbps
sub-ports when a breakout cable is attached.
By default, all main 40 Gbps ports are configured to come up in 40 Gbps mode. Once ports are cabled
for breakout, configure the ports using the breakout ethernet command at the global configuration
level.

NOTE
You should remove any interface-level configuration before configuring breakout.

NOTE
If the device is in cut-through mode and you attempt to configure breakout, an error is returned. Cut-
through must be disabled to return the unit to store-and-forward mode before breakout is configured.
The breakout ethernet command first checks for existing configuration on the port. If existing
configuration is detected, an error message similar to the following is displayed to indicate that prior
configuration must be removed.

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# breakout ethernet 1/1/11
Error: Port 1/1/11 is tagged

Once any previous configuration is removed, the breakout ethernet command must be reissued. The
resulting configuration must be saved, and the unit must then be reloaded before the four 10 Gbps
sub-ports are created and accessible.

For example, to configure ports 1/3/1 through 1/3/6 for breakout, issue the
following commands:
Device# configure terminal
Device(config)# breakout ethernet 1/3/1 to ethernet 1/3/6

The following example configures breakout on port 1/1/5. On the first

configuration attempt, an error is returned. The interface-level configuration is
removed. Then the write-memory command is issued, followed by the reload
command, to successfully configure the port for breakout.

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# breakout ethernet 1/1/5
Error: Port 1/1/5 has sflow forwarding
Device(config)# interface ethernet 1/1/5
Device(config-if-e40000-1/1/5)# no sflow forwarding
Device(config-if-e40000-1/1/5)# end
Device# write memory
Write startup-config done.
Device# configure terminal
Device(config)# breakout ethernet 1/1/5
Reload required. Please write memory and then reload or power cycle.
Device(config)# write memory
Write startup-config done.
Device(config)# Flash Memory Write (8192 bytes per dot) .
Copy Done.
Device(config)# end
Device# reload

378 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Configuring sub-ports

Configuring sub-ports
After 40 Gbps ports are successfully configured and activated for breakout, the sub-ports are available
for configuration.

NOTE
Sub-port configuration persists only as long as the original 40 Gbps port is configured for breakout.
Once breakout is removed and the device is reloaded, the sub-ports and their configuration are also
removed.

NOTE
When a breakout cable is removed, the breakout configuration still exists. The user should manually
issue the no breakout command to change a breakout port to a regular port.
Once a 40 Gbps port is broken out, the configuration is saved (with the write memory command), and
the unit is reloaded with the updated configuration, four sub-ports are available for detailed
configuration.
The sub-ports are configured like any other port; however, special four-tuple notation is required to
reference them. Regular ports are identified by three-tuple notation; that is, by three numbers separated
by a forward slash to indicate unit, slot, and port. For example 1/2/3 designates unit 1/slot 2/port 3. To
designate sub-ports, you must add a fourth identification number, for example, 1/2/3:4. The four 10
Gbps sub-ports for port 1/2/3 can be represented as 1/2/3:1, 1/2/3:2, 1/2/3:3, and 1/2/3:4.
The following example shows no breakout on port 1/2/4, a 40 Gbps port that is up.
device# show interface brief

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pvid Pri MAC Name
1/1/1 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3700
1/1/2 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3701
1/1/3 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3702
1/1/4 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3703
1/1/5 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3704
1/1/6 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3708
1/1/7 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.370c
1/1/8 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3710
1/1/9 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3714
1/1/10 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3718
1/1/11 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.371c
1/1/12 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3720
1/1/13 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3724
1/1/14 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3728
1/1/15 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.372c
1/1/16 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3730
1/1/17 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3734
1/1/18 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3735

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 379

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 40 Gbps Breakout Ports

1/1/19 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.

2439.3736
1/1/20 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3737
1/2/1 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3715
1/2/2 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3719
1/2/3 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.371d
1/2/4 Up Forward Full 40G None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3721
1/2/5 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3725
1/2/6 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3729
mgmt1 Up None Full 1G None No None 0 cc4e.
2439.3700

The following example breaks out port 1/2/4.

device(config)# breakout ethernet 1/2/4

Reload required. Please write memory and then reload or power cycle.
device(config)# end
device# write memory
Write startup-config done.

device# Flash Memory Write (8192 bytes per dot) .

Copy Done.
device# reload

The following example shows that port 1/2/4 has been configured for breakout into four 10 Gbps sub-
ports.
device# show interface brief

Port Link State Dupl Speed Trunk Tag Pvid Pri MAC Name
1/1/1 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3700
1/1/2 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3701
1/1/3 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3702
1/1/4 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3703
1/1/5 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3704
1/1/6 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3708
1/1/7 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.370c
1/1/8 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3710
1/1/9 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3714
1/1/10 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3718
1/1/11 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.371c
1/1/12 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3720
1/1/13 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3724
1/1/14 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3728
1/1/15 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.372c
1/1/16 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3730
1/1/17 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3734
1/1/18 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3735
1/1/19 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3736
1/1/20 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.

380 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Removing breakout configuration

2439.3737
1/2/1 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3715
1/2/2 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3719
1/2/3 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.371d
1/2/4:1 Up Forward Full 10G None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3721
1/2/4:2 Up Forward Full 10G None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3722
1/2/4:3 Up Forward Full 10G None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3723
1/2/4:4 Up Forward Full 10G None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3724
1/2/5 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3725
1/2/6 Down None None None None No 1 0 cc4e.
2439.3729
mgmt1 Up None Full 1G None No None 0 cc4e.2439.3700

The following example configures names for port 1/2/4 sub-ports.

device> enable
device# configure terminal
device(config)# interface ethernet 1/2/4:1
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:1)# port-name subport1
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:1)# interface ethernet 1/2/4:2
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:2)# port-name subport2
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:2)# interface ethernet 1/2/4:3
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:3)# port-name subport3
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:3)# interface ethernet 1/2/4:4
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:4)# port-name subport4
device(config-if-e10000-1/2/2:4)# end
device(config)# end
device# end
device>

Removing breakout configuration

Use the no breakout command as described to remove 40 Gbps breakout configuration.
Removing 4X10 Gbps sub-ports and restoring the original 40 Gbps port requires the same steps as
configuring breakout.
Enter the no breakout command for an individual port or port range as shown in the following
examples. However, for the restored 40 Gbps port configuration to take effect, you must also execute
the write memory command and then use the reload command to update the unit's configuration.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 381

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 40 Gbps Breakout Ports

The following example checks for ports with active breakout configuration and then removes breakout
from ports 1/3/1 through 1/3/6.

Device# show breakout

Unit-Id: 1

Port Module Exist Module Conf breakout_conf breakout_oper

1/1/5 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/6 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/7 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/8 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/9 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/10 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/11 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/12 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/13 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/14 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/15 Yes No Yes Yes
1/1/16 Yes No Yes Yes
1/2/1 Yes No Yes Yes
1/2/2 Yes No Yes Yes
1/2/3 Yes No Yes Yes
1/2/4 Yes No Yes Yes
1/2/5 Yes No Yes Yes
1/2/6 Yes No Yes Yes
1/3/1 Yes No Yes Yes
1/3/2 Yes No Yes Yes
1/3/3 Yes No Yes Yes
1/3/4 Yes No Yes Yes
1/3/5 Yes No Yes Yes
1/3/6 Yes No Yes Yes

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# no breakout ethernet 1/3/1 to 1/3/6
Reload required. Please write memory and then reload or power cycle.
Device(config)# write memory
Write startup-config done.

Device(config)# Flash Memory Write (8192 bytes per dot) .

Copy Done.
Device(config)# end
Device# reload

NOTE
If there had been any configuration on any sub-ports (1/3/1:1 to 1/3/6:4), the no
breakout command would have returned an error. The configuration would
then have to be removed from the sub-ports before breakout configuration
could be removed.

The following example shows a failed attempt to remove breakout from port
1/1/5 as indicated by the error message. Configuration is then removed from
sub-port 1/1/5:1 before the breakout configuration is successfully removed.
Once the updated configuration is loaded, the ports are restored as full 40 Gbps
ports. The former sub-port configuration is not retained in memory.
device(config)# no breakout ethernet 1/1/5
Error: Port 1/1/5:1 is tagged

device(config)# vlan 200

device(config-vlan-200)# no tagged ethernet 1/1/5:1
Deleted tagged port(s) to port-vlan 200.
device(config)# end
device# configure terminal
device(config)# no breakout ethernet 1/1/5
Reload required. Please write memory and then reload or power cycle.
device(config)# end
device# write memory
Write startup-config done.

382 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying information for breakout ports

device# Flash Memory Write (8192 bytes per dot) .

Copy Done.

Displaying information for breakout ports

Use the show breakout command to display breakout port status.
The show breakout command indicates which ports are configured for breakout and which breakout
ports are in operation. The command also displays ports that have been configured for breakout but that
are not yet broken out into sub-ports, pending reload.

The following example displays breakout port information for an ICX 7750-48F.
Port 1/2/1 is the only port with active sub-ports; however, ports 1/2/2 and 1/2/4
are configured for breakout, pending reload.

Device# show breakout

Unit-Id: 1
Port Module Exist Module Conf Breakout-config Breakout-oper
1/2/1 yes no yes yes
1/2/2 yes no yes no
1/2/3 yes no no no
1/2/4 yes no yes no
1/2/5 yes no no no
1/2/6 yes no no no
1/3/1 yes no no no
1/3/2 yes no no no
1/3/3 yes no no no
1/3/4 yes no no no
1/3/5 yes no no no
1/3/6 yes no no no

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 383

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Displaying information for breakout ports

384 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OpenSSL License

● OpenSSL license.......................................................................................................... 385

OpenSSL license
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
1. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation or other materials provided with the distribution.
4. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. ( http://www.openssl.org/ )"
5. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact [email protected] .
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in
their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit ( http://
www.openssl.org/ )"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The
implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial
and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL
code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such
any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 385

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 OpenSSL License

Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form
of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
1. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric
Young([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgment: "This product includes software written by
Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and
distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed.
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence.

386 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Joint Interoperability Test Command

● JITC overview............................................................................................................... 387

JITC overview
The Joint Interoperability Test Command (JITC) mode on a FastIron device is compliant with the
standards established by JITC, a United States military organization that tests technology pertaining to
multiple branches of the armed services and the government.
The JITC mode implemented on a FastIron device enforces default behavior for some features to
ensure strict JITC certification compliance.

AES-CTR encryption mode support for SSH

The Advanced Encryption Standard - Cipher Block Chaining (AES-CBC) encryption mode for Secure
Shell (SSH) is vulnerable to certain plain-text attacks. The JITC mode uses AES-CTR (Counter)
encryption mode for SSH instead of AES-CBC mode for enhanced security.
In the JITC mode, by default, the AES-CBC encryption mode for SSH is disabled and the AES-CTR
(Counter) encryption mode is enabled. The ip ssh encryption disable-aes-cbc command that disables
the AES-CBC mode can be seen in the running configuration. The encryption algorithms such as
aes256-ctr, aes192-ctr, or aes128-ctr are enabled and the CBC mode ciphers are removed.
The AES-CBC mode can be re-enabled by issuing the no ip ssh encryption disable-aes-cbc
command, which will bring back the pre-existing CBC ciphers (aes256-cbc, aes192-cbc, aes128-cbc,
and 3des-cbc) along with the CTR ciphers.

NOTE
The AES-CTR mode must be configured both on the client and server sides to establish an SSH
connection.

SHA1 authentication support for NTP

In the JITC mode, the symmetric key scheme supported for cryptographic authentication of messages
uses the SHA1 keyed hash algorithm instead of the MD5 authentication scheme. The MD5
authentication for Network Time Protocol (NTP) is disabled by default in the JITC mode and the disable
authentication md5 command can be seen in the running configuration. Only the SHA1 authentication
scheme is available to define the authentication key for NTP in the JITC mode. SHA1 authentication
must be enabled manually using the authentication-key key-id command. In the JITC mode, only the
SHA1 option is available.
The MD5 authentication scheme can be re-enabled by issuing the no disable authentication md5
command. By doing so, the default JITC mode behavior is overridden.

FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide 387

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Joint Interoperability Test Command

IPv6 ACL for SNMPv3 group

As part of the JITC requirement, from 08.0.20a release onwards, the IPv6 access list is supported for
the SNMPv3 group, and the incoming SNMP packets can be filtered based on the IPv6 ACL attached
to the group.
For more information, refer to Defining an SNMP group on page 152 and Defining an SNMP group
and specifying which view is notified of traps on page 156.

388 FastIron Ethernet Switch Administration Guide

53-1003625-01
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine